216-NR Consolidated 2020-07

Rules on Materials and Welding for the
Classification of Marine Units

NR 216
Consolidated edition for documentation only
July 2020
This document is an electronic consolidated edition of the Rules on Materials and Welding for the
Classification of Marine Units, July 2020.
This document is for documentation only.
The following published Rules are the reference text for classification:
NR216 Amd 002 Amendments to NR216 July 2020

NR216 DT R11 E Rules on materials and welding for the classification of marine units July 2019
July 2020 Bureau Veritas
RULES ON MATERIALS AND WELDING FOR
THE CLASSIFICATION OF MARINE UNITS
NR 216
Chapters 1 2 3 4 5
Chapter 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Chapter 2 STEEL AND IRON PRODUCTS
Chapter 3 NON FERROUS ALLOY PRODUCTS
Chapter 4 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS
Chapter 5 WELDING
July 2019 with amendments July 2020

Electronic consolidated edition for documentation only. The published Rules
and amendments are the reference text for classification.
2 Bureau Veritas - Rules on Materials and Welding July 2019 with amendments July 2020
C HAPTER 1
G ENERAL R EQUIREMENTS
Section 1 Manufacture, Inspection, Certification

1 General 25
1.1 Scope
1.2 Other specifications
1.3 Information to be supplied by the purchaser
2 Manufacture and quality 25
2.1 General
2.2 Chemical composition
2.3 Condition of supply
2.4 Identification of products
3 Inspection and testing 26
3.1 General conditions
3.2 Alternative survey scheme
3.3 Sampling for mechanical tests
3.4 Mechanical tests
3.5 Re-test procedures
3.6 Visual, dimensional and non-destructive examinations
3.7 Repairs of defects
4 Identification and certification 28
4.1 Identification and marking
4.2 Documentation and certification
Section 2 Testing Procedures for Materials

1 General 30
1.1 Scope
1.2 Testing machines
1.3 Preparation of test specimens
2 Tensile test 30
2.1 Tensile test specimens
2.2 Tensile test procedure
2.3 Tensile re-test procedure
3 Bend test 33
3.1 Flat bend test specimen
3.2 Bend test procedure
4 Charpy V-notch impact test 34
4.1 Sampling
4.2 Charpy V-notch test specimens
4.3 Charpy V-notch test procedure
4.4 Charpy V-notch re-test procedure
5 Drop weight test 35
5.1 Definition and test specimens dimensions
July 2019 with amendments July 2020 Bureau Veritas - Rules on Materials and Welding 3
6 Crack Tip Opening Displacement (CTOD) test 35
6.1 General
7 Ductility tests for pipes and tubes 35
7.1 Flattening test
7.2 Drift expanding test
7.3 Flanging test
7.4 Ring expanding test
7.5 Ring tensile test
7.6 Bend test on pipes and tubes
8 Other tests and checks 37
8.1 Strain age embrittlement test
8.2 Macrographic and micrographic examinations
C HAPTER 2
S TEEL AND I RON P RODUCTS
Section 1 Rolled Steel Plates, Sections and Bars

1 General 41
1.1 Scope
1.2 Manufacture
1.3 Approval
1.4 Quality of materials
1.6 Surface quality
1.8 Sampling and tests
2 Normal and higher strength steels for hull and other structural
applications 44
2.1 Scope
2.2 Steel grades
2.3 Manufacture
2.4 Surface quality
2.5 Internal soundness
2.8 Mechanical properties
3 Normal and higher strength corrosion resistant steels for cargo oil
tanks 51
3.1 Scope
3.2 Steel grades
3.3 Manufacture
3.5 Marking
4 High strength steel and crack arrest steels plates for container
ships structural applications 52
4.1 Scope
4.2 Steel grades
4.3 Manufacture
5 Extra high strength steels for welded structures 54
5.1 Scope
5.2 Steel grades
5.3 Manufacture
5.5 Chemical Composition
5.8 Marking
6 Steels for boilers and pressure vessels 59
6.1 Scope
6.2 Steel grades
6.3 Manufacture
6.7 Mechanical properties at elevated temperatures
7 Ferritic steels for low temperature service 64
7.1 Scope
7.2 Steel grades
7.3 Manufacture
8 Steels for machinery 66
8.1 Scope
8.2 Steel grades and relevant properties
8.3 Manufacture and condition of supply
9 Stainless steel products 68
9.1 Scope
9.2 Steel grades
9.3 Manufacture
9.8 Metallographic structure inspection
9.9 Intergranular corrosion test
9.10 Through thickness tests
10 Clad steel plates 70
10.1 Scope
10.2 Steel grades
10.3 Manufacture
10.8 Corrosion testing
10.9 Ultrasonic testing
10.10 Surface defects and repairs
10.11 Adhesion defects in the cladding and repairs
11 Steels with specified through thickness properties 72
11.1 Scope
11.2 Steel grades
11.3 Manufacture
11.7 Test preparation
11.8 Test results
11.9 Re-test
11.10 Ultrasonic testing
11.11 Marking
Section 2 Steel Pipes, Tubes and Fittings

1 General 74
1.1 Application
1.2 Manufacture
1.3 Approval
1.6 Rectification of surface defects
1.8 Hydrostatic test
1.9 Sampling and testing
2 Pipes for pressure systems operating at ambient temperature 77
2.1 Application
2.2 Steel grades
2.6 Mechanical and technological tests
3 Pipes for structural applications 78
3.1 Application
3.2 Steel grades
3.4 Non-destructive examination
4 Extra high strength steel pipes for welded structure 78
4.1 Application
5 Pipes for high temperature service 79
5.1 Application
5.2 Steel grades
5.6 Mechanical properties at elevated temperatures
6 Ferritic steel pipes for pressure service at low temperature 81
6.1 Application
6.2 Steel grades
7 Austenitic and austenitic-ferritic stainless steel pipes 83
7.1 Application
7.2 Steel grades
7.7 Corrosion tests
8 Fittings 85
8.1 Application
8.7 Marking and certification
Section 3 Steel Forgings

1 General 86
1.1 Scope
1.2 Manufacture
1.3 Approval
1.6 Heat treatment (including surface hardening and straightening)
1.8 Pressure test
1.9 Visual and dimensional examination
1.11 Rectification of defects
2 Forgings for hull, offshore structures and welded components in general 90
2.1 Scope
2.2 Steel grades
2.3 Manufacture
3 Forgings for machinery, shafts and non-welded components in general 92
3.1 Scope
3.2 Steel grades
3.3 Manufacture
4 Forgings for crankshafts 94
4.1 Scope
4.2 Steel grades
4.3 Manufacture
4.5 Chemical and mechanical properties
5 Forgings for gearing 95
5.1 Scope
5.2 Steel grades
5.3 Manufacture
5.5 Chemical and mechanical properties
5.6 Mechanical tests for normalised and tempered or quenched and tempered
forgings
5.7 Mechanical tests for surface-hardened forgings
6 Forgings for turbines 97
6.1 Scope
6.2 Steel grades, chemical composition and mechanical properties
6.3 Manufacture
6.7 Thermal stability test
7 Forgings for boilers, pressure vessels and systems 99
7.1 Scope
7.2 Steel grades
7.3 Manufacture
7.7 Mechanical properties at elevated temperature
8 Ferritic steel forgings for low temperature service 101
8.1 Scope
8.3 Manufacture
9 Stainless steel forgings 102
9.1 Scope
9.3 Manufacture
9.6 Corrosion tests
Section 4 Steel Castings

1 General 104
1.1 Scope
1.2 Manufacture
1.3 Approval
1.6 Heat treatment
1.8 Pressure test
1.11 Repair by grinding
1.12 Repair by welding
2 Castings for hull, offshore structures and welded components in
general 107
2.1 Scope
2.2 Steel grades
2.3 Manufacture
2.5 Heat treatment
3 Castings for machinery and non-welded components in general 109
3.1 Scope
3.2 Steel grades
3.3 Manufacture
3.5 Heat treatment
4 Castings for crankshafts 110
4.1 Scope
4.2 Steel grades
4.3 Manufacture
4.5 Heat treatment
4.8 Non-destructive examinations
5 Castings for boilers, pressure vessels and systems 110
5.1 Scope
5.2 Steel grades
5.3 Manufacture
5.5 Heat treatment
5.7 Mechanical properties at elevated temperature
6 Ferritic steel castings for low temperature service 112
6.1 Scope
6.2 Steel grades
6.3 Manufacture
6.5 Heat treatment
7 Stainless steel castings 113
7.1 Scope
7.2 Steel grades
7.3 Manufacture
7.5 Heat treatment
7.9 Corrosion tests
8 Stainless steel castings for propellers 114
8.1 Scope
8.2 Manufacture
8.4 Heat treatment
8.8 Definition of skew, severity zones
8.9 Dye penetrant examination
8.10 Radiographic and ultrasonic examination
8.11 Repair of defects
8.12 Weld repair
Section 5 Iron Castings

1 General 119
1.1 Scope
1.2 Casting designation
1.3 Manufacture
1.4 Quality of castings
1.5 Visual, dimensional and non-destructive examination
2 Grey iron castings 120
2.1 Scope
3 Spheroidal or nodular graphite iron castings 121
3.1 Scope
3.2 Manufacture and condition of supply
3.5 Metallographic examination
C HAPTER 3
N ON F ERROUS A LLOY P RODUCTS
Section 1 Copper and Copper Alloys

1 General 127
1.1 Scope
1.2 Manufacture
1.3 Testing
2 Copper alloy castings 127
2.1 Scope
2.2 Manufacture
2.7 Visual and non-destructive examination
2.8 Rectification of defective castings
3 Cast copper alloy propellers and propellers blades 129
3.1 Scope
3.2 Manufacture
3.11 Radiographic and ultrasonic examination
3.13 Weld repair
3.14 Straightening
4 Copper alloy pipes 136
4.1 Scope
4.6 Stress corrosion cracking test
4.7 Hydrostatic test - Eddy current test
4.9 Rectification of defects
Section 2 Aluminium Alloys
1 General 139
1.1 Scope
1.2 Manufacture
2 Wrought aluminium alloy products (plates, bars, sections and tubes) 139
2.1 Scope
2.2 Approval
2.3 Aluminium grades and their temper conditions
2.6 Repairs
2.7 Tolerances on dimensions
2.8 Tests and examinations
2.9 Tensile test
2.10 Drift expansion tests
2.11 Corrosion tests
3 Rivets 144
3.1 Application
3.2 Chemical composition and heat treatment
3.3 Heat treatment
3.4 Test material
3.6 Identification
3.7 Certification
4 Transition joints 145
4.1 General
4.2 Manufacture
4.4 Inspection
5 Aluminium alloy castings 145
5.1 General
5.2 Aluminium grades
5.3 Manufacture
C HAPTER 4
M ISCELLANEOUS P RODUCTS
Section 1 Equipment for Mooring and Anchoring

1 Anchors 151
1.1 Scope
1.2 Design
1.3 Materials
1.4 Manufacture
1.5 Tests and examination
1.6 Identification, marking and certification
2 Stud link chain cables and accessories 155
2.1 Scope
2.2 Chain cable grades
2.3 Approval of chain cable manufacturers
2.4 Rolled steel bars
2.5 Forged steels
2.6 Cast steels
2.7 Materials for studs
2.8 Design and manufacture of chain cables and accessories
2.9 Testing of finished chain cables
2.10 Testing of accessories
3 Studless chain cables 163
3.1 Scope
3.2 Materials for studless chain cables
4 Steel wire ropes 165
4.1 Scope
4.2 Manufacture
4.3 Types of ropes
4.5 Identification marking and certification
5 Fibre ropes 174
5.1 Scope
5.2 General
5.4 Marking
Section 2 Offshore Mooring Chain Cables and Accessories

1 General requirements 176
1.1 Scope
1.2 Chain grades
1.3 Approval of chain manufacturers
1.4 Approval of quality system at chain and accessory manufacturers
1.5 Approval of steel mills - Rolled bar
1.6 Approval of forges and foundries - Accessories
2 Materials 179
2.1 Scope
2.2 Rolled steel bars
2.3 Forged steel
2.4 Cast steel
2.5 Materials for studs
3 Design and manufacture 183
3.1 Design
3.2 Chain cable manufacturing process
4 Testing and inspection of finished chain 187
4.1 General
4.2 Proof and break load tests
4.3 Dimensions and dimensional tolerances
4.5 Non-destructive examination after proof load testing
4.6 Retest, rejection and repair criteria
4.7 Marking
4.8 Documentation
5 Testing and inspection of accessories 190
5.1 General
5.3 Dimensions and tolerances on dimensions
5.5 Non-destructive examination after proof load testing
5.6 Test failures
5.7 Marking
5.8 Documentation
6 Chafing chain for single point mooring arrangements 192
6.1 Scope
6.2 Approval of manufacturing
6.3 Materials
6.4 Design, manufacturing, testing and certification
Section 3 Others
1 Side scuttles, windows and their glass panes 193
1.1 Scope
1.2 Manufacture
1.3 Inspections and tests
2 Pressure bottles 195
2.1 Scope
2.2 Manufacture
2.3 Inspection and tests
2.4 Identification, marking and certification
C HAPTER 5
W ELDING
Section 1 General Requirements

1 Scope 199
1.1 General
2 Fabrication by welding 199
2.1 General
2.2 Approval
2.3 Type of joints, edge preparations and size
2.4 Welding execution and control
Section 2 Approval of Welding Consumables

1 General 200
1.1 Scope
1.2 Grading and designation
1.3 Approval procedure
1.4 Preparation and welding of test assemblies
1.6 Test samples for checking the chemical composition of deposited weld metal
2 Covered electrodes for manual metal arc welding of C and C-Mn
steels 204
2.1 Scope
2.2 Approval tests
2.3 Tests for checking the mechanical pro-perties
2.4 Tests for checking the hydrogen content
2.5 Fillet weld test assemblies
2.6 Annual control tests
3 Covered electrodes for gravity or contact welding 209
3.1 Scope
3.2 Approval tests
4 Covered electrodes for deep penetration manual welding of C and
C-Mn steels 209
4.1 Scope
4.2 Approval tests
5 Flux-wire combination for submerged arc welding of C and C-Mn
steels 211
5.1 Scope
5.2 Approval tests
6 Flux-wire combinations for one side submerged arc welding of butt-joints
of C and C-Mn steels 216
6.1 Scope
6.2 Designation
6.3 Approval tests
7 Wires and wire-gas combination for semiautomatic welding of C and
C-Mn steels 216
7.1 Scope
7.2 Type of wires
7.3 Shielding gases
7.4 Designation
7.5 Information and documentation to be submitted
7.6 Approval tests
8 Wires and wire-gas combinations for automatic welding of C and
C-Mn steels 219
8.1 Scope
8.2 Designation
8.3 Approval tests
9 Consumables for welding C and C-Mn steels with electrogas or
electroslag process 222
9.1 Scope
9.2 Information and documentation to be submitted
9.3 Approval tests
10 Consumables for welding extra high strength steels 223
10.1 Scope
10.2 Approval tests
10.3 Test requirements
11 Consumables for welding EH47 steel and crack arrest steel
EH47CAS 224
11.1 Scope
11.2 Approval tests
12 Consumables for welding Mo and Cr-Mo steels 226
12.1 Scope
12.2 Approval tests
13 Consumables for welding Ni steels for low temperature applications 227
13.1 Scope
13.2 Approval tests
13.3 Tests requirements
14 Consumables for welding Cr-Ni austenitic and austenitic-ferritic
stainless steels 228
14.1 Scope
14.2 Approval tests
15 Consumables for welding aluminium alloys 230
15.1 Scope
15.2 Approval tests
Section 3 Approval of Over Weldable Shop Primers

1 Scope 234
1.1 General
2 Information and documentation to be submitted 234
2.1 General
3 Approval tests 234
3.1 Base material
3.2 Filler metal
3.3 Type and dimension of test samples
3.4 Number of samples required
3.5 Preparation of test samples
3.7 Re-tests
4 Certification and validity 235
4.1 Certification
4.2 Validity
Section 4 Approval of Welding Procedures

1 General 236
1.1 Scope
1.2 Welding procedure
2 Welding procedure qualification tests for C and C-Mn steels for ship hull
and other welded structures in general 237
2.1 Plates butt weld with full penetration
2.2 T butt joints in plates
2.3 Plates fillet weld
2.4 Pipes butt weld with full penetration
2.5 Re-testing
2.6 Range of approval
3 Welding procedures for offshore structures and equipment 248
3.1 General
4 Welding procedures for cargo tanks and process pressure vessels
of liquefied gas carriers 248
4.1 General
5 Welding procedures for fuel tanks and process pressure vessels of
gas fuelled ships 248
5.1 General
6 Welding procedures for Cr-Ni austenitic and austenitic-ferritic
stainless steels for application with chemicals 248
6.1 General
7 Welding procedures for extra high strength steels 249
7.1 General
8 Approval of welding procedures for crack arrest steel EH47CAS 249
8.1 General
9 Approval of welding procedures for aluminium alloys 250
9.1 Plates butt weld
9.2 Plates fillet weld
9.4 Re-testing
10 Approval of welding procedures for copper alloys 253
10.1 Pipes butt weld
10.2 Re-testing
Section 5 Approval of CO2 Laser Welding Procedures

1 General 255
1.1 Application
1.2 General requirements
1.3 Welding procedure specification
1.4 Parent metal
1.5 Welding consumables
2 Approval of welding procedure 255
2.1 General
2.2 Assembly and welding
3 Non-destructive examinations 256
3.1 General
4 Plates butt welds 256
4.1 Assembly
4.2 Examinations and tests
4.3 Tensile tests
4.4 Bend tests
4.5 Impact tests
4.6 Hardness measurements
5 T joint weld procedure test 258
5.1 Assembly
6 Re-testing 259
6.1 Non-destructive and destructive tests
7 Range of approval 259
7.1 Parent metal
7.2 Thickness
7.3 Edge preparation and surface condition
7.4 Joint type, bevel
7.5 Welding machine
7.6 Welding parameters
NR 216
Chapter 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 1 MANUFACTURE, INSPECTION, CERTIFICATION
SECTION 2 TESTING PROCEDURES FOR MATERIALS
NR 216, Ch 1, Sec 1
SECTION 1 MANUFACTURE, INSPECTION, CERTIFICATION
1 General 1.3 Information to be supplied by the

purchaser
1.1 Scope 1.3.1 The purchaser is to provide the Manufacturer with the
information necessary to ensure that products are tested in
1.1.1 Chapter 2 to Chapter 4 of these Rules specify the accordance with these Rules and other relevant Society’s
requirements for the manufacture, inspection and certifica- Rules; optional or additional conditions are also to be
tion of steel and iron products, non-ferrous metals, various clearly indicated.
finished products and equipment such as propellers, pres-
sure bottles, anchors, chain cables, ropes and sidescuttles, 2 Manufacture and quality
entering in the construction or repair of Units which are sur-
veyed for classification purposes.
2.1 General
The general requirements relevant to the manufacture,
inspection and certification of the above-mentioned materi- 2.1.1 Manufacture
als and products, hereafter generally referred to as “prod- Manufacturers and their individual works are to be rec-
ucts”, are given in this Chapter and are to be complied with ognised by the Society for the type of products fabricated on
as applicable. a case-by-case basis or through recognition scheme given
by the Society in a separate document.
The requirements Chapter 1 are also applicable, as appro-
To this end plants, production and treatment procedures,
priate, to products covered by other relevant Society’s
testing machines, laboratories for analyses, internal control
Rules.
systems and personnel qualification are to be suitable in the
Chapter 5 specifies the requirements for approval of weld- opinion of the Society.
ing consumables and qualification of welding procedures. Manufacturing procedures and techniques are to be such as
to reasonably ensure constant compliance of the product
1.1.2 In addition to these Rules, the requirements given for with the requirements.
certain materials, procedures and products in the other rele- Where tests and analyses are performed by external labora-
vant Society’s Rules or specified by the Society on the tories or third parties, these are to be recognised by the
reviewed drawings, are also applicable, where appropriate. Society on a case-by-case basis or through recognition
scheme given by the Society in a separate document.
1.1.3 Products subject to the requirements of these Rules
and the relevant testing operations are those laid down in 2.1.2 Approval
the relevant Rules of the Society dealing with the design, Depending on the type and importance of the products
survey at works and testing of products, unless otherwise being supplied, the relevant manufacturing process may be
specified. required to be approved and approval tests performed for
the purpose.
1.1.4 Products with properties departing appreciably from When approval of the manufacturing process is required,
those covered by these Rules and other relevant Society’s such condition is specified in the rule requirements relevant
Rules may be used with the approval of the Society to the various products.
The provisions for the approval of Manufacturers are given
1.2 Other specifications in the document NR480”Approval of the manufacturing
process of metallic materials”.
1.2.1 Products complying with international, national or
2.1.3 Responsibility
proprietary specifications may be accepted by the Society,
provided such specifications give reasonable equivalence to Irrespective of the interventions of Surveyors, the Manufac-
the requirements of these Rules and other relevant Society’s turer is entirely and solely responsible for compliance of the
Rules or are approved for a specific application. supplied products with the stipulated requirements.
The Society assumes no liability by its interventions in
Such products, when accepted, are designated by their stan- respect of the compliance of a tested product with the stipu-
dard identification or as agreed at the time of the approval. lated regulations and requirements.
Unless otherwise agreed, survey and certification of prod- Where, in the course of manufacture or after supply, a prod-
ucts complying with other specifications are to be carried uct is found not to be in compliance with the requirements
out in accordance with the requirements of these Rules and or to present unacceptable defects, it will be rejected, irre-
other relevant Society’s Rules. spective of any previous satisfactory test results.
NR 216, Ch 1, Sec 1
2.2 Chemical composition 3.1.3 Interested parties are to apply for Society’s interven-
tion in adequate time.
2.2.1 The chemical composition is to be determined and Prior to the survey, the Manufacturer is to provide the Sur-
certified, as a rule, by the Manufacturer using ladle sam- veyor with details of the orders, technical specifications and
pling analysis. The laboratory is to be adequately equipped any special condition additional to the rule requirements.
and the analyses are to be performed by qualified person-
nel. 3.1.4 The Surveyors are to have free access to all depart-
ments involved in production, collection of test samples,
2.2.2 The analyses of the Manufacturer are generally internal control and, in general, all operations concerning
accepted subject to occasional checks, if required by the the manufacturing, examination and testing.
Surveyor. When checks on the product are required, they
They are to be supplied with the information necessary to
are to be performed and the results evaluated in accordance
assess whether production and tests are performed accord-
with recognised standards.
ing to the rule requirements.
2.3 Condition of supply 3.1.5 The tests and checks required by the Rules are to be
carried out in the presence of the Surveyors or, when
2.3.1 Unless otherwise agreed, the products are to be sup- expressly agreed with the Society, in the presence of the
plied in the finished condition as per rules, including heat person responsible for internal control, specially delegated
treatment if required. for this purpose.
Heat treatment is to be carried out in suitable and efficient The survey activities may be delegated to the Manufacturer
furnaces, fitted with appropriate means for temperature under the conditions given in [3.2].
control and recording. Sufficient thermocouples are to be
connected to the furnace charge to measure and record that 3.1.6 The tests required are to be performed by qualified
its temperature is adequately uniform unless the tempera- personnel in accordance with the Society’s Rules or, with
ture uniformity of the furnace is verified at regular intervals. recognised national or international standards, as appropri-
The manufacturer is to maintain records of heat treatment ate.
identifying the furnace used, furnace charge, date, tempera- The testing and measuring equipment is to be adequate,
ture and time at temperature. The records are to be pre- maintained in proper condition and regularly calibrated, as
sented to the surveyor on request. required; the record of such checks is to be kept up-to-date
and made available to the Surveyor.
The furnaces employed are to have a size sufficient to allow
a uniform increase in temperature up to the required value
of the entire part to be heat treated. In the case of very large 3.2 Alternative survey scheme
parts, alternative systems proposed are to be agreed by the
Society. 3.2.1 Alternative procedures to the systematic intervention
of the Surveyor for testing may be adopted by Manufactur-
ers specially recognised by the Society for the purpose.
2.4 Identification of products
Such alternative survey schemes, which are determined by
2.4.1 In the course of manufacturing, inspection and test- taking into account the type of product, its mass production
ing, the identification of the various products in respect of and the effectiveness of the certified Quality System imple-
their origin is to be ensured as required. mented in the workshop, allow the testing operations indi-
cated in these Rules and other relevant Society’s Rules to be
To this end the Surveyor is to be given all facilities for trac- totally or partially carried out by the Manufacturer without
ing the products when required. the presence of the Surveyor.
Indications on the field of application of such schemes,
3 Inspection and testing along with conditions and procedures for their recognition,
are given by the Society in a separate document.
3.1 General conditions

3.3 Sampling for mechanical tests
3.1.1 As far as practicable the inspections and tests are to
be carried out at the Manufacturer’s works before delivery. 3.3.1 The test samples are to be selected by the Surveyor or
by a responsible person from the Manufacturer's staff, spe-
If the necessary facilities are not available at the Manufac- cially delegated, and are to be suitably marked for identifi-
turer’s works, the testing is to be carried out at a testing lab- cation purposes.
oratory agreed with the Society.
3.3.2 The test samples are to be representative of the unit or
3.1.2 Where the testing is allowed to be carried out or lot of material which they are relevant to and are therefore
completed at works other than the Manufacturer’s it is in also to have been subjected to the same heat treatment as
any case to be possible to trace back with certainty to the the products except when a different procedure is agreed
documentation of the origin. with the Society.
NR 216, Ch 1, Sec 1
3.3.3 For the purpose of test sampling the following defini- 3.6 Visual, dimensional and non-destructive
tions apply: examinations
a) unit: single forging, casting, plate, tube or other single
product 3.6.1 General
The products are to be subjected to:
b) rolled unit: product rolled from the same slab or billet
or, when rolling proceeds directly from ingots, from the a) visual examination
same ingot
b) dimensional check
c) batch: number of similar units or rolled units presented
c) non-destructive examination, when applicable.
as a group for acceptance testing, on the basis of the
tests to be carried out on the test sample The above operations are to be carried out on products in
appropriate conditions under the responsibility of the Man-
d) sample: a sufficient quantity of material taken from the
ufacturer and are to be witnessed or repeated in the pres-
unit, rolled unit or batch, for the purpose of producing
ence of the Surveyor when required.
one or more test specimens
When, following examinations and tests, there are grounds
e) test specimens: part of sample with specified dimen-
to presume that a product may be defective, the Manufac-
sions and conditions for submission to a given test.
turer is obliged, for the purpose of acceptance, to demon-
strate its suitability using procedures deemed necessary.
3.6.2 Visual examination
3.4.1 The mechanical tests are to be carried out in the pres- Visual examination is to be carried out by the manufacturer.
ence of the Surveyor unless otherwise agreed; see [3.2]. A general examination is to be carried out by the surveyor
at his discretion on each product tested individually, and, at
3.4.2 For the check of the mechanical properties of the
random on products tested by batch.
material, test methods and specimens in compliance with
the requirements of Sec 2 are to be used. 3.6.3 Dimensional check
3.4.3 The type of tests, the number and direction of the test The dimensional checks and verification of compliance
specimens and the results of the tests are to comply with the with approved drawings are the responsibility of the manu-
requirements relevant to the type of product, as indicated in facturer. Some checks are to be made in presence of the
the various Articles. Surveyor, as deemed necessary, solely for those parts sub-
ject to approval, or where expressly required in these Rules
or other parts of the relevant Society’s Rules.
3.6.4 Non-destructive examination
3.5.1 General
Non-destructive examination is to be performed by skilled
Where the unsuccessful outcome of any test is attributable and qualified personnel, using calibrated equipment of suit-
to defective machining of the test specimen and/or to able type and according to approved procedures, rec-
improper test procedure, the negative result is disregarded ognised standards and the requirements of the Society.
and the test repeated, in correct conditions, on a substitute
test specimen. In case of non-destructive testing carried out by an indepen-
dent company from the manufacturer or shipyard, such
3.5.2 Rejection or reconsideration company has to comply with the requirements set out in
Where unsatisfactory results are obtained from re-tests rep- NR669 “Recognition of non-destructive testing suppliers”.
resentative of one lot of material, the unit from which the The Manufacturer’s laboratory or other organisation respon-
test specimens are taken is rejected. sible for the non-destructive examination is required to
The remainder of the lot may, at the discretion of the Sur- issue, on its own responsibility, a certificate illustrating the
veyor, be reconsidered by performing the required tests on results and, where requested, an opinion concerning the
at least two different units; for acceptance, both the results acceptability of the product; in the latter case, the certificate
of the new tests are to satisfy the requirements. is to be countersigned by the Manufacturer.
Otherwise, upon agreement with the Surveyor, the individ- The various steps of the examinations are to be witnessed
ual units composing the lot may be tested individually and by the Surveyor when required.
those found satisfactory may be accepted.
The Manufacturer may resubmit for testing previously
3.7 Repairs of defects
rejected material, after a suitable heat treatment or reheat
3.7.1 Small surface defects may be suitably removed by
treatment, or resubmit it under a different grade.
grinding or other appropriate means, provided that the
The Surveyor is to be notified of such circumstances. dimensional tolerances, prescribed for the various products
Unless otherwise agreed by the Surveyor, only one new in the relevant Articles, are complied with.
heat treatment is permitted for material which has already The repaired zone is to be found free from defects and to be
been heat treated. acceptable in the opinion of the Surveyor.
NR 216, Ch 1, Sec 1
3.7.2 Repairs by welding may be accepted only where this 4.1.4 Society marking for incomplete survey
is not in contrast with the requirements applicable to the Whenever a product is dispatched for delivery or is to be
product, and provided that they are deemed suitable in marked without undergoing all the examinations and tests
connection with the material, extent of defects and welding required (whether by the provisions of these Rules or those
procedure. of other relevant Society’s Rules), the Society’s brand \ will
The repair procedure is to be previously agreed upon with be replaced by the Society’s mark ] for incomplete survey.
the Surveyor. The testing documents are to contain clear indications of all
outstanding examinations and tests and specify the reason
4 Identification and certification why they have not been performed.
Upon satisfactory completion of all required examinations
and tests, the product is to be stamped with the Society’s
brand \.
4.1.1 General 4.1.5 Invalidation of Society’s brand

A detailed record of the products to be tested is to be sub- When a product already marked with one of the Society’s
mitted to the Surveyor with indication of the necessary data, stamps is found not to be in compliance with the require-
as applicable: ments and is therefore rejected, the Society’s brand is to be
invalidated by punching them.
a) name of purchaser and order number
The Surveyors may request to check the invalidation
b) hull number or destination
effected.
c) number, size and mass of parts or batches Any repairs after the product is tested are subject to the
d) cast number and chemical composition prior consent of the Society; failing this, the validity of the
original testing will automatically expire and the original
e) part reference number, detail of manufacturing process testing marks are to be invalidated by the interested parties.
and heat treatment
4.1.6 Society’s brand for alternative survey scheme
f) condition of supply.
In the case of admission to an alternative survey scheme,
the marking with the Society’s brand may be delegated to
4.1.2 Manufacturer’s marking
the Manufacturer, who will be supplied with the special
Products, which have satisfactorily undergone the required brand @ to be used for this purpose.
examination and tests are to be appropriately marked by the
Manufacturer in at least one easily accessible location.
The marking is to contain all necessary indications, as spec-
ified in the Articles relevant to the various products, and is 4.2.1 Society’s certificate
to correspond to the content of the survey documentation. For products tested with satisfactory results, the Society
The marks are to be stamped, as a rule, by means of brands, issues a certificate signed by the Surveyor stating that the
except when products could be impaired by such a system. products have been tested in accordance with the Society’s
When paints or other reliable alternatives are adopted, ade- Rules.
quate duration of marking is to be ensured. This certificate is identified by the letter C for ease of refer-
ence in the various relevant Society’s Rules.
For small pieces contained in effective containers, as well
as bars and sections of modest weight, adequately bound in A certificate issued by the Manufacturer is to be attached to
bundles, the marks are transferred to the container, label or the Society’s certificate and is to include, as applicable, the
top item of each bundle to the Surveyor’s satisfaction. following particulars:
a) Manufacturer’s name
4.1.3 Marking with the Society’s brand
b) purchaser’s name, order number and hull number
The products found satisfactory in accordance with the
Rules and other relevant Society’s Rules are to be marked c) description of the product, dimensions and weight
with the Society’s brand \ in the presence of the Surveyor
d) results of all specified inspections and tests
unless otherwise agreed between Manufacturer and Sur-
veyor. e) identification and testing marks stamped on the prod-
ucts.
All other additional marks required are specified in the
applicable Articles depending on the products (e.g. name or In the case of testing of materials, the following particulars
initials of Manufacturer, material, grade and cast number, are also to be included:
code for calendar year, running file number and code of the
a) identification of specification or grade of material
local office survey, Surveyor’s personal brand, test pressure
as statement of hydrostatic test). b) identification of the heat and relevant chemical analysis
NR 216, Ch 1, Sec 1
c) supply condition and details of heat treatment, includ- The certificate issued by the Manufacturer and including all
ing temperatures and holding times the information required in [4.2.1] is to be attached to the
d) working and manufacturing procedure (for rolled prod- (CA) certificate.
ucts intended for hull, boilers and pressure vessels only) The certificate is to be submitted to the Society for endorse-
e) declaration that the material has been made by an ment according to the procedures stated in the agreement
approved process, as applicable, and that it has been for the alternative survey scheme.
subjected to the tests required by the Rules with satisfac- 4.2.3 Works’ certificates
tory results.
For products which in accordance with the relevant rules
For products manufactured in large quantities and tested by may be accepted only on the basis of a certificate of confor-
heats or by lot, the Manufacturer is to further state, for the mity issued by the Manufacturer, stating the results of the
individual supplies, that the products have been produced tests performed, such certificate is to contain the informa-
according to the Society’s Rules. tion required under [4.2.1], as applicable.
4.2.2 Society’s certificate for alternative survey This certificate of conformity is identified by the letter W
scheme (works’ certificate) for ease of reference in the various parts
For products covered by the alternative survey scheme, of the Rules.
unless otherwise stated in the admission to the alternative For particular products it may be accepted that the tests or
survey scheme, the Manufacturer is to issue a Certificate of examinations are carried out by the Manufacturer not on
Conformity on the appropriate Society form. the product supplied, but on the current production.
This certificate is identified by the letter CA (certificate for This particular certificate of conformity is identified by the
alternative survey) for ease of reference in the various Soci- letter R (report) for ease of reference in the various Society’s
ety’s Rules. Rules.
NR 216, Ch 1, Sec 2
SECTION 2 TESTING PROCEDURES FOR MATERIALS
1 General 2 Tensile test
1.1 Scope 2.1 Tensile test specimens
1.1.1 This Section gives the requirements for testing proce- 2.1.1 General
dures, testing machines and test specimens for mechanical Test specimens of proportional type should preferably be
and technological tests of materials. used as the values of minimum percentage elongation after
fracture specified in the Rules refer to the gauge length L0 of
Alternative testing procedures and test specimens such as
those complying with recognised standards may be these test specimens calculated by the following formula:
accepted by agreement with the Society.
L 0 = 5 ,65 So
The tests to be performed and the results to be obtained are
This gauge length L0 should preferably be greater than
given in the articles of the Rules dealing with each product.
20 mm. The gauge length may be rounded off to the nearest
The general conditions given in Sec 1 also apply. 5 mm provided that the difference between this length and
L0 is less than 10% of L0.
1.2 Testing machines 2.1.2 Proportional flat test specimen

For plates, strips and sections, proportional flat test speci-
1.2.1 Testing machines are to be maintained in satisfactory
mens are usually used, with dimensions as shown in Fig 1.
condition and recalibrated at approximately annual inter-
vals for adequate reliability, accuracy and sensitivity. This For such products the tensile test specimens are to retain the
calibration is to be traced to a nationally recognised author- original raw surfaces of the product.
ity and is to be to the satisfaction of the Society. The records
of the calibration are to be made available to the Surveyor, When the capacity of the testing machine is insufficient to
kept in the test laboratory and copies provided on request. allow the use of test specimens of full thickness, this may be
reduced by machining one of the raw surfaces.
1.2.2 Tension/compression testing machines are to be cali-
brated in accordance with ISO 7500-1 or other recognised Figure 1 : Proportional flat specimen
standard.
R t
The accuracy of tensile test machines is to be within plus or b Cross-section So
minus one percent.
1.2.3 Charpy impact testing machines are to have a striking L0 gauge length
energy of not less than 150J and are to be calibrated in LC parallel test length
accordance with ISO 148-2 or other recognised standard.
t : Thickness of the plate, strip or section, in mm

1.3 Preparation of test specimens b, R : Both equal to 25 mm
L0 : Original gauge length, in mm, equal to:
1.3.1 The samples for test specimens are to be in the same
L 0 = 5 65 So
condition as the product from which they have been taken
and therefore in the same heat treatment condition, if any. So : Original specimen cross-section, in mm2
LC : Parallel test length, in mm, equal to:
1.3.2 If the test samples are cut from products by flame cut- L C = L 0 + 2 So
ting or shearing, a reasonable margin is required to enable
sufficient material to be removed from cut or sheared edges 2.1.3 Non-proportional flat test specimen
during final machining.
Alternatively to the proportional flat test specimen, non-pro-
Test specimens are to be prepared in such a way that they portional flat test specimen having original gauge length of
are not subjected to any significant straining or heating 200 mm and other dimensions as shown in Fig 2, may be
which might alter the properties of the material. used for plates, strips and sections.
NR 216, Ch 1, Sec 2
Figure 2 : Non proportional flat specimen 2.1.6 Through thickness tensile test specimen
Round test specimen including built-up type by welding are
R = 25 mm t b to be prepared in accordance with a recognised standard.
2.1.7 Test specimen for grey cast iron

For grey cast iron, the test specimen as shown in Fig 4 is to
L0 = 200 mm be used.
LC ≥ 212,5 mm
Figure 4 : Specimen for grey cast iron
t : Thickness of the plate, strip or section, in mm R ≥ 25 mm
b, R : Both equal to 25 mm
L0 : Original gauge length, in mm
LC : Parallel test length, in mm. 20 mm dia.
2.1.4 Round proportional test specimen

Alternatively to the flat test specimen for plates, strips or
sections equal to or greater than 40 mm thick, proportional 2.1.8 Test specimens for pipes and tubes
round test specimen, machined to the dimensions shown in For pipes and tubes, the test specimen may be a full cross-
Fig 3, may be used. section of suitable length to be secured in the testing
machine with plugged ends, as shown in Fig 5.
Round proportional test specimen is used for rolled prod-
ucts in aluminium alloy with thickness higher than
12,5mm. Figure 5 : Full cross section specimen
t
For rolled bars, forgings and castings, grey cast iron
excluded, round proportional test specimen are usually to D
be used.
L0
LC Drift
Figure 3 : Round proportional specimen
R φ The original gauge length L0 is to be equal to:

d
L 0 = 5 ,65 So
and the distance between the grips Lc is to be not less than

L0 gauge length the gauge length plus D, where D is the external diameter of
LC parallel test length the tube or pipe.
The length of the plugs projecting over the grips, in the
d : From 10 to 20 mm, preferably taken equal to 14 mm direction of the gauge marks, is not to exceed the external
L0 : Original gauge length, in mm, equal to 5  d diameter D, and the shape of the plugs is not to impede the
elongation of the gauge length.
LC : Parallel test length, in mm, such as LC  L0 + d / 2
R : 10 mm (for nodular cast iron and materials with a Alternatively, test specimens as shown in Fig 6 and taken
specified elongation less than 10%, R  1.5d) from the tube or pipe wall may be used, where:
L 0 = 5 65 So
2.1.5 Round test specimen position
LC = L0 + 2 b
For plates, strips and sections with thickness equal to or
greater than 40 mm, the longitudinal axis of the round test  : Wall thickness, in mm.
specimen is to be located at a distance from one of the sur-
faces equal to one quarter of the thickness. Figure 6 : Specimen taken from the tube or pipe wall
For rolled products in aluminium alloy with thickness up to So R ≥ 10 mm

and including 40mm, the longitudinal axis of the round test
specimen is to be located at mid-thickness. For thicknesses
over 40mm, the longitudinal axis of the test specimen is to α
be located at a distance from one of the surfaces equal to
one quarter of the thickness.
L0
b ≥ 12 mm
For bars and similar products, the longitudinal axis of the
round test specimen is to be located at one third of the
LC
radius from the outside.
NR 216, Ch 1, Sec 2
The parallel test length is not to be flattened, but the 2.2 Tensile test procedure
enlarged ends may be flattened for gripping in the testing
machine. 2.2.1 General
The following characteristics, as required by the Rules for
The round proportional test specimen shown in Fig 3 may
each product, are to be determined by the test:
be used provided that the wall thickness is sufficient to
allow the machining of such test specimen with its axis ReH : Upper yield stress (yield point), in N/mm2
located at the mid-wall thickness. Rp0,2 - Rp0,5 - Rp1,0 : Proof stress (yield strength), in N/mm2
Rm : Tensile strength, in N/mm2
2.1.9 Test specimen for wires A : Percentage elongation after fracture
For testing of wires, a full cross-section test specimen of Z : Percentage reduction of area.
suitable length is to be used.
2.2.2 Yield and proof stress determination
The original gauge length is to be 200 mm and the parallel
For materials with well defined yield phenomenon, the
test length (distance between the grips) is to be 250 mm.
upper yield stress ReH is the value of stress at the moment
when the first decrease in force is measured by the testing
2.1.10 Test specimen for deposited metal tensile test
machine in the tensile tests at ambient temperature.
Round test specimen with the following dimensions is to be
This applies, unless otherwise agreed, to products in carbon
used:
steels, carbon-manganese steels and alloy steels, except
d = 10 mm austenitic and duplex stainless steels.
L0 = 50 mm When no well defined yield phenomenon exists, the type of
proof stress required by the applicable specification is to be
LC 55 mm determined.
R 10 mm In general for steels, the conventional proof stress to be
assumed is the 0,2 per cent proof stress or the 0,5 per cent
For specially small or large dimensions, other test speci-
proof stress, designated by the symbols Rp0,2 and Rp0,5,
mens may be used after agreement with the Society, pro-
respectively, where 0,2 and 0,5 are the percentage of per-
vided they conform with the geometrical relationship given
manent elongation.
in Fig 3.
For austenitic and duplex stainless steel products and rele-
2.1.11 Test specimen for butt weld transverse tensile vant welding consumables, the 1,0 per cent proof stress,
test designated by the symbol Rp1,0 , may be determined in addi-
Flat test specimen as shown in Fig 7 and with the following tion to Rp0,2.
dimensions is to be used: 2.2.3 Test rate
t : Thickness of the welded plate, in mm Within the elastic range, the test is to be carried out with a
a=t stress rate within the following limits shown in Tab 1.
After reaching the yield or proof load, for ductile material
b : Equal to 12 mm for t  2 mm
the machine speed during the tensile test is not to exceed
25 mm for t > 2 mm that corresponding to a strain rate of 0,008 s1.
LC : Width of the weld + 60 mm For brittle materials such as cast iron, the elastic stress rate
R 25 mm. is not to exceed 10 N/mm2 per second.
The weld is to be machined (or ground) flush with the sur- Table 1 : Stress rate within elastic range
face of the plate.
Modulus of elasticity E Rate of stressing (N/mm2s1)
Figure 7 : Specimen for transverse tensile test of the material (N/mm2) Min. Max.
on butt weld
< 150000 2 20
R a
 150000 6 60
2.2.4 Percentage elongation after fracture

b The percentage elongation after fracture is usually deter-
mined on a proportional gauge length L0. In that case, the
LC percentage elongation after fracture is noted A or A5.
L0 is calculated from the following formula:
2.1.12 Tolerances L 0 = 5 ,65 So
The tolerances on test specimen dimensions are to be in where:

accordance with ISO 6892-98 or other recognised stan- So : Original cross-sectional area of the test speci-
dards as appropriate. men.
NR 216, Ch 1, Sec 2
When using round proportional test specimens, L0 is equal 3 Bend test

to 5 diameters.
When a gauge length other than proportional gauge length 3.1 Flat bend test specimen
L0 is used, the equivalent per cent elongation Ax required is
obtained from the following formula: 3.1.1 A flat bend test specimen as shown in Fig 8 is to be
used.
0 ,4
A x = 2A 5  -------
S The edges on the tension side are to be rounded to a radius
 L
of 1 to 2 mm.
where: The length of the test specimen is to be at least 11 times the
A5 : Minimum elongation, in per cent, required by thickness or 9 times the thickness plus the mandrel diame-
the Rules for the proportional test specimens ter, whichever is the greater.
illustrated in Fig 1, Fig 3 and Fig 6
Figure 8 : Flat bend specimen
S : Area, in mm2, of the original cross-section of the
w
actual test specimen
L : Length, in mm, of the corresponding gauge
length actually used.
t
The above conversion formula may be used only for ferritic
steel of low or medium strength and not cold worked.
The extension of the formula to other applications, such as
1 to 2 mm 1 to 2 mm
cold worked steels, austenitic steels or non-ferrous materi-
als is to be agreed with the Society.
3.1.2 For castings, forgings, and semi-finished products, the
In the case of disagreement, the value of elongation com- other dimensions are to be as stated below:
puted on the proportional test specimen is to be taken. • thickness: t = 20 mm
The gauge length used to determine the percentage elonga- • width: w = 25 mm.
tion after fracture is to be indicated in the test reports.
3.1.3 For plates, sheets, strips and sections the other
For non-proportional test specimens with gauge length of
dimensions are to be as stated below:
50 mm and 200 mm, the equivalent elongation values indi-
cated in ISO 2566 apply. • thickness: t = thickness of the product
• width: w = 30 mm.
The elongation value is, in principle, valid only if the dis-
tance between the fracture and the nearest gauge mark is If the as rolled thickness t is greater than 25 mm, it may be
not less than one third of the original gauge length. How- reduced to 25 mm by machining on the compression side
ever the result is valid irrespective of the location of the of the bend specimen.
fracture if the percentage elongation after fracture is equal
to or greater than the expected value. 3.1.4 For transverse face and root bend test on butt welds,
the other dimensions are to be as follows:
The fracture surfaces of test specimens after the tensile test
is to be examined. The fracture surfaces are to be sound and • thickness: t = thickness of welded plates
free from defects and irregularities. • width: w = 30 mm.
2.2.5 Testing at high temperature If the thickness t is greater than 25 mm, it may be reduced
to 25 mm by machining on the compression side of the
Tensile tests at high temperature are to be performed at the
bend specimen.
specified temperature in accordance with an appropriate
national or international standard in agreement with the The surfaces of the weld are to be machined (ground) flush
Society. with the surface of the plate.
3.1.5 For transverse side bend test on butt welds, the other
2.3 Tensile re-test procedure dimensions are to be as follows:
2.3.1 When the tensile test fails to meet the requirements, • thickness: t = 10 mm
two further tests may be made from the same piece. If both • width: w = thickness of welded plates.
of these additional tests are satisfactory the item and/or
batch (as applicable) is acceptable. If one or both of these If the thickness of welded plates is equal or greater than
40mm, the side bend test specimen may be subdivided,
tests fail the item and/or batch is to be rejected.
each part being at least 20mm wide.
The additional tests detailed above are to be taken, prefera-
bly from material taken adjacent to the original tests, but 3.1.6 The test specimens for longitudinal face and root
alternatively from another test position or sample represen- bend test on butt welds are to be in accordance with an
tative of the item/batch. appropriate recognised standard.
NR 216, Ch 1, Sec 2
3.2 Bend test procedure Figure 9 : Charpy V-notch test specimen
3.2.1 The bend test is to be performed, as a rule, by apply- 45˚

ing a continuous mechanical compressive action on one of
the surfaces of the test specimen.
The required mandrel diameter and the minimum bend
angle are specified in the Articles dealing with the various
products. 10
8
4 Charpy V-notch impact test
25
0,
r=
27,5 27,5 10
V = notch section
4.1 Sampling
55
4.1.1 The Charpy V-notch impact test is, in general, per-
formed on a set of 3 test specimens.
The longitudinal axis of the test specimens can be: 4.2.2 Test specimens with the largest possible size, reduced
a) parallel to the rolling direction of the plate, section or sectional area 10 x 7,5 or 10 x 5,0 are to be used if the
piece (longitudinal direction L), noted KVL in the Rules thickness of the product does not allow to take test speci-
mens of the standard size with sectional area 10 x 10.
b) perpendicular to the rolling direction of the plate, sec-
tion or piece (transverse direction T), noted KVT in the The energy value required when using reduced size test
Rules specimen compared to standard size test specimen is given
in Tab 3.
c) parallel to other directions.
4.1.2 The axis of the V-notch is to be perpendicular to the Table 3 : Average energy value for
faces of the plate, section or piece. reduced test specimens
The position of the V-notch is not to be nearer than 25mm Sectional area of V-notch Minimum average
to a flame cut or sheared edge. test specimens (mm2) energy (1)
4.1.3 For rolled products with thickness less than or equal 10 x 10 KV
to 40 mm, the test specimens are to be taken retaining the 10 x 7,5 5/6 KV
original raw surface of the product or within 2 mm from it.
10 x 5,0 2/3 KV
For rolled products with thickness higher than 40 mm, the
test specimens are to be taken with their longitudinal axis (1) KV is the required value on standard size test speci-
located at 1/4 of the product thickness from one of the mens, as per the Rules.
rolled surface, or as close as possible to such position.
4.3 Charpy V-notch test procedure
4.2 Charpy V-notch test specimens 4.3.1 Ambient temperature means any temperature within
4.2.1 The test specimens are to be fully machined at the the range 18 to 28°C.
dimensions and tolerances shown in Fig 9 and Tab 2. Where the test temperature is lower than ambient, the tem-
perature of the test specimen at the moment of breaking is
Table 2 : Charpy V-notch test specimen to be the specified test temperature, within  2°C.
Dimensions Nominal Tolerance The test temperature is to be clearly stated in the testing
documents.
Length 55 mm  0,60 mm
Width 4.3.2 The unit used to report the energy values is to be
clearly stated in the testing documents and should be pref-
• standard test specimen 10 mm  0,11 mm
erably the Joule (J).
• subsize test specimen 7,5 mm  0,11 mm The average of the three results from the test of the set is to
• subsize test specimen 5,0 mm  0,06 mm comply with the value required for the product. Only one
Thickness 10 mm  0,06 mm individual value may be less than the required average
value, provided it is not less than 70% of that value.
Depth below notch 8 mm  0,06 mm
Angle of notch 45°  2° 4.4 Charpy V-notch re-test procedure
Root radius 0,25 mm  0,025 mm
4.4.1 When the average value of the three initial Charpy V-
Distance of notch from end of 27,5 mm  0,42 mm
notch impact test specimens fails to meet the stated require-
test specimen
ment, or the value for more than one test specimen is below
Angle between plane of sym- 90°  2° the required average value, or when the value of any one
metry of notch and longitudinal test specimen is below 70% of the specified average value,
axis of test specimen three additional specimens from the same material may be
NR 216, Ch 1, Sec 2
tested and the results added to those previously obtained to 7.1.2 The test consists of compressing the test specimen
form a new average. If this new average complies with the between two rigid and parallel flat plates in a direction per-
requirements and if not more than two individual results are pendicular to its longitudinal axis; the plates are to cover
lower than the required average and of these, not more than the whole test specimen after flattening.
one result is below 70% of the specified average value the
It is to be continued until the distance Z between the two
piece or batch (as applicable) may be accepted.
plates, measured under load, reaches the value specified.
In the case of welded pipes or tubes, the test is to be carried

5 Drop weight test
out with the weld seam positioned at 90° and at 0° to the
flattening force.
5.1 Definition and test specimens
After flattening, the test specimen is not to present any
dimensions cracks or other flaws; however, small cracks at the ends may
be disregarded.
5.1.1 The drop weight test according to ASTM Standard E
208 is used for determination of the NDT (nil ductility tran-
sition) temperature. 7.2 Drift expanding test
The NDT is the maximum temperature where the drop 7.2.1 The test specimen consists of a tube section having
weight test specimen breaks when tested according to the the ends perpendicular to the tube axis; the edges of the
provisions of the standard. end to be tested may be rounded by filing.
Drop weight test specimens have one of the following
dimensions (thickness by width by length, in mm3): 7.2.2 For metallic tubes, the length of the specimen is
equal to 2 D, where D is the external diameter of the tube, if
• type P1: 25 x 90 x 360 the angle of the drift is 30°, or equal to 1,5 D if the angle of
the drift is 45° or 60°. The test piece may be shorter pro-
• type P2: 19 x 50 x 130
vided that after testing the remaining cylindrical portion is
• type P3: 16 x 50 x 130. not less than 0,5D.
5.1.2 The following apply, if not otherwise agreed: 7.2.3 The rate of penetration of the mandrel shall not
exceed 50 mm/min.
a) the test specimen sides are to be saw-cut or machined
(minimum 25 mm distance to flame-cut surface) 7.2.4 The test consists of flaring the end of the test speci-
men at ambient temperature and symmetrically, by means
b) the machining of the sample to obtain the required
of a truncated-cone shaped mandrel of hardened steel hav-
thickness of the test specimen is to be carried out only
ing the included angle specified in [7.2.2] (see Fig 10).
on one surface; the opposite raw surface is to be main-
tained The mandrel is to be lubricated but is not to be rotated in
the pipe during the test.
c) the specimens may be of any orientation, but the orien-
tation is to be the same for all specimens. The mandrel penetration is to continue until the increase in
external diameter of the end of the expanded zone reaches
the value specified in the requirements relevant to the vari-
6 Crack Tip Opening Displacement ous products.
(CTOD) test
The expanded zone of the test specimen is not to present
any cracks or other flaws.
6.1 General
Figure 10 : Drift expanding test
6.1.1 Unless otherwise agreed, the test is to be performed
on test specimens of full thickness according to appropriate
national or international standards like BS 7448 Part 1:1991
and ASTM E 1290.
7 Ductility tests for pipes and tubes
7.1 Flattening test 30˚ or 45˚ or 60˚ or 120˚
7.1.1 The test specimen consists of a ring cut with

smoothed ends perpendicular to the tube axis.
The length of the specimen is to be from 10 mm to 100 mm.
NR 216, Ch 1, Sec 2
7.3 Flanging test Figure 12 : Ring expanding test
7.3.1 The test specimen consists of a tube section cut with

the ends perpendicular to the tube axis; the edges of the
end to be tested may be rounded by filing.
7.3.2 The length of the test specimen is equal to approxi-

mately 1,5 times the external diameter of the tube. The test
specimen may be shorter provided that after testing the
remaining cylindrical portion is not less than half the exter-
nal diameter.
7.3.3 The test is carried out in two stages and consists of

symmetrically forming a flange at one end of the test speci- 7.5 Ring tensile test
men by means of a special mandrel of hardened steel; the
mandrel is to be lubricated but is not to be rotated in the 7.5.1 The test specimen consists of a tube section with
tube during the test. plain and smoothed ends cut perpendicular to the tube axis
The rate of penetration of the forming tool shall not exceed and with a length of about 15 mm.
50 mm/min.
7.5.2 The test specimen is to be drawn to fracture in a ten-
During the first stage of flanging, the end of the test speci- sile testing machine by means of two mandrels having
men is expanded by means of a truncated-cone shaped diameter equal to at least three times the wall thickness of
mandrel having an included angle of 90°; the test is then the pipe.
continued during the second stage using a special forming
mandrel to complete the flange. The rate shall not exceed 5 mm/s.
The test is to be continued until the expanded zone forms a In the case of welded pipes the weld seam is to be at 90° to
flange perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the test the direction of the tensile load.
specimen, with an increase in the external diameter of the
end of the test specimen not less than the value specified The test specimen after fracture is not to reveal defects such
(see Fig 11). as cracks, grooves or laminations and is to show visible
deformation at the point of fracture.
The cylindrical and flanged portion of the test specimen is
not to present any cracks or other flaws.
7.6 Bend test on pipes and tubes
After testing, the remaining cylindrical portion is to be not
less than half the external diameter of the tube. 7.6.1 Where feasible, the test specimen consists of full
thickness strips not less than 40 mm in width (which may be
Figure 11 : Flanging test machined down to 20 mm width for large thickness pipes)
cut perpendicular to the pipe axis.
The edges of the test specimen may be rounded to 1,5 mm
radius.
The result is considered satisfactory if, after being bent
through the required angle in the direction of the original
curvature, the test specimen is free from cracks and lamina-
tions; however, small cracks on the edges may be disre-
garded.
7.4 Ring expanding test 7.6.2 For small diameter tubes, in general not exceeding
50 mm, the test specimen consists of a tube section of suffi-
7.4.1 The test specimen consists of a tube section cut with cient length.
the ends perpendicular to the tube axis and the length
between 10 and 16 mm. The test specimen is to be bent on a cylindrical mandrel
with appropriate procedures as stated below, depending on
7.4.2 The rate of penetration of the mandrel shall not the specification of the product:
exceed 30 mm/s. a) on a mandrel having a diameter 12 times the nominal
diameter of the tube until an angle of 90° is reached
7.4.3 The test specimen is to be expanded to the prescribed
diameter or until fracture occurs (see Fig 12). b) on a mandrel having a diameter 8 times the nominal
diameter of the tube, until an angle of 180° is reached.
The expanded test specimen is not to reveal defects such as
cracks, grooves or laminations and is to reach the pre- The test specimen after bending is not to present any cracks
scribed expansion. or other flaws.
NR 216, Ch 1, Sec 2
8 Other tests and checks 8.2 Macrographic and micrographic

examinations
8.1 Strain age embrittlement test
8.2.1 The following examinations may be required to be
8.1.1 The test is performed according to the following performed as a random check for specific steel products:
requirements: a) macrographic examination for detection of sulphur seg-
a) the material is to be deformed, generally by compres- regations (sulphur print or “Baumann test”) according to
sion (in special cases, deformation under tension may ISO 4968
be permitted) until the required shortening (or elonga- b) evaluation of the primary austenitic grain size
tion) (usually 3%, 5% or 10%) is attained “McQuaid Ehn test” according to ASTM E 112 58 T
Standards. For fine grained steels, the “fine grain” condi-
b) the material is then to be heat treated in a furnace at
tion is considered satisfied when the grain size is 5 or
250°C for 1/2 h unless otherwise agreed
finer.
c) Charpy impact test specimens are to be obtained from
Test methods according to other recognised standards may
the strained and treated material and broken at the spec-
be accepted by agreement with the Society.
ified temperature.
When the deformation is reached by lateral compression, 8.2.2 The laboratory which carries out the examination is
the procedure of artificial aging described above may be to issue a certificate of the results and photographic docu-
applied directly to the individual test specimens. mentation of typical zones is to be enclosed.
NR 216, Ch 1, Sec 2
NR 216
Chapter 2
STEEL AND IRON PRODUCTS
SECTION 1 ROLLED STEEL PLATES, SECTIONS AND BARS
SECTION 2 STEEL PIPES, TUBES AND FITTINGS
SECTION 3 STEEL FORGINGS
SECTION 4 STEEL CASTINGS
SECTION 5 IRON CASTINGS
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 1
SECTION 1 ROLLED STEEL PLATES, SECTIONS AND BARS
1 General 1.4 Quality of materials

1.4.1 All products are to have a workmanlike finish and to
1.1 Scope be free from surface or internal defects which may impair
their proper workability and use.
1.1.1 The requirements of this Section apply to hot rolled
plates, strips, sections and bars intended for hull, structural 1.4.2 The responsibility for storage and maintenance of the
applications, boilers, pressure vessels and parts of machinery. delivered product(s) with acceptable level of surface condi-
Article [1] specifies the requirements common to all the tions rests with the manufacturer or shipyard before the
above-mentioned steel products, while the appropriate spe- product(s) are used in fabrication.
cific requirements are indicated in Articles [2] to [11].
1.5 Visual, dimensional and non-destructive
1.2 Manufacture examinations
1.5.1 General
1.2.1 Steel is to be manufactured by the electric furnace,
Visual, dimensional and, as appropriate, non-destructive
basic oxygen or open hearth processes.
examinations are to be performed by the manufacturer on
The use of other processes may be specially approved by the materials supplied prior to delivery, as required.
the Society.
Reference is made to the general provisions given in Ch 1,
Sec 1, [3.6].
1.2.2 The steel is to be cast in ingot moulds or by a contin-
uous casting process. Non-destructive examinations may be required by the Sur-
veyor when deemed necessary.
Provision is to be made for sufficient discard such as to
ensure: 1.5.2 Thickness tolerances of steel plates and wide
• at both ends of the ingots, the soundness of the material flats
The tolerances on thickness of a given product are defined as:
• at the transitory zones of continuous casting material, a
homogeneous chemical composition along the longitu- • minus tolerance is the lower limit of the acceptable
dinal axis. range below the nominal thickness
• plus tolerance is the upper limit of the acceptable range
above the nominal thickness.
1.3 Approval
The requirements for minus tolerances on nominal thickness
1.3.1 The manufacturing process is to be approved by the are indicated in the Articles relevant to the various products.
Society for individual steelmakers, grade of steel and prod-
The plus tolerance on nominal thickness are to be in accor-
ucts, as specified in the applicable Articles.
dance with a recognized national or international standard
Provisions for the approval are given in the document unless otherwise required by the Classification Society or
NR480 “Approval of the manufacturing process of metallic purchaser.
materials”. The tolerances on nominal thickness are not applicable to
areas repaired by grinding.
1.3.2 Rolling mills without their own steelmaking have to
ensure that the slabs, blooms or ingots are supplied by The responsibility for verification and maintenance of the
works approved by the Society. production within the required tolerances rests with the
manufacturer. The Surveyor may require to witness some
1.3.3 It is the manufacturer’s responsibility to assure that measurements.
effective process and production controls in operation are
1.5.3 Thickness measurements
adhered to within the manufacturing specifications. Where
control imperfection inducing possible inferior quality of Automated method or manual method is applied to the
product occurs, the manufacturer is to identify the cause thickness measurements.
and establish a countermeasure to prevent its recurrence. At least two lines among Line 1, Line 2 or Line 3 as shown
Also, the complete investigation report is to be submitted to in Fig 1, are to be selected for the thickness measurements
the surveyor. For further use, each affected piece is to be and at least three points on each selected line as shown in
tested to the Surveyor’s satisfaction. The frequency of testing Fig 1 are to be selected for thickness measurement. If more
for subsequent products offered may be increased at the dis- than three points are taken on each line the number of
cretion of the Society. points shall be equal on each line.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 1
Figure 1 : Locations of thickness measuring points

For automated methods, the measuring points at sides are to The general provisions of Ch 1, Sec 1 and specific require-
be located not less than 10 mm but not greater than ments for the various products as specified in the relevant
300 mm from the transverse or longitudinal edges of the Articles of this Section apply.
product.
For manual methods, the measuring points at sides are to be 1.7 Condition of supply
located not less than 10 mm but not greater than 100 mm
from the transverse or longitudinal edges of the product. 1.7.1 The conditions of supply are specified in the Articles
relevant to the various products.
1.6 Surface quality Where alternative supply conditions are agreed, the choice
of the supply condition, unless otherwise required, is left to
1.6.1 General the manufacturer; the condition of supply is always to be
The finished material is to have a surface quality in accor- mentioned in the testing documentation.
dance with a recognized standard such as EN 10163 parts
1.7.2 When acceptable as an alternative to normalising,
1, 2 and 3, or an equivalent standard accepted by the Soci-
the procedures relevant to controlled or thermo-mechanical
ety, unless otherwise specified in this Section.
rolling process are to be specially approved for individual
The responsibility for meeting the surface finish require- steelworks.
ments rests with the manufacturer of the material, who is to
take the necessary manufacturing precautions and is to 1.7.3 The rolling practice applied is to comply with the
inspect the products prior to delivery. At that stage, how- appropriate condition of supply. The applicable procedures
ever, rolling or heat treatment scale may conceal surface are defined as follows:
discontinuities and defects. If, during the subsequent desca- a) As Rolled, AR
ling or working operations, the material is found to be This procedure involves steel being cooled as it is rolled
defective, the Society may require materials to be repaired with no further heat treatment. The rolling and finishing
or rejected. temperatures are typically in the austenite recrystallization
The surface quality inspection method shall be in accor- region and above the normalising temperature. The
dance with recognized national or international standards strength and toughness properties of steel produced by this
agreed between purchaser and manufacturer, accepted by process are generally less than those of steel either heat
the Society. treated after rolling or produced by advanced process.
1.6.2 Rectification of surface defects by grinding b) Normalising, N

Defects which need to be repaired may be removed by Normalising involves heating rolled steel above the crit-
grinding. ical temperature, Ac3 , and in the lower end of the aus-
tenite recrystallization region for a specific period of
The general provisions of Ch 1, Sec 1 and specific require-
time, followed by air cooling. The process improves the
ments for the various products as specified in the relevant
mechanical properties of as rolled steel by refining the
Articles of this Section apply.
grain size and homogenising the microstructure.
The repaired areas are to be ground smooth to the adjacent
c) Controlled Rolling, CR (Normalising Rolling, NR)
surface of the product.
This is a rolling procedure in which the final deforma-
The Surveyor may request that the complete removal of tion is carried out in the normalising temperature range,
defects is verified by suitable non-destructive examination. allowed to cool in air, resulting in a material condition
generally equivalent to that obtained by normalising.
1.6.3 Rectification of surface defects by welding
Surface defects of products which cannot be removed as d) Quenching and Tempering, QT
stated in [1.6.2] may be repaired by chipping or grinding Quenching is a procedure which involves a heat treat-
followed by welding subject to the Surveyor’s consent and ment process in which steel is heated to an appropriate
under his supervision. temperature above the Ac3, held for a specific period of
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 1
time, and then cooled with an appropriate coolant for c) both the ends of the coil for plates fabricated in coils.
the purpose of hardening the microstructure. Tempering
Samples are to be taken from the following positions:
subsequent to quenching is a process in which the steel
is reheated to an appropriate temperature not higher • plates and flats having width  600 mm: at approxi-
than the Ac1, maintained at that temperature for a spe- mately one quarter of the width from an edge (see Fig 2)
cific period of time to restore toughness properties by • flats having width < 600 mm, bulb flats and sections: at
improving the microstructure and reduce the residual approximately 1/3 of the width from an edge (see Fig 3,
stress caused by the quenching process. Fig 4 and Fig 5); alternatively, for channels, beams or
Direct quenching after hot rolling, followed by temper- bulb angles: on the web, at approximately 1/4 of the
ing (DQ+T) is considered equivalent to conventional width from the centreline (see Fig 5)
quenching and tempering. • hollow sections: if rectangular, at approximately in the
e) Thermo-Mechanical rolling, TM (Thermo-Mechanical centreline of one side; if circular, at any position along
Controlled Processing, TMCP) the circumference
This is a procedure which involves the strict control of • bars: at approximately 1/3 of the radius or half-diagonal
both the steel temperature and the rolling reduction. from the outer surface; the axis of the sample should be
Generally a high proportion of the rolling reduction is at least 12 mm from the outer surface, except for bars
carried out close to the Ar3 temperature and may having diameter 25 mm or less, in which case the sam-
involve the rolling in the dual phase temperature region. ple is to be concentric with the bar (see Fig 6).
Unlike controlled rolling (normalising rolling), the prop-
erties conferred by TM (TMCP) cannot be reproduced 1.8.3 Preparation of test specimens
by subsequent normalising or other heat treatment. The test specimens are to be cut from the samples with their
principal axis parallel (longitudinal test) or perpendicular
The use of accelerated cooling on completion of TM-
(transverse test) to the direction of rolling, as required in the
rolling may also be accepted, subject to the special
Articles relevant to the various products.
approval of the Society. The same applies for the use of
tempering after completion of the TM-rolling. For the preparation of test specimens and for the testing pro-
cedures, reference is to be made to the applicable require-
The generic designation Thermo-Mechanical rolling TM
ments of Ch 1, Sec 2.
includes Direct Quenching followed by tempering
(TM + DQ) after TM-rolling.
Figure 2 : Plates and flats
f) Accelerated Cooling, AcC
Accelerated cooling is a process which aims to improve
1/4 W
the mechanical properties by controlled cooling with

rates higher than air cooling immediately after the final
W
TM-rolling operation. Direct quenching is excluded

from accelerated cooling.
The material properties conferred by TM and AcC can-
not be reproduced by subsequent normalising or other
heat treatment.
Figure 3 : Bulb flats
1.8 Sampling and tests
1.8.1 General 1/3 W

All products are to be presented for testing in the final sup-
ply condition in batches or rolled units as specified in the W
Articles relevant to the various products.
1.8.2 Sampling Figure 4 : Angles
The samples required for the preparation of test specimens W

are, in general, to be cut from:
a) the end of the plate or section corresponding to the top
position of the ingot, in the case of casting in ingot moulds
b) any end of the plate or section, where such products are

rolled from blooms or billets manufactured by continu- 1/3 W
ous casting, on the understanding that sufficient discard
is taken from the transitory zones of the cast beginning
and end
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 1
Figure 5 : Sections 1.9 Identification and marking

A 1.9.1 The manufacturer is to adopt a suitable system of
identification which enables the product to be traced to its
original cast.
1/3 A
1/4 B
1.9.2 All products which have been tested with satisfactory
results are to be identified and marked, in addition to the
Society’s brand required in Ch 1, Sec 1, [4.1.3], with the fol-
lowing indications:
B
a) manufacturer’s name or trade mark
b) identification mark for the grade of steel
c) cast number or other marking, which will enable the
history of the fabrication of the product to be traced.
Different marking systems are to be agreed with the Society.
Figure 6 : Bars
R 1.10 Documentation and certification
1/3 R 1.10.1 Information required

The testing documentation indicated in Ch 1, Sec 1, [4.2.1]
is required and is to contain all the appropriate information.
The ladle analysis is to include the content of refining and
alloying elements as applicable.
1.10.2 Inspection certificate

Before signing the Society’s inspection certificate or endors-
ing the inspection certificate issued by the manufacturer
(mill sheets), the Surveyor is to be provided by the manufac-
turer with a written declaration, stating that the material has
been manufactured by a process accepted by the Society,
complies with the applicable requirements and has been
satisfactorily tested in accordance with the Rules.
The following wording may be acceptable, either printed or
1.8.4 Tensile test
stamped on the delivery documents, with the name of the
The results of the test are to comply with the values speci- steel manufacturer and signed by one of his authorised rep-
fied in the Tables relevant to the various products. resentatives: “We hereby certify that the material has been
made by an approved process and has been satisfactorily
If during the tensile test there is no marked yield stress ReH,
tested in accordance with the Society’s Rules”.
the 0,2% proof stress Rp0,2, may be taken as an alternative.
1.10.3 Casting and rolling in different works
1.8.5 Impact test
When the steel is not produced at the works at which it is
The average value is to comply with the minimum average rolled, a certificate is to be supplied to the Surveyor at the
value specified in the Tables relevant to the various prod- rolling mill stating the process by which it was manufac-
ucts and only one individual value may be less than the tured, the name of the manufacturer who supplied it, the
average required, provided that it is not less than 70% of it. number of the cast from which it was made and the ladle
The minimum average values are relevant to the standard analysis. The Surveyor is to have access to the works at
specimen 10 x 10 mm2. which the steel was produced.
For subsize specimen dimensions and requirements, refer-

ence is to be made to Ch 1, Sec 2, [4.2.2]. 2 Normal and higher strength steels for
hull and other structural applications
1.8.6 Re-test procedures
Reference is made to Ch 1, Sec 1, [3.5]. 2.1 Scope
For tensile re-test procedure, reference is made to Ch 1, Sec 2,
2.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to weldable
[2.3].
normal and higher strength steel hot rolled plates, wide
For Charpy V-notch re-test procedure, reference is made to flats, sections and bars intended for use in hull construction
Ch 1, Sec 2, [4.4]. and other structural applications.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 1
2.1.2 Provision is made for: 2.2.2 Steels differing in chemical composition, deoxidation
practice, conditions of supply and mechanical properties
• plates and wide flats of all grades not exceeding may be accepted, subject to the special approval of the
100 mm in thickness Society. Such steels are to be given a special designation.
• sections and bars of all grades not exceeding 50 mm in
thickness. 2.3 Manufacture
2.3.1 Approval
2.1.3 For thickness greater than the above, the require-
ments may be modified, as appropriate, in the individual The manufacturers are to be approved by the Society and
the relevant requirements of [1.2] and [1.3]apply.
cases.
Provisions for the approval are given in NR480 “Approval of
the manufacturing process of metallic materials”.
2.2 Steel grades
2.3.2 Deoxidation process
2.2.1 The steels are classed, on the basis of a minimum
The method of deoxidation is specified in Tab 1 and Tab 2.
yield strength level ReH (N/mm2), into normal strength
(ReH=235) and higher strength (32: ReH=315 - 36: ReH=355 - 2.3.3 Rolling practice
40: ReH=390). Where CR (NR) and TM with or without AcC are applied,
the programmed rolling schedules are to be submitted to
Normal strength steels are divided into four grades A, B, D
the Society at the time of the approval and are to be made
and E. For normal strength steels, the letters A, B, D and E available when required by the attending Surveyor. On the
mean impact properties at +20°C, 0°C, 20°C and 40°C, manufacturer’s responsibility, the programmed rolling
respectively. schedules are to be adhered to during the rolling operation
(as per [1.3.3]). To this effect, the actual rolling records are
Higher strength steels are divided into four grades identified to be reviewed by the manufacturer and, occasionally, by
by the letters AH, DH, EH and FH followed by a number the Surveyor.
related to the yield strength level. For higher strength steels, When deviation from the programmed rolling schedules
the letters AH, DH, EH and FH mean impact properties at occurs, the manufacturer is to take further measures, to the
0°C, 20°C, 40°C and 60°C, respectively. Surveyor’s satisfaction, in accordance with [1.3.3].
Table 1 : Normal strength steels - Chemical composition and deoxidation practice
Steel grade A B D E
Deoxidation practice for t  50 mm: any method t  50 mm: any method t  25 mm: killed killed and fine
thickness t (mm) except rimmed (1) except rimmed t > 25 mm: killed and grain treated
t > 50 mm: killed t > 50 mm: killed fine grain treated
Chemical composition (%)
(2) (3) (4)
C max (5) 0,21 (6) 0,21 0,21 0,18
Mn min (5) 2,5 x C 0,80 (7) 0,60 0,70
Si max 0,50 0,35 0,35 0,35
P max 0,035 0,035 0,035 0,035
S max 0,035 0,035 0,035 0,035
Al (acid soluble) min 0,015 (8) (9) 0,015 (9)
(1) For sections up to a thickness of 12,5 mm, rimmed steel may be accepted subject to the special approval of the Society.
(2) When any grade of steel is supplied in the thermo-mechanically rolled condition, variations in the specified chemical composi-
tion may be allowed or required by the Society and are to be stated at the approval.
(3) The Society may limit the amount of residual elements which may have an adverse effect on the working and use of the steel,
e.g. copper and tin.
(4) Where additions of any other element have been made as part of the steelmaking practice, the content is to be indicated in the
ladle analysis certificate.
(5) C +1/6 Mn is not to exceed 0,40%.
(6) Max. 0,23% for sections.
(7) When Grade B steel is impact tested, the minimum manganese content may be reduced to 0,60%.
(8) Al is required for thickness greater than 25 mm.
(9) The total aluminum content may be determined instead of acid soluble content. In such cases the total aluminum content is to
be not less than 0,020%. Other suitable grain refining elements may be used subject to the special approval of the Society.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 1
Table 2 : Higher strength steels - Chemical composition and deoxidation practice
AH32, DH32, EH32 AH36, DH36,

Steel grade FH32, FH36, FH40
EH36 AH40, DH40, EH40
Deoxidation practice killed and fine grain treated killed and fine grain treated
Chemical composition (%) (1) (5)
C max. 0,18 0,16
Mn 0,90 - 1,60 (2) 0,90 - 1,60
Si max. 0,50 0,50
P max. 0,035 0,025
S max. 0,035 0,025
Al (acid soluble) min (3) (4) 0,015 0,015
Nb (4) 0,02 - 0,05 0,02 - 0,05
V (4) 0,05 - 0,10 0,05 - 0,10
Ti max. (4) 0,02 0,02
Cu max. 0,35 0,35
Cr max. 0,20 0,20
Ni max. 0,40 0,80
Mo max. 0,08 0,08
N max. 0,009 (0,012 if Al is present)
(1) Alloying elements other than those listed above or exceeding the specified limits may be accepted by the Society when pro-
posed by the steelmaker at the time of approval and their content is to be indicated in the ladle analysis.
(2) Up to a thickness of 12,5 mm, the minimum manganese content may be reduced to 0,70.
(3) The total aluminium content may be determined instead of the acid soluble content. In such cases the total aluminium content
is to be not less than 0, 020%.
(4) The steel is to contain aluminium, niobium, vanadium or other suitable grain refining elements, either singly or in any combina-
tion. When used singly, the steel is to contain the specified minimum content of the grain refining element. When used in com-
bination, the specified minimum content of at least one grain refining element is applicable; the sum of Nb + V + Ti is not to
exceed 0,12%.
(5) When any grade of higher strength steel is supplied in the thermo-mechanically rolled condition, variations in the specified
chemical composition may be allowed or required by the Society and are to be stated at the approval.
2.3.4 Thickness and tolerances (t  5mm) The plus tolerance on nominal thickness are to be in accor-
dance with a recognized national or international standard
The average thickness of plates and wide flats is defined as unless otherwise required by the Classification Society.
the arithmetic mean of the measurements made in accor-
dance with [1.5.2]. The average thickness of plates and The tolerances on nominal thickness are not applicable to
areas repaired by grinding as indicated in [2.4.3] which are
wide flats is not to be less than the nominal thickness.
to be in accordance with a recognized standard.
For plates and wide flats with thicknesses of 5 mm and over,
2.3.5 Thickness and tolerances (t < 5mm)
a minus tolerance on nominal thickness of 0,3 mm is per-
The thickness tolerances for products with thicknesses
mitted.
below 5mm are to be in accordance with a national or
Alternatively, Class C of ISO 7452-2013 or equivalent international standard, e.g. Class B of ISO 7452-2013.
according to national or international standards may be However the minus tolerance shall not exceed 0.3mm.
applied, in which case the requirements of this Article
about average thickness and associated measurements need 2.4 Surface quality
not be applied.
2.4.1 General
Additionally, if Class C of ISO 7452-2013 is applied, it is The general requirements for surface quality of [1.6] apply.
required that the steel mill demonstrates to the satisfaction
2.4.2 Acceptance criteria
of the Society that the number of measurements and mea-
surement distribution are appropriate to establish that the a) Imperfections
mother plates produced are at or above the specified nomi- Imperfections of a harmless nature, for example pitting,
nal thickness. rolled-in scale, indentations, roll marks, scratches and
grooves, regarded as being inherent of the manufactur-
For sections and bars with thicknesses of 5mm and over, the ing process, are permissible irrespective of their number,
minus tolerance on nominal thickness is to be in accor- provided the maximum permissible limits of Class A of
dance with the requirements of a recognized international EN 10163-2 or limits specified in a recognized equiva-
or national standard. lent standard accepted by the Society, are not exceeded
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 1
and the remaining plate or wide flat thickness remains b) repair is carried out by an approved procedure and by
within the average allowable minus thickness tolerance qualified welders. The electrodes shall be of low hydro-
specified in [2.3.4] or [2.3.5]. Total affected area with gen type and shall be dried in accordance with the
imperfection not exceeding the specified limits are not manufacturer’s requirements and protected against
to exceed 15% of the total surface area in question. rehumidification before and during welding.
b) Defects c) no single welded area exceeds 0,125 m2 and the sum of
all welded areas does not exceed 2% of the total surface
Affected areas with imperfections with a depth exceed-
area.
ing the limits of Class A of EN 10163-2 or the maximum
permissible limits specified in a recognized equivalent d) The distance between two welded areas shall not be less
standard accepted by the Society, shall be repaired irre- than their average width.
spective of their number. e) If weld repair depth exceeds 3mm, UT may be
Cracks, injurious surface flaws, shells (over lapping requested by the Society. If required, UT shall be carried
material with non-metallic inclusion), sand patches, out in accordance with an approved procedure.
laminations and sharp edged seams (elongated defects)
visually evident on surface and/or edge of plate are con- 2.4.5 The surface quality and condition requirements
sidered defects, which would impair the end use of the herein are not applied to products in forms of bars and
product and which require rejection or repair, irrespec- tubulars, which will be subject to manufacturer’s confor-
tive of their size and number. mance standards.
2.4.3 Rectification of surface defects by grinding 2.5 Internal soundness

Surface defects may be removed by grinding as indicated in
[1.6.2] provided that: 2.5.1 If plates and wide flats are ordered with ultrasonic
inspection, this is to be made in accordance with an
a) the nominal thickness will not be reduced by more than accepted standard at the discretion of the Classification
7% or 3 mm, whichever is the less Society.
b) each single ground area does not exceed 0,25 m2
2.5.2 Ultrasonic testing of plates intended for offshore
c) the total ground area does not exceed 2% of the total structural applications of first and special category as
surface of the plate defined in the Society’s Offshore Rules is required and is to
be performed in accordance with a recognized standard
d) adjacent repairs located at a distance less than their
(e.g. EN 10160 or ASTM A 578) and an examination level
mean width are considered as forming a single ground
area accepted by the Society.
e) in the case of ground areas lying opposite each other on 2.5.3 Verification of internal soundness is the responsibility
both surfaces of the plate, the resulting thickness is to of the manufacturer. The acceptance of internal soundness
satisfy in any place the values indicated in item a). by the Society’s surveyor shall not absolve the manufacturer
from this responsibility.
Defects or unacceptable imperfections are to be completely
removed by grinding and the remaining plate or wide flat
thickness shall remain within the average allowable minus 2.6 Condition of supply
thickness tolerance specified in [2.3.4] or [2.3.5].
2.6.1 The products are to be supplied in the condition indi-
The ground areas shall be a smooth transition to the sur- cated in Tab 5 and Tab 6 for normal strength steels and Tab 9
rounding surface of the product. Complete elimination of and Tab 10 for higher strength steels.
the defect is to be verified by magnetic particle or by liquid
The definition of the supply conditions is given in [1.7.3].
penetrant testing.
2.4.4 Rectification of surface defects by welding 2.7 Chemical composition

Weld repair procedures and the method are to be reported 2.7.1 General
and be approved by the Society. Repair of defects such as
The chemical composition is determined by the manufac-
unacceptable imperfections, cracks, shells or seams shall be
turer on ladle samples (see Ch 1, Sec 1, [2.2.1]).
followed by magnetic particle or liquid penetrant testing.
Surface defects of products which cannot be removed as 2.7.2 Normal strength steels
stated in [2.4.3] may be repaired by chipping or grinding The chemical composition is to comply with the require-
followed by welding subject to the agreement of the Society ments specified in Tab 1.
and provided that:
2.7.3 Higher strength steels
a) after removal of defects and weld preparation, the thick-
ness of the piece is in no place reduced by more than The chemical composition is to comply with the require-
20% with respect to the nominal thickness. For occa- ments specified in Tab 2.
sional defects with depths exceeding 20% of nominal At the time of the approval of higher strength steels, an
thickness, special consideration at the Surveyor’s discre- upper limit for carbon equivalent CEQ on the ladle analysis
tion will be necessary. may be specified.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 1
Unless otherwise agreed, the value of CEQ is calculated by As an alternative to CEQ, at the discretion of the Society, the
the following formula: cold cracking susceptibility Pcm may be used for evaluating
Mn Cr + Mo + V Ni + Cu
the weldability.
C EQ = C + --------- + -------------------------------- + --------------------- %
6 5 15 Pcm is given by the following formula and an upper limit
For steel produced by thermo-mechanical rolling, CEQ is to may be agreed at the time of the approval of the steel:
comply with the requirements of Tab 3.
Si Mn Cu Ni Cr Mo V
Pcm = C + ------ + --------- + ------- + ------ + ------ + --------- + ------ + 5B %
Table 3 : Carbon equivalent for higher strength steels 30 20 20 60 20 15 10
up to 100 mm in thickness produced by TM process
When a limit of CEQ and Pcm is required, the relevant val-
Carbon equivalent ues are to be stated by the manufacturer and included in the
Steel grade CEQ max. (%) (1) testing documentation for each cast.
t  50 50 < t  100
AH32, DH32, EH32, FH32 0,36 0,38
AH36, DH36, EH36, FH36 0,38 0,40
AH40, DH40, EH40, FH40 0,40 0,42 2.8.1 Normal strength steels
t = thickness (mm) The mechanical properties are indicated in Tab 4.

(1) More stringent carbon equivalent limits may be agreed The number of impact tests to be performed is indicated in
between the manufacturer and the shipbuilder in indi- Tab 5 for plates and wide flats and Tab 6 for sections and
vidual cases. bars.
Table 4 : Normal strength steels - Mechanical properties
Average impact energy (J) min

Yield stress Tensile
El. A5 KVL longitudinal - KVT transverse - t = thickness (mm)
Steel ReH strength
(%) min
grade (N/mm2) Rm Test temp t  50 50 < t  70 70 < t  100
(1)
min. (N/mm2) (°C) KVL KVT KVL KVT KVL KVT
A 235 400/520 (2) 22 +20 34 24 41 27
B 235 400/520 22 0 27 20 34 24 41 27
D 235 400/520 22 20 27 20 34 24 41 27
E 235 400/520 22 40 27 20 34 24 41 27
(1) El.: elongation. For full thickness flat tensile test specimens with a width of 25 mm and a gauge length of 200mm, the elonga-
tion is to comply with the minimum values given for strength level 32 in Tab 8.
(2) For sections in grade A of all thicknesses, the upper limit for the specified tensile stress range may be exceeded up to a maxi-
mum of 540 N/mm2.
Table 5 : Normal strength plates and wide flats - Condition of supply and number of impact tests
Condition of supply (1)
Steel grade Batch for impact tests in tons () for thickness t (mm) (2)
t 25 25 < t < 35 35  t  50 50 < t 100
A A() (N,TM)(), NR(50), AR*(50) (3)
B A () (4) A(50) (N,TM)(50), NR(25), AR*(25)
D A(50) (N,NR,TM)(50) (N,TM)(50), NR(25)
E N or TM (each piece)
(1) Abbreviations:
A : Any
N : Normalised Condition (heat treatment)
NR : Normalising Rolled Condition as an alternative to Normalising
TM : Thermo-Mechanical Rolling
AR* : As Rolled Condition subject to the special approval of the Society.
(2) One set of impact tests is to be taken from each batch of the weight in tons specified in brackets (), from each fraction thereof or
from each piece as indicated. When impact tests are not required the indication is ().
(3) Charpy V-notch tests are generally not required for fine grained grade A products over 50 mm thick N or TM; when required,
the rate is at the Society’s discretion.
(4) Charpy V-notch tests are generally not required for Grade B steel with thickness of 25 mm or less; when required, the rate is at
the Society’s discretion.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 1
Table 6 : Normal strength sections and bars - Condition of supply and number of impact tests

Steel grade Batch for impact tests in tons () for thickness t (mm) (2)
t  25 25 < t  35 35 < t  50
A A ()
B A () (3) A (50)
D A (50) N(50), NR(50), TM(50), AR*(25)
E N(25), TM(25), AR*(15), NR*(15)
(1) Abbreviations:
A : Any
AR* : As Rolled Condition subject to the special approval of the Society
NR* : Normalising Rolled Condition subject to the special approval of the Society.
(2) One set of impact tests is to be taken from each batch of the weight in tons specified in brackets () or fraction thereof. When
impact tests are not required, the indication is ().
(3) Charpy V-notch impact tests are generally not required for grade B steel with thickness of 25 mm or less.
2.8.2 Higher strength steels In the other cases, the specimens are to be taken in the lon-
The mechanical properties are indicated in Tab 7. gitudinal direction, unless otherwise required by or agreed
with the Society.
The condition of supply and the number of impact tests to
be performed are indicated in Tab 9 for plates and wide flats The impact test requirements specified on transverse speci-
and Tab 10 for sections and bars.
mens (KVT) are to be guaranteed by the manufacturer and
random checks may be required by the Society.
Generally, impact tests are not required when the nominal
2.9.1 General product thickness is less than 6 mm.
Samples for mechanical tests are to be cut from the prod-
ucts in the final supply condition.The tests are to be carried For plates fabricated in coils, the tensile and impact tests
out on pieces selected from batches or on individual pieces required are to be duplicated on specimens taken from
as required in [2.9.5] and [2.9.6]. samples cut at both ends of the coil.
2.9.2 Batch testing Sampling positions are indicated in [1.8.2].

All materials in the batch are to be from the same heat, of Additional through thickness tests may be required for spe-
the same product type, in the same condition of supply and
cial applications and are to be carried out according to the
within the following ranges of thickness and mass:
requirements of Article [11].
a) difference between minimum and maximum thicknesses
not exceeding 10 mm 2.9.5 Number of tensile tests
b) mass not exceeding 50 t.
One tensile test is to be carried out from one piece for each
For products of steel type A intended for secondary applica- batch presented or fraction thereof.
tions, the batch composition may not be required to be
restricted to material from the same heat, but in such case In general the specimen is to be taken from a piece selected
the mass of the batch is not to exceed 25 t. in the batch among those with the highest thickness.
2.9.3 Individual testing

2.9.6 Number of impact tests
For tests on individual pieces the term piece means rolled
unit as defined in Ch 1, Sec 1, [3.3.3]. The number of sets of impact tests required is indicated in
Tab 5 and Tab 6 for normal strength products and Tab 9 and
2.9.4 Sampling Tab 10 for higher strength products.
For plates and flats having width  600 mm, the specimens
for tensile test are to be taken in the transverse direction and When testing is by batches, the specimens are to be taken
the specimens for the Charpy V-notch impact test in the lon- from a piece selected among those of the batch having the
gitudinal direction (KVL). highest thickness.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 1
Table 7 : Higher strength steels - Mechanical properties
Yield stress Tensile Elong. A5 Average impact energy (J) min. for thickness t (mm)
Steel grade ReH strength Rm (%) min. Test temp. t  50 50 < t  70 70 < t  100
(N/mm2) min. (N/mm2) (1) (°C) KVL KVT KVL KVT KVL KVT
AH32 315 440/570 22 0 31 22 38 26 46 31
DH32  20 31 22 38 26 46 31
EH32  40 31 22 38 26 46 31
FH32  60 31 22 38 26 46 31
AH36 355 490/630 21 0 34 24 41 27 50 34
DH36  20 34 24 41 27 50 34
EH36  40 34 24 41 27 50 34
FH36  60 34 24 41 27 50 34
AH40 390 510/660 20 0 39 26 46 31 55 37
DH40  20 39 26 46 31 55 37
EH40  40 39 26 46 31 55 37
FH40  60 39 26 46 31 55 37
(1) For full thickness flat tensile test specimens with a width of 25 mm and a gauge length of 200 mm, the elongation is to comply
with the minimum values given in Tab 8.
Table 8 : Elongation (%) on a gauge length of 200 mm for thickness t (mm)
Strength grade t5 5 < t 10 10 < t 15 15 < t 20 20 < t 25 25 < t 30 30 < t 40 40 < t  50
32 14 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
36 13 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
40 12 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Table 9 : Higher strength plates and wide flats - Condition of supply and number of impact tests

Grain refining Batch for impact tests in tons () for thickness t (mm)up to: (2)
Steel grade
elements
12,5 20 25 35 50 100
AH32 (3) Nb and/or V A(50) N(50), NR(50), TM(50) N(50), NR(25), TM(25)
AH36 (3) Al only A(50) AR*(25) Not applicable
or with Ti N(50), NR(50), TM(50) N(50), NR(25), TM(50)
AH40 Any A(50) N(50), NR(50), TM(50) N(50), TM(50), QT (each piece as
heat treated)
DH32 Nb and/or V A(50) N(50), NR(50), TM(50) N(50), NR(25), TM(50)
DH36 Al only A(50) AR*(25) Not applicable
or with Ti N(50), NR(50), TM(50) N(50), NR(25), TM(50)
DH40 Any N(50), NR(50), TM(50) N(50), TM(50), QT (each piece as
heat treated)
EH32 Any N (each piece), TM (each piece)
EH36
EH40 Any N (each piece), TM (each piece), QT (each piece as heat treated)
FH32 Any N (each piece), TM (each piece), QT (each piece as heat treated)
FH36
FH40 Any N (each piece), TM (each piece), QT (each piece as heat treated)
(1) Abbreviations:
A : Any
QT : Quenched and Tempered Condition
AR* : As Rolled Condition subject to the special approval of the Society.
(2) One set of impact tests is to be taken from each batch of the weight in tons specified in brackets (), from each fraction thereof or
from each piece as indicated. When impact tests are not required the indication is ().
(3) For Grades AH32 and AH36 steels, a relaxation in the number of impact tests may be permitted by special agreement with the
Society, provided that satisfactory results are obtained from occasional checks.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 1
Table 10 : Higher strength sections and bars - Condition of supply and number of impact tests

Grain refining Batch for impact test in tons () for thickness t (mm) up to: (2)
Steel grade
elements
12,5 20 50
AH32 (3) Nb and/or V A(50) N(50), NR(50), TM(50), AR*(25)
AH36 (3) Al only or with Ti A(50) N(50), NR(50), TM(50), AR*(25)
AH40 Any A(50) N(50), NR(50), TM(50)
DH32 Nb and/or V A(50) N(50), NR(50), TM(50), AR*(25)
DH36 Al only or with Ti A(50) N(50), NR(50), TM(50), AR*(25)
DH40 Any N(50), NR(50), TM(50)
EH32 Any N(25), TM(25), AR*(15), NR*(15)
EH36
EH40 Any N(25), TM(25), QT(25)
FH32 Any N(25), TM(25), QT(25), NR*(15)
FH36
FH40 Any N(25), TM(25), QT(25)
(1) Abbreviations:
A : Any
QT : Quenched and Tempered Condition
AR* : As Rolled Condition subject to the special approval of the Society
NR* : Normalising Rolled Condition subject to the special approval of the Society.
(2) One set of impact tests is to be taken from each batch of the weight in tons specified in brackets () or fraction thereof.
(3) For Grades AH32 and AH36 steels, a relaxation in the number of impact tests for acceptance purposes may be permitted by
special agreement with the Society provided that satisfactory results are obtained from occasional checks.
The number of sets of specimens for the impact test, each of 3 Normal and higher strength corrosion
three specimens, summarised in the above-mentioned Tables,
is to be in accordance with the following requirements: resistant steels for cargo oil tanks
a) one set is required for each batch of 50 tons, or fraction
thereof for the following grades of steel, unless other- 3.1 Scope
wise specified in b):
• A, for products having thickness  50 mm 3.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to normal and
• B, for products having thickness  25 mm higher strength corrosion resistant steels when such steel is
• D, AH32, DH32, AH36, DH36, AH40, DH40 used as the alternative means of corrosion protection for
b) except for grade A, for products supplied subject to spe- cargo oil tanks as specified in the performance standard
cial approval in the as rolled condition (AR*), and for MSC.289(87) of Regulation 3-11, Part A-1, Chapter II-1 of
products with thickness higher than 50 mm supplied in
the SOLAS Convention (Corrosion protection of cargo oil
the controlled rolled condition (NR), the mass of the
batches for the purpose of impact tests is to be 25 t, or a tanks of crude oil tankers).
fraction thereof
c) one set of three impact test specimens is required for: 3.1.2 Normal and higher strength corrosion resistant steels
• each piece for grades E and F in all strengths are steels whose corrosion resistance performance in the
• each batch of 25 t or fraction thereof of sections of bottom or top of the internal cargo oil tank is tested and
grades E and F in all strengths approved to satisfy the requirements in the performance
d) when, subject to special approval, sections of steel standard MSC.289 (87).
grades E and F in all strengths other than 40 are supplied
It is not intended that such steels be used for corrosion resis-
in the as rolled (AR*) or controlled rolled (NR*) condi-
tion, the mass of the batches for the purpose of impact tant applications in other areas of a vessel that are outside
tests is to be 15 t, or a fraction thereof. of those specified in the performance standard MSC.289
Random checks of the impact values may be required at the (87) of Regulation 3-11, Part A-1, Chapter II-1 of the SOLAS
discretion of the Surveyor. Convention.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 1
3.1.3 Provision is made for: 4 High strength steel and crack arrest
• plates and wide flats of all grades not exceeding 50 mm steels plates for container ships
in thickness structural applications
• sections and bars of all grades not exceeding 50 mm in
thickness. 4.1 Scope
3.2 Steel grades 4.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to hot rolled
plates in high strength steel and crack arrest steel intended
3.2.1 The requirements of Article [3] are intended as a sup- for longitudinal structural members in the upper deck
plement to the requirements of Article [2], which specify region of container ships, when required by the applicable
the steel grades for hull structures. rules.
3.2.2 The corrosion resistant grade is designated according 4.1.2 Provision is made for plates not exceeding 100 mm in
to its area of application with one of the following suffixes: thickness.
• lower surface of strength deck and surrounding struc-
tures: RCU 4.2 Steel grades
• upper surface of inner bottom plating and surrounding 4.2.1 The crack arrest steels are classed into three groups,
structures: RCB on the basis of a minimum yield strength level ReH, in
• for both strength deck and inner bottom plating: RCW. N/mm2 (36: ReH = 355; 40: ReH = 390; 47: ReH = 460).
The suffix is given to any steel grade which has been tested Each group is further subdivided into two grades EH and FH
according to the present Article and to the corrosion testing based of the impact test temperature. The letters EH and FH
procedure defined in the Appendix of the Annex to Perfor- mean impact properties at 40°C and 60°C, respectively.
mance Standard for Alternative Means of Corrosion Protec- The suffix CAS (for Crack Arrest Steel) is added to the grade.
tion for Cargo Oil Tanks of Crude Oil Tankers MSC.289(87).
High strength steel grade EH47 belongs to the minimum
yield strength level ReH = 460 N/mm2.
3.3 Manufacture
3.3.1 Approval 4.3 Manufacture

Approval may be given for a steel grade for application in 4.3.1 Approval
one of the following areas of cargo oil tank: The manufacturers are to be approved by the Society and
• lower surface of strength deck and surrounding struc- the relevant requirements of [1.2] and [1.3] apply.
tures
• upper surface of inner bottom plating and surrounding the manufacturing process of metallic materials”.
structures
Approval program for steel grade EH47(without suffix CAS)
• for both strength deck and inner bottom plating. is to be based on the program for the steel grade EH40.
The requirements of [1.2] and [1.3] apply. 4.3.2 Deoxidation process
Provisions for the approval are given in NR480 “Approval of The steel is to be killed and fine grain treated.
4.3.3 Rolling practice
3.4 Chemical composition Where CR (NR) and TM (with or without AcC) are applied,
the programmed rolling schedules are to be submitted to
3.4.1 The chemical composition of samples taken from the Society at the time of the approval and are to be made
each ladle of each cast is to be determined by the manufac- available when required by the attending Surveyor. On the
turer and is to be in accordance with the appropriate manufacturer’s responsibility, the programmed rolling
requirements of [2.7]. schedules are to be adhered to during the rolling operation,
(as per [1.3.3]). To this effect, the actual rolling records are
The weight percentage of each element added or intention- to be reviewed by the manufacturer and, occasionally, by
ally controlled for improving corrosion resistance is to be the Surveyor.
determined and is to be in compliance with the approved
steel grade specification. When deviation from the programmed rolling schedules
occurs, the manufacturer is to take further measures, to the
Carbon equivalent requirements are to be in accordance Surveyor's satisfaction, in accordance with [1.3.3].
with [2.7], as applicable.
4.3.4 Thickness tolerances and surface condition
3.5 Marking Unless otherwise agreed or specially required, the require-
ments for tolerances on nominal thickness, surface condi-
3.5.1 In addition to the requirements of [1.9], the appropri- tion and rectification of surface defects are indicated in
ate suffix RCU, RCB or RCW is to be marked. [2.3.4] or [2.3.5] and [2.4].
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 1
Table 11 : Plates - Condition of supply and number of impact tests
Grain refining
Steel grade Condition of supply (1)
elements
EH36CAS Any N (each piece), TM (each piece)
EH40CAS Any N (each piece), TM (each piece), QT (each piece as heat treated)
EH47, EH47CAS Any TM (each piece)
FH36CAS
Any N (each piece), TM (each piece), QT (each piece as heat treated)
FH40CAS
(1) Abbreviations:
QT : Quenched and Tempered Condition.
4.4 Condition of supply 4.7 Mechanical tests
4.4.1 The plates are to be supplied in the condition indi- 4.7.1 General
cated in Tab 11. Samples for mechanical tests are to be cut from the prod-
ucts in the final supply condition. The tests are to be carried
The definition of the supply conditions is given in [1.7.3]. out on individual pieces as required in [4.7.4] and [4.7.5].
4.5 Chemical composition 4.7.2 Individual testing

The term piece means rolled unit as defined in Ch 1, Sec 1,
4.5.1 The manufacturer is to submit a specification of the [3.3.3].
chemical composition of the high strength steel and crack
4.7.3 Sampling
arrest steel grades, which is to be approved by the Society.
The specimens for tensile test are to be taken in the trans-
The approved specification is also to include the alloying verse direction and the specimens for the Charpy V-notch
and grain refining elements, the maximum Carbon equiva- impact test in the longitudinal direction (KVL).
lent CEQ and the maximum Pcm value (cold cracking sus-
The impact test requirements specified on transverse speci-
ceptibility index), agreed during the initial approval tests.
mens (KVT) are to be guaranteed by the manufacturer and
Unless otherwise agreed, the value of CEQ is calculated by random checks may be required by the Society.
the following formula: Generally, impact tests are not required when the nominal
product thickness is less than 6 mm.
C EQ = C + --------- + -------------------------------- + --------------------- % Sampling positions are indicated in [1.8.2].
6 5 15
The Pcm value is to be calculated from the ladle analysis in Additional through thickness tests may be required for spe-
accordance with the following formula: cial applications and are to be carried out according to the
requirements of Article [11].
Si Mn Cu Ni Cr Mo V
Pcm = C + ------ + --------- + ------- + ------ + ------ + --------- + ------ + 5B % 4.7.4 Number of tensile tests
30 20 20 60 20 15 10
One tensile test is to be carried out from each piece.
The alloying and grain refining elements, CEQ and Pcm
value, as applicable, are to be stated by the steelmaker and Table 12 : Carbon equivalent and Pcm value
included in the testing documentation for each cast. for high strength steel and crack arrest steels up to
100 mm thickness produced by TM process
4.5.2 The chemical composition on ladle analysis is to
comply with the requirements specified in the approved Carbon equivalent Pcm value
specification. Steel grade CEQ max. (%) (1) max. (%) (1)
t  50 50 < t  100 t  100
4.5.3 For steel produced by thermo-mechanical rolling, CEQ
EH36CAS, FH36CAS 0,38 0,40 (2)
and Pcm value are to comply with the requirement of Tab 12.
EH40CAS, FH40CAS 0,40 0,42 (2)
4.6 Mechanical properties EH47, EH47CAS 0,49 0,22

t = thickness (mm)
4.6.1 The mechanical properties are indicated in Tab 13. (1) More stringent carbon equivalent or Pcm limits are to
The condition of supply and the number of impact tests to be considered as per the approved specification
be performed are indicated in Tab 11. (2) As per the approved specification.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 1
Table 13 : Mechanical properties
Yield stress Tensile Average impact energy (J) min. for thickness t (mm)
Elong. A5
Steel grade ReH (N/mm2) strength Rm Test temp. t  50 50 < t  70 70 < t  85 85 < t  100
(%) min.
min. (N/mm2) (°C) KVL KVT KVL KVT KVL KVT KVL KVT
EH36CAS  40 34 24 41 27 50 34 50 34
355 490/630 21
FH36CAS  60 34 24 41 27 50 34 50 34
EH40CAS  40 39 26 46 31 55 37 55 37
390 510/660 20
FH40CAS  60 39 26 46 31 55 37 55 37
EH47 460 570/720 17  40 53 53 64 75
EH47CAS
4.7.5 Number of impact tests 5.3 Manufacture

The number of sets of impact tests required is indicated in
5.3.1 Approval
Tab 11.
The manufacturers are to be approved by the Society and
One set of three impact test specimens is required for each the relevant requirements of [1.2] and [1.3] apply.
piece of steel grades EH and FH in all strengths.
5 Extra high strength steels for welded
5.3.2 Steelmaking process
structures
Vacuum degassing shall be used for all extra high strength
steels of this Article with enhanced through thickness prop-
5.1 Scope erties, and for steels grade with the minimum yield strength
ReH = 690N/mm².
5.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to hot rolled,
fine grain, weldable extra high strength steel plates, wide 5.3.3 Deoxidation process and grain size
flats, sections, bars and seamless tubulars, intended for use The steel is to be fully killed and fine grain treated.
in marine and offshore structural applications. These
requirements do not apply to steels intended for ship hull The extra high strength steels shall have a fine grain struc-
structure. ture containing sufficient amounts of nitrogen binding ele-
ments.
5.1.2 Provision is made for plates, sections, bars and seam- A fine grain structure has an equivalent index  6 deter-
less tubulars not exceeding thicknesses as specified in Tab 14. mined by micrographic examination in accordance with
ISO 643 or alternative test method.
5.1.3 For thickness greater than the above, the steel grade
specification may be accepted subject to the special 5.3.4 Reduction ratio
approval of the Society. The maximum thickness of slab, billet or bloom from the
continuous casting process shall be at the manufacturer’s
discretion.
5.2 Steel grades
Unless otherwise approved the total reduction ratio for
5.2.1 The steels are classed into eight groups indicated by products from slabs, billets, blooms or ingots is to be at least
minimum yield strength levels ReH (N/mm²) 420, 460, 500, 3:1.
550, 620, 690, 890 and 960.
5.3.5 Rolling practice
Each group is further subdivided into four grades A, D, E Where NR and TM (with or without AcC) are applied, the
and F based on the impact test temperature, except for yield programmed rolling schedules are to be submitted to the
strength levels 890 and 960 N/mm² for which grade F is not Society at the time of the approval and are to be made avail-
applicable. able when required by the attending Surveyor. On the man-
The letters A, D, E and F mean impact test at 0°C, 20°C, 40°C ufacturer’s responsibility, the programmed rolling schedules
and 60°C, respectively. are to be adhered to during the rolling operation (as per
[1.3.3]). To this effect, the actual rolling records are to be
reviewed by the manufacturer and, occasionally, by the Sur-
5.2.2 Steels differing in chemical composition, deoxidation
veyor.
practice, conditions of supply and mechanical properties
may be accepted, subject to special approval of the Society. When deviation from the programmed rolling schedules
Such steels are to have the letter ”S” after the identification occurs, the manufacturer is to take further measures, to the
mark [e.g.E620S]. Surveyor’s satisfaction, in accordance with [1.3.3].
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 1
Table 14 : Maximum thickness limits 5.5 Chemical Composition
5.5.1 The chemical composition is to be determined by the

Delivery Maximum thickness (mm) steelmaker in an adequately equipped and competently
condition Plates Sections Bars Tubulars staffed laboratory. The method of sampling is to follow that
carried out for the initial approval tests, either from the ladle,
N 250 50 250 65
the tundish or the mould in the case of continuous casting.
NR 150 (1)
The aim analysis is to comply with the approved specifica-
TM 150 50 N.A. N.A. tion. All elements listed in Tab 15 are to be reported.
QT 150 50 N.A. 50
The approved specification is to include the alloying, nitro-
N.A. = Not applicable. gen binding, grain refining and residual elements, the maxi-
(1) The maximum thickness limits of sections, bars and mum CEQ/CET and the maximum Pcm value (cold cracking
tubulars produced by NR process route are less than susceptibility index), agreed during the initial approval tests.
those manufactured by N route, and shall be agreed
with the Society. Unless otherwise agreed, the value of CEQ is calculated by
the following formula:
5.3.6 Thickness tolerances and surface condition Mn Cr + Mo + V Ni + Cu
C EQ = C + --------- + -------------------------------- + --------------------- %
6 5 15
All materials are to be free from cracks, injurious surface
flaws, injurious laminations and similar defects. For steel grade with the minimum yield strength 460N/mm²,
CET may be used instead of CEQ at the discretion of the
Unless otherwise agreed or specially required, tolerances manufacturer and is to be calculated using the following
on nominal thickness, surface condition and rectification of formula:
surface defects, the requirements are indicated in [2.3.4] or
[2.3.5] and [2.4]. Mn + Mo Cr + Cu Ni
CET = C + ------------------------ + -------------------- + ------ %
10 20 40
The surface quality inspection method shall be in accor-
dance with recognized national or international standards For TM and QT steels with carbon content not more than
agreed between the purchaser and the manufacturer. 0.12%, the cold cracking susceptibility Pcm for evaluating
weldability may be used instead of carbon equivalent CEQ
a) Welding repair procedures and the method for reporting or CET at manufacturer’s discretion and is to be calculated
repairs are to be approved by the Society. using the following formula:
b) Where repair by grinding is carried out then the remain- Si Mn Cu Ni Cr Mo V

Pcm = C + ------ + --------- + ------- + ------ + ------ + --------- + ------ + 5B %
ing plate thickness below ground area must be within 30 20 20 60 20 15 10
the allowable under thickness tolerance. The alloying and grain refining elements, CEQ/CET and Pcm
Surface inspection is the responsibility of the manufacturer. value, as applicable, are to be stated by the steelmaker and
The acceptance by the Surveyor of material later found to included in the testing documentation for each cast. CEQ/
be defective shall not absolve the manufacturer of this CET and Pcm value are to comply with the requirements of
responsibility. Tab 16, Tab 17 and Tab 18.
5.3.7 Non-destructive examination 5.6 Mechanical properties

Ultrasonic testing of plates intended for offshore structural
5.6.1 The mechanical properties are specified in Tab 19.
applications of first and special category as defined in the
Society’s Offshore Rules is required and is to be performed
5.6.2 For plates and sections for applications, such as racks
in accordance with a recognised standard (e.g. EN 10160 or
in offshore platforms etc; where the design requires that ten-
ASTM A 578) and an examination level accepted by the
sile properties are maintained through the thickness, a
Society.
decrease in the minimum specified tensile properties is not
Verification of the internal soundness is the responsibility of permitted with an increase in the thickness.
the manufacturer. The acceptance by the Surveyor shall not
absolve the manufacturer of this responsibility. 5.7 Mechanical tests
5.7.1 General
Samples for tests are to be cut from the products in the final
5.4.1 The products are to be supplied in Normalised (N)/ supply condition. The tests are to be carried out on each
Normalised Rolled (NR), Thermo-Mechanical controlled rolled unit as heat treated.
rolled (TM) or Quenched and Tempered (QT) condition as The definition of rolled unit is given in Ch 1, Sec 1, [3.3.3].
indicated in Tab 19.
For continuously heat treated products, special sampling
The definition of supply condition is given in [1.7.3]. procedures may be agreed at the Society’s discretion.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 1
Table 15 : Chemical composition
Delivery condition (1) N/NR TM QT

Steel grade A/D420 E420 A/D420 E/F420 A/D420 E/F420
A/D460 E460 A/D460 E/F460 A/D460 E/F460
A/D500 E/F500 A/D500 E/F500
A/D550 E/F550 A/D550 E/F550
A/D620 E/F620 A/D620 E/F620
A/D690 E/F690 A/D690 E/F690
A890 D/E890 A890 D/E890
A960 D/E960
(2)
C max. 0,20 0,18 0,16 0,14 0,18 0,18
Mn 1,0 - 1,70 1,0 - 1,70 1,0 - 1,70 1,0 - 1,70 1,70 1,70
Si max. 0,60 0,60 0,60 0,60 0,80 0,80
P max. (3) 0,030 0,025 0,025 0,020 0,025 0,020
S max. (3) 0,025 0,020 0,015 0,010 0,015 0,010
Al total min. (4) 0,02 0,02 0,02 0,02 0,018 0,018
Nb max. (5) 0,05 0,05 0,05 0,05 0,06 0,06
V max. (5) 0,20 0,20 0,12 0,12 0,12 0,12
Ti max. (5) 0,05 0,05 0,05 0,05 0,05 0,05
Cu max. 0,55 0,55 0,55 0,55 0,50 0,50
Cr max. (5) 0,30 0,30 0,50 0,50 1,50 1,50
Ni max. (6) 0,80 0,80 2,00 2,00 2,00 2,00
Mo max. (5) 0,10 0,10 0,50 0,50 0,70 0,70
N max. 0,025 0,025 0,025 0,025 0,015 0,015
O ppm max. (7) Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable 50 Not applicable 30
(1) See [5.4] for definition of delivery conditions.
(2) The chemical composition is to be determined by ladle analysis and shall meet the approved manufacturing specification at the
time approval. When boron is deliberated added for enhancement of hardenability of the steels, the maximum boron content
shall not be higher than 0,005%.
(3) For sections the P and S content can be 0,005% higher than the value specified in the table.
(4) The total aluminium to nitrogen ratio shall be a minimum of 2:1. When other nitrogen binding elements are used, the minium
Al value and Al/N ratio do not apply.
(5) Total Nb + V + Ti  0,26% and Mo + Cr  0,65%, not applicable for QT steels.
(6) Higher Ni content may be agreed with the Society.
(7) The requirement of maximum Oxygen content is only applicable to D890, E890, D960 and E960.
Table 16 : Maximum carbon equivalent CEQ /CET and maximum Pcm value for
extra high strength steels produced by N/NR process
CEQ (%) CET (%) Pcm (%)

Steel grade Plates Sections Bars Tubulars
N/NR all all
t 50 50 < t  100 100 < t  250 t  50 t or d  250 t  65
mm mm mm mm mm mm
A420, D420,
0,46 0,48 0,52 0,47 0,53 0,47 N.A. N.A.
E420, F420
A460, D460,
0,50 0,52 0,54 0,51 0,55 0,51 0,25 N.A.
E460, F460
N.A. = Not applicable
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 1
extra high strength steels produced by TM process
CEQ (%) CET (%) Pcm (%)

Steel grade Plates Sections
TM t  50 50 < t  100 100 < t  250 t  50 all all
mm mm mm mm
A420, D420,
0,43 0,45 0,47 0,44 N.A. N.A.
E420, F420
A460, D460,
0,45 0,47 0,48 0,46 0,30 0,23
E460, F460
A500, D500,
0,46 0,48 0,50 N.A 0,32 0,24
E500, F500
A550, D550,
0,48 0,50 0,54 N.A 0,34 0,25
E550, F550
A620, D620,
0,50 0,52 N.A N.A. 0,34 0,26
E620, F620
A690, D690,
0,56 N.A. N.A. N.A. 0,36 0,28
E690, F690
A890, D890,
0,60 N.A. N.A. N.A. 0,38 0,28
E890
extra high strength steels produced by QT process
CEQ (%) CET (%) Pcm (%)

Steel grade Plates Tubulars
QT t  50 50 < t  100 100 < t  250 t  65 all all
mm mm mm mm
A420, D420,
0,45 0,47 0,49 0,46 N.A. N.A.
E420, F420
A460, D460,
0,47 0,48 0,50 0,48 0,32 0,24
E460, F460
A500, D500,
0,48 0,50 0,54 0,50 0,34 0,25
E500, F500
A550, D550,
0,56 0,60 0,64 0,56 0,36 0,28
E550, F550
A620, D620,
0,56 0,60 0,64 0,58 0,38 0,30
E620, F620
A690, D690,
0,64 0,66 0,70 0,68 0,40 0,33
E690, F690
A890, D890,
0,68 0,75 N.A. N.A. 0,40 N.A.
E890
A960, D960,
0,75 N.A. N.A. N.A. 0,40 N.A.
E960
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 1
Tensile strength Rm
Yield stress ReH (N/mm2) min. (N/mm2) Elongation A5 (%) Average impact energy
Delivery for thickness (mm) (2) for thickness min. (3) (J) min.
Steel (mm)
condition
grade
(1) 3t 50 < t 100 < t 3t 100 < t
Test temp
50 100 250 100 250 T L KVT KVL
(C°)
mm mm mm mm mm
A420 0
D420 N/NR or 20
420 390 365 520-680 470-650 19 21 28 42
E420 TM or QT 40
F420 60
A460 0
D460 N/NR or 20
460 430 390 540-720 500-710 17 19 31 46
E460 TM or QT 40
F460 60
A500 0
D500 20
TM or QT 500 480 440 590-770 540-720 17 19 33 50
E500 40
F500 60
A550 0
D550 20
TM or QT 550 530 490 640-820 590-770 16 18 37 55
E550 40
F550 60
A620 0
D620 20
TM or QT 620 580 560 700-890 650-830 15 17 41 62
E620 40
F620 60
A690 0
D690 20
TM or QT 690 650 630 770-940 710-900 14 16 46 69
E690 40
F690 60
A890 0
D890 TM or QT 890 830 N.A. 940-1100 N.A. 11 13 20 46 69
E890 40
A960 0
D960 QT 960 N.A. N.A. 980-1150 N.A. 10 12 20 46 69
E960 40
(1) N: Normalising, NR: Normalising Rolling, TM: Thermo-Mechanical rolling, QT: Quenched and Tempered.
(2) When ReH cannot be determined, the 0,2% proof stress (Rp0.2) value is to be determined. The material is considered to comply
with the requirement if either value meets or exceeds the specified minimum value of yield strength.
(3) For full thickness flat test specimens having a width of 25mm and a gauge length of 200 mm, the elongation is to comply with
the minimum values given in Tab 20. The tabulated elongation minimum values specified in Tab 20 are the requirements for
testing specimens in transverse direction.
5.7.2 Sampling of tensile test specimen Full thickness flat tensile specimens are to be prepared in
such manner as to maintain the rolling scale at least at one
The specimens for tensile test are to be taken with their lon-
side. When the capacity of the test machine is exceeded by
gitudinal axes transverse to the final rolling direction, the use of the full thickness specimen, sub-sized flat tensile
except in the case of sections, bars, tubulars and flats hav- specimens representing either the full thickness or half of
ing finished width 600mm, where the specimens may be the product thickness retaining one rolled surface are to be
taken in the longitudinal direction. used.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 1
Table 20 : Minimum elongation values for flat specimens 25 mm width and 200 mm gauge length
Strength level Thickness t (mm)

(1) t  10 10 < t  15 15 < t  20 20 < t  25 25 < t  40 40 < t  50 50 < t  70
420 11 13 14 15 16 17 18
460 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
500 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
550 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
620 9 11 12 12 13 14 15
690 9 (2) 10 (2) 11 (2) 11 12 13 14
(1) For strength levels 890 and 960, specimens which are not included in this table shall be proportional specimens with gauge
length of:
L 0 = 5 ,65 So
(2) For plates with thickness 20 mm and strength level 690, round specimen may be used instead of the flat tensile specimen.The
minimum elongation for testing specimen in transverse direction is 14%.
Alternatively, machined round test specimens may be used. If the mass of the finished material is greater than 25 tonnes,
The specimens are to be located at a position lying at a dis- one set of tests from each 25 tonnes and/or fraction thereof
tance t/4 from the surface and additionally at t/2 for thick- is required (e.g. for consignment of 60 tonnes would require
ness above 100mm or as near as possible to these positions. 3 plates to be tested).
Additional through thickness tests may be required for spe-
cial application and are to be carried out according to the 5.8 Marking
requirements of Article [11]. When required, through thick-
5.8.1 Each finished piece is to be clearly marked by the
ness tensile strength is not to be less than 80% of the speci-
manufacturer as per [1.9] and with the following particulars:
fied minimum tensile strength.
a) Cast number/heat number, plate number or equivalent
5.7.3 Sampling of impact test specimen identification mark
In the case of plates and wide flats having finished width  b) Delivery condition (N/NR, TM/TM+AcC/TM+DQ or QT)
600 mm, the impact test specimens are to be taken with The entire markings are to be encircled with paint or other-
their axes transverse to the final rolling direction. wise marked so as to be easily recognized.
In other cases the specimens are to be taken in the longitu-
dinal direction, unless otherwise required by or agreed with 6 Steels for boilers and pressure
the Society. vessels
Sub-surface test specimens will be taken in such a way that
one side is not further away than 2mm from a rolled surface. 6.1 Scope
For products with a thickness higher than 50mm, impact 6.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to weldable
tests shall be taken at the quarter thickness (t/4) location and ferritic steel products (plates, flats, sections and bars)
mid-thickness (t/2) location. intended for boilers and pressure vessels.
Generally, impact tests are not required when the nominal Provision is made for products with thickness up to 60 mm
product thickness is less than 6mm. and impact properties at a temperature not lower than 20°C.
These requirements may also be applied to products with
5.7.4 Number of tensile tests thickness above 60 mm subject to agreement with the Society.
Tensile test sample is to be randomly selected from each
6.1.2 Special requirements may be specified in the case of
batch, as defined in Ch 1, Sec 1, [3.3.3] that is to be less
applications intended for dangerous substances or particu-
than or equal to 25 tonnes, and to be from the same cast, in
larly severe service conditions.
the same delivery condition and of the same thickness.
6.1.3 In the case of applications involving the storage and
5.7.5 Number of impact tests transport of liquefied gases, reference is to be made to Soci-
a) For steel plates in N/NR or TM condition, test sample is ety’s Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships Pt D, Ch9 and
to be taken from each piece. to the International Code for the Construction and Equip-
ment of Ships Carrying Liquefied Gases in Bulk (IGC Code).
b) For steel plates in QT condition, test sample is to be
For gas fuelled ships, reference is to be made to Society
taken from each individually heat treated part thereof.
Rule Note NR 529, and, to the International Code of Safety
c) For sections, bars and tubulars, test sample is to be for Ships using Gases or other Low-flash point Fuels (IGF
taken from each batch of 25 tonnes or fraction thereof. Code).
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 1
6.2 Steel grades 6.3.4 Thickness tolerances
Minus tolerances on the nominal thickness are not normally

6.2.1 The requirements apply to carbon and carbon man-
permitted.
ganese steels and low alloy steels (Mo and Cr-Mo steels).
6.3.5 Rectification of surface defects by grinding

6.2.2 Carbon and carbon manganese steels are classed into
four groups indicated by the minimum ultimate tensile Surface defects may generally be removed by grinding as
strength Rm (N/mm2): 360, 410, 460 and 510. indicated in [1.6.2], provided that the thickness, after grind-
Each group may be further subdivided into grades HA, HB ing, is not less than the nominal thickness.
and HD, as appropriate, based on the quality level and
However the extent of repairs is to be agreed with the Sur-
impact properties.
veyor. Where the thickness is reduced below the nominal
The letters HA, HB and HD mean impact properties at thickness given in the approved plans, the possible accep-
+20°C, 0°C and 20°C, respectively. tance and the relevant conditions are subject to special con-
sideration by the Society.
6.2.3 Low alloy steels are designated according to the
chemical composition into the grades 0,3Mo - 1Cr0,5Mo -
6.3.6 Rectification of surface defects by welding
2,25Cr1Mo.
Defects which cannot be removed by grinding may gener-
Two types of 2,25Cr1Mo steel are specified in relation to
ally be repaired by welding under the conditions given in
the heat treatment and consequent mechanical properties.
[1.6.3], except that suitable heat treatment and non-
The figures mean the nominal percentage content of the destructive examination are always required after repair.
main alloying elements.
The purchaser is to be informed as to the extent and posi-
6.2.4 In the case of liquefied gas carriers, plates and section of the repairs carried out on the individual plates.
tions intended for cargo tanks and process pressure vessels
with design temperature not lower than 0°C, the steel
grades with letters HB may be selected for thicknesses up to 6.4 Condition of supply
20mm included, and the steel grades with letters HD may
be selected for thicknesses from 20mm to 40mm included, 6.4.1 The products are to be supplied in the conditions
as applicable. indicated in Tab 23 for carbon and carbon manganese
steels and Tab 24 for low alloy steels.
6.3 Manufacture
6.4.2 The products to be processed after supply by hot
6.3.1 Approval forming may also be supplied, where agreed, in the as
rolled condition.
Unless otherwise agreed by the Society, the manufacturers
are to be approved and the relevant requirements of [1.2] In such cases heat treatment is to be carried out after hot
and [1.3] apply. forming and provision for the mechanical tests indicated in
Provisions for the approval are given in NR480 “Approval of [6.8.4] is to be made.
6.3.2 Deoxidation process
The method of deoxidation is specified in Tab 21 and Tab 22. 6.5.1 The chemical composition on ladle analysis is to
comply with the requirements specified in Tab 21 for car-
6.3.3 Rolling practice bon and carbon manganese steels and Tab 22 for low alloy
steels and/or in the approved specification.
Where CR (NR) are applied, the programmed rolling sched-
ules are to be submitted to the Society at the time of the The approved specification is also to include the alloying and
approval and are to be made available when required by
grain refining elements (not specified in Tab 21 and Tab 22).
the attending Surveyor. On the manufacturer’s responsibil-
ity, the programmed rolling schedules are to be adhered to The relevant elements as applicable are to be stated by the
during the rolling operation (as per [1.3.3]). To this effect,
steelmaker and included in the testing documentation for
the actual rolling records are to be reviewed by the manu-
each cast.
facturer and, occasionally, by the Surveyor.
When deviation from the programmed rolling schedules For C and C-Mn steels, an upper limit for carbon equivalent
occurs, the manufacturer is to take further measures, to the CEQ on the ladle analysis may be specified at the time of
Surveyor’s satisfaction, in accordance with [1.3.3]. approval of the individual steels.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 1
Table 21 : Carbon and carbon manganese steels - Chemical composition
Chemical composition (%) (1)

Steel grade Deoxidation
C max Mn Si P max S max Al tot. min. (1) Ni max
360HA not rimmed 0,16  0,40  0,35 0,030 0,030
360HB killed 0,16 0,40 - 1,20 0,10 - 0,35 0,030 0,030
360HD killed and fine grained 0,16 0,40 - 1,20 0,10 - 0,35 0,030 0,030 0,020
410HA not rimmed 0,20  0,50  0,35 0,030 0,030 0,30
410HB killed 0,20 0,50 - 1,40 0,10 - 0,35 0,030 0,030 0,30
410HD killed and fine grained 0,20 0,50 - 1,40 0,10 - 0,35 0,030 0,030 0,020 0,30
460HB killed 0,20 0,80 - 1,50 0,10 - 0,40 0,030 0,030 0,30
510HB killed 0,22 0,90 - 1,60 0,10 - 0,50 0,030 0,025 0,30
(1) Nb, V or Ti may be used for grain refining as a complete or partial substitute for Al. The grain refining elements are to be speci-
fied at the time of approval; in general Nb and V are not to exceed 0,05 and 0,10%, respectively.
Additional alloying elements are to be submitted for consideration and approval. Residual elements not intentionally added are
not to exceed the following limits:
Cu  0,30%; Cr  0,25%; Mo  0,10%. Total: Ni + Cu + Cr + Mo  0,70%
Table 22 : Low alloy steels - Chemical composition
Deoxidation Chemical composition (%) (1)

Steel grade
(2) C Mn Si P max S max Cr Mo
0,3Mo Si killed 0,12 - 0,20 0,40 - 0,90 0,10 - 0,35 0,030 0,030  0,30 0,25-0,35
1Cr 0,5Mo Si killed 0,08 - 0,18 0,40 - 1,00 0,15 - 0,35 0,030 0,030 0,70-1,20 0,40-0,60
2,25Cr 1Mo Si killed 0,07 - 0,15 0,40 - 0,80 0,15 - 0,50 0,030 0,030 2,00-2,50 0,90-1,10
(1) Residual elements are not to exceed the following limits: Cu  0,30%, Ni  0,30%.
(2) Aluminium total max 0,020% for all grades of steel. The aluminium content is to be mentioned in the ladle analysis certificate.
Table 23 : Carbon and carbon manganese steels - Mechanical properties
Yield stress ReH (N/mm2) min. Tensile Average impact energy (J)
Heat for thickness (mm) strength min.
Steel Elong. A5
treatment
grade Rm (%) min. Test temp
(1) t 16 16 < t 40 40 < t  60 KVT KVL
(N/mm2) (°C)
360HA 215 205 195 360 - 480 25 + 20 27 41
360HB N or NR 235 225 215 0
360HD  20
410HA 245 235 225 410 - 530 23 + 20
410HB N or NR 265 255 245 0
410HD  20
460HB 285 270 260 460 - 580 22 0
N or NR
460HD 295 285 280  20
510HB 345 335 325 510 - 630 21 0
N or NR
510HD 355 345 335  20
(1) N: Normalising - NR: Normalising Rolling. As an alternative to normalising, the as rolled condition may be accepted for sec-
tions, subject to approval of individual steelmakers.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 1
Unless otherwise agreed, the value of CEQ is calculated by 6.7 Mechanical properties at elevated
the following formula: temperatures
C EQ = C + --------- + -------------------------------- + --------------------- %
6 5 15 6.7.1 The values for the yield stress or 0,2% proof stress (Rp0,2)
Unless otherwise agreed, when a limit for CEQ is required, at temperatures of 100°C and higher are given in Tab 25.
the relevant values are to be stated by the steelmaker and The above Table are for design purposes only. Their verifica-
included in the testing documentation for each cast. tion is in general not required during the testing, unless fig-
ures higher than those shown in the above Tables but in
6.6 Mechanical properties accordance with recognised standards are proposed by the
steel manufacturer.
6.6.1 The mechanical properties are specified in Tab 23 for
carbon and carbon manganese steels and Tab 24 for low In such cases, the verification is required and the proce-
alloy steels. dures detailed in [6.7.2] and [6.7.3] are to be followed.
Table 24 : Low alloy steels - Mechanical properties
Average impact
Heat Yield stress ReH (N/mm2) Tensile Elongation A5 (%) min.
energy (J) min.
Steel grade treatment min. for thickness (mm) strength Rm for thickness (mm)
at + 20°C
(1) (N/mm2)
t 16 16t 40 40 t 60 t  40 40 t 60 KVT
0,3Mo N 275 270 260 430 - 600 24 23 31
1Cr 0,5Mo N+T 300 295 295 450 - 610 20 19
2,25Cr 0,5Mo N+T 295 285 275 520 - 670 18 18
N+T or Q+T 310 310 310 470 - 620
(1) N = Normalising; T = Tempering; Q = Quenching
Table 25 : Minimum proof stress (Rp0,2) values at elevated temperatures
Steel Thickness Rp0,2 (N/mm2) at a temperature (°C) of:

grade (mm) 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
360HA (1)  16 175 172 168 150 124 117 115
> 16  40 171 169 162 144 124 117 115
> 40  60 162 158 152 141 124 117 115
360HB (1)  16 204 185 165 145 127 116 110
360HD (1) > 16  40 196 183 164 145 127 116 110
> 40  60 179 172 159 145 127 116 110
410HA (1)  16 211 208 201 180 150 142 138
> 16  40 201 198 191 171 150 142 138
> 40  60 192 188 181 168 150 142 138
410HB (1)  16 235 216 194 171 152 141 134
410HD (1) > 16  40 228 213 192 171 152 141 134
> 40  60 215 204 188 171 152 141 134
460HB (1)  16 262 247 223 198 177 167 158
460HD (1) > 16  40 260 242 220 198 177 167 158
> 40  60 251 235 217 198 177 167 158
510HB (1)  60 290 270 255 235 215 200 180
510HD (1)
0,3Mo  60 215 200 170 160 150 145 140
1Cr 0,5Mo  60 230 220 205 190 180 170 165
2,25Cr 1Mo  60 (2) 235 230 220 210 200 190 180
 60 (3) 265 255 235 225 215 205 195
(1) The values at Rp0,2 for temperatures  250°C are for guidance only
(2) Normalised and tempered
(3) Normalised and tempered or quenched and tempered
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 1
Table 26 : Average values for stress to rupture in 100000 hours (N/mm2)
Steel grade
Temperature (°C)
360 - 410 460 - 510 0,3Mo 1Cr 0,5Mo 2,25Cr 1Mo
380 170 225
390 155 200
400 140 175
410 125 155
420 110 135
430 100 115
440 90 100
450 75 85 235 285 220
460 (60) (70) 205 250 205
470 (50) (60) 175 220 185
480 (40) (55) 145 190 170
490 (45) 120 160 150
500 (40) 100 135 135
510 80 120 120
520 65 95 105
530 50 80 90
540 60 75
550 50 65
560 40 55
570 30 50
580 45
590 (40)
600 (35)
Note 1: The values shown are estimated average values; the lower limit of the range is approximately 20% less than the average
value. The values in brackets for some higher temperatures indicate that the steel is not suitable for continuous use at such tempera-
tures.
6.7.2 When Rp0,2 is required to be verified, at least one ten- For manufacturers and steel types approved on this basis,
sile test for each cast is to be carried out at the agreed tem- tensile tests at elevated temperatures are not generally
perature. required during the routine testing of the material supplied;
they may be required by the Society as a random check for
The sample is to be cut from the thickest plate of the cast
the confirmation of the approval.
and, if applicable, at the end of the plate that has shown the
lowest figures in the tensile test at ambient temperature. 6.7.4 For design purposes only, the estimated values of the
The sample is to be taken halfway between the edge and the stress to rupture in 100000 hours are given in Tab 26 for
axis of the piece, and the axis of the test specimen is to be groups of steels.
located at one quarter of the thickness from one of the
rolled surfaces. 6.8 Mechanical tests
The dimensions of the specimens and the testing procedure 6.8.1 General
are to be in accordance with the requirements of Ch 1, Sec Unless otherwise agreed (see [6.8.6]), samples for tests are
2, [2.1] and Ch 1, Sec 2, [2.2.5], respectively. to be cut from the products in the final supply conditions.
The results of tests are to comply with the specified values.
6.8.2 Samples from plates and wide flats
6.7.3 As an alternative to the systematic verification of the The tests are to be carried out on each rolled unit as heat
required Rp0,2 as in [6.7.2], it may be agreed with the indi- treated.
vidual steelmakers to carry out an adequate program of tests One sample is to be taken from one end of each rolled unit
on the normal production for each type of steel to be when the mass and the length do not exceed 5t and 15m,
approved. respectively.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 1
When either of these limits is exceeded, samples are to be 7.1.3 In case of applications involving the storage and
cut at both ends of each rolled unit. transport of liquefied gases, reference is to be made to Soci-
The definition of rolled unit is given in Ch 1, Sec 1, [3.3.3]. ety’s Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships Pt D, Ch 9
and to the International Code for the Construction and
6.8.3 Samples from sections and bars Equipment of Ships Carrying Liquefied Gases in Bulk (IGC
Code).
One sample is to be taken from each batch homogeneous
for cast, section size and condition of supply. Each batch is For gas fuelled ships, reference is to be made to Society
to contain not more than 50 pieces and its total mass is not Rule Note NR 529, and, to the International Code of Safety
to exceed 10 t. for Ships using Gases or other Low-flash point Fuels (IGF
Code).
6.8.4 Sampling of test specimens
In the case of plates and wide flats having width  600mm, 7.2 Steel grades
the tensile test and impact test specimens are to be taken in
the transverse direction. 7.2.1 The requirements apply to carbon, carbon manga-
nese and Ni steels.
dinal direction, unless otherwise required by or agreed with 7.2.2 The carbon and carbon manganese steels are classed
the Society. into six groups indicated by the minimum ultimate tensile
strength Rm (N/mm2): 390, 410, 460, 490, 510 and 550.
6.8.5 Number of test specimens
Each group may be further subdivided into three grades, LE,
The following test specimens are to be taken from each LF or LT, as appropriate, based on the quality level and
sample: impact properties.
a) 1 tensile test specimen (2 tests in the case of bars The letters LE and LF mean impact properties at 40°C and
intended for tie rods) 60°C, respectively.
b) 1 set of 3 Charpy V-notch impact test specimens (only The letters LT mean impact properties at temperature
for grades HB and HD unless otherwise specified) between 55°C and 70°C, depending on the thickness.
c) 1 tensile test specimen at elevated temperature, for each 7.2.3 Ni steels are designated according to the chemical
cast, when required. composition into the grades: 1,5Ni - 2.25Ni - 3,5Ni - 5Ni -
9Ni. The figures mean the Ni nominal percentage content.
6.8.6 Material to be hot worked
When for material to be hot worked after delivery, it is agreed 7.2.4 In the case of liquefied gas carriers, plates and sec-
that the heat treatment required will be carried out by the tions intended for cargo tanks, secondary barriers and pro-
purchaser, the samples are to be submitted by the steelmaker cess pressure vessels with design temperatures not lower
to such treatment before the cutting of test specimens. than 50°C, the steel grades 390LT and 490LT may be
In particular cases (when the material is submitted to cold selected as per Tab 30, as applicable.
or hot working during fabrication), tests additional to the
7.2.5 In the case of liquefied gas carriers, plates and sec-
routine testing may be required on samples in the final con-
tions intended for cargo tanks, secondary barriers and pro-
dition of the material after fabrication.
cess pressure vessels with design temperatures lower than
These may also include tests on material submitted to artifi- 55°C, nickel steels may be selected as per Tab 31,
cial aging treatment as indicated in Ch 1, Sec 2, [8.1.1]. depending on the design temperature, as applicable.
7 Ferritic steels for low temperature 7.3 Manufacture

service 7.3.1 Approval
The manufacturers are to be approved by the Society and
7.1 Scope the relevant requirements of [1.2] and [1.3] apply.
7.1.1 The requirement of this Article apply to ferritic steel Provisions for the approval are given in NR480 “Approval of
products (plates, flats, sections and bars) intended for cargo the manufacturing process of metallic materials”.
tanks, storage tanks, process pressure vessels and systems 7.3.2 Deoxidation process
for liquefied gases and other pressure vessels in general,
The steel is to be killed and fine grained.
when impact properties at temperature lower than 20°C
are required. 7.3.3 Thickness tolerances
Provision is made for products with thickness up to 60mm. For pressure vessels, minus tolerances on nominal thickness
The extension to higher thicknesses and relevant conditions are not normally permitted.
are subject to agreement with the Society.
7.3.4 Surface conditions
7.1.2 Special requirements may be specified in the case of For repairs, the provisions of [6.3.5] and [6.3.6] apply.
applications intended for dangerous substances or particu- Repairs by welding are not normally allowed on 5% or 9%
larly severe service conditions. nickel steels.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 1
Steel Chemical composition (%) (1)

grade C max Mn Si P max S max Al tot min Ni max
410 LE 0,18 0,50 - 1,40 0,10 - 0,35 0,030 0,030 0,020 0,30
410 LF 0,16 0,50 - 1,40 0,10 - 0,35 0,030 0,030 0,020 0,80
460 LE 0,18 0,80 - 1,50 0,10 - 0,40 0,030 0,030 0,020 0,30
460 LF 0,16 0,80 - 1,50 0,10 - 0,40 0,030 0,030 0,020 0,80
510 LE 0,18 1,00 - 1,70 0,10 - 0,50 0,030 0,025 0,020 0,30
510 LF 0,16 1,00 - 1,70 0,10 - 0,50 0,030 0,025 0,020 0,80
550 LE 0,18 1,00 - 1,70 0,10 - 0,50 0,030 0,025 0,020 0,30
550 LF 0,16 1,00 - 1,70 0,10 - 0,50 0,030 0,025 0,020 0,80
390 LT 0,16 0,80 - 1,50 0,10 - 0,40 0,030 0,025 0,020 1,25
490 LT 0,16 1,00 - 1,70 0,10 - 0,50 0,030 0,025 0,020 1,25
(1) Nb, V or Ti may be used for grain refining as a complete or partial substitute for Al. The grain refining elements are to be speci-
fied at the time of approval; in general Nb and V are not to exceed 0,05 and 0,10%, respectively. Additional alloying elements
are to be submitted for consideration and approval. Residual elements not intentionally added are not to exceed the following
limits (%): Cu 0,30, Cr 0,15, Mo  0,10.
Table 28 : Nickel steels - Chemical composition
Chemical composition (1) (2)

Steel grade
C max Mn Si max P max S max Ni Cr max Mo max
1,5 Ni 0,18 0,30 - 1,50 0,35 0,035 0,020 1,30 - 1,70 0,25 0,10
2,25 Ni 0,17 0,30 - 0,90 0,35 0,035 0,020 2,10 - 2,50 0,25 0,10
3,5 Ni 0,15 0,30 - 0,90 0,35 0,035 0,020 3,20 - 3,80 0,25 0,10
5,0 Ni 0,12 0,30 - 0,90 0,35 0,035 0,020 4,70 - 5,30 0,25 0,10
9,0 Ni 0,10 0,30 - 0,90 0,35 0,035 0,020 8,50 - 10,0 0,25 0,10
(1) Residual elements are not to exceed the following limits (%): Cu 0,35; V 0,05. Total Cr + Cu + Mo 0,50
(2) Aluminium total not less than 0,020 for all grades of steels. The aluminium content is to be mentioned in the ladle analysis cer-
tificate.
Yield stress ReH (N/mm2) min.

Steel Tensile strength Elong. Average impact energy (J) min.
for thickness t (mm)
grade Rm (N/mm2) A5 (%) min
t  16 16 < t  40 40 < t  60 Temp (°C) KVT KVL
410 LE 265 255 245 410 - 530 23 40 27 41
410 LF 290 280 270 410 - 530 23 60 27 41
460 LE 295 285 270 460 - 580 22  40 27 41
460 LF 320 310 300 460 - 580 22  60 27 41
510 LE 355 345 335 510 - 630 21  40 27 41
510 LF 355 345 335 510 - 630 21  60 27 41
550 LE 390 380 375 550 - 670 20  40 27 41
550 LF 390 380 375 550 - 670 20  60 27 41
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 1
7.4 Condition of supply 7.7.3 Samples from sections and bars

One sample is to be taken from each batch homogeneous
7.4.1 Unless otherwise accepted by the Society, carbon for heat, section size and condition of supply.
and carbon manganese products are to be supplied in nor-
Each batch is to contain not more than 50 pieces and its
malised (N) condition.
total mass is not to exceed 10 t.
Nickel steel products are to be supplied in the conditions
indicated in Tab 31. 7.7.4 Sampling of test specimens
In the case of plates and wide flats having width  600mm,
7.4.2 The products to be processed after supply by hot the tensile test and impact test specimens are to be taken in
working may also be supplied, where agreed, in the as the transverse direction.
rolled condition.
In such cases heat treatment is to be carried out after form-
dinal direction, unless otherwise required by or agreed with
ing and provision for the mechanical tests indicated in
the Society.
[6.8.6] is to be made.
7.7.5 Number of test specimens
7.5 Chemical composition The following test specimens are to be taken from each
sample:
7.5.1 The chemical composition on ladle analysis is to com-
ply with the requirements specified in Tab 27 and Tab 28 a) 1 tensile test specimen
and/or in the approved specification. b) 1 set of 3 Charpy V-notch impact test specimens
The approved specification is also to include the alloying and c) 2 or more drop weight test specimens, when required.
grain refining elements (not specified in Tab 27 and Tab 28).
The content of the above elements, as applicable, is to be 8 Steels for machinery
stated by the steelmaker for each heat and included in the
testing documentation. 8.1 Scope
For C and C-Mn steels, an upper limit for carbon equivalent
CEQ on the ladle analysis may be specified at the time of 8.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to carbon, car-
approval of the individual steels. bon manganese, low alloy and alloy rolled steel products
intended for use in the construction of structures and parts
Unless otherwise agreed, the value of CEQ is calculated by of machinery and equipment operating at ambient tempera-
the following formula: ture.
Mn Cr + Mo + V Ni + Cu In the case of applications in low or high temperature pres-
C EQ = C + --------- + -------------------------------- + --------------------- %
6 5 15 sure systems, reference is to be made to the applicable
Unless otherwise agreed, when a limit for CEQ is required requirements of Articles [7] and [6] respectively.
the relevant values are to be stated by the steelmaker and
8.1.2 The products are grouped as follows, depending on
included in the testing documentation for each cast.
the application:
a) structural parts of deck equipment
b) welded machinery structures such as bedplates, crank-
7.6.1 The products are to comply with the mechanical cases, frame entablatures or similar items
properties specified in Tab 29, Tab 30 and Tab 31. c) rolled products, such as bars for small shafts, pins, bolts
or similar items, when, in the limit of diameters of
7.7 Mechanical tests 250mm, they are accepted in lieu of forgings.
7.7.1 General 8.2 Steel grades and relevant properties

Unless otherwise agreed in the case of materials to be hot
worked after delivery [7.4.2], samples for tests are to be cut 8.2.1 The type of steels covered by Articles [2], [6], [7] and
from the products in the final supply condition. [9] may be used as appropriate.
Chemical and mechanical properties are to comply with the
7.7.2 Samples from plates and wide flats
requirements given therein.
The tests are to be carried out on each rolled unit as heat
For products having thickness exceeding the maximum
treated.
thickness considered in the above-mentioned Articles, the
One sample is to be taken from one end of each rolled unit following deviations in mechanical properties are permitted:
when the mass and the length do not exceed 5t and 15m,
• the minimum yield stress ReH required is reduced by 1%
respectively.
for every 5 mm thickness over the a.m. maximum
When either of these limits is exceeded, samples are to be • the minimum elongation A5 min. required is reduced by
cut at both ends of each rolled unit.
1 unit for thickness over than the a.m. max up to 100 mm
The definition of rolled unit is given in Ch 1, Sec 1, [3.3.3]. and by 2 units for thickness greater than 100 mm.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 1
Yield stress ReH (N/mm2)

Tensile Average impact energy (J) min.
Steel min. for thickness t (mm) Elongation
strength Rm
grade A5 (%) min Thickness
t  16 16 < t  40 (N/mm2) Temp (°C) KVT KVL
(mm)
390 LT 275 265 390 - 510 24 t  25  55 27 41
25 < t  30  60
30 < t  35  65
35 < t  40  70
490 LT 355 345 490 - 630 22 t  25  55 27 41
25 < t  30  60
30 < t  35  65
35 < t  40  70
Note 1: These requirements are applicable to products with thickness up to 40mm. For thicknesses exceeding 40 mm, the require-
ments shall be agreed with the Society.
Table 31 : Nickel steels - Mechanical properties
Average impact energy (J) min.

Steel Heat treatment Yield stress ReH Tensile strength Elongation
grade (1) (N/mm2) min. Rm (N/mm2) A5 (%) min. Thickness
Temp (°C) KVT KVL
(mm)
1,5 Ni N+T or Q+T 275 490 - 640 22 t  25  65 27 41
25 < t  30 70
30 < t  35 75
35 < t  40 80
2.25 Ni N+T or Q+T 275 490 - 640 22 t  25 70 27 41
25 < t  30 75
30 < t  35 80
35 < t  40 85
3,5 Ni N+T or Q+T 285 450 - 610 21 t  25  95 27 41
25 < t  30  100
30 < t  35  105
35 < t  40  110
5,0 Ni N+T or Q+T 390 540 - 740 21 t  25  110 27 41
25 < t  30  115
30 < t  35  120
35 < t  40  125
9,0 Ni N+N+T or Q+T 490 640 - 790 18 t  40  196 27 41
(1) N = normalising; T = tempering; Q = quenching.
Note 1: These requirements are applicable to products with thickness up to 40mm. For thicknesses exceeding 40 mm, the require-
ments shall be agreed with the Society.
8.3 Manufacture and condition of supply 8.3.2 For specific applications, ultrasonic examinations in
accordance with approved standards or procedures may be
8.3.1 Products intended for applications under [8.1.2] a) required.
and [8.1.2] b) are to be manufactured and supplied as indi- Rolled bars for shaft lines, used in lieu of forgings and having
cated in [2.3] and [2.6], [6.3] and [6.4], [7.3] and [7.4], as a diameter higher than 150 mm, are to be submitted to non-
appropriate. destructive (ultrasonic and magnetoscopic) examinations.
For products intended for applications under [8.1.2] c), the
applicable requirements of Sec 3 apply; unless otherwise 8.3.3 Unless otherwise agreed or specially required, the
agreed, a reduction ratio of 6:1 in respect of the original minus tolerances on nominal thickness indicated in Tab 32
ingot is generally required. apply to plates and wide flats.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 1
Table 32 : Minus tolerances on nominal thickness and to the International Code for the Construction and
Equipment of Ships Carrying Liquefied Gases in Bulk (IGC
Nominal thickness t (mm) Minus tolerance (mm) Code).
3t<5 0,3 For gas fuelled ships, reference is to be made to Society
Rule Note NR 529, and to the International Code of Safety
5t<8 0,4
for Ships using Gases or other Low-flash point Fuels (IGF
8  t < 15 0,5 Code).
15  t < 25 0,6
25  t < 40 0,7 9.2 Steel grades
40  t < 80 0,9
9.2.1 The requirements apply to Cr-Ni austenitic and auste-
80  t < 150 1,1 nitic-ferritic stainless steels.
150  t < 250 1,2 Note 1: Reference is made for designation to the corresponding
AISI grade.
t 250 1,3
Other stainless steel of martensitic types, in accordance
with international or national standards, may be accepted
for specific applications such as in [9.1.3].
8.4.1 For applications under [8.1.2] a) and [8.1.2] b), irre-
spective of the grade of steel, the testing may be in batches 9.3 Manufacture
in accordance with the relevant requirements of Article [2].
9.3.1 Approval
One tensile test is to be carried out from one piece for each Unless otherwise agreed, the manufacturers of steel
batch presented or fraction thereof. intended for the construction of cargo tanks, storage tanks
Unless otherwise required, the impact tests may be omitted. and pressure vessels for chemicals and liquefied gases are
to be approved by the Society and the relevant require-
8.4.2 For applications under [8.1.2] c), the testing proce- ments of [1.2] and [1.3] apply.
dure is to be in accordance with the requirements of Sec 3, Provisions for the approval are given in NR480 “Approval of
[1.7.4] relevant to forgings. the manufacturing process of metallic materials”.
8.4.3 The results of tensile and impact tests are to comply 9.3.2 Corrosion resistance
with requirements of Articles [2], [6] and [7], [9], as appli- The resistance of tank material to cargoes is under the
cable. responsibility of the yard.
Justification of such resistance is to be submitted to the
9 Stainless steel products Society.
9.3.3 Thickness tolerances

9.1 Scope With the exception of pressure vessels (see [6.3.4]), the
minus tolerance on nominal thickness is to be 0,3 mm.
9.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to austenitic
and austenitic-ferritic (duplex) rolled stainless products 9.3.4 Surface conditions
intended for use in construction of cargo tanks, storage Surface defects may be removed by grinding, provided that
tanks and pressure vessels for chemicals and limitedly to the the plate thickness at the location of the ground zone is not
austenitic grades for liquefied gases. less than the minimum thickness specified in [9.3.3].
9.1.2 Austenitic stainless steels are suitable for use both at Surface defects which cannot be removed by grinding may
elevated and low temperatures. be generally repaired under the conditions given in [2.4.4],
as applicable.
When austenitic stainless steels are proposed for use at ele-
vated temperatures, details of chemical composition, heat
treatment and mechanical properties are to be submitted for
consideration and approval. 9.4.1 All materials are to be supplied in the solution treated
Unless otherwise specified, austenitic-ferritic stainless steels condition.
are in general suitable for design temperature between 20°C
and +275°C. 9.5 Chemical composition
9.1.3 Stainless steel bars may be used for propeller shafts or 9.5.1 The chemical composition on ladle analysis is to
similar applications under the conditions given in [8.1.2] c). comply with the requirements specified in Tab 33.
9.1.4 In cases of applications involving the storage and 9.6 Mechanical properties
transport of liquefied gases, reference is to be made to Soci-
ety’s Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships Pt D, Ch 9 9.6.1 The mechanical properties are specified in Tab 34.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 1
AISI grade Chemical composition (%) (1)

designation C max Mn max Si max P max S max Cr Ni Mo Others
Austenitic
304 L 0,030 2,0 1,0 0,040 0,030 17,0 - 19,0 8,0- 12,0 
304 LN 0,030 2,0 1,0 0,040 0,030 17,0 - 19,0 8,5 - 11,0  0,14  N 0,22
316 L 0,030 2,0 1,0 0,040 0,030 16,0 - 18,5 10,0 - 14,0 2,0 - 3,0
316 LN 0,030 2,0 1,0 0,040 0,030 16,0 - 18,5 10,0 - 14,0 2,0 - 3,0 0,14  N  0,22
317 L 0,030 2,0 1,0 0,040 0,030 18,0 - 20,0 14,0 - 16,0 3,0 - 4,0
317 LN 0,030 2,0 1,0 0,040 0,030 18,0 - 20,0 12,5 - 14,0 3,0 - 4,0 0,14  N  0,22
321 0,080 2,0 1,0 0,040 0,030 17,0 - 19,0 9,0 - 13,0  5xC  Ti 0,80
347 0,080 2,0 1,0 0,040 0,030 17,0 - 19,0 9,0 - 13,0  10xC Nb 0,80
Duplex austenitic-ferritic
UNS S 31803 0,030 2,0 0,75 0,035 0,010 21,0 - 23,0 4,5 - 6,5 2,5 - 3,5 0,10 N 0,22
UNS S 32550 0,030 2,0 0,75 0,035 0,010 24,0 - 26,0 5,5 - 7,5 2,7 - 3,9 1,0  Cu  2,0
UNS S 32750 0,030 2,0 0,80 0,035 0,020 24,0 - 26,0 6,0 - 8,0 3,0 - 5,0 Cu  0,50
(1) With the exception of refining elements, additional alloying elements are to be submitted for consideration and approval.
Residual elements are permitted provided they do not impair the properties, subsequent processing or behaviour in service of
the material.
AISI grade Yield strength (N/mm2) min. (1) Tensile strength Rm Average impact energy (J) min.
A5 (%) min.
designation Rp0,2 Rp1,0 (N/mm2) KVL KVT
Austenitic at 196°C at 196°C
304 L 175 215 470 - 670 45 41 27
304LN 270 310 570 - 790 40
316L 195 235 490 - 690 45
316LN 300 340 590 45
317L 195 235 490 - 690 40
317LN 300 340  590 45
321 205 245 500 - 750 40
347 205 245 500 - 750 40
Duplex austenitic-ferritic at 20°C at 20°C
UNS S31803  470 660 - 800 25 41 27
UNS S32550  490 690 - 890 25
UNS S32750  530 730 - 930 25
(1) The yield strength Rp0,2 is in general to be determined
9.7 Mechanical tests 9.7.2 Samples from plates and wide flats for other
applications
9.7.1 Samples from plates and wide flats for cargo The products are grouped in batches of 20 tons or fraction
tanks, secondary barriers and process thereof, consisting of parts coming from the same cast, the
pressure vessels of liquefied gas carriers
thickness of which differs by no more than 5mm in the case
Samples for tests are to be cut from the products in the final of flat products.
supply condition. The tests are to be carried out on each
rolled unit as heat treated. When the batch is made up of plates, the plate selected to
take the test specimens is to be one of those of highest
One sample is to be taken from one end of each rolled unit
thickness.
when the mass and the length do not exceed 5t and 15m,
respectively. 9.7.3 Samples from sections and bars
When either of these limits is exceeded, samples are to be The products are grouped in batches of 20 tons or fraction
cut at both ends of each rolled unit. thereof, consisting of parts coming from the same cast, the
The definition of rolled unit is given in Ch 1, Sec 1, [3.3.3]. thickness of which differs by no more than 5mm.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 1
9.7.4 Sampling of test specimens sides, continuously and integrally bonded, by hot rolling or
In the case of plates and wide flats having width  600 mm, by explosion bonding.
the tensile test and impact test specimens are to be taken in Provision is made for plates having total thickness higher
the transverse direction. than 5mm; unless otherwise accepted by the Society, the
thickness of the cladding metal is to be  2mm.
dinal direction, unless otherwise required by or agreed with
the Society. 10.2 Steel grades
9.7.5 Number of test specimens 10.2.1 The grade of the backing steel is to be chosen from
the steel grades for boilers and pressure vessels defined in
The following tests are to be carried out: Article [6].
a) one tensile test at ambient temperature Other backing steel grades may be accepted subject to the
Society’s approval.
b) unless otherwise required, 3 Charpy V-notch impact
tests at:
10.2.2 The cladding metal in austenitic or austenitic-ferritic
• 196°C for austenitic steels intended for use in con- stainless steel is to correspond to the grades defined in Arti-
structions with design temperature lower than 105°C cle [9].
• 20°C for austenitic-ferritic steels. The use of other grades for stainless steel cladding is to be
proposed to the Society for prior approval.
9.8 Metallographic structure inspection
10.3 Manufacture
9.8.1 When required, a metallographic structure inspection
is to be carried out on sections parallel to the rolling direc- 10.3.1 Approval
tion of the product, and taken over the whole thickness of Clad steel plate manufacturing process is to be approved by
the product. the Society and the conditions for approval are indicated in
the document NR480 “Approval of the manufacturing pro-
The inspection is to be performed with magnification 200x. cess of metallic materials”.
No detrimental intermetallic phase (sigma phase) is to
appear in appreciable quantity. 10.3.2 Surface condition and dimensional tolerances
The manufacturer is responsible for examination of the sur-
face condition, as well as the compliance with the dimen-
9.9 Intergranular corrosion test
sions and the tolerances. However the Surveyor may
require to have the cladding surface presented for visual
9.9.1 When required, an intergranular corrosion test is to
examination.
be carried out in compliance with standard ASTM A262
Practice E, or other recognised standards.
The test is to reveal no sensitivity to intergranular corrosion.
10.4.1 The plates are to be supplied in the same heat treat-
9.10 Through thickness tests ment condition as stated during the approval.
9.10.1 Where improved through thickness ductility is 10.5 Chemical composition

required, through thickness tests are to be performed but are
generally not required for grades 304L, 304LN, 321 and 347. 10.5.1 Works’ certificates for backing and cladding steels
stating the chemical composition are to be supplied by the
9.10.2 Tests and results are to be in accordance with the manufacturer.
requirements of Article [11] and [9.10.3].
9.10.3 When the reduction in area is between 25 and 35
per cent, additional metallographic examination or other 10.6.1 The mechanical properties of the backing material
evidence is required to show that no significant amount of are to comply with the requirements given in Article [6].
any detrimental phase, such as sigma, is present.
The check of the mechanical properties of the cladding
material is not required.
10 Clad steel plates
10.1 Scope
10.7.1 Batch composition
10.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to clad steel The batch is to be composed of plates having the same
plates consisting of a base material ”backing steel” and a overall thickness, cladding thickness and cast of backing
thinner stainless steel layer ”cladding steel” on one or both steel, and mass not exceeding 20 t.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 1
10.7.2 Number of tests thickness (backing + cladding) equal to or greater than

The following tests are to be performed: 10mm. For overall thickness less than 10mm, the ultrasonic
inspection procedure is to be defined in agreement with the
• 1 tensile test on the full clad plate
Society.
• 2 bend tests on the full clad plate
• 1 series of impact tests on the backing steel 10.9.2 The ultrasonic inspection is to be performed with
• 1 shear test on the cladding. the following procedures:
• peripheral inspection of a strip of 50 mm in width on all

10.7.3 Tensile test
the plate edges
During the tensile test of the full clad plate, the strength is to
be not less than the value given by the following formula: • continuous inspection according to a grid with square
meshes, 200 mm long and parallel to the plate edges.
Rb  tb + Rc  tc
R = ---------------------------------
-
t
Random checks may be required by the Surveyor.
where:
Rb : Nominal minimum ReH or Rm of backing mate- 10.9.3 The reflection technique is used, with a normal
rial probe having a diameter ranging from 20 to 35 mm and a
frequency from 3 to 5 MHz.
Rc : Nominal minimum ReH or Rm of cladding mate-
rial
10.9.4 Unless otherwise agreed with the Society, non-
tb : Nominal thickness of backing material adhesion areas which do not exceed (50 mm x 50 mm) are
tc : Nominal thickness of cladding material tolerated without repair, provided that they are at least 500
t : Nominal thickness of the full clad plate. mm apart.
If the values resulting from the tensile test yield stress, ulti-
mate tensile strength) are lower than those given by the 10.10 Surface defects and repairs
above formula, one additional test is to be performed after
removal of the cladding material. 10.10.1 Surface defects may be accepted by the Surveyor
During the tests the requirements for the backing material when they are not detrimental to the proper use of the prod-
are to be satisfied. uct and its corrosion resistance.
The value of elongation specified for the backing material
applies also to the full clad plate. 10.10.2 All the surface defects are to be ground so as to
restore the surface continuity. Nevertheless, such repair by
10.7.4 Bend tests grinding is admitted only if the remaining thickness of the
The bending conditions (mandrel diameter in general 3 cladding is at least equal to its guaranteed nominal thickness.
times the plate thickness) are those required for the backing
steel grade. One bend test is carried out with the cladding 10.10.3 In cases where, after grinding, the cladding thick-
metal on the tensioned side (outer side of bend) and another ness is less than the guaranteed nominal thickness, the
with the cladding metal on the compressed side (inner side repair is carried out by welding. The filler metal is to be of
of bend). In the latter test, separations of the cladding not the same grade as the cladding and the repair procedure is
exceeding 25% of the bent portion are admitted. to be defined in agreement with the Surveyor and prelimi-
narily approved.
10.7.5 Shear test
The shear test is carried out in accordance with ASTM A 10.10.4 If, after grinding of the defect, the remaining thick-
264. The shear strength is to be at least 140 N/mm2. ness of the cladding is less than half of the guaranteed nom-
inal thickness, it is necessary to replace the cladding by
10.8 Corrosion testing tapering and to rebuild the whole of the cladding by weld-
ing. Such repair is to be carried out in agreement with the
10.8.1 When required, an accelerated corrosion test is to Surveyor and preliminarily approved.
be carried out to check the resistance of the cladding metal
against intergranular corrosion. This corrosion test may be
carried out according to a national or an international stan- 10.11 Adhesion defects in the cladding and
dard, or to a particular specification, in agreement with the repairs
Society. ASTM A 262 practice E may be used.
10.11.1 In the case of adhesion defects detected by an
10.9 Ultrasonic testing ultrasonic inspection as defined in [10.9], the areas of non-
adhesion of the cladding which exceed the limits specified
10.9.1 Ultrasonic inspection of the adhesion of the clad- in [10.9.4] are to be removed by cutting off or to be
ding is generally to be performed on plates with an overall repaired.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 1
11 Steels with specified through Table 35 : Batch size dependent on product

and sulphur content
thickness properties
Product S > 0,005% S  0,005%
11.1 Scope
Plates Each piece Maximum 50 t of
(parent plate) products of the
11.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to steel plates same cast, thickness
and wide flats having thickness not less than 15mm, where and heat treatment
improved through thickness ductility in the direction of Wide flats of Maximum 10 t of Maximum 50 t of
thickness is required. nominal thick- products of the products of the
The extension to lower thicknesses and relevant conditions ness  25 mm same cast, thickness same cast, thickness
and heat treatment and heat treatment
are at the discretion of the Society.
Wide flats of Maximum 20 t of Maximum 50 t of
nominal thick- products of the products of the
11.2 Steel grades ness  25 mm same cast, thickness same cast, thickness
and heat treatment and heat treatment
11.2.1 The requirements of Article [11] are intended as a
supplement to the requirements of Articles [2], [3], [4], [5], 11.7 Test preparation
[6], [7], [8] and [9] which specify the quality grade of steels
for hull structures, cargo oil tanks, upper deck region of
11.7.1 The sample is to be taken close to the longitudinal
container ships, boilers, pressure vessels, low temperature
centreline of one end of the rolled piece to be tested as
applications and machinery.
shown in Fig 7.
11.2.2 The Z designation is to be given to any steel grade The sample must be large enough for the preparation of six
which has been tested according to the above mentioned specimens. Three specimens are to be prepared while the
specifications, and has been successfully subjected to the rest of the sample remains for possible retest.
tests defined in [11.6] and [11.7].
Figure 7 : Plate and wide flat sampling position
11.3 Manufacture
11.3.1 Approval Test

Principal rolling direction sample
Any Z grade steel must be submitted to the approval of the
Society. Central line of product
Test
specimens
The conditions for approval are indicated in the document
NR480 “Approval of the manufacturing process of metallic
materials”.
11.4 Chemical composition 11.7.2 Cylindrical tensile test specimens are to be used
having the following dimensions:
11.4.1 In addition to the requirements of the appropriate a) diameter:
steel grade, the maximum sulphur content is to be 0,008%
determined by the ladle analysis. • d = 6 mm for product thickness between 15 mm and
25 mm
11.5 Mechanical properties • d = 10 mm for product thickness exceeding 25 mm
11.5.1 The ductility in the direction of thickness is evalu- b) parallel length: not less than 2 d.
ated, for the purpose of these requirements with the value of Other dimensions are to be according to ISO 6892-84 or
the reduction area measured on tensile test specimens taken other recognised standards.
in the through thickness direction of the product and pre-
pared as specified in [11.7.3]. Where the product thickness does not allow the preparation
of specimens of sufficient length for the gripping jaws of the
testing machine, the ends of the specimens may be built up
by suitable welding methods in such a way as to not impair
the portion of the specimen within the parallel length.
11.6.1 Plates and wide flats
Plates and wide flats are to be tested by rolled unit or by batch 11.7.3 The preparation of samples is indicated in Fig 8 and
in accordance with the conditions mentioned in Tab 35. Fig 9.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 1
Figure 8 : Normal test specimen Table 36 : Reduction of area acceptance values
Plate thickness Grade Z25 Z35

Minimum average 25% 35%
Minimum individual 15% 25%
d
11.9 Re-test
Parallel length > 2d 11.9.1 Three additional test specimens taken from the
remaining test sample can be prepared and tested in three
cases shown in Fig 10. The average of all six tensile tests is
Figure 9 : Welded test specimen to be greater than the required minimum average with no
more than two results below the minimum average.
In the case of failure after retest, either the batch repre-
d sented by the piece is rejected or each piece within the
batch is required to be tested.
Plate thickness
Parallel length > t + 4mm 11.10 Ultrasonic testing

Welded Welded
extension extension 11.10.1 Ultrasonic testing is required and is to be per-
formed in accordance with either EN10160 Level S1/E1 or
ASTM A578 Level C. Ultrasonic testing is to be carried out
11.8 Test results on each piece in the final supply condition and unless oth-
erwise agreed with a probe frequency of 4MHz.
11.8.1 The three tensile test specimens taken in the through
thickness direction are to be tested at ambient temperature.
The minimum average value for the reduction of area must 11.11 Marking
be that shown for the appropriate grade given in Tab 36.
Only one individual value may be below the minimum 11.11.1 In addition to the material grade designation, prod-
average but not less than minimum individual value shown ucts complying with these requirements are to be marked
for the appropriate grade. A value less than the minimum with the letter Z followed by the indication of the reduction
individual is a cause for rejection. of area required, e.g.: EH 36-Z 25.
Figure 10 : Diagram showing acceptance / rejection and retest criteria

Acceptable Result where retest is permitted Acceptable
result retest
Minimum
Average
Minimum
Individual
Individual result Average result
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 2
SECTION 2 STEEL PIPES, TUBES AND FITTINGS
1 General Unless a specific method is agreed for individual supplies,

or specific requirements are given in the relevant Articles,
the pipes may be manufactured by one of the following
1.1 Application methods:
1.1.1 General a) seamless, hot or cold finished
The requirements of this Section apply to seamless and
b) welded, by automatic processes
welded steel pipes, tubes and fittings intended for boilers,
pressure vessels and systems operating at ambient, high or c) welded, as above hot and/or cold finished.
low temperature.
In the case of welded pipes, the following processes are to
Provision is also made for pipes intended for structural be used depending on the grade of steel:
applications, at ambient temperature.
a) electrical resistance (ERW), induction (IW), submerged
Article [1] specifies the requirements common to all the arc (SAW) welding for carbon and carbon manganese
above-mentioned steel pipes, while the appropriate specific steels
requirements are indicated in Articles [2] to [8].
b) electric tungsten arc process (GTAW), plasma (PAW),
The general term pipes will be used in the following text to
submerged (SAW) arc welding for austenitic or austen-
mean pipes and tubes.
itic-ferritic steels.
1.1.2 Other Specifications The welding process is to be approved according to the
Seamless and welded pipes, tubes and fittings complying applicable requirements of Ch 5, Sec 4 of the Rules.
with international, national or proprietary specifications
Unless specially approved by the Society, pipes in carbon
may be accepted by the Society, provided such specifica-
and carbon-manganese steel for offshore structural applica-
tions give reasonable equivalence to the requirements of
tions are to be seamless or longitudinally welded.
these Rules and other relevant Society’s Rules or are
approved for a specific application. Nickel steel pipes are to be manufactured seamless.
Such products, when accepted are designated by their stan-
Unless otherwise specified, the manufacturing process is
dard identification or as agreed at the time of the approval.
left to the discretion of the Manufacturer.
Unless otherwise agreed, survey and certification of prod-
ucts complying with other specifications are to be carried
1.3 Approval
out in accordance with the requirements of these Rules and
other relevant Society’s Rules.
1.3.1 Welded pipes and fittings and, unless otherwise spec-
1.1.3 Special requirements ified by the Society, seamless pipes and fittings in low
alloyed or alloyed steels, intended for high temperature are
Special requirements may be specified in cases of applica-
to be manufactured by approved Manufacturers.
tions intended for dangerous substances or particularly
severe service conditions. In other cases the Manufacturers are in any event to be rec-
In cases of applications involving the storage and transport ognised by the Society.
of liquefied gases, reference is to be made to Society’s Rules The approval procedure is indicated in the document
for the Classification of Steel Ships Pt D, Ch 9 and to the NR480 “Approval of the manufacturing process of metallic
International Code for the Construction and Equipment of materials“.
Ships Carrying Liquefied Gases in Bulk (IGC Code).
For gas fuelled ships, reference is to be made to Society 1.4 Quality of materials
Rule Note NR 529, and to the International Code of Safety
1.4.1 All pipes are to have a workmanlike finish consistent
Code).
with the method of manufacture and to be free from defects
and surface or internal imperfections which may impair
1.2 Manufacture their use in subsequent fabrication or service.
1.2.1 Manufacturing process 1.4.2 All pipes are to be reasonably straight and their ends
The steel used is to be manufactured as detailed in Sec 1, are to be cut perpendicular to the axis without leaving chips
[1.2.1]. or burrs.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 2
1.5 Visual, dimensional and non-destructive f : Equal to:

examinations • 0,80 ReH for ferritic steels
• 0,70 Rp0,2 for austenitic or austenitic-ferritic
1.5.1 Each pipe is to be submitted by the Manufacturer to steels.
visual examination and verification of dimensions.
The test pressure is to be maintained for a sufficient time to
Reference is made to the general provisions given in Ch 1, verify the tightness and at least for 5 seconds.
Sec 1, [3.6].
The test pressure is to be measured by means of a suitable,
1.5.2 The dimensional tolerances on the thickness and calibrated pressure gauge.
diameter are to be in accordance with recognised stan-
1.8.2 Unless otherwise agreed, the Manufacturer’s certifi-
dards.
cate of the hydrostatic test is accepted.
In welded pipes, the weld reinforcement is to be well faired The hydrostatic test of pipes intended for boilers, super
and within allowable limits. heaters or pressure systems with working pressure higher
1.5.3 Welded pipes are to be submitted by the Manufac- than 4,0 N/mm2, or conveying liquefied gases and danger-
turer to an appropriate, automatic non-destructive test of ous media, may be required to be witnessed by the Sur-
welded joints as specified at the approval. veyor.
1.8.3 Subject to the prior approval of the procedure, a non-

1.6 Rectification of surface defects destructive test by ultrasonic or eddy current may be
accepted as an alternative to the hydrostatic test.
1.6.1 Rectification of surface defects by grinding
Small surface defects and imperfections may be removed by 1.9 Sampling and testing
grinding, provided that the pipe thickness after repair is
within the permissible tolerance and the ground zone is 1.9.1 Batch composition
well faired into the adjacent zone. Pipes are to be presented for mechanical and technological
tests in the final supply condition and, unless otherwise
1.6.2 Rectification of surface defects by welding indicated in the relevant Articles, in batches.
Repairs by welding may be accepted at the Surveyor’s dis- For pipes which are not heat treated, the batch is to consist
cretion. The repair procedure is to be submitted for consid- of pipes of the same size, manufactured by the same proce-
eration. dure, from the same type of steel.
The repaired areas are subsequently to be examined by For pipes which are supplied in the heat treated condition,
magnetic particle or liquid penetrant methods and/or by the batches are to consist of pipes of the same size, manu-
other appropriate non-destructive tests. factured from the same type of steel and subjected to the
same heat treatment in a continuous furnace or heat treated
1.7 Condition of supply in the same furnace charge.
For pipes welded by the electric submerged arc welding
1.7.1 Pipes are to be supplied in the required heat treated process, the batch is also to consist of pipes welded with
or equivalent condition. the same welding materials.
Where alternative supply conditions are accepted, the For pipes intended for low temperature service, the batch is
choice of the supply condition, unless otherwise required, also to consist of material originating from the same cast.
is left to the Manufacturer; the condition of supply is always
to be mentioned in the testing documentation. The size of the batch is to be in accordance with Tab 1.
Table 1 : Number of pipe as made lengths per batch

1.7.2 Pipes which are to be expanded after supply are to be
annealed at least at their ends. Outside diameter range Maximum number of tubes
(mm) per batch (1)
1.8 Hydrostatic test D  114,3 200
1.8.1 With the exception of pipes intended for structural 114,3 < D  323,9 100
application, each pipe is to be subjected to hydrostatic test 323,9 < D 50
at the Manufacturer’s works.
(1) Residual quantities of up to 10 lengths may be allo-
The test pressure P, in N/mm2, is given by the following for- cated to the other batches presented for testing.
mula but the maximum pressure may not be higher than
14 N/mm2: 1.9.2 Sampling
2tf The test samples are to be cut from a length selected at ran-
P = ------- dom from each batch, for the tests specified in the various
D
Articles.
where:
The specimens for all or part of the following tests, as
D : Nominal outside diameter of the pipe, in mm detailed in the various Articles, are to be obtained from the
t : Nominal wall thickness of the pipe, in mm individual samples.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 2
a) Mechanical tests 1.9.6 Re-test procedures

• tensile test, longitudinal direction Reference is made to Ch 1, Sec 1, [3.5].
• tensile test transverse to the weld for pipes with For tensile re-test procedure, reference is made to Ch 1, Sec 2,
D  300 mm [2.3].
• 3 Charpy V-notch impact tests, longitudinal direc- For Charpy V-notch re-test procedure, reference is made to
tion. Ch 1, Sec 2, [4.4].
For subsize specimens, reference is to be made to
Ch 1, Sec 2, [4.2.2]. For pipes having thickness less 1.10 Identification and marking
than 6 mm, reduced specimens having the maxi-
mum thickness are to be used. 1.10.1 The Manufacturer is to adopt a system of identifica-
tion which enables the material to be traced to its original
b) Technological tests
cast, as appropriate.
• flattening test
For welded pipes, two tests are to be carried out; in 1.10.2 All pipes and tubes are to be identified and marked
one test the specimen is to be positioned with the with the following indications:
welded joint at 0°, in the other at 90°, to the direc- a) Society’s brand
tion of the force.
b) Manufacturer’s name or trade mark
The distance between plates to be reached during
the test is determined by the following formula: c) Identification mark for the type of steel
d) Cast number or identification number and/or letters,
 1 + C t
Z = -------------------- which will enable the history of the fabrication of the
t
C + ---- piece or bundle to be traced.
D
Marking is to be applied by punching. In the case of small
where the value of C is indicated in the tables rele- wall thickness which may be damaged by punching, alter-
vant to the mechanical properties of the various native methods such as paint, electrical engraving or rubber
pipes stamps may be used.
• a bend test is to be performed in lieu of the flatten- Marking on labels is accepted for small pipes, see Ch 1, Sec
ing test for pipes having D > 400 mm or thickness 1, [4.1.2].
greater than 15% of D
For welded pipes, one test is carried out with the 1.11 Documentation and certification
outside surface of the pipe in tension and the other
with the inside surface of the pipe in tension. The 1.11.1 The testing documentation indicated in Ch 1, Sec 1,
mandrel diameter is indicated in the various Articles [4.2.1] is to be issued and is to include all the required
and the bend angle is to be equal to 180° information, as appropriate.
• flanging or drift expanding test for pipes having The ladle analysis is to include the content of refining and
D  150 mm or thickness  9 mm. alloying elements as applicable.
If rimming steel is supplied, this condition is to be stated on
1.9.3 Preparation of test specimens
the certificate.
For the preparation of test specimens and for the testing pro-
cedures, reference is to be made to the applicable require- 1.11.2 When pipes are made from steel produced in a mill
ments of Ch 1, Sec 2. other than that where the pipes are manufactured, the Sur-
veyor is to be supplied with a steelmaker’s certificate stating
1.9.4 Tensile and technological tests
the manufacturing process, the grade of steel, the cast num-
The results of the test are to comply with the values speci- ber and the relevant ladle analysis.
fied in the appropriate tables.
If during the tensile test there is no marked yield stress ReH, 2 Pipes for pressure systems
the 0,2% proof stress Rp0,2 is taken as an alternative.
operating at ambient temperature
1.9.5 Impact test
The average value is to comply with the minimum average 2.1 Application
value required; only one individual value may be less than
the average value required, provided that it is not less than 2.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to seamless
70% of it. The values required for the various products are and welded carbon and carbon manganese steel pipes,
relevant to standard specimens 10x10 mm2. intended for piping systems or pressure vessels operating at
ambient temperature or when impact properties at a tem-
For subsize specimens reference is to be made to Ch 1, Sec 2, perature not lower than 20°C are specified.
[4.2.2].
For reduced specimens obtained from pipes having thick- 2.2 Steel grades
ness less than 6 mm, the energy required is proportional to
the area of the specimen, referring to the specimen 2.2.1 The requirements apply to carbon and carbon man-
10 x 5 mm2 and to the energy required for this specimen. ganese steels, which are classed into five groups indicated
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 2
by the minimum ultimate tensile strength Rm , in N/mm2: Welded pipes are to be supplied in the condition specified
320, 360, 410, 460 and 510. at the approval.
At the Manufacturer’s discretion, normalising and temper-
Each group is further subdivided into grades HA, HB and HD,
based on quality level and impact properties, as applicable. ing may be carried out in lieu of normalising; see [1.7].
The letters HA, HB and HD mean impact properties at 2.4 Chemical composition
+20°C, 0°C and 20°C, respectively.
2.4.1 The method of deoxidation and chemical composi-
tion on ladle analysis are to comply with the requirements
2.3 Condition of supply specified in Tab 2.
2.3.1 Seamless cold finished pipes are to be normalised, 2.5 Mechanical properties
while hot finished pipes may be normalised or normalised
formed. 2.5.1 The mechanical properties are specified in Tab 3.

Deoxidation
grade C max Mn Si max P max S max Al tot. min. (1)
320 HA semi-killed or killed (2) 0,16 0,40 - 0,70 0,35 0,040 0,040
360 HA semi-killed or killed 0,17 0,40 - 1,00 0,35 0,040 0,040
360 HB
410 HB killed 0,21 0,40 - 1,20 0,35 0,040 0,040
410 HD killed and fine grained 0,020
460 HB killed 0,22 0,80 - 1,40 0,35 0,040 0,040
510 HB killed 0,22 0,60 - 1,80 0,35 0,035 0,035
(1) Nb, V or Ti may be used for grain refining as a complete or partial substitute for Al. The grain refining elements are to be spec-
ified at the time of approval; in general Nb and V are not to exceed 0,05 and 0,10%, respectively.
Additional alloying elements are to be submitted for consideration and approval. Residual elements not intentionally added are
not to exceed the following limits (%): Ni  0,30; Cu  0,25; Cr  0,25; Mo  0,10. Total: Ni + Cu + Cr + Mo  0,70
(2) For welded pipes, rimmed steel may also be used, as specified at the approval.
Yield stress ReH (N/mm2) Average impact

Technological tests
min. for thickness t (mm) Tensile Elong. energy (J) min.
Steel grade strength Rm A5 (%) Flattening test Bend test
16 < t  40 < t  (N/mm2) min. Test temp
t 16 KVL constant C for t/D diameter
40 60 (°C)
t/D 0,15 t/D > 0,15 mandrel
320HA 195 320 - 440 25 +20 27 0,09 0,08 4t
360HA 235 225 215 360 - 500 24 +20
360HB 0
410HB 255 245 235 410 - 550 22 0 0,07 0,06
410HD 20
460HB 285 275 265 460 - 580 21 0
460HD 20
510HB 355 345 (1) 510 - 630 19 0 34
510HD 20
(1) To be agreed between Manufacturer and purchaser.
2.6 Mechanical and technological tests One pipe is to be selected from each batch for the required
tests as follows:
2.6.1 For pipes intended for pressure cylinders, the tests are
a) seamless pipes:
to be carried out on each as made length.
Pipes intended for other applications are to be presented in • one tensile test, longitudinal direction
batches, as specified in Tab 1. • one flattening test or one bend test
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 2
• 3 Charpy V-notch impact tests, longitudinal direc- b) welded pipes:

tion, for pipes having thickness 11 mm and, when • one tensile test on base metal, longitudinal direction
impact properties are required at 20°C, for thick- • one tensile test transverse to the weld for pipes with
ness 6 mm D  300 mm
b) welded pipes: • face and root bend tests
• Series of 3 Charpy V-notch tests on sets of 3 speci-
• one tensile test on base metal, longitudinal direction
mens taken transverse to the weld and located with
• one tensile test transverse to the weld for pipes with the notch in the weld axis, the fusion line and 2mm
D  300 mm away from the fusion line in the HAZ
• Hardness tests on the weld macrosection. The Vick-
• two flattening tests or two bend tests
ers method HV10 is normally used. Three rows of
• 3 Charpy V-notch impact tests, longitudinal direc- indentations are to be made; one row at 2 mm
tion, for pipes having thickness  11 mm and, when below outer surface, one row at 2 mm below inner
impact properties are required at 20°C, for thick- surface and one row crossing the weld root as
ness  6 mm. shown in Fig 1. The values are not to exceed the
maximum value allowed for the qualification of
welding procedure (see Ch 5, Sec 4, [2.3.6]).
3 Pipes for structural applications
Figure 1 : Hardness test HV10
3.1 Application HAZ
2 mm
3.1.1 Steel pipes for structural application at ambient tem-
perature are to comply with the requirements specified in
Article [2], with the exception of the hydrostatic test which
is not required.
3.2 Steel grades

2 mm
3.2.1 Unless otherwise agreed with the Society, steel grades
are to correspond to the types specified in Article [2] with
designation 410 HA-HB, 460 HB-HD and 510 HB-HD.
Steels for offshore structural applications are to be killed
and fine grain treated. 3.4.1 Pipes are to be examined as specified in [1.5].
In addition, pipes for offshore structural applications are to
The symbol ST is to be added to the steel designation to be examined as shown in Tab 4.
clearly indicate that pipes are intended for structural appli-
cation. 4 Extra high strength steel pipes for
welded structure
4.1 Application
3.3.1 Pipes are to be tested as specified in [2.6] except
pipes for offshore structural applications which are to be 4.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to seamless
tested as specified in the following. pipes intended for use in marine and offshore structural
applications.
One pipe is to be selected from each batch for the required
tests as follows:
a) seamless pipes:
4.2.1 Unless otherwise agreed with the Society, steel
• one tensile test, longitudinal direction grades are to correspond to the types specified for seamless
tubulars in the Sec 1, [5].
• one flattening test or one bend test
Seamless pipes are to meet the requirements of Sec 1, [5],
• Charpy V-notch impact tests on a set of specimens, specified for tubular products with respect of manufacture,
longitudinal direction chemical composition and mechanical properties.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 2
Table 4 : NDE of pipes for offshore structural applications
Type of Wall thickness (mm)

tests t  10 mm 10 mm < t  20 mm 20 < t  49 mm t > 49 mm
UT of weld  100% length 100% length 100% length
UT of tube (1)  grid (3) grid (3) 10% surface (2)
Radiographic inspection of weld ends ends ends ends
MPi of weld 10% length (2) 10% length (2) 100% length 100% length
MPi of tube (1) (4) grid (3) grid (3) grid (3) 10% surface
Repairs 100% MPi + 100% MPi + UT 100% MPi + UT 100% MPi + UT
radiographic inspection
Note 1: UT = Ultrasonic testing; MPi = Magnetic particle inspection.
(1) Except if plates were US tested at the steel mill.
(2) When non-destructive tests are carried out only at random (10%), UT and MPi are to be performed in different locations.
(3) Dimensions of the grid to be agreed with the Society.
(4) Seamless tubes and hot formed welded tubes only.
4.3 Condition of supply 5.2.3 Low alloy steels are designated according to the
chemical composition into the grades 0,3Mo - 0,5Mo0,5Cr,
4.3.1 The products are to be supplied in Normalised (N), 1Cr0,5Mo - 2,25Cr1Mo - 0,5Cr0,5Mo0,25V.
Normalised Rolled (NR) or Quenched and Tempered (QT) The figures mean the nominal percentage content of the
condition as specificed in Sec 1, [5]. main alloying elements.
4.4 Mechanical properties 5.3 Condition of supply

4.4.1 Pipes are to be tested as specified in Sec 1, [5].
5.3.1 The products are to be supplied in the conditions
In addition, for pipes for offshore structural applications, indicated in Tab 6.
one flattening or one bend test is to be carried out on pipe
selected for each batch.
4.5 Non-destructive examination 5.4.1 The chemical composition on ladle analysis is to

comply with the requirements specified in Tab 5.
4.5.1 Pipes are to be examined as specified in [1.5].
Steels are to be killed with the exception of grades 320 and
In addition, pipes for offshore structural applications are to 360 which may be semi-killed.
be examined as shown in Tab 4.

5 Pipes for high temperature service
5.5.1 The mechanical properties and conditions of supply
5.1 Application are specified in Tab 6.
5.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to seamless 5.6 Mechanical properties at elevated
and welded pipes intended for boilers, superheaters and temperatures
heat exchangers, or pressure parts operating at elevated
temperatures.
5.6.1 The values of the yield stress ReH or 0,2% proof stress
Rp0,2 at temperatures of 100°C and higher are given in Tab 7.
5.2 Steel grades
The values are for design purposes only. Their verification is
in general not required during the testing, unless figures
5.2.1 The requirements apply to carbon, carbon-manga-
higher than those shown in Tab 7 and in accordance with
nese steels and low alloy steels (Mo, Cr-Mo and Cr-Mo-V).
recognised standards are proposed by the steel Manufac-
turer.
5.2.2 Carbon and carbon manganese steels are classed into
five groups which are indicated by the minimum ultimate In such cases, the verification is required and the proce-
tensile strength Rm (N/mm2): 320, 360, 410, 460 and 510. dures detailed in [5.6.2] and [5.6.3] are to be followed.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 2

grade C max Mn Si P max S max Cr Mo V Al tot
320 0,16 0,40-0,70  0,35 0,030 0,030
360 0,17 0,40-1,00  0,35 0,030 0,030
410 0,21 0,40-1,20  0,35 0,030 0,030
460 0,22 0,80-1,40  0,35 0,030 0,030
510 0,22 0,60-1,80  0,35 0,035 0,035
0,3Mo 0,12-0,20 0,40-0,80 0,10-0,35 0,035 0,035 0,25-0,35 0,020
0,5Cr 0,5Mo 0,10-0,18 0,50-0,90 0,10-0,35 0,035 0,035 0,40-0,65 0,45-0,60 0,020
1Cr 0,5Mo 0,10-0,18 0,40-0,70 0,10-0,35 0,035 0,035 0,70-1,10 0,45-0,65 0,020
2,25Cr 1Mo 0,08-0,15 0,40-0,70 0,10-0,35 0,035 0,035 2,00-2,50 0,90-1,20 0,020
0,5Cr 0,5Mo 0,25V 0,10-0,18 0,40-0,70 0,15-0,50 0,035 0,035 0,70-1,10 0,45-0,65 0,22-0,28 0,020
Residual elements are permitted provided they do not impair the properties, subsequent processing or behaviour in service.
For C and C-Mn steels, the following limits (%) apply: Ni 0,30; Cu 0,25; C 0,25; Mo  0,10;
Total: Ni+Cu+Cr+Mo  0,70. For Mo and Cr-Mo alloy steels, the limits are the following (%): Ni  0,30; Cu  0,25.
Table 6 : Mechanical properties - Conditions of supply
Heat Yield stress ReH (N/mm2) Tensile Elong. A5 Technological tests

Steel grade treatment min for t (mm) strength Rm (%) Di/D (4)
(1) (N/mm2) min. C (3)
t 40 40 < t 60 0,6 0,6 < Di/D0,8 > 0,8
320 N or NR 195 320 - 440 25 0,09 12 15 19
360 N or NR 225 215 360 - 500 25 0,09 12 15 19
410 N or NR 245 235 410 - 550 22 0,06 10 12 17
460 N or NR 270 260 460 - 580 21 0,06 8 10 15
510 N or NR 345 (2) 510 - 640 21 0,06 8 10 15
0,3Mo N 270 260 450 - 600 22 0,07 8 10 15
0,5Cr 0,5Mo N+T 270 260 440 - 570 22 0,07 8 10 15
1Cr 0,5Mo N or N+T 290 280 440 - 590 22 0,07 8 10 15
2,25Cr 1Mo N+T 280 270 450 - 600 20 0,06 8 10 15
A 205 205 410 - 560 22 0,06 8 10 15
0,5Cr 0,5Mo 0,25V N+T 300 290 460 - 610 20 0,06 8 10 15
(1) N = Normalising; NR = Normalising forming; T = Tempering; A = Annealing.
(2) To be agreed between Manufacturer and purchaser.
(3) Constant C for flattening test.
(4) Expanding or flanging test; increase of outside diameter D, in %, as a function of Di/D.
5.6.2 When the Rp0,2 is required to be verified, at least one 5.6.3 As an alternative to the systematic verification of the
tensile test for each cast is to be carried out at the agreed required Rp0,2 as in [5.6.2], it may be agreed with the indi-
temperature. vidual steelmakers to carry out an adequate program of tests
on the normal production of each steel, in accordance with
In cases of pipes of different thickness, the sample is to be an ad hoc procedure.
taken from a pipe selected among those of greatest thick-
ness. Subsequent to the satisfactory results of the approval tests,
tensile tests at elevated temperatures are not generally
The dimensions of the specimens and the testing procedure required during the routine testing of the material supplied
are to be in accordance with the requirements of Ch 1, Sec 2, but as a random check for the confirmation.
[2.1.8] and Ch 1, Sec 2, [2.2.5] respectively.
5.6.4 For design purposes only, the estimated values of the
The results of tests are to comply with the values specified stress to rupture in 100000 hours are given in Tab 8 for
in Tab 7. groups of steels.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 2
Rp0,2 (N/mm2) at a temperature (°C) of (1)

Steel grade
100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550
320 HA 170 160 150 125 100 95 90 85
360 HA 190 175 165 145 120 115 110 105
410 HA 210 200 190 170 150 140 130 125
460 HA 235 220 215 195 180 165 160 155
510 HA 250 240 230 215 195 180 175 170
0,3Mo 240 235 225 205 175 160 155 150 145
0,5Cr 0,5Mo (2)
1Cr 0,5Mo 265 250 245 235 190 180 175 165 155 150
2,25Cr 1Mo (3) 260 250 245 235 230 215 205 195 180 165
2,25Cr 1Mo (4) 110 100 90 85 80 75 70 65 65 70
0,5Cr 0,5Mo 0,25V 260 250 235 215 190 185 175 165 155 145
(1) The values for temperatures < 200°C are given for information.
(2) Values to be determined during preliminary approval.
(3) Normalised and tempered condition.
(4) Annealed condition.
5.7 Mechanical and technological tests Provision is made for pipes with wall thickness up to
40 mm.
5.7.1 For pipes intended for boiler headers, the tests are to
be carried out on each as made length.
6.2 Steel grades
Other pipes are to be presented in batches and the number
is defined in Tab 1.
6.2.1 The requirements apply to carbon and carbon-man-
Two pipes are to be selected from each batch for the ganese steels and nickel steels.
required tests, as follows:
a) seamless pipes and tubes: 6.2.2 The carbon and carbon-manganese steels are classed
• one tensile test, longitudinal direction into four groups which are indicated by the minimum ulti-
• one flattening test or one bend test on a mandrel of mate tensile strength Rm (N/mm2): 360, 410, 460 and 510.
diameter 4 t
Each group is further subdivided into two grades LE and LF,
• one expanding or flanging test, when required based on the quality level and impact properties.
b) welded pipes:
The letters LE and LF mean impact properties at 40°C and
• one tensile test on base metal, longitudinal direction 60°C, respectively.
• one tensile test transverse to the weld
• two flattening or two bend tests transverse to the 6.2.3 The Ni steels are designated according to the chemi-
weld for pipes with D  300 mm on a mandrel of cal composition into the grades 2,25Ni, 3,5Ni and 9,0Ni.
diameter 4 t
The figures mean the Ni nominal percentage content.
• one expanding or flanging test, when required.
When required in [5.6.1], a tensile test at elevated tempera-
ture is to be performed on one sample per cast. 6.3 Condition of supply
6 Ferritic steel pipes for pressure 6.3.1 The pipes are to be supplied in the conditions indi-
service at low temperature cated in Tab 11and Tab 12.
6.1 Application 6.4 Chemical composition

6.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to seamless
and welded steel pipes intended for construction of piping 6.4.1 The steel is to be killed and fine grained and the
systems, pressure vessels and plants, when impact proper- chemical composition on ladle analysis is to comply with
ties at temperatures lower than 20°C are specified. the requirements specified in Tab 9 and Tab 10.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 2
Table 8 : Average values for stress to rupture in 100000 hours (N/mm2)
Carbon and carbon

Alloy steels
Temperature manganese steels
(°C) 2,25Cr 1Mo
360 / 410 460 / 510 0,3Mo 1Cr 0,5Mo 0,5Cr 0,5Mo 0,25V
N + T (1) (3) A (2)
380 170 225
390 155 200
400 140 175
410 125 155
420 110 135
430 100 115
440 90 100
450 75 85 240 280 220 195
460 65 70 205 250 205 180
470 55 60 175 220 185 165
480 45 55 140 200 170 155 215
490 35 45 115 170 150 140 190
500 40 95 140 135 125 170
510 75 120 120 115 150
520 60 97 105 100 130
530 45 80 90 90 115
540 35 65 76 76 100
550 30 54 68 68 85
560 43 58 58 70
570 35 50 50 55
580 44 44 45
Note 1: The values shown are estimated average values; the lower limit of the range is approximately 20% less than the average value.
(1) N + T = Normalising and Tempering.
(2) A = Annealing.
(3) When the tempering temperature exceeds 750°C, the values relevant to the annealing heat treatment are to be used.

Steel grade
C max Mn Si P max S max Ni Al tot Others (3)
360 LE-LF 0,17 0,40 - 1,00  0,35 0,030 0,025  0,30 (2)  0,020 Cr  0,25
410 LE-LF 0,18 0,60 - 1,30  0,35 0,030 0,025  0,30 (2)  0,020 Cu  0,30
460 LE-LF 0,18 0,60 - 1,30  0,35 0,030 0,025  0,30 (2)  0,020 Mo 0,10
510 LE-LF 0,20 1,00 - 1,60  0,35 0,030 0,025  0,30 (2)  0,020
(1) With the exception of refining elements, additional alloying elements are to be submitted for consideration and approval; resid-
ual elements are permitted provided they do not impair the properties, subsequent processing or behaviour in service.
(2) Higher Ni content up to 0,80% may be agreed for LF grades.
(3) When the pipes are subjected to hot forming: Cu < 0,25.

Steel grade
C max Mn Si P max S max Ni Others (2)
2,25 Ni 0,17 0,30 - 0,90 0,15 - 0,35 0,025 0,020 2,10 - 2,50 Cr  0,25
3,5 Ni 0,15 0,30 - 0,90 0,15 - 0,35 0,025 0,020 3,25 - 3,75 Cu  0,30
9,0 Ni 0,12 0,30 - 0,90 0,15 - 0,35 0,025 0,020 8,50 - 9,50 Mo 0,10
(1) With the exception of refining elements, additional alloying elements are to be submitted for consideration and approval; resid-
ual elements are permitted provided they do not impair the properties, subsequent processing or behaviour in service.
(2) When the pipes are subjected to hot forming: Cu < 0.25.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 2
6.5 Mechanical properties pipes intended for use in the construction of piping systems
for chemicals, liquefied gases and bulk chemical tankers.
6.5.1 The mechanical properties and conditions of supply
are specified in Tab 11 and Tab 12. 7.1.2 Austenitic stainless steels are suitable for use at both
elevated and low temperatures.
When austenitic stainless steels are proposed for use at ele-
6.6.1 The pipes are to be presented in batches as per vated temperatures, details of chemical composition, heat
[1.9.1]and the number of pipes per batch is defined in Tab 1. treatment and mechanical properties are to be submitted for
consideration and approval.
Two pipes are to be selected from each batch for the
required tests, as follows: Ferritic-austenitic (duplex) steels are suitable for use for
a) seamless pipes and tubes: design temperatures between 20°C and +275°C.
• one tensile test, longitudinal direction

7.2 Steel grades
• one flattening test or one bend test
• 3 Charpy V-notch impact tests, longitudinal direc- 7.2.1 The requirements apply to Cr-Ni stainless steels.
tion, for thickness  6 mm
Steels are designated according to AISI grades; the corre-
b) welded pipes: sponding ISO grades are also indicated in Tab 13.
• one tensile test transverse to the weld 7.3 Condition of supply
• two flattening tests or two bend tests transverse to
the weld for pipes with D  300 mm 7.3.1 The pipes are to be supplied in the solution treated
condition.
• 3 Charpy V-notch impact tests, longitudinal direc-
tion, for thickness  6 mm.
7 Austenitic and austenitic-ferritic
stainless steel pipes
comply with the requirements specified in Tab 13.
7.1 Application
7.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to seamless
and welded austenitic and austenitic-ferritic stainless steel 7.5.1 The mechanical properties are specified in Tab 14.
Table 11 : Carbon and carbon manganese steels - Mechanical properties and condition of supply
Average impact
Yield stress ReH Technological tests
Tensile energy (J) min.
Heat (N/mm2) min. Elong.
Steel strength
treatment for t (mm) A5 (%) Test Flattening test
grade Rm Bend test
(1) min. temp KVL constant C for t/D diameter
(N/mm2)
25 25 < t 40 (°C) t/D0,15 t/D > 0,15 mandrel
360 LE N 225 215 360-500 22 40 27 0,09 0,08 4t

360 LF 60
410 LE N 255 245 410-550 20 40 27 0,07 0,06
410 LF 60
460 LE N 275 265 460-580 20 40 27
460 LF 60
510 LE N 345 335 510-630 19 40 34
510 LF 60
(1) N = Normalising
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 2
Table 12 : Nickel steels - Mechanical properties and condition of supply
Average impact
Yield stress ReH Technological tests
Tensile energy (J) min.
Heat (N/mm2) min. Elong.
Steel strength
treatment for t (mm) A5 (%) Test Flattening test
grade Rm Bend test
(1) min. temp KVL constant C for t/D diameter
(N/mm2)
25 25 < t 40 (°C) t/D0,15 t/D > 0,15 mandrel
2,25 Ni N or N+T 245 235 450-640 21  34 0,07 0,06 4t

or Q+T
3,5 Ni N or N+T 255 245 450-640 19 95 34
or Q+T
9,0 Ni N+N+T 470 460 640-840 16 196 41
9,0 Ni Q+T 570 560 690-840
(1) N = Normalising; N+T = Normalising and Tempering; N+N+T = Double Normalising and Tempering; Q+T = Quenching and
Tempering

ISO grade AISI grade
designation designation C Mn Si
P max S max Cr Ni Mo Others
max max max
X2CrNi1810 304L 0,03 2,00 1,00 0,045 0,035 17,0-19,0 9,0-13,0 
X5 CrNi1810 304 0,07 2,00 1,00 0,045 0,035 17,0-19,0 9,0-13,0 
X2CrNiMo1713 316L 0,03 2,00 1,00 0,045 0,035 16,0-18,5 10,0-14,0 2,0-2,5
X5CrNiMo1713 316 0,07 2,00 1,00 0,045 0,035 16,0-18,5 10,0-14,0 2,0-2,5
X6CrNiTi1810 321 0,08 2,00 1,00 0,045 0,035 17,0-19,0 9,0-13,0  5xCTi0,80
X6CrNiNb1810 347 0,08 2,00 1,00 0,045 0,035 17,0-19,0 9,0-13,0  10xCNb1,0
X2CrNiMoN2253 UNS31803 0,03 2,00 1,00 0,030 0,020 21,0-23,0 4,50-6,50 2,5-3,5 0,08N0,20
Residual elements are permitted provided they do not impair the properties, subsequent processing or behaviour in service of
the material.
Yield strength Average impact Technological tests

Tensile Elong.
Steel (N/mm2) min. (1) energy KVL (J) at
strength Rm A5 (%) Di/D (3)
grade C (2)
(N/mm2) min
Rp0,2 Rp1 196°C 20°C 0,6 0,6<Di/D0,8 > 0,8
304L 175 205 490 - 690 30 41 9 15 17
304 195 235 490 - 690 30 41
316L 185 215 490 - 690 30 41
316 205 245 490 - 690 30 41 0,09
321 195 235 510 - 710 30 41
347 205 245 510 - 710 41
UNS 31803 450 620 25 27
(1) Conventional proof stress; the 0,2% proof stress values are given for information and, unless otherwise agreed, are not required
to be verified during the test.
(2) Constant C for flattening test.
(3) Expanding or flanging test; increase of outside diameter D, in %, as a function of Di/D.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 2
7.6 Mechanical and technological tests Fittings may be made from sections of plates formed in one
or more shells and welded together. The relevant welding
7.6.1 Unless they are required to be tested on each length, process is to be approved.
pipes are to be presented in batches, as specified in Tab 1.
Two pipes are to be selected from each batch for the 8.2.2 Unless otherwise required, the material used for the
required tests, as follows: fabrication of the fittings is to be covered by a works’ certif-
icate (W).
a) seamless pipes:
• one tensile test, longitudinal direction 8.3 Condition of supply
• one flattening test or one bend test with mandrel
diameter of 3 t 8.3.1 All fittings are to be in the heat treated or hot working
• 3 Charpy V-notch impact tests, longitudinal direc- condition specified in the various Articles for the corre-
tion sponding material.
• one expansion or flanging test, when required Fittings in ferritic steel manufactured by hot forming may be
b) welded pipes: delivered in the normalised forming condition in lieu of
normalising, provided that evidence is given of the equiva-
lence of such condition; see [1.7.1].
• one tensile test transverse to the weld for pipes with
D  300 mm Fittings manufactured by cold forming are in general to be
• two flattening or two bend tests transverse to the submitted to heat treatment after forming.
weld with mandrel diameter of 3 t A proposal to deliver fittings in the cold formed condition
• 3 Charpy V-notch impact tests, longitudinal direc- may be considered by the Society; to this end, the Manufac-
tion, when required turer is to submit detailed information relevant to forming
• one expansion or flanging test when required. procedure, mechanical properties after forming and desti-
nation of the products.
When required, one tensile test at elevated temperature is to
be performed on one sample per cast. The heat treatment procedure of welded fittings is to be
Unless otherwise specified for individual cases, the impact defined during the approval tests.
test of austenitic stainless steel is required only for design
temperature less than 105°C and are to be carried out at - 8.4 Mechanical properties
196°C.
8.4.1 The mechanical properties of the finished fittings are
to comply with the values specified for the starting materials
7.7 Corrosion tests
(plate or pipe).
7.7.1 For materials used for piping systems for chemicals,
the corrosion tests, ASTM A262 Practice E or ASTM A262 8.5 Mechanical and technological tests
Practice C (Nitric acid test), as appropriate, may be required
to be carried out on two pipes per batch. 8.5.1 The fittings are to be presented for testing in batches
homogeneous for cast and in the number indicated in Tab 1.
Tests in accordance with other recognised standards are
accepted, subject to the agreement of the Society. A Brinell hardness test HB is to be performed on 10% of the
fittings, with a minimum of 3 units, to verify the homogene-
8 Fittings ity of the batch. The difference in the hardness value may
not be greater than 30 units.
8.1 Application Two fittings per batch are to be selected for the mechanical
and technological tests specified in Articles [2] to [7]
8.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to seamless depending on the application.
and welded carbon, carbon manganese, low alloy and alloy
The tensile tests are to be performed on the hardest and soft-
steel fittings, fabricated from pipes or plates and intended
est fittings.
for piping systems or pressure plants.
8.6.1 Unless otherwise specified during the approval proce-
8.2.1 Fittings fabricated from pipes are to meet the require-
dure or in the order, checks with radiographic examination
ments of Articles [1] to [7], depending on the applications,
are in general to be performed on welded fittings with outside
with respect to manufacture, chemical composition and
diameter higher than 75 mm, at the Surveyor’s discretion.
mechanical properties. Fittings may be hot or cold formed
from sections of pipes.
8.7 Marking and certification
Fittings fabricated from plates are to meet the requirements
of the Articles from Sec 1, [1] to Sec 1, [9], depending on 8.7.1 The requirements specified in Article [1] relevant to
the applications, with respect to manufacture, chemical marking in [1.10] and certification in [1.11] are to be com-
composition and mechanical properties. plied with, as appropriate.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 3
SECTION 3 STEEL FORGINGS
1 General In the case of applications involving the storage and trans-

port of liquefied gases or fluids at low temperature, refer-
ence is to be made to the Society’s Rules for the
1.1 Scope
Classification of Steel Ships Pt D, Ch 9, and, to the Interna-
1.1.1 The requirements of this Section apply to steel forg- tional Code for the Construction and Equipment of Ships
ings intended for hull, structural applications, offshore con- Carrying Liquefied Gases in Bulk (IGC Code).
struction, machinery, boilers, pressure vessels and piping For gas fuelled ships, reference is to be made to Society
systems. Rule Note NR 529, and, to the International Code of Safety
These requirements may also be applied to the testing of for Ships using Gases or other Low-flash point Fuels (IGF
semi-finished products, to be further processed by forging, Code).
and to rolled products, when these are acceptable in lieu of
forged material. See Sec 1, [8]. 1.2 Manufacture
This Article specifies the requirements common to all the
above-mentioned steel products, while the appropriate spe- 1.2.1 Manufacturing process
cific requirements are indicated in Articles [2] to [9]. The steel is to be manufactured as detailed in Sec 1, [1.2].
1.1.2 Mass productions Adequate top and bottom discards of the ingots are to be
For mass produced small forgings, the Manufacturer may made to ensure freedom from piping and harmful segrega-
adopt modified procedures for testing and inspection sub- tions in the finished forgings.
ject to the approval of the Society. Hot forging, to be carried out within the temperature range
specified, is to be gradual and uniform and extended, as far
1.1.3 Other specifications
as possible, to the final dimensions of the piece.
Forgings complying with international, national or propri-
etary specifications may be accepted by the Society, pro- The plastic deformation is to be such as to ensure sound-
vided such specifications give reasonable equivalence to ness, uniformity of structure and satisfactory mechanical
the requirements of these Rules and other relevant Society’s properties after heat treatment.
Rules or are approved for a specific application. At an appropriate stage of manufacture, after completion of
Such products, when accepted, are designated by their stan- all hot working operations, forgings are to be suitably heat
dard identification or as agreed at the time of the approval. treated to refine the grain structure and to obtain the
Unless otherwise agreed, survey and certification of steel required mechanical properties.
forgings complying with other specifications are to be car-
ried out in accordance with the requirements of these Rules 1.2.2 Reduction ratio
and other relevant Society’s Rules. The reduction ratio is to be calculated with reference to the
average cross-sectional area of the cast material. Where the
1.1.4 Special requirements cast material is initially upset, this reference area may be
Special requirements may be specified in the case of appli- taken as the average cross-sectional area after this opera-
cations intended for dangerous substances or for particu- tion. Unless otherwise approved the total reduction ratio is
larly severe service conditions. to be at least as specified in Tab 1.
Table 1 : Reduction Ratio
Total Reduction Ratio

Raw material Finished product
Ingot, forged bloom or billet Forging 3:1 where L>D (1) 1,5:1 where LD (1)
Rolled product Forging 4:1 where L>D (1) 2:1 where LD (1)
In a case of an initial forging reduction: Ingot, billet, Forging made by upsetting
rolled product 1,5:1 and L0/L1  (2)
In a case of no initial forging reduction: forging Forging made by upsetting 1,5:1 and L0/L1  (2)
(1) L and D are the length and diameter respectively of the part of the forging under consideration
(2) L0 is the length before upsetting and L1 is the length after upsetting
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 3
1.2.3 Flame and arc-air shaping 1.6 Heat treatment (including surface
The shaping of forgings or rolled slabs and billets by flame hardening and straightening)
cutting, scarfing or arc-air gouging is to be undertaken in
1.6.1 The forgings are to be supplied in the heat treated
accordance with recognised good practice and, unless oth-
condition.
erwise approved, is to be carried out before the final heat
treatment. Preheating is to be employed when necessitated Heat treatment is to be carried out in suitable furnaces as
by the composition and/or thickness of the steel. For certain detailed in Ch 1, Sec 1, [2.3.1].
components, subsequent machining of all flame cut sur- If, for any reason, a forging is subsequently heated for fur-
faces may be required. ther hot working, the forging is to be reheat treated.
1.2.4 Welding of forgings 1.6.2 The acceptable heat treatment conditions are indi-
cated in the Articles relevant to the various forged products.
When two or more forgings are joined by welding to form a
When more than one heat treatment condition is specified,
composite component, the proposed welding procedure
the choice of the supply condition, unless otherwise
specification is to be submitted for approval. Welding pro-
required, is left to the Manufacturer; the condition of supply
cedure qualification tests may be required.
is always to be mentioned in the testing documentation.
1.3 Approval 1.6.3 When the heat treatment is quenching and tempering
and the piece cannot be forged near the final dimensions
and shape, it is to be worked by rough machining or flame
1.3.1 Manufacturers of steel forgings are to be recognised
cutting prior to being quenched and tempered.
by the Society in accordance with the Society’s Rule Note
NR320. 1.6.4 If a forging is locally reheated or any straightening
operation is performed after the final heat treatment consid-
1.3.2 When required in the relevant articles, provisions for eration is to be given to a subsequent stress relieving heat
approval of manufacturing process are given in the Society’s treatment.
Rule Note NR480.
1.6.5 Where it is intended to surface harden forgings, full
details of the proposed procedure and specification are to
1.4 Quality of materials be submitted for the approval of the Society. For the pur-
poses of this approval, the Manufacturer may be required to
1.4.1 All forgings are to be free from surface or internal demonstrate by test that the proposed procedure gives a
defects which would be detrimental to their proper applica- uniform surface layer of the required hardness and depth
tion in service. and that it does not impair the soundness and properties of
the steel.
1.5 Chemical composition 1.6.6 Where induction hardening or nitriding is to be car-
ried out, forgings are to be heat treated at an appropriate
1.5.1 All forgings are to be made from killed steel and the stage to a condition suitable for this subsequent surface
chemical composition is to be appropriate for the type of hardening.
steel, dimensions and required mechanical properties of the
forgings being manufactured. 1.6.7 Where carburising is to be carried out, forgings are to
be heat treated at an appropriate stage (generally either by
The chemical composition of each heat is to be determined full annealing or by normalizing and tempering) to a condi-
by the Manufacturer on a sample taken preferably during tion suitable for subsequent machining and carburising.
the pouring of the heat. When multiple heats are tapped
into a common ladle, the ladle analysis shall apply. 1.6.8 The forge is to maintain records of heat treatment
identifying the furnace used, furnace charge, date, tempera-
The chemical composition is to comply with the overall
ture and time at temperature. The records are to be pre-
limits given in the relevant Articles of this Section or, where
sented to the surveyor and copies provided on request.
applicable, the requirements of the approved specification.
At the option of the Manufacturer, suitable grain refining 1.7 Mechanical tests
elements such as aluminium, niobium or vanadium may be
added. The content of such elements is to be reported. 1.7.1 General
The requirements relevant to the type and number of tests to
Elements designated as residual elements in the individual be carried out are given in the Articles relevant to the vari-
specifications are not to be intentionally added to the steel. ous products.
The content of such elements is to be reported.
Test material, sufficient for the required tests and for possi-
ble retest purposes, is to be provided with a cross-sectional
1.5.2 Carbon equivalent (CEQ) values, when used in this
area of not less than that part of the forging which it rep-
Section, are calculated using the following formula:
resents.
Mn Cr + Mo + V Ni + Cu Except for components which are to be carburised or for
C EQ = C + --------- + -------------------------------- + --------------------- %
6 5 15 hollow forgings where the ends are to be subsequently
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 3
closed, test material is not to be cut from a forging until all 1.7.5 Sampling
heat treatment has been completed.
In the case of individual testing [1.7.2], the number and
For forgings to be carburised after machining, sufficient test position of samples necessary for the required tests are
material is to be provided both for preliminary tests after given in the Articles relevant to the various products.
forging and for final tests after completion of carburising
[5.7.1]. In the case of batch testing [1.7.3], one sample at least is to
be taken from the forging representative of the batch; where
For forgings to be hot worked and/or heat treated by the
the number of pieces in the batch exceeds 20, two samples
purchaser, the samples to be tested at the Manufacturer’s
are to be taken.
works are to be forged and heat treated accordingly.
A set of test specimens is to consist of:
For forgings in quenched and tempered condition having a a) one tensile test specimen
mass of more than 500 kg, and, forgings in others delivery
b) three Charpy V-notch impact tests specimens when
conditions having a mass of more than 1000 kg, individual
required in the Articles relevant to the various products.
testing is to be applied. The test material is to be integral
with each forging and is to be taken from a suitable exten-
sion as specified in the various Articles and in accordance 1.7.6 Preparation of test specimens
with Fig 4 to Fig 10. Test specimens are normally to be cut from the samples
Where one forging is subsequently divided into a number of with their axes either mainly parallel (longitudinal tests) or
components, all of which are heat treated together in the mainly tangential (tangential test) to the principal axial
same furnace charge, for test purposes this may be regarded direction of each product, as required in the Articles rele-
as one forging and the number of tests required is to be vant to the various products.
related to the total length and mass of the original multiple
Unless otherwise agreed, the longitudinal axis of the test
forging.
specimens is to be positioned as follows:
1.7.3 Batch testing
a) for thickness or diameter up to maximum 50 mm, the
A batch testing procedure may be adopted in the following axis is to be at the mid-thickness or the center of the
cases: cross-section.
a) Forgings in normalized or solution treated condition
b) for thickness or diameter greater than 50 mm, the axis
with mass up to 1000 kg each of similar shape and
is to be at one quarter thickness (mid-radius) or 80 mm,
dimensions, made from the same heat, heat treated in
whichever is less, below any heat treated surface.
the same furnace charge and with a total mass of the
batch not exceeding 6 tonnes For the preparation of test specimens, reference is made to
b) Forgings in quenched and tempered condition with the applicable requirements of Ch 1, Sec 2.
mass up to 500 kg each of similar shape and dimen-
sions, made from the same heat, heat treated in the 1.7.7 Tensile test
same furnace charge and with a total mass of the batch
Reference is made to the applicable requirements of Ch 1,
not exceeding 3 tonnes
Sec 2.
The test material may be cut from one or more forgings of
the batch [1.7.5] or, alternatively, separately forged test The results of the tensile test at ambient temperature are to
material may be used. When separately forged, the test comply with the requirements in the appropriate Tables, or
material is to have a reduction ratio similar to that used for in the approved specification when steels other than those
the forgings represented. They are to be properly identified specified in these Rules are accepted.
and heat treated together with the forgings of the batch.
Reference is made to [7.7] for the properties at elevated
When samples are integral with the forging, the require- temperatures and their verification, when required.
ments of [1.7.2] apply.
1.7.8 Impact test
1.7.4 Batch testing for rolled products
When the use of rolled bars as a substitute for forging mate- Reference is made to the applicable requirements of Ch 1,
rial is permitted, a batch testing procedure may be adopted Sec 2.
and the batch composition is to be as follows:
The average value of a set of 3 tests is to comply with the
a) Bars made from the same rolled ingot or bloom pro- average value required in the appropriate Tables, or in the
vided that where this is cut into individual lengths, these approved specification when steels other than those speci-
are all heat treated in the same furnace charge, or: fied in these Rules are accepted.
b) Bars of the same diameter made from the same heat,
Only one individual value may be lower than the average
heat treated in the same furnace charge and with a total
value required, provided that it is not less than 70% of it.
mass of the batch not exceeding 2,5 t.
The test samples are taken from one or more pieces of the The minimum average values for impact tests indicated in
batch [1.7.5]. the Tables are relevant to standard specimens 10 x 10 mm2.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 3
1.7.9 Hardness tests 1.9.2 Verification of dimensions

At the discretion of the Society, hardness tests may be The verification of dimensions and tolerances is the respon-
required on the following: sibility of the Manufacturer.
Checks of dimensions for verification of compliance with
a) quenched and tempered gear forgings after completion
the approved drawings are in general required for important
of heat treatment and prior to machining the gear teeth
forgings, to the Surveyor’s satisfaction.
[5.6.2]
b) surface-hardened gear forgings after the teeth have been 1.10 Non-destructive examination
ground to the finished profile [5.7.2]
1.10.1 General
c) surface-hardened forgings in general
When required by the relevant construction Rules, by the
d) batch tested forgings: at least one hardness test on each Society on the approved plans, by the approved procedure
forging for welded composite components or, in particular cases,
by the Surveyor, appropriate non-destructive testing is also
The results of hardness tests in the cases a) and d) are to be
to be carried out in accordance with a recognized standard.
reported.
The results of hardness tests in the cases b) and c) are to Sec 1, [3.6].
comply with the approved specification.
Non-destructive examinations are to be carried out by per-
sonnel qualified and certified in accordance with recog-
1.7.10 Re-test procedures
nized standards or schemes such as ISO 9712, EN 473 or
Samples for possible re-tests are to be taken as near as prac- ASNT.
ticable to the specimens used for the original tests but alter- The Manufacturer is to provide the Surveyor with a report
natively may also be taken from another test position or confirming that the required examinations have been car-
sample representative of the forging or batch of forgings. ried out without revealing significant defects, including ref-
Reference is made to Ch 1, Sec 1, [3.5]. erence of the testing standard and the agreed acceptance
criteria.
For tensile re-test procedure, reference is made to Ch 1, Sec
2, [2.3]. 1.10.2 Magnetic and liquid penetrant examination
Magnetic particle or liquid penetrant testing is to be carried
For Charpy V-notch re-test procedure, reference is made to
out when the forgings are in the finished condition.
Ch 1, Sec 2, [4.4].
Where current flow methods are used for magnetisation,
particular care is to be taken to avoid damaging machined
1.8 Pressure test surfaces by contact burns from the prods.
1.8.1 Forgings subjected to internal pressure are to be sub- Unless otherwise agreed, these tests are to be carried out in
jected to a hydraulic pressure test in compliance with the the presence of the Surveyor.
conditions laid down in the applicable parts of the Rules.
1.10.3 Ultrasonic examination
The test pressure is to be measured by means of a suitable Ultrasonic examination is to be carried out following the
calibrated pressure gauge. final heat treatment and at a stage when the forgings have
been machined to a condition suitable for this type of
The test is to be performed on the forging in the finished
examination.
condition and before the application of any coating which
may conceal the effect of the test. Both radial and axial scanning are to be carried out, when
appropriate for the shape and dimensions of the forging
Unless otherwise agreed, the test of forgings is to be carried being examined.
out in the presence of the Surveyor.
This examination is to be carried out by the Manufacturer,
A report confirming the satisfactory results of the pressure although Surveyors may request to be present.
tests and indicating the relevant testing conditions is to be
issued by the Manufacturer. 1.11 Rectification of defects
1.9 Visual and dimensional examination 1.11.1 Rectification of defects by grinding

Defects may be removed by grinding or chipping and grind-
1.9.1 Visual examination ing provided the component dimensions are acceptable.
All products are to be submitted by the Manufacturer to The resulting grooves are to have a bottom radius of approx-
visual examination; where applicable this is to include the imately three times the groove depth and are to be blended
examination of internal surfaces and bores. into the surrounding surface so as to avoid any sharp con-
tours. Complete elimination of the defective material is to
Forgings are also to be presented to the Surveyor for visual be verified by magnetic particle testing or liquid penetrant
examination. testing.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 3
1.11.2 Rectification of defects by welding 2.2 Steel grades

Repair welding of forgings except crankshaft forgings may
be permitted subject to prior approval of the Society. 2.2.1 The grades are identified by the symbol FC (forgings
in carbon and carbon-manganese steels) or FA (forgings in
In such cases, full details of the extent and location of the
alloy steels), followed by a number giving the minimum
repair, the proposed welding procedure, heat treatment, if
any, and subsequent inspection procedures, are to be sub- specified ultimate tensile strength Rm, in N/mm2.
mitted for the approval.
2.2.2 Where it is proposed to use alloy steels, the specifica-
Records of repairs and subsequent inspections traceable to tion of the steel grade (chemical composition, heat treat-
each forging repaired are to be prepared by the forging ment and mechanical properties) is to be submitted for
Manufacturer. The records are to be presented to the Sur- approval.
veyor on request.
2.3 Manufacture
2.3.1 Approval
1.12.1 The Manufacturer is to adopt a system of identifica-
tion which will enable all finished forgings to be traced to Forgings having a mass above 1000kg or with a diameter
the original cast and their manufacturing. above 200mm are to be manufactured at works which are
approved by the Society. Provisions are given in [1.3].
All forgings which have been tested with satisfactory results
are to be marked with the following details:
a) Manufacturer’s name or trade mark
b) Society’s brand 2.4.1 The forgings are to be supplied in one of the follow-
c) Identification mark for the grade of steel ing conditions, as appropriate:
d) Cast number or other marking which will enable the • Carbon and carbon-manganese steels:
history of the fabrication of the forging to be traced - fully annealed
e) Additional, optional marks such as file number and - normalized
code of local inspection office, Surveyor’s personal
- normalized and tempered
brand
f) Test pressure, where applicable. - quenched and tempered
Modified arrangements for identification and marking of • Alloy steels:

small forgings manufactured in large numbers may be - quenched and tempered.
agreed with the Society.
Alternatively, alloy steel forgings may be supplied in the
1.13 Documentation and certification normalized and tempered condition, in which case the
specified mechanical properties are to be agreed with the
1.13.1 The testing documentation indicated in Ch 1, Sec 1, Society.
[4.2.1] is to be issued and is to include all the information, For all types of steel the tempering temperature is to be not
as appropriate. less than 550°C.
Where applicable, the reports relevant to the non-destruc-
tive examination [1.10.1], weld repair [1.11.2] and pressure 2.5 Chemical composition
test [1.8.1] are to be enclosed with the testing documenta-
tion. 2.5.1 Reference is made to [1.5]. The chemical composi-
tion on ladle analysis is to comply with the limits given in
1.13.2 When the steel is cast in a mill other than that
Tab 2 or, where applicable, the requirements of the
where the forgings are manufactured, the Surveyor is to be
approved specification.
supplied with a steelmaker’s certificate stating the manufac-
turing process, the grade of steel, the cast number and the
2.5.2 Maximum carbon equivalent (CEQ) value specified for
relevant ladle analysis.
forgings for offshore structures and components is to be
agreed with the Society.
2 Forgings for hull, offshore structures
and welded components in general 2.6 Mechanical properties
2.1 Scope 2.6.1 Tab 3 gives the minimum requirements for yield
stress, elongation, reduction of area and impact test energy
2.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to steel forg- values corresponding to different strength levels. Where it is
ings intended for ship hull structures, such as sternframes, proposed to use a steel with a specified minimum tensile
rudder horns, offshore structures and welded components strength intermediate to those given, corresponding mini-
in general, where design and acceptance tests are related to mum values for the other tensile properties may be obtained
mechanical properties at ambient temperature. by interpolation.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 3
Table 2 : Chemical composition limits
Total
Steel type C Si Mn P S Cr Mo Ni Cu (2)
residuals
C, C-Mn 0,23 (1) 0,45 0,30-1,50 0,035 0,035 0,30 (2) 0,15 (2) 0,40 (2) 0,30 0,85
Alloy (3) 0,45 (3) 0,035 0,035 (3) (3) (3) 0,30 
Note 1: Composition given in percentage mass by mass maximum unless shown as a range.
(1) The carbon content may be increased above this level provided that the carbon equivalent (CEQ), in %, is not more than 0,41%
calculated using the following formula, except for forgings intended for offshore structures where maximum CEQ values are to
be agreed with the Society:
Ceq = C + --------- + -------------------------------- + ---------------------
6 5 15
(2) Elements are considered as residual elements.

(3) Specification is to be submitted for approval.
Table 3 : Mechanical properties for hull steel forgings
Charpy V-notch
Tensile strength Reduction of area Z
Yield stress Elongation A5 min. (%) average energy min.
Steel type Rm min. (N/mm2) min. (%)
ReH min. (N/mm2) at + 20°C (2) (3)
(1)
Long. Tang. Long. Tang. Long. Tang.
C and C-Mn 400 200 26 19 50 35 32 18
440 220 24 18 50 35 32 18
480 240 22 16 45 30 32 18
520 260 21 15 45 30 32 18
560 280 20 14 40 27 32 18
600 300 18 13 40 27 32 18
Alloy 550 350 20 14 50 35 41 24
600 400 18 13 50 35 41 24
650 450 17 12 50 35 41 24
(1) The following ranges for tensile strength may be additionally specified:
• specified minimum tensile strength: < 600 N/mm2  600 N/mm2
• tensile strength range: 120 N/mm2 150 N/mm2.
(2) For steel forgings intended for the poop structure of ships with ice class notation, Charpy V-notch minimum average energy
long. is to be 27 J at 0°C for all grades.
(3) Not applicable to steel forgings for offshore structures and components. See [2.6.4].
2.6.2 Forgings intended for the poop structure of ships with Where a forging exceeds both 4 tons in mass and 3 m in
ice class notation are to be Charpy V-notch impact tested at length, one test sample is to be taken from each end. These
0°C with 27 J minimum average energy in longitudinal limits refer to the as forged mass and length but excluding
direction. the test material.
2.6.3 For forgings operating at 0°C or lower temperature,

2.7.2 In the case of batch testing, the number of test sam-
which are not dealt with in this Article, the applicable
requirements are to be agreed with the Society depending ples is given in [1.7.3].
on the design temperature, application and dimensions; see
also Article [8]. 2.7.3 The test specimens for 1 tensile and 3 Charpy V-notch
impact tests are to be taken from each test sample.
2.6.4 Charpy V-notch impact tests requirements applicable
to forgings for offshore structures and components are to be Unless otherwise agreed the tests specimens are to be cut in
agreed with the Society in accordance with the Society’s a longitudinal direction as per [1.7.6].
Offshore Rules.

2.7.1 In the case of individual testing as in [1.7.2], at least 2.8.1 Magnetic particle and ultrasonic examination are to
one test sample is to be taken for the required tests. be carried out on forgings and as mentioned in [1.10].
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 3
3 Forgings for machinery, shafts and 3.5 Chemical composition

non-welded components in general 3.5.1 General
Reference is made to [1.5]. The chemical composition on ladle
3.1 Scope analysis is to comply with the limits given in Tab 4 or, where
3.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to carbon, car- applicable, the requirements of the approved specification.
bon-manganese and alloy steel forgings, intended for use in
the construction of machinery, shafts and non-welded com- 3.6 Mechanical properties
ponents including offshore equipment like rings for slewing
bearings of cranes and offshore loading systems. 3.6.1 Tab 5 gives the minimum requirements for yield
Specific requirements for anchors are given in Ch 4, Sec 1, stress, elongation, reduction of area corresponding to differ-
[1]. ent strength levels. Where it is proposed to use a steel with
a specified minimum tensile strength intermediate to those
3.1.2 When welding is expected on rudder stocks, tillers given, corresponding minimum values for the other tensile
and pintles, the requirements of [2] apply, unless otherwise properties may be obtained by interpolation.
agreed by the Society.
3.6.2 Forgings intended for propeller shafts, rudder stocks,
3.2 Steel grades pintles, blade bolts, CP mechanisms, shaft bolts, strut-pod
connecting bolts of ships with ice class notation ICE CLASS
3.2.1 The grades are identified by one of the symbols FC IA SUPER, ICE CLASS IA,ICE CLASS IB or ICE CLASS IC are
(forgings in carbon and carbon-manganese steels) or FA to be Charpy V-notch impact tested at 10°C with 20 J min-
(forgings in alloy steels), followed by a number giving the imum average energy in longitudinal direction.
specified minimum tensile strength Rm in N/mm2.
3.6.3 For forgings operating at 0°C or lower temperature,
3.3 Manufacture which are not dealt with in this Article, the applicable
requirements are to be agreed with the Society depending
3.3.1 Approval on the design temperature, application and dimensions; see
Forgings having a mass above 1000kg or with a diameter also Article [8].
above 200mm are to be manufactured at works which are
approved by the Society. Provisions are given in [1.3]. 3.6.4 Unless otherwise agreed with the Society, carbon and
carbon-manganese steel forgings intended for offshore
equipment are to be Charpy V-notch impact tested with 27 J
3.4 Condition of supply minimum average energy in longitudinal direction at a tem-
3.4.1 The forgings are to be supplied in one of the follow- perature to be agreed with the Society in accordance with
ing conditions, as appropriate: Tab 6.
• Carbon and carbon-manganese steels: Alloy steel forgings intended for offshore equipment are to
be Charpy V-notch tested in accordance with the approved
- fully annealed
specifications.
- normalized
- normalized and tempered 3.7 Mechanical tests
- quenched and tempered
• Alloy steels: 3.7.1 In the case of individual testing as in [1.7.2], at least
- quenched and tempered. one test sample is to be taken for the required tests.
Where a forging exceeds both 4 tons in mass and 3 m in
Alternatively, alloy steel forgings may be supplied in the
length, one test sample is to be taken from each end. These
normalized and tempered condition, in which case the
limits refer to the as forged mass and length but excluding
specified mechanical properties are to be agreed with the
the test material.
Society.
For all types of steel the tempering temperature is to be not 3.7.2 In the case of batch testing, the number of test sam-
less than 550°C. ples is given in [1.7.3].
Table 4 : Chemical composition limits for non-welded components
Total
Steel type C Si Mn P S Cr Mo Ni Cu (1)
residuals
C, C-Mn 0,65 0,45 0,30-1,50 0,035 0,035 0,30 (1) 0,15 (1) 0,40 (1) 0,30 0,85
Alloy 0,45 0,45 0,30-1,00 0,035 0,035 min. 0,40 (2) min. 0,15 (2) min. 0,40 (2) 0,30 
Note 1: Composition given in percentage mass by mass maximum unless shown as a range or as a minimum.
(1) Elements are considered as residual elements unless shown as a minimum.
(2) One or more of the elements is to comply with the minimum content.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 3
Table 5 : Mechanical properties for machinery steel forgings
Tensile strength Reduction of area Z min. Hardness

Yield stress Elongation A5 min. (%)
Steel type Rm min. (N/mm2) (%) (Brinell)
ReH min. (N/mm2)
(1) Long. Tang. Long. Tang. (2)
C and C-Mn 400 200 26 19 50 35 110-150
440 220 24 18 50 35 125-160
480 240 22 16 45 30 135-175
520 260 21 15 45 30 150-185
560 280 20 14 40 27 160-200
600 300 18 13 40 27 175-215
640 320 17 12 40 27 185-230
680 340 16 12 35 24 200-240
720 360 15 11 35 24 210-250
760 380 14 10 35 24 225-265
Alloy 600 360 18 14 50 35 175-215
700 420 16 12 45 30 205-245
800 480 14 10 40 27 235-275
900 630 13 9 40 27 260-320
1000 700 12 8 35 24 290-365
1100 770 11 7 35 24 320-385
Note 1: For propeller shafts, rudder stocks, pintles, blade bolts, CP mechanisms, shaft bolts, strut-pod connecting bolts of ships with
ice class notation ICE CLASS IA SUPER, ICE CLASS IA,ICE CLASS IB or ICE CLASS IC, Charpy V-notch impact testing is to be carried
out for all steel types at 10°C and the average energy value is to be minimum 20 J (longitudinal test).
(1) The following ranges for tensile strength may be additionally specified:
• specified minimum tensile strength: < 900 N/mm2  900 N/mm2
• tensile strength range: 150 N/mm2 200 N/mm2.
(2) The hardness values are typical and are given for information purposes only.
Table 6 : Charpy V-notch test temperature for carbon 3.7.3 The test specimens for 1 tensile test and, when
and carbon-manganese steel forgings intended for required, 3 Charpy V-notch impact tests are to be taken
offshore equipment from each test sample.
The tests specimens are to be cut in a longitudinal direction
Yield stress except that, at the discretion of the Manufacturer, the alter-
TD (°C) TCVN (°C)
ReH min. (N/mm2) native directions or positions as shown in Fig 1, Fig 2 and
235 +20 +10 Fig 3 may be used.
+10 0
Figure 1 : Plain shaft
0 10 Test position A
10 20 (longitudinal)
355 +20 0
+10 10
0 15
10 20
460 +20 0 Test position B
(tangential)
+10 10
0 20 Figure 2 : Flanged shaft
10 30 Test position B
(longitudinal)
690 +20 20 (through bolt hole) Test position A
+10 30 (longitudinal)
0 40
10 40
Note 1:
TD : Design temperature Test position C
TCVN : Charpy V-notch impact test temperature. (tangential)
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 3
Figure 3 : Flanged shaft with collar 4.2 Steel grades

Test position B
(tangential) 4.2.1 The steel specification relevant to chemical composi-
tion, mechanical properties and heat treatment is to be sub-
Test position C Test position A mitted for approval.
(tangential) (longitudinal)
4.2.2 The specified minimum tensile strength Rm is gener-

ally to be not lower than 400 N/mm2 and not higher than
1000 N/mm2.
4.3 Manufacture
4.3.1 Approval
Test position D Forgings having a mass above 1000kg are to be manufac-
(tangential)
tured at works which are approved by the Society. Provi-
sions are given in [1.3].
4.3.2 Continuous grain flow forging procedures are to be
3.8.1 A magnetic particle or liquid penetrant examination specially approved and, to this end, tests effected to demon-
is to be carried out on forgings intended for: strate that a satisfactory structure and grain flow are
obtained.
a) rudder stocks and pintles with diameter not lower than
100 mm In the case of a welded crankshaft, the welding procedure is
to be approved.
b) main propulsion shafting with diameter not lower than
When the webs are obtained by flame cutting from forged
100 mm
or rolled flat products, the part to be removed by machining
c) connecting rods is to be not less than 8 mm from all flame-cut surfaces.
d) components for engines having bore diameter larger
than 400 mm, such as: 4.4 Condition of supply
• cylinder covers, piston crowns, piston rods, tie rods, 4.4.1 Forgings are to be normalised and tempered or
gear wheels for camshaft drives quenched and tempered depending on the approved speci-
• bolts and studs for cylinder covers, cross heads, fication.
main bearing and connecting rod bearings, nuts for The tempering temperature is to be not lower than 550°C.
tie rods.
The magnetic particle test of tie rods/stay bolts is to include 4.4.2 Where a superficial hardening of the crankshaft forg-
test at each threaded portion which is at least twice the ing by nitriding or by induction quenching is foreseen, the
length of the thread. proposed procedure is to be submitted as indicated in
[1.6.5].
3.8.2 Ultrasonic testing is to be carried out on the follow-
ing items: 4.5 Chemical and mechanical properties
a) rudder stocks and pintles with diameter not lower than
200 mm
comply with the approved specification [4.2.1].
b) shafts having a finished diameter of 200 mm or larger, when For alloy steels which are to be nitrided, the phosphorus or
intended for main propulsion or other essential services sulphur content is to be not greater than 0,020%.
c) piston crowns and cylinders covers
4.5.2 The mechanical properties are to comply with the
d) connecting rods, piston rods and crosshead with mini- requirements of the approved specification.
mum diameter not less than 200 mm or equivalent
cross-section. 4.6 Mechanical tests
4.6.1 For open die solid forged crankshafts one set of test
4 Forgings for crankshafts specimens is to be taken in the longitudinal direction, from
the driving shaft end of each forging (test position A in Fig 4).
4.1 Scope Where the mass (as heat treated but excluding test material)
exceeds 3 tons, the specimens in a longitudinal direction
4.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to carbon-man- are to be taken from each end (test positions A and B in Fig
ganese and alloy steel for solid forged crankshafts and forg- 4). Where however the crankthrows are formed by machin-
ings to be used for the construction of semi-built or fully ing or flame cutting, the second set of specimens is to be
built crankshafts. taken in a tangential direction from material removed from
The general requirements, specified in Article [1], are also the crankthrow at the end opposite to the driving shaft end
to be complied with, as appropriate. (test position C in Fig 4).
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 3
Figure 4 : Solid forged crankshaft

Test position A Test position B
(longitudinal) (longitudinal)
Coupling end
Test position C
(tangential)
4.6.2 For crank webs, one set of specimens is to be taken 5.2 Steel grades
from each forging in a tangential direction (test position C in
Fig 4). 5.2.1 Steels are to comply with requirements specified in
[3.2] or with a specification approved by the Society.
4.6.3 For closed die crankshaft forgings and crankshaft To this end, a detailed specification relevant to chemical
forgings where the method of manufacture has been spe- composition, mechanical properties and heat treatment is
cially approved in accordance with [4.3], the number and to be submitted for approval.
position of test specimens is to be agreed with the Society
having regard to the method of manufacture used.
5.3 Manufacture
4.6.4 When small crankshaft forgings are batch tested
5.3.1 Approval
[1.7.3], hardness tests are to be made on the individual
pieces and results are to be reported. Forgings having a mass above 1000kg are to be manufac-
5.3.2 The reduction ratio during forging is to be in compli-
4.7.1 Magnetic particle and/or liquid penetrant tests are
ance with [1.2.2].
required for all crankshaft forgings.
Forgings are to be provided with sufficient excess material
Where applicable, this is also to include all flame-cut sur-
as may be necessary for machining out possible defective
faces not subsequently machined.
zones.
Special care is to be devoted to the pins and journals and
associated fillets. 5.4 Condition of supply
Unless otherwise agreed, all crankshaft forgings having a
minimum crankpin diameter not lower than 150 mm are to 5.4.1 Unless otherwise agreed, forgings which are not to be
be ultrasonically examined. surface-hardened are to be normalised and tempered or
quenched and tempered.
4.7.2 Non-destructive examination procedures and the
acceptance criteria of the indications of such tests, comply- 5.4.2 Where induction hardening or nitriding is to be car-
ing with the requirements of the engine Manufacturer, are ried out, forgings are to be heat treated at an appropriate
to be previously approved by the Society. stage to a condition suitable for this subsequent surface
hardening.
5 Forgings for gearing 5.4.3 Where carburising is to be carried out, forgings are to
be heat treated at an appropriate stage (generally either by
5.1 Scope full annealing or by normalizing and tempering) to a condi-
tion suitable for subsequent machining and carburising.
5.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to carbon-man-
ganese and alloy steel forgings intended for the construction 5.4.4 Treatments for surface hardening are to be approved
of gearing for main propulsion and auxiliary equipment. in accordance with [1.6.5].
The general requirements, specified in Article [1], are also
to be complied with, as appropriate. 5.5 Chemical and mechanical properties
5.1.2 In the case of forgings for flexible couplings, quill 5.5.1 The chemical composition and the mechanical prop-
shafts and gearwheel shafts, the requirements of Article [3] erties are specified in [3.5] and [3.6], respectively, or in the
apply. approved specification as applicable.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 3
Figure 5 : Pinions
Test position B Test position B
(tangential) (tangential)
D d
Test position C Test position A

(tangential) (longitudinal)
L : Length of toothed portion, in mm
D : Diameter of toothed portion, in mm
d : Journal diameter, in mm.
5.6 Mechanical tests for normalised and • Gear wheel rims made by expanding (see Fig 7):
tempered or quenched and tempered One set of tests is to be taken from each forging in a tan-
forgings gential direction (test position A or B). Where the fin-
ished diameter exceeds 2,5 m or the mass (as heat
5.6.1 Sampling treated excluding test material) exceeds 3 tons, two sets
The specimens necessary for the required tests are to be of test specimens are to be taken from diametrically
taken from each forging [1.7.2] or a forging representative opposite positions (test positions A and B). The mechan-
of the batch [1.7.3], in accordance with Fig 5, Fig 6, Fig 7 ical properties for longitudinal tests are to be applied.
and Fig 8. • Pinion sleeves (see Fig 8):
The set of test specimens is to be taken as follows: One set of test specimens is to be taken from each forg-
• Pinions (see Fig 5): ing in a tangential direction (test position A or B). Where
the finished length exceeds 1,25 m, one set of test spec-
Where the finished machined diameter of the toothed
imens is to be taken from each end.
portion exceeds 200 mm, one set of test specimens is to
be taken from each forging in a tangential direction
Figure 7 : Gear wheel rim made by expanding
adjacent to the toothed portion (test position B). Where
the dimensions preclude the preparation of tests from Test position A
(tangential)
this position, tests in a tangential direction are to be
taken from the end of the journal (test position C).
If, however, the journal diameter is 200 mm or less, tests
are to be taken in a longitudinal direction (test position A).
Where the finished length of the toothed portion
exceeds 1,25 m, one set of test specimens is to be taken
from each end.
Where the finished diameter of the toothed portion is
200 mm or less, one set of test specimens is to be taken
in a longitudinal direction (test position A).
• Gear wheel (see Fig 6):
Test position B
One set of tests is to be taken from each forging in a tan- (tangential)
gential direction (test positions A or B).
Figure 8 : Pinion sleeve
Figure 6 : Gear wheel Test position A Test position B
Test position A (tangential) (tangential)
(tangential)
Test position B
(tangential)
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 3
5.6.2 Hardness tests 5.8 Non-destructive examination

Hardness tests may be required at the discretion of the Soci-
ety. See also [1.7.9] a). 5.8.1 Magnetic particle or liquid penetrant testing is
required on the tooth surfaces of gears hardened completely
The hardness is to be determined after completion of heat
or at their surface.
treatment and prior to machining the gear teeth.
An ultrasonic examination of the forgings is to be performed
Measurements are to be carried out at four positions equally
by the Manufacturer when there is still an adequate amount
spaced around the circumference of the surface where teeth
of excess material on the surfaces in respect of the final
will subsequently be cut. Where the finished diameter of
position of the teeth.
the toothed portion exceeds 2,5 m, the above number of
test positions is to be increased to eight. In general, ultrasonic examination is required for forging
Where the width of a gear wheel rim forging exceeds having a finished diameter, of the part where teeth will be
1,25 m, the hardness is to be determined at eight positions cut, higher than 200 mm.
at each end of the forging.
6 Forgings for turbines
5.7 Mechanical tests for surface-hardened
forgings 6.1 Scope
5.7.1 Sampling 6.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to steel forg-
Forgings to be carburised after machining are to be pro- ings intended for the construction of rotors and discs of
vided with sufficient test material for the sets of specimens main turbines and rotors of auxiliary turbines driving elec-
for both preliminary tests at the forge and final tests after tric generators and compressors.
completion of carburising.
The general requirements specified in Article [1] are also to
For this purpose two test samples are to be taken from posi- be complied with, as appropriate.
tions as detailed in [5.6] except that irrespective of the
dimensions or mass of the forging, tests are required from 6.1.2 Plans submitted for approval are to state whether the
one position only and, in the case of forgings with integral turbine is for propulsion or for auxiliary service; in the latter
journals, are to be cut in a longitudinal direction. case the shaft power is to be specified.
This test sample is to be machined to a diameter of D/4 or For rotors to be subjected to a thermal stability test, the
60 mm, whichever is less, where D is the finished diameter maximum design temperature and the proposed test tem-
of the toothed position. perature are also to be specified.
For preliminary tests at the forge, one test sample is to be For rotors of welded construction, the specification of the
given a blank carburising and heat treatment cycle, simulat- chemical composition of the steel is to be submitted for
ing that which subsequently will be applied to the forging. approval.
For final acceptance tests, the second test sample is to be
blank carburised and heat treated along with the forgings 6.2 Steel grades, chemical composition and
they represent.
mechanical properties
At the discretion of the Manufacturer, test samples of larger
cross-section may be either carburised or blank carburised, 6.2.1 The steel grades and relevant properties may be in
but these are to be machined to the required diameter prior accordance with [3.2], [3.5] and [3.6] or with a particular
to the final quenching and tempering heat treatment. specification to be submitted for acceptance.
5.7.2 Hardness tests and additional checks

6.3 Manufacture
Hardness tests may also be required on forgings which have
been induction hardened, nitrided or carburised. See also
6.3.1 Approval
[1.7.9] b).
Forgings having a mass above 1000kg are to be manufac-
The hardness is to be determined on the toothed part after tured at works which are approved by the Society. Provi-
the teeth have been ground to the finished profile. The sions are given in [1.3].
results of such tests are to comply with the approved speci-
fication.
Additional checks of the hardness, depth and shape of the
hardened layer are to be performed as indicated in the
6.4.1 The intermediate and final heat treatments, specified
by the Manufacturer, are to be submitted for consideration.
When, for nitrided gearing, hardness verification is required
In particular, the heat treatments are to be such as to avoid
on additional test samples, unless otherwise stated in the
hair-line cracks.
approved specification, the depth of the hardened zone is
to be not lower than 0,6 mm and the hardness at a depth of For rotors of welded construction, the heat treatment is to
0,25 mm is to be not lower than 500 Vickers points. be specially approved.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 3
Figure 9 : Turbine rotor

L direction T direction
T direction
L direction L direction
L direction
6.5 Mechanical tests 6.7 Thermal stability test
6.5.1 For rotors not exceeding 3 tons in mass, one set of 6.7.1 Solid forged rotors and rotors built by welding two or
longitudinal specimens is to be taken from one end of the more forged pieces and intended for turbines having a
shaft and one set of transverse test specimens is to be taken design temperature exceeding 400°C are to be subjected,
in the tangential direction from the body portion (see Fig 9). after the final heat treatment and in their rough machined
condition, to a thermal stability test.
For rotors exceeding 3 tons in mass, the set of longitudinal
specimens is to be taken from each end of the shaft and the The test is to be performed using procedures and equipment
set of transverse test specimens is to be taken in the tangen- to the satisfaction of the Society.
tial direction from the body portion (see Fig 9). The deflection may be measured with the procedure out-
lined below, which consists in reading the radial elongation
For each turbine disc, at least one set of transverse speci-
in way of some machined zones distributed along the
mens is to be taken from the boss in the tangential direction
length of the rotor (in general, there will be two reference
(see Fig 10).
machined zones in way, or in proximity, of the supports and
three test machined zones located one at the mid-length
Figure 10 : Turbine disc and two at the ends of the rotor).
Four markings, 90° apart, are to be stamped for identifica-
tion on the coupling end of the rotor.
During the test, the rotor is to be rotated very slowly and
uniformly in the furnace, while it is heated gradually and
T direction evenly, excessive thermal gradients being avoided; the rotor
is to be maintained for a sufficient length of time at the
specified test temperature, which is to be appropriate to the
final heat treatment of the piece, and subsequently slowly
and uniformly cooled to a sufficiently low temperature,
excessive thermal gradients again being avoided.
In the course of the test, the deflections are to be regularly
recorded in each machined zone, at angular intervals of
90°, and the difference in the readings between the cold
6.6 Non-destructive examination and hot conditions is not to exceed the specified limits.
In general, the following requirements are to be complied
6.6.1 A visual examination, supported by a magnetic parti- with:
cle examination at the discretion of the Surveyor, is required
• the furnace is to be large enough to contain the whole
for the end surfaces of the rotors and the boss of the discs;
length of the rotor, including the end zones in way of
the degree of finishing is to be appropriate for this purpose.
the glands; overhung wheels, when present, are also to
An ultrasonic examination is to be carried out by the Manu- be enclosed in the furnace
facturer on all forgings. • means are to be provided for continuous recording of
the temperature at the surface of the rotor and, if practi-
6.6.2 Rotor forgings for propulsion turbines having a power
cable, in a bore at the mid-length of the rotor
exceeding 1100 kW are to be hollow bored to permit inter-
nal examination visually and, where possible, by the mag- • the temperature of the rotor is in no case to exceed the
netic particle method. final tempering temperature
• the test temperature is to not be less than the maximum
These examinations are to be confirmed by the Surveyor;
design temperature +28°C but not higher than the tem-
the degree of finishing is to be adequate for the purpose.
perature mentioned above; the temperature distribution
At the discretion of the Society, ultrasonic examination of is to be uniform and maintained at a constant level for at
the rotor by an approved procedure may be accepted as an least three hours with the readings falling within
alternative to hollow boring. 0,006 mm in all the machined zones
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 3
• the rotor is to be rotated during cooling until the tem- 7.3 Manufacture
perature is not more than 100°C
• cold readings are to be taken before and after the test. 7.3.1 Approval
The test results are considered satisfactory when the differ- tured at works which are approved by the Society. Provi-
ence between the final readings in the hot conditions and sions are given in [1.3].
the initial and final cold readings do not exceed 0,025 mm
in any zone.
Otherwise, at the request of the Manufacturer and with the
Society’s approval, the test may be repeated; when the 7.4.1 The forgings are to be supplied in one of the follow-
results of the second test are also unsatisfactory, proposals ing conditions, as appropriate:
for alterations to the rotor are to be approved by the Society • Carbon and carbon-manganese steels:
before further testing.
- normalized
- normalized and tempered
7 Forgings for boilers, pressure
- quenched and tempered
vessels and systems
• Alloy steels:
7.1 Scope - quenched and tempered.
Alternatively, alloy steel forgings may be supplied in the nor-
7.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to forgings
malized and tempered condition, in which case the specified
made in carbon, carbon-manganese, molybdenum and
mechanical properties are to be agreed with the Society.
chromium-molybdenum low alloy steels, intended for the
construction by welding of boilers and pressure vessels, For all types of steel the tempering temperature is to be not
plants and piping systems in general, when Charpy V-notch less than 550°C.
properties at temperature not lower than 20°C are speci-
fied. 7.5 Chemical composition
For forgings not intended for welded constructions, the
requirements of Article [2] apply, as appropriate. 7.5.1 The chemical composition on ladle analysis is to
comply with the limits specified in Tab 7 for carbon and
7.1.2 Forgings intended for vessels and systems operating carbon-manganese forgings and Tab 8 for Cr and Cr-Mo
at low temperatures are to comply with the applicable alloy steel forgings.
requirements of Article [8] and, in the case of applications
involving the storage and transport of liquefied gases or flu- 7.6 Mechanical properties
ids at low temperature, reference is to be made to the Soci-
ety’s Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships Part D, 7.6.1 The mechanical properties are specified in Tab 9 for
Chapter 9, and, to the International Code for the Construc- carbon and carbon-manganese steel and in Tab 10 for Cr
tion and Equipment of Ships Carrying Liquefied Gases in and Cr-Mo alloy steel forgings.
Bulk (IGC Code).
For gas fuelled ships, reference is to be made to Society 7.7 Mechanical properties at elevated
Rule Note NR 529, and, to the International Code of Safety temperature
Code). 7.7.1 The values for the 0,2% proof stress (Rp0,2) at tempera-
tures of 150°C and higher are given in Tab 11.
7.2 Steel grades The above values are for design purposes only. Their verifi-
cation is in general not required during the testing, unless
7.2.1 Carbon and carbon-manganese steels are classed into
figures higher than those shown in Tab 11 and in accor-
three groups indicating the minimum ultimate tensile
dance with recognised standards are proposed by the steel
strength Rm, in N/mm2: 410, 460 and 510. Manufacturer.
Each group may be further subdivided into grades HA, HB
In such cases, the verification is required and the proce-
and HD, based on conventional levels of quality and impact
dures detailed in [7.7.2] and [7.7.3] are to be followed.
properties.
7.7.2 When Rp0,2 is required to be verified, at least one ten-
sile test for each cast is to be carried out at the agreed tem-
chemical composition in the grades 0,3Mo-1Cr0,5Mo-
perature on each forging or batch of forgings.
2,25Cr1Mo.
The figures mean the nominal percentage content of the The test specimen is to be taken near the position of the ten-
main alloying elements. sile specimen tested at ambient temperature.
Where it is proposed to use steels other than those dealt The dimensions of the specimens and the testing procedure
with in these Rules, the steel specification relevant to chem- are to be in accordance with the requirements of Ch 1, Sec
ical composition, mechanical properties and heat treatment 2, [2.1] and Ch 1, Sec 2, [2.2.5], respectively.
is to be submitted for approval. The results of tests are to comply with the specified values.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 3
Table 7 : Carbon and carbon-manganese steels - Chemical composition

Steel grade Deoxidation
C max Mn Si P max S max Al tot. min. (1) Ni max
410 HA killed 0,20 0,60 - 1,40 0,10 - 0,40 0,030 0,030 0,40
410 HB killed
460 HA killed 0,22 0,90 - 1,60 0,10 - 0,50 0,030 0,030 0,40
460 HB killed
460 HD killed and fine grained 0,20 0,020
510 HA killed 0,23 1,00 - 1,60 0,10 - 0,50 0,030 0,030 0,40
510 HB killed
510 HD killed and fine grained 0,20 0,020
(1) Nb, V or Ti may be used for grain refining as a complete or partial substitute for Al, in which case the minimum value for Al
content does not apply. The grain refining elements are to be specified at the time of approval;
in general Nb and V are not to exceed 0,05% and 0,10%, respectively. Additional alloying elements are to be submitted for
consideration and approval. Residual elements not intentionally added are not to exceed the following limits:
Cu  0,30%; Cr  0,25%; Mo  0,10%. Total: Ni + Cu + Cr + Mo  0,80%
Table 8 : Low alloy steels - Chemical composition

Steel grade Deoxidation (2)
C Mn Si P max S max Cr Mo
0,3Mo Si killed 0,12 - 0,22 0,40 - 0,90 0,10 - 0,40 0,030 0,030  0,25 - 0,35
1Cr 0,5Mo Si killed  0,18 0,40 - 1,70 0,10 - 0,40 0,030 0,030 0,80 - 1,15 0,40 - 0,65
2,25Cr 1Mo Si killed  0,15 0,10 - 0,40 0,10 - 0,40 0,030 0,030 2,00 - 2,50 0,90 - 1,10
(1) Residual elements are not to exceed the following limits: Cu  0,30%; Ni  0,30%.
(2) Aluminum total is to be lower than 0,020% for all grades of steel. The aluminum content is to be mentioned on the ladle anal-
ysis certificate.
Table 9 : Carbon and carbon-manganese steels - Mechanical properties
Yield stress ReH (N/mm2) Tensile Elongation A5 (%) min.

min. for thickness t (mm) for thickness t (mm) (1) Average impact energy (J)
strength min.
Steel grade
Rm t100 100 < t 250
t100 100 < t 250 (N/mm2) L T L T Test temp (°C) KVL KVT
410 HA 230 220 410 - 530 24 23 23 21 + 20 41 27
410 HB 0 27 22
410 HD 250 230  20
460 HA 260 250 460 - 600 23 21 22 20 + 20 41 27
460 HB 0 27 22
460 HD 280 260  20
510 HA 280 270 510 - 650 21 20 20 19 + 20 41 27
510 HD 0
510 HD 330 310  20
(1) L and T stand for longitudinal and transverse specimens, respectively.
Table 10 : Low alloy steels - Mechanical properties
Yield stress ReH (N/mm2) min. Elongation A5 (%) min. Average impact energy (J)
for thickness t (mm) (1) Tensile strength (2) min.
Steel grade
Rm (N/mm2)
t100 100 < t 250 L T Test temp (°C) KVL KVT
0,3Mo 285 270 440 - 570 23 21 +20 50 34
1Cr 0,5Mo 270 255 440 - 590 20 18 44 27
2,25Cr 1Mo 275 275 500 - 650 19 17 60 50
(1) For thickness or diameter greater than 250 mm, values are to be agreed with the Society.
(2) L and T stand for longitudinal and transverse specimens, respectively.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 3
Steel grade Thickness Rp0,2 (N/mm2) at a temperature (°C) of

(mm) 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
410 HA (1)  100 190 180 170 150 140 135 135
410 HB (1) > 100 175 170 160 150 140 135 135
410 HD (1)  100 205 190 170 150 140 135 130
> 100 190 175 165 150 140 135 130
460 HA (1)  100 215 210 195 175 170 160 155
460 HB (1) > 100 200 200 190  -  
460 HD (1)  100 235 215 200 175 165 155 150
> 100 220 200 190 175   
510 HB (1)  100 235 225 210 190 180 175 170
> 100 220 210 200 190   
510 HD (1)  100 255 235 215 190 180 170 165
> 100 240 215 205 190   
0,3Mo 200 185 170 160 150 140 130
1Cr 0,5Mo 210 200 180 170 160 150 140
2,25Cr 1Mo 240 230 220 210 200 190 180
(1) The values at Rp0,2 for temperatures  250°C are for guidance only.
7.7.3 As an alternative to the systematic verification of the 7.9 Non-destructive examination

required Rp0,2 as in [7.7.2], it may be agreed with the indi-
vidual steelmakers to carry out an adequate program of tests 7.9.1 Unless otherwise required or agreed, at least the fol-
or to adequately check the statistical data of the current pro- lowing non-destructive examinations are to be carried out:
duction. • forgings are to be examined by the magnetic particle
method
7.7.4 The values of the estimated average stress to rupture • drum forgings and other similar important forgings hav-
in 100.000 hours are given, for design purposes only, in Sec ing thickness higher than 10 mm are to be examined by
1, Tab 26. ultrasonic method.
7.8 Mechanical tests 8 Ferritic steel forgings for low

temperature service
7.8.1 With the exception of drums (see [7.8.2]), at least one
set of specimens for mechanical tests (1 tension and unless
8.1 Scope
otherwise required 3 Charpy V-notch specimens for type
HB and HD) is to be taken from each forging [1.7.2] or 8.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to ferritic steel
batch [1.7.3]; unless otherwise agreed and when possible, forgings intended for welded structural use as in the con-
specimens are to be taken in the longitudinal direction. struction of structures, vessels, plants and piping systems for
low temperature service or when, irrespective of the service
7.8.2 For drum forgings, one set of specimens for mechani- conditions, they are required to satisfy specified impact
cal tests is to be taken from each open end. properties at temperatures lower than 20°C.
When, depending on the manufacturing procedure, the test
samples are to be detached before heat treatment, they are
transport of liquefied gases or fluids at low temperature, ref-
to be heat treated with the forging they represent.
erence is to be made to the Society’s Rules for the Classifi-
The specimens are to be cut in the circumferential direc- cation of Steel Ships Part D, Chapter 9, and, to the
tion. Where the tensile test is carried out on specimens International Code for the Construction and Equipment of
taken at both ends of a drum forging, the variation in tensile Ships Carrying Liquefied Gases in Bulk (IGC Code).
strength Rm on the two tests is not to exceed 70 N/mm2. For gas fuelled ships, reference is to be made to Society
7.8.3 For tensile tests at elevated temperatures, the require- for Ships using Gases or other Low-flash point Fuels (IGF
ments of [7.7.2] apply. Code).
8.2 Steel grades and relevant properties nese and nickel alloy steels.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 3
The steel specification relevant to chemical composition, mechanical properties and heat treatment are to be submit-
mechanical properties and heat treatment is to be submitted ted for consideration and approval.
for approval.
9.1.3 Stainless steels may also be used for shafts and
Reference can be made to the steel designation, chemical machinery applications under Article [3].
composition and mechanical properties relevant to the
rolled materials to which the forgings are intended to be 9.1.4 In the case of applications involving the storage and
welded, i.e. in particular, for these Rules, to Sec 1, Tab 27 transport of liquefied gases or fluids at low temperature, ref-
and Sec 1, Tab 29 for carbon and carbon-manganese steels, erence is to be made to the Society’s Rules for the Classifi-
and to Sec 1, Tab 28 and Sec 1, Tab 31 for nickel alloy cation of Steel Ships Part D, Chapter 9, and, to the
steels. International Code for the Construction and Equipment of
Ships Carrying Liquefied Gases in Bulk (IGC Code).
8.3 Manufacture For gas fuelled ships, reference is to be made to Society Rule
Note NR 529, and, to the International Code of Safety for
8.3.1 Approval Ships using Gases or other Low-flash point Fuels (IGF Code).
tured at works which are approved by the Society. Provi- 9.2 Steel grades and relevant properties
9.2.1 The requirements apply to austenitic Cr-Ni steels.
8.4 Condition of supply The general requirements relevant to designation, chemical
composition, mechanical properties and condition of sup-
8.4.1 Forgings are to be normalised, normalised and tem- ply are specified in Sec 1, [9] relevant to rolled products.
pered or quenched and tempered, depending on the grade
of steel, as indicated in Sec 1, [7.4.1] or in the approved 9.2.2 Forgings made in stainless steels other than austenitic
specification. and intended for blade bolts, CP mechanisms, shaft bolts,
strut-pod connecting bolts of ships having class notation ICE
CLASS IA SUPER, ICE CLASS IA, ICE CLASS IB or ICE
CLASS IC are to be Charpy V-notch impact, tested at 10°C
8.5.1 At least one set of specimens for mechanical tests with 20 J minimum average energy in longitudinal direction.
(1 tensile and 3 Charpy V-notch specimens) is to be taken
from each forging [1.7.2] or batch [1.7.3]; unless otherwise 9.2.3 Other types of stainless steels (ferritic-austenitic or
agreed and when possible, specimens are to be cut in the martensitic), complying with international or national spec-
longitudinal direction. ifications, may be accepted for particular applications (e.g.
[9.1.3]); their relevant specification is to be submitted for
The impact tests are generally to be carried out at the mini- approval.
mum temperature stated for the type of steel; a higher test
temperature may be agreed with the Society, however,
depending on the design temperature of the individual 9.3 Manufacture
applications.
9.3.1 Approval
8.6 Non-destructive examination tured at works which are approved by the Society. Provi-
8.6.1 Unless otherwise required or agreed, forgings are to
be examined by the magnetic particle method.
When the above forgings have thickness higher than 10mm,
they are also to be subjected to ultrasonic examination. 9.4.1 Sampling and mechanical tests are to be in compli-
ance with the requirements of [3.7] and [7.8], as appropri-
9 Stainless steel forgings ate, depending on the application (machinery or pressure
systems).
9.1 Scope Unless otherwise required, impact tests on the austenitic
grades are to be performed for a design temperature lower
9.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to stainless than 105°C and are to be carried out at 196°C.
steel forgings intended for construction of cargo and storage The results of the tests are to be in accordance with the
tanks, pressure vessels, and piping fittings for chemical requirements of Sec 1, [9.6.1].
and/or low temperature applications.
9.1.2 Austenitic stainless steels are suitable for use at both
elevated and low temperatures where the design tempera- 9.5.1 Unless otherwise required or agreed, forgings are to
ture is not lower than 165°C. be examined by the liquid penetrant test and/or by the ultra-
When austenitic stainless steels are proposed for use at ele- sonic method, as appropriate, depending on the applica-
vated temperatures, details of chemical composition, tion.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 3
9.6 Corrosion tests priate, may be required to be carried out on one piece per
batch.
9.6.1 For forgings intended for chemicals, the corrosion
tests, ASTM A262 Practice E (copper- copper sulphate sul- Tests in accordance with other recognised standards may be
phuric) or ASTM A262 Practice C (nitric acid test), as appro- accepted subject to the agreement of the Society.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 4
SECTION 4 STEEL CASTINGS
1 General 1.2.2 Flame and arc-air shaping

All flame cutting, scarfing or arc-air gouging to remove sur-
1.1 Scope plus metal is to be undertaken in accordance with rec-
ognised good practice and is to be carried out before the
final heat treatment. Suitable preheating is to be applied
1.1.1 The requirements of this Section apply to steel cast-
when necessary due to the chemical composition and/or
ings intended for hull, structural applications, offshore con-
dimensions of the casting. If necessary, the affected areas
struction, machinery, propellers, boilers, pressure vessels
are to be either machined or ground smooth.
and piping systems.
This Article specifies the requirements common to all the 1.2.3 Welding of castings
above-mentioned steel products, while the specific require- When two or more castings are joined by welding to form a
ments for the various applications are indicated in Articles composite component, the proposed welding procedure is
[2] to [8]. to be submitted for approval. Welding procedure qualifica-
tion tests may be required.
1.1.2 Mass productions
For mass produced small castings, the Manufacturer may
1.3 Approval
adopt particular procedures for testing and inspection sub-
ject to the approval of the Society.
1.3.1 Manufacturers of steel castings are to be recognised
by the Society in accordance with the Society’s Rule Note
1.1.3 Other specifications
NR 320.
Steel castings complying with international, national or pro-
prietary specifications may be accepted by the Society, pro- 1.3.2 When required in the relevant articles, provisions for
vided such specifications give reasonable equivalence to approval of manufacturing process are given in the Society’s
the requirements of these Rules and other relevant Society’s Rule Note NR 480.
Rules or are approved for a specific application.
Such products, when accepted, are designated by their stan- 1.4 Quality of materials
dard identification or as agreed at the time of the approval.
1.4.1 All castings are to be free from surface or internal
Unless otherwise agreed, survey and certification of steel defects which would be prejudicial to their proper applica-
castings complying with other specifications are to be car- tion in service.
ried out in accordance with the requirements of these Rules
and other relevant Society’s Rules.
1.1.4 Special requirements
1.5.1 All castings are to be made from killed steel and the
Special requirements may be specified in the case of appli-
chemical composition is to be appropriate for the type of
cations intended for dangerous substances or for particu-
steel and the mechanical properties specified for the cast-
larly severe service conditions.
ings.
In the case of applications involving the storage and trans-
port of liquefied gases or fluids at low temperature, the ref- 1.5.2 The chemical composition of each heat is to be deter-
erence is to be made to Society’s Rules for the Classification mined by the manufacturer on a sample taken preferably
of Steel Ships Pt D, Ch 9, and, to the International Code for during the pouring of the heat. When multiple heats are
the Construction and Equipment of Ships Carrying Liquefied tapped into a common ladle, the ladle analysis shall apply.
Gases in Bulk (IGC Code).
1.5.3 Unless otherwise required suitable grain refining ele-
For gas fuelled ships, reference is to be made to Society ments such as aluminium may be used at the discretion of
Rule Note NR 529, and, to the International Code of Safety the manufacturer. The content of such elements is to be
for Ships using Gases or other Low-flash point (IGF Code). reported.
1.2 Manufacture 1.5.4 Carbon equivalent (CEQ) values, when used in this
Section, are calculated using the following formula:
1.2.1 Manufacturing process Mn Cr + Mo + V Ni + Cu
C EQ = C + --------- + -------------------------------- + --------------------- %
The steel is to be manufactured as detailed in Sec 1, [1.2.1]. 6 5 15
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 4
1.6 Heat treatment used. When cast samples are used, they are to be properly
identified and heat treated together with the castings of the
1.6.1 Castings are to be suitably heat treated to obtain the batch.
required mechanical properties.
1.7.4 Preparation of test specimens
Heat treatment is to be carried out in suitable furnaces. See
Ch 1, Sec 1, [2.3.1]. For the preparation of test specimens and relevant testing
procedure, reference is made to the applicable require-
1.6.2 The heat treatment conditions foreseen are given in ments of Ch 1, Sec 2.
the Articles relevant to the various castings.
1.7.5 Tensile test
When more than one heat treatment condition is specified,
the choice of the supply condition, unless otherwise The results of the tensile test at ambient temperature are to
required, is left to the Manufacturer; the condition of supply comply with the requirements of the appropriate Tables, or
is always to be mentioned in the testing documentation. of the relevant approved specification when steels other
than those specified in these Rules are accepted.
1.6.3 If a casting is locally reheated or any straightening Reference is made to [5.7] for the properties at elevated
operation is performed after the final heat treatment consid- temperatures and their verification, when required.
eration is to be given to a subsequent stress relieving heat
treatment. 1.7.6 Impact test
The average value of a set of 3 tests is to comply with the
1.6.4 The foundry is to maintain records of heat treatment average value required in the appropriate Tables, or in the
identifying the furnace used, furnace charge, date, tempera- approved specification when steels other than those speci-
ture and time at temperature. The records are to be pre- fied in these Rules are accepted.
sented to the surveyor and copies provided on request.
Only one individual value may be lower than the average
value required, provided that it is not less than 70% of it.
The minimum average values for impact tests indicated in
1.7.1 General the Tables are relevant to standard specimens 10x10mm2.
The requirements relevant to the type and number of tests to
1.7.7 Hardness tests
be carried out are given in the Articles relevant to the vari-
ous applications. Where a batch testing procedure is used, hardness tests of
Brinell type may be required, at the discretion of the Sur-
Test material sufficient for the required tests and for possible veyor, to check the homogeneity of the batch.
re-test purposes is to be provided for each casting or batch
of castings. 1.7.8 Re-test procedures
The test material is to have a thickness of not less than Samples for possible re-tests are to be taken as near as prac-
30mm. ticable to the specimens used for the original tests but alter-
natively may also be taken from another test position or
The test samples are not to be detached from the casting
sample representative of the casting or batch of castings.
until the specified heat treatment has been completed and
they have been properly identified. Reference is made to Ch 1, Sec 1, [3.5].
For tensile re-test procedure, reference is made to Ch 1, Sec 2,
[2.3].
At least one test sample is to be provided for each casting.
Unless otherwise agreed these test samples are to be either For Charpy V-notch re-test procedure, reference is made to
integrally cast or gated to the castings. Ch 1, Sec 2, [4.4].
Where the casting is of complex design or where the fin-

ished mass exceeds 10 tonnes, two test samples are to be
1.8 Pressure test
provided.
1.8.1 Castings subject to internal pressure are to be sub-
Where large castings are made from two or more casts, jected to a hydraulic pressure test in compliance with the
which are not mixed in a ladle prior to pouring, two or conditions laid down in the applicable parts of the Rules.
more test samples are to be provided corresponding to the The test pressure is to be measured by means of a suitable
number of casts involved. These are to be integrally cast at calibrated pressure gauge.
locations as widely separated as possible.
The test is to be performed on the casting in the finished
1.7.3 Batch testing condition and before the application of any coating which
A batch testing procedure may be adopted for small cast- may conceal the effect of the test.
ings of about the same size, each of which is under 1000 kg Unless otherwise agreed, the test of castings is to be carried
in mass, made from one cast and heat treated in the same out in the presence of the Surveyor.
furnace charge.
A report confirming the satisfactory results of the pressure
The test samples may be cut from one or more castings of tests and indicating the relevant testing conditions is to be
the batch or, alternatively, separately cast samples may be issued by the Manufacturer.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 4
1.9 Visual and dimensional examination 1.10.3 Radiographic examination

Radiographic examination is to be carried out by the Manu-
1.9.1 Visual examination facturer at positions as indicated on the approved plans
and, in areas deemed susceptible to casting defects; welded
All castings are to be cleaned and adequately prepared for joints and adjacent zones are also to be checked.
examination; suitable methods include pickling, caustic
All radiographs are to be submitted to the Surveyor for
cleaning, wire brushing, local grinding, and shot or sand
acceptance.
blasting.
1.10.4 Ultrasonic examination
The surfaces are not to be hammered or treated in any way
which may obscure defects. Ultrasonic examination is to be carried out following the
final heat treatment at positions as indicated in [1.10.3].
All products are to be submitted by the Manufacturer to Unless otherwise required, this examination is to be carried
visual examination; where applicable, this is to include the out by the Manufacturer but Surveyors may request to be
examination of internal surfaces and bore. present.
All castings are to be presented to the Surveyor for visual
examination. 1.11 Repair by grinding
1.11.1 Defective parts of material may be removed by
1.9.2 Verification of dimensions grinding, or by chipping and grinding or by arc-air gouging
The verification of dimensions and tolerances is the respon- and grinding. When arc-air gouging is used, suitable pre-
sibility of the Manufacturer. heating is to be applied when necessary due to the chemi-
cal composition and/or the dimensions of the casting.
Checks of dimensions for verification of compliance with All grooves shall have a bottom radius of approximately
the approved plans are, in general, required for important three times the groove depth and shall be smoothly blended
castings, to the Surveyor’s satisfaction. to the surface area with a finish equal to that of the adjacent
surface.
1.10 Non-destructive examination Shallow grooves or depressions resulting from the removal
of defects are not to cause appreciable reduction in the
strength of the casting and may be accepted with the agree-
1.10.1 General
ment of the Society.
When required by the applicable Parts of the Rules, the Elimination of the defective part of material is to be verified
approved plans, the approved procedures for welded com- by a magnetic particle or liquid penetrant examination.
posite components or, in specific cases, the Surveyor,
The manufacturer is to maintain records detailing the extent
appropriate non-destructive tests are to be carried out in
and location of repairs made to each casting. The records
accordance with a recognized standard and the results
are to be presented to the surveyor and copies provided on
reported by the Manufacturer.
request.
Sec 1, [3.6]. 1.12 Repair by welding
The extent of testing and acceptance criteria are to be 1.12.1 Before welding is started, full details of the extent
agreed with the Society. The IACS Recommendation No.69 and location of the repair, the proposed welding procedure
is regarded as an example of an acceptable standard. specification, heat treatment and subsequent inspection
procedures are to be submitted to the Society for approval.
The Manufacturer is to provide the Surveyor with a report
confirming that the required examinations have been car- 1.12.2 Large castings in carbon or carbon-manganese
ried out without revealing significant defects; including ref- steels, alloy steel castings and all steel castings when
erence of the testing standard and the agreed acceptance deemed necessary for major repairs are to be given a suit-
criteria. able preliminary heat treatment prior to welding.
1.12.3 The excavations are to be suitably shaped to allow

1.10.2 Magnetic and liquid penetrant examination
good access for welding. The resulting grooves are to be
Magnetic particle or liquid penetrant examination is to be subsequently ground smooth and complete elimination of
carried out when the castings are in the finished condition. the defective material is to be verified by magnetic particle
or liquid penetrant testing.
Where current flow methods are used for magnetisation,
particular care is to be taken to avoid damaging finished 1.12.4 All castings in alloy steels and all castings for crank-
machined surfaces by contact burns from the prods. shafts are to be suitably pre-heated prior to welding. Cast-
ings in carbon or carbon-manganese steel may also require
Unless otherwise agreed, these tests are to be carried out in to be pre-heated depending on their chemical composition
the presence of the Surveyor. and the dimensions and position of the weld repairs.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 4
1.12.5 The welding consumables used are to be of an Modified arrangements for identification and marking may
appropriate composition, giving a weld deposit with be agreed with the Society in the case of small castings
mechanical properties similar and in no way inferior to manufactured in large numbers.
those of the parent castings. Welding procedure qualifica-
tion tests are to be carried out by the manufacturer to 1.14 Documentation and certification
demonstrate that satisfactory mechanical properties can be
obtained after final heat treatment or stress relieving heat 1.14.1 The testing documentation indicated in Ch 1, Sec 1,
treatment, as applicable. [4.2.1] is to be issued and is to include all the information,
as appropriate.
1.12.6 Welding is to be done under cover in positions free
from draughts and adverse weather conditions by qualified The ladle analysis is to include the content of refining and
welders with adequate supervision, in accordance with the alloying elements as applicable.
approved welding procedure specification. As far as possi- Where applicable, the reports relevant to the non-destruc-
ble, all welding is to be carried out in the downhand (flat) tive examination [1.10.1], weld repair [1.12] and pressure
position. test [1.8.1] are to be enclosed with the testing documenta-
tion.
1.12.7 After welding has been completed the castings are
to be given either a suitable heat treatment in accordance
with [1.6] at a temperature of not less than 550°C. The type
2 Castings for hull, offshore structures
of heat treatment employed will be dependent on the chem- and welded components in general
ical composition of the casting and the dimensions, posi-
tions and nature of the repairs. 2.1 Scope
1.12.8 Subject to prior agreement with the Society, consid- 2.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to steel cast-
eration may be given to the omission of postweld heat treat- ings intended for hull structures, offshore structures and
ment or to the acceptance of local stress-relieving heat welded components in general, where design and accep-
treatment where the repaired area is small and machining of tance tests are related to mechanical properties at ambient
the casting has reached an advanced stage. temperature.
1.12.9 On completion of heat treatment the weld repairs

and adjacent material are to be ground smooth and exam-
2.2 Steel grades
ined by magnetic particle or liquid penetrant testing. Sup-
2.2.1 Castings are divided into the qualities Normal and
plementary examination by ultrasonics or radiography may
Special depending on chemical composition and mechani-
also be required depending on the dimensions and nature
cal properties.
of the original defect. Satisfactory results are to be obtained
from all forms of non-destructive testing used. The steel grades are identified by the letter G, followed by a
number indicating the minimum specified tensile strength
1.12.10 The manufacturer is to maintain full records detail- Rm (in N/mm2) and by the symbol 1 for Normal quality or 2
ing the extent and location of repairs made to each casting for Special quality.
and details of weld procedures and heat treatment applied
for repairs. These records are to be available to the Surveyor 2.2.2 Limits on the specified minimum tensile strength and
and copies provided on request. quality to be used for hull structures are given in the Soci-
ety’s Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships Part B and/or
required by the Society on the relevant approved plans.
In particular, the use of the grades G480 and G520 may be
1.13.1 The Manufacturer is to adopt a system of identifica- restricted to quality 2 and to specific conditions.
tion which will enable all finished castings to be traced to
the original cast and their manufacturing. 2.2.3 Where it is proposed to use alloy steels, the specifica-
tion of the steel grade (chemical composition, heat treat-
Before acceptance, all castings which have been tested and ment and mechanical properties) is to be submitted for
inspected with satisfactory results are to be marked with the approval.
following details:
a) Manufacturer’s name or trade mark 2.3 Manufacture
b) Society’s brand
2.3.1 Approval
c) identification mark for the grade of steel Castings having a mass above 1000kg are to be manufac-
d) identification number, cast number or other marking tured at works which are approved by the Society. Provi-
which will enable the history of the fabrication of the sions are given in [1.3].
casting to be traced
e) Society’s marks including Society’s certificate number,
f) test pressure, where applicable. 2.4.1 All castings are to be made from killed steel.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 4
2.4.2 Suitable grain refining elements such as aluminium, 2.5.2 Alloy steel castings are to be supplied in the condi-
niobium or vanadium are to be added to Quality 2 steels. tion stated in the approved specification.
2.4.3 The chemical composition on ladle analysis of car-
bon or carbon-manganese steels is to comply with the limits
2.6.1 Tab 2 gives the minimum requirements for yield
given in Tab 1 or, where applicable the requirements of the
stress, elongation and reduction of area corresponding to
different strength levels. Where it is proposed to use a steel
with a specified minimum tensile strength intermediate to
Table 1 : Chemical composition those given, corresponding minimum values for the other
tensile properties may be obtained by interpolation.
Permitted residual
Composition (%) Charpy V-notch impact test requirements applicable to cast-
elements (%)
ings for offshore structures and components are to be
C max 0,23 Cu max 0,30
agreed with the Society in accordance with the Society’s
Mn 0,50 - 1,60 Cr max 0,30 Offshore Rules.
Si max 0,60 Ni max 0,40
P max 0,040 Mo max 0,15 2.7 Mechanical tests
S max 0,040 Total max 0,80
2.7.1 The number of test samples required is given in
2.4.4 Maximum carbon equivalent (Ceq) value specified [1.7.2] for individual testing and in [1.7.3] for batch testing.
for castings for offshore structures and components is to be The test specimens for 1 tensile and 3 Charpy V-notch
agreed with the Society. impact tests are to be taken from each test sample.
2.5 Heat treatment 2.8 Non-destructive examination
2.5.1 Carbon or carbon-manganese steel castings are to be 2.8.1 Castings intended for the construction of sternframes,
supplied in one of the following conditions: poop structure, rudders and propeller shaft supports are to
be non-destructively tested by ultrasonic and magnetic
• fully annealed
methods.
• normalised
Other castings are to be examined by non-destructive test
• normalised and tempered at a temperature of not less methods as required by the Society on the approved plans
than 550°C. or, in specific cases, by the Surveyor.
Tensile strength Yield stress Average impact energy (J)

Elongation A5 (%) Reduction of area at + 20°C min (3) (4)
Rm (N/mm2) min. Quality ReH (N/mm2)
min. Z (%) min.
(1) (2) min. V-notch
1 25 40 25
400 200
2 28 45 32
1 22 30 22
440 220
2 26 45 27
1 20 27 20
480 240
2 24 40 25
1 18 25 15
520 260
2 22 40 20
1 15 20 12
560 300
2 20 35 18
1 13 20 10
600 320
2 18 35 15
(1) For intermediate values of the tensile strength Rm, the corresponding properties may be obtained by interpolation.
(2) Unless otherwise agreed, the tensile strength Rm shall not exceed the specified value by more than 150 N/mm2 or 120 N/mm2,
for casting of quality 1 and 2 respectively.
(3) Not applicable to steel castings for offshore structures and components, see [2.6.1].
(4) Not applicable to castings for machinery and non-welded components in general.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 4
3 Castings for machinery and non- • fully annealed

welded components in general • normalised
• normalised and tempered at a temperature of not less
3.1 Scope than 550°C.
3.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to carbon or Castings for components such as engine bedplates, turbines
carbon-manganese steel castings, intended for use in the and other castings in general, where dimensional stability
construction of machinery and non-welded components in and low internal stress level are a concern, are to be given a
general. stress relief heat treatment. This is to be carried out at a tem-
Provisions for castings for anchors are given in Ch 4, Sec 1, perature of not less than 550°C and then cooled in the fur-
[1]. nace to 300°C or lower. When the full annealing or the
tempering of the normalised and tempered steels is fol-
lowed by furnace cooling to 300°C or lower, the stress relief
3.2 Steel grades
treatment is not required.
3.2.1 Castings are divided into the qualities Normal and
Special depending on chemical composition and mechani- 3.6 Mechanical properties
cal properties.
The steel grades are identified by the letter G, followed by a 3.6.1 Tab 2 gives the minimum requirements for yield
number indicating the minimum specified tensile strength stress, elongation and reduction of area corresponding to
Rm (in N/mm2) and by the symbol 1 for Normal quality or 2 different strength levels. Where it is proposed to use a steel
for Special quality. with a specified minimum tensile strength intermediate to
those given, corresponding minimum values for the other
3.2.2 Where it is proposed to use alloy steels, the specifica- tensile properties may be obtained by interpolation.
tion of the steel grade (chemical composition, heat treat- Charpy V-notch impact test requirements applicable to cast-
ment and mechanical properties) is to be submitted for ings for offshore structures and components are to be
approval. agreed with the Society in accordance with the Society’s
Offshore Rules.
3.3 Manufacture
3.3.1 Approval 3.7 Mechanical tests
Castings having a mass above 1000kg are to be manufac-
3.7.1 The number of test samples required is given in
[1.7.2] for individual testing and in [1.7.3] for batch testing.
The test specimens for 1 tensile test is to be taken from each
3.4 Chemical composition test sample.
3.4.1 All castings are to be made from killed steel. 3.8 Non-destructive examination
3.4.2 Suitable grain refining elements such as aluminium,
3.8.1 Ultrasonic examination is to be carried out on the fol-
niobium or vanadium are to be added to Quality 2 steels.
lowing items:
a) piston crowns and cylinder covers
3.4.3 The chemical composition on ladle analysis of car-
bon or carbon-manganese steels is to comply with the limits b) parts of engine bedplates
given in Tab 3 or, where applicable the requirements of the c) turbine casings
d) rudder components.
3.8.2 A magnetic particle examination is to be carried out
Composition (%) Permitted residual elements (%) for the following items:
C max 0,40 Cu max 0,30 a) piston crowns and cylinder covers for engines having a
Mn 0,50 - 1,60 Cr max 0,30 bore size greater than 400 mm
Si max 0,60 Ni max 0,40 b) parts of engine bedplates

P max 0,040 Mo max 0,15 c) turbine casings
Total residuals d) rudder components.
S max 0,040 0,80
(max.)
The parts to be examined and the test procedures are to be
agreed with the Surveyor.
3.5 Heat treatment
Other castings are to be examined by non-destructive test
3.5.1 Castings are to be supplied in one of the following methods as required by the Society on the approved plans,
conditions: or, in specific cases, by the Surveyor.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 4
4 Castings for crankshafts The procedures for ultrasonics examination as well as accept-
ance criteria are to comply with the requirements of the
engine manufacturer and are to be agreed with the Society.
4.1 Scope
4.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to carbon or 5 Castings for boilers, pressure
carbon-manganese steel castings intended for the construc- vessels and systems
tion of semi-built and fully built crankshafts.
5.1 Scope
4.2 Steel grades
5.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to steel cast-
4.2.1 As required in the Society’s Rules for the Classifica- ings intended for the welded construction of boilers, pres-
tion of Steel Ships Pt C, Ch 1, Sec 2, the steel grade specifi- sure vessels, plants and piping systems in general, operating
cation (chemical composition, heat treatment and at temperatures not lower than 0°C.
mechanical properties) is to be submitted for approval when
the engine type approval is processed. 5.1.2 Castings intended for vessels and systems operating at
temperatures lower than 0°C are to comply with the appli-
4.3 Manufacture cable requirements of Article [6] for applications involving
the storage and transport of liquefied gases and those speci-
4.3.1 Approval fied in the Society’s Rules for the Classification of Steel
Castings for crankshafts are to be manufactured at works Ships as appropriate.
which are approved by the Society. Provisions are given in
[1.3]. 5.2 Steel grades
4.4 Chemical composition nese or low alloy steels (Mo and Cr-Mo steels).
4.4.1 All castings are to be made from killed and fine grain The C and C-Mn steels are classed into three groups and are
treated steel. identified by the specified minimum tensile strength Rm (in
N/mm2) 400, 440, 480, followed by the letter P.
4.4.2 The chemical composition on ladle analysis is to Carbon or carbon-manganese steels having a minimum speci-
comply with the requirements of the approved specifica- fied tensile strength Rm greater than the above but without
tion.
exceeding 520 N/mm2 may be accepted, at the discretion of
the Society, on the basis of their detailed specification.
4.5 Heat treatment
4.5.1 Castings are to be supplied in the condition stated in chemical composition into the grades 0,3Mo - 1Cr0,5Mo -
the approved specification. 2,25Cr1Mo - 0,5Cr0,5Mo0,25V.
Castings in carbon or carbon-manganese steels are gener- The figures mean the nominal percentage content of the
ally supplied in one of the following conditions: main alloying elements.
• fully annealed and cooled in the furnace to 300°C or
less 5.3 Manufacture
• normalised and tempered to a temperature of not less
5.3.1 Approval
than 550°C, then cooled in the furnace to 300°C or less.
4.6 Mechanical properties sions are given in [1.3].
requirements of the approved specification. 5.4 Chemical composition
4.7 Mechanical tests comply with the requirements specified in Tab 4 or the
approved specification as applicable.
4.7.1 The number and position of the specimens for
mechanical tests are agreed at the time of approval of the 5.5 Heat treatment
manufacturing process.
5.5.1 Castings are to be supplied in one of the following
4.8 Non-destructive examinations conditions:
• fully annealed
4.8.1 All the surfaces of the casting in the finished condi-
• normalised
tion are to be tested by magnetic particle.
• normalised and tempered
Where applicable this test is to be performed on all flame
cut surfaces not subsequently machined as well. • quenched and tempered.
All the castings are to be tested by ultrasonics. The tempering temperature is to be of not less than 550°C.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 4

grade C Mn Si P max S max Cr Mo V Ni max
400 P 0,23 0,50-1,20 0,60 0,035 0,035 0,30  0,15  
440 P 0,23 0,50-1,20 0,60 0,035 0,035 0,30  0,15  0,40 (1)
480 P  0,25 0,60-1,60 0,60 0,035 0,035 0,30  0,15  0,40 (1)
0,5Mo 0,15-0,23 0,50-1,00 0,30-0,60 0,035 0,035 0,30 0,40-0,60  0,40
1Cr0,5Mo 0,10-0,20 0,50-1,00 0,30-0,60 0,035 0,035 1,00-1,50 0,45-0,65  0,40
2,25Cr1Mo 0,13-0,20 0,50-1,00 0,30-0,60 0,035 0,035 2,00-2,50 0,90-1,20  0,40
0,5Cr0,5Mo0,25V 0,10-0,18 0,40-0,80 0,30-0,60 0,035 0,035 0,70-1,10 0,40-0,60 0,22-0,30 0,40
Residual elements are not to exceed the following limits (%):
for C and C-Mn steels: Cu  0,30; total: Ni + Cu + Cr + Mo  0,80
for alloy steels: Cu  0,30
Average impact
Yield stress ReH Tensile strength Elongation A5 (%) Reduction of area energy (J) at + 20°C
Steel grade
(N/mm2) min. (N/mm2) min. Z (%) min.
V-notch
400 P 200 400 - 550 25 40 27
440 P 230 440 - 590 22 38 27
480 P 250 480 - 630 20 30 27
0,5Mo 245 450 - 600 21 35 25
1Cr 0,5Mo 290 480 - 630 18 35 25
2,25Cr 1Mo 280 500 - 650 18 35 25
0,5Cr 0,5Mo 0,25V 310 500 - 650 17 35 16
Rp0,2 (N/mm2) at a temperature (°C) of

Steel grade
150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
400 P
440 P 210 200 185 160 155 150 135
480 P
0,5Mo 235 225 205 185 175 170 155 145 135 125
1Cr 0,5Mo 200 195 185 160 115
2,25Cr 1Mo 310 305 295 290 280 270 255 240 210 180
0,5Cr 0,5Mo 0,25V 245 300 215 195 145
Note 1: The values at Rp0,2 for temperatures  200°C are for guidance only.
5.6 Mechanical properties 5.7.2 Where, however, a verification of the properties at

elevated temperature (above 200°C) is required, the follow-
ing procedure applies, unless otherwise agreed:
requirements given in Tab 5 or the approved specification,
as applicable. • a tensile test to verify the yield stress is to be performed
at an agreed temperature (in relation to the design tem-
5.7 Mechanical properties at elevated perature) rounded to the nearest multiple of 50°C
temperature
• the test is to be carried out on samples properly taken
5.7.1 The values for the 0,2% proof stress (Rp0,2), at tem- from the castings selected
peratures of 150°C and higher, are given in Tab 6.
The above values are for design purposes only. Their verifi- • the test samples are to be heat treated, as required,
cation is generally not required for material certification. together with the casting they represent
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 4
• the test procedure is to be in compliance with the relevant 6.2 Steel grades
requirements of Ch 1, Sec 2, [2.1] and Ch 1, Sec 2,
[2.2.5] 6.2.1 The requirements apply to carbon-manganese or
• the result of the test is to comply with the yield stress nickel steels specified in [6.2.2] and [6.2.3].
value specified at the test temperature concerned. Where it is proposed to use alternative steel grade, the spec-
ification (chemical composition, heat treatment and
5.7.3 Where figures higher than those shown in Tab 6 and
mechanical properties) is to be submitted for approval.
in accordance with recognised standards are proposed by
the steel Manufacturer, their verification is required and
6.2.2 Carbon-manganese steels are classed into three
procedures similar to those detailed in Sec 1, [6.7.2] are to
groups indicated by the specified minimum tensile strength
be followed in agreement with the Society.
Rm: 400, 440 or 480 N/mm2.
5.7.4 The values of the estimated average stress to rupture Each group is further subdivided into three grades: LD, LE and
in 100 000 hours, for design purposes only, are given in LF, based on the impact test temperature specified at 20°C,
Sec 1, Tab 26. 40°C and 60°C, respectively.
5.8 Mechanical tests 6.2.3 Ni steels are designated according to the chemical
composition into the grades 2,5Ni, 3,5Ni and 9,0Ni. The
5.8.1 The number of test samples required is given in figures mean the Ni nominal percentage content.
[1.7.2] for individual testing and in [1.7.3] for batch testing.
The test specimens for 1 tensile and 3 Charpy V-notch
6.3 Manufacture
impact tests are to be taken from each test sample.
6.3.1 Approval
5.9.1 The castings are to be examined by means of the non- tured at works which are approved by the Society. Provi-
destructive tests required by the applicable Rules or by the sions are given in [1.3].
Society on the approved plans; tests may also be required in
individual cases at the discretion of the Surveyor. 6.4 Chemical composition
6 Ferritic steel castings for low 6.4.1 The chemical composition on ladle analysis is to
temperature service comply with the requirements specified in Tab 7 and Tab 8
or the approved specification as applicable.
6.1 Scope
6.5 Heat treatment
6.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to ferritic steel
castings intended for welded structural use as in the con- 6.5.1 Castings are to be supplied in one of the following
struction of structures, vessels, plants and piping systems for conditions:
low temperature service or when, irrespective of the service • fully annealed
conditions, they are required to satisfy specified impact
properties at temperatures lower than 0°C. • normalised
• normalised and tempered at a temperature of not less
than 550°C
erence is to be made to Society’s Rules for the Classification • quenched and tempered.
of Steel Ships Pt D, Ch 9, and, to the International Code for
the Construction and Equipment of Ships Carrying Liquefied 6.6 Mechanical properties
Gases in Bulk (IGC Code).
For gas fuelled ships, reference is to be made to Society 6.6.1 The mechanical properties are to comply with the
Rule Note NR 529, and, to the International Code of Safety requirements given in Tab 9 and Tab 10 or the approved
for Ships using Gases or other Low-flash point (IGF Code). specification, as applicable.

Steel grade
C max Mn Si P max S max Ni Al tot Others
400 LD-LE-LF 0,23 0,50 - 1,20 0,30 - 0,60 0,035 0,035  0,80  0,020 Cr  0,25
440 LD-LE-LF 0,23 0,60 - 1,30 0,30 - 0,60 0,035 0,035  0,80  0,020 Cu  0,30
Mo  0,15
480 LD-LE-LF 0,25 0,60 - 1,30 0,30 - 0,60 0,035 0,035  0,80  0,020
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 4

Steel grade
C max Mn Si P max S max Ni Others
2,5Ni 0,16 0,50 - 0,80 0,30 - 0,60 0,035 0,035 2,00 - 3,00 Cr  0,25
3,5Ni 0,14 0,50 - 0,80 0,30 - 0,60 0,035 0,035 3,00 - 4,00 Cu  0,30
Mo  0,15
9,0 Ni 0,12 0,50 -0,80 0,30 - 0,60 0,035 0,035 8,50 - 9,50
Yield stress ReH Tensile strength Elongation A5 Reduction of Average impact energy (J) min.
Steel grade
(N/mm2) min. Rm (N/mm2) (%) min. area Z (%) min. Test temp (°C) KV
400 LD  20
400 LE 200 400 - 550 25 40  40 27
400 LF  60
440 LD  20
440 LE 230 440 - 590 22 35  40 27
440 LF  60
480 LD  20
480 LE 250 480 - 630 20 30  40 27
480 LF  60
Table 10 : Nickel steels - Mechanical properties
Yield stress ReH Tensile strength Elongation A5 Reduction of Average impact energy (J) min.
Steel grade
(N/mm2) min. Rm (N/mm2) (%) min. area Z (%) min. Test temp (°C) KV
2,5Ni 275 490 - 640 20 35  70 34
3,5 Ni 275 490 - 640 20 35  95 34
9,0 Ni 490 640 - 790 18 30  196 41
6.7 Mechanical tests 7.1.2 In the case of applications involving the storage and
6.7.1 The number of test samples required is given in erence is made to Society’s Rules for the Classification of
[1.7.2] for individual testing and in [1.7.3] for batch testing. Steel Ships Part D, Chapter 9, and, to the International Code
for the Construction and Equipment of Ships Carrying Liq-
The test specimens for 1 tensile and 3 Charpy V-notch uefied Gases in Bulk (IGC Code).
impact tests are to be taken from each test sample. For gas fuelled ships, reference is to be made to Society
6.8 Non-destructive examination for Ships using Gases or other Low-flash point (IGF Code).
6.8.1 The castings are to be examined by means of the non- 7.2 Steel grades
destructive tests required by the applicable Rules or by the 7.2.1 The requirements apply to austenitic Cr-Ni steels.
Society on the approved plans; tests may also be required in
Note 1: The steels are designated according to the corresponding
individual cases at the discretion of the Surveyor.
AISI type.
Where it is proposed to use alternative steel grade, the spec-
7 Stainless steel castings ification (chemical composition, heat treatment and
mechanical properties) is to be submitted for approval.
7.1 Scope 7.3 Manufacture

7.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to stainless 7.3.1 Approval
steel castings intended for construction of cargo tanks, pres- Castings having a mass above 1000kg are to be manufac-
sure vessels and piping fittings for chemicals and/or low tured at works which are approved by the Society. Provi-
temperature applications. sions are given in [1.3].
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 4
AISI grade Chemical composition (%)

designation C max Mn max Si max P max S max Cr Ni Mo Others
304L 0,030 2,0 1,5 0,040 0,030 17,0 - 21,0 8,0 - 12,0 
304 0,080 2,0 1,5 0,040 0,030 17,0 - 21,0 8,0 - 12,0 
316L 0,030 2,0 1,5 0,040 0,030 17,0 - 21,0 9,0 - 13,0 2,0 - 3,0
316 0,080 2,0 1,5 0,040 0,030 17,0 - 21,0 9,0 - 13,0 2,0 - 3,0
347 0,080 2,0 1,5 0,040 0,030 17,0 - 21,0 9,0 - 13,0  10xC Nb 0,80
AISI grade Yield strength Tensile strength Elong. A5 Reduction of Average impact energy min.
designation Rp1,0 (N/mm2) min. Rm (N/mm2) min. (%) min. area Z (%) min. KV at 196°C
304 L 215 430 26 40 41
304 220 480 26 40 41
316L 215 430 26 40 41
316 240 480 26 40 41
347 215 480 22 35 41
7.4 Chemical composition 7.8 Non-destructive examination

7.4.1 The chemical composition on ladle analysis is to 7.8.1 Unless otherwise agreed, castings are to be tested by
comply with the requirements specified in Tab 11 or the liquid penetrant and/or ultrasonics, as required, depending
approved specification as applicable. on the application.
7.5 Heat treatment 7.9 Corrosion tests
7.5.1 Castings are to be supplied in solution treated condition. 7.9.1 For castings intended for chemicals, the corrosion
tests, ASTM A262 Practice E (Copper-copper sulphate sul-
7.6 Mechanical properties phuric) or ASTM A262 Practice C (Nitric acid test) as appro-
priate, may be required to be carried out on one piece per
7.6.1 The mechanical properties are to comply with the batch.
requirements given in Tab 12 or the approved specification, Tests in accordance with other recognised standards are
as applicable. subject to the agreement of the Society.
7.9.2 These tests are strictly conventional and do not aim at

7.7 Mechanical tests providing data on the effective resistance of the steel to the
7.7.1 The number of test samples required is given in possible corrosion due to the chemicals carried in actual
[1.7.2] for individual testing and in [1.7.3] for batch testing. service conditions.
The test specimens for 1 tensile and 3 Charpy V-notch

impact tests are to be taken from each test sample. 8 Stainless steel castings for propellers
Unless otherwise agreed, impact tests on the austenitic
grades are to be performed for design temperature below 
8.1 Scope
105°C and are to be carried out at 196°C. 8.1.1 The requirements of this Article are applicable to the
In the case of applications involving the storage and trans- moulding, casting, inspection and repair procedures of new
port of liquified gases (as per [1.1.4]), the following applies: cast stainless steel propellers, blades and bosses.
• impact tests are required for castings in steel grades 316
8.1.2 These requirements may also be applied for the repair
and 316L (which contain molybdenum) whatever is the
and inspection of propellers which become damaged
design temperature and are to be carried out at -196°C.
during service.
A reduction of the tests may be granted for design tem-
peratures above -60°C, subject to the agreement of the
Society. 8.2 Manufacture
• impact tests are required for castings in steel grades 304, 8.2.1 Approval
304L, 321 and 347 when the design temperature is Castings propeller are to be manufactured at works which
below -60°C and are to be carried out at -196°C. are approved by the Society. Provisions are given in [1.3].
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 4
Table 13 : Typical chemical composition for steel propeller castings
Alloy type C max. (%) Mn max. (%) Cr (%) Mo (1) max. (%) Ni (%)
Martensitic (12Cr 1Ni) 0,15 2,0 11,5 - 17,0 0,5 max. 2,0
Martensitic (13Cr 4Ni) 0,06 2,0 11,5 - 17,0 1,0 3,5 - 5,0
Martensitic (16Cr 5Ni) 0,06 2,0 15,0 - 17,5 1,5 3,5 - 6,0
Austenitic (19Cr 11Ni) 0,12 1,6 16,0 - 21,0 4,0 8,0 - 13,0
(1) Minimum values are to be in accordance with recognised national or international standards.
Table 14 : Mechanical properties for steel propeller castings
Proof stress Rp0,2 min. Tensile strength Rm Elongation A5 min. Reduction of area Z Charpy V-notch (1)
Alloy type
(N/mm2) min. (N/mm2) (%) min. (%) Energy min. (J)
12Cr 1Ni 440 590 15 30 20
13Cr 4Ni 550 750 15 35 30
16Cr 5Ni 540 760 15 35 30
19Cr 11Ni 180 (2) 440 30 40 
(1) Tests to be made at 0°C for general service and at 10°C when intended for ships with ice class notation.
(2) Rp1,0 value is 205 N/mm2.
8.3 Chemical composition 8.7 Visual and dimensional examination
8.3.1 Typical cast steel propeller alloys are grouped into 8.7.1 The finished castings are to be presented to the sur-
four types depending on their chemical composition as veyor for visual examination and this is to include the bore
given in Tab 13. The chemical composition is to comply and internal surfaces where applicable.
with the requirements of Tab 13 or the approved specifica-
tion, as appropriate. 8.7.2 The dimensions are the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and the report on the dimensional inspection is to be
handed over to the Surveyor, who may requires checks to
8.4 Heat treatment be made in his presence.
8.4.1 Castings made of martensitic stainless steel grades are 8.7.3 Static balancing is to be carried out on all propellers.
to be austenitized and tempered. Castings made of austen- Dynamic balancing is required for propellers running above
itic stainless steel grades are to be solution treated. 500 rpm.
8.5 Mechanical properties 8.8 Definition of skew, severity zones

8.5.1 The mechanical properties are to comply with the 8.8.1 Refer to Ch 3, Sec 1, [3.9].
values given in Tab 14 or the approved specification, as
appropriate.
8.6 Mechanical tests 8.9.1 General
Propeller castings are to be cleaned and adequately pre-
8.6.1 The test samples are to be cast integral with the cast- pared. The dye penetrant examination is to be carried out in
ing represented. The test samples are to be detached from accordance with a recognised standard or an approved pro-
the casting after completion of the final heat treatment and cedure.
by non-thermal procedures.
8.9.2 Extent of examination
8.6.2 One set of tests is to be made on material represent-
The severity zones A as defined above are to be subjected to
ing each casting.
a dye penetrant examination in the presence of the sur-
veyor. In zones B and C the dye penetrant examination is to
8.6.3 As an alternative to [8.5.1], where a number of small
be performed by the manufacturer and may be witnessed by
propellers of about the same size, and less than one meter
the surveyor upon his request.
in diameter, are made from one cast and heat treated in the
same furnace charge, a batch testing procedure may be If repairs have been made either by grinding or by welding
adopted using separately cast test samples of suitable the repaired areas are additionally to be subjected to the
dimensions. At least one set of tests is to be made for each dye penetrant examination independent of their location
multiple of five castings in the batch. and/or severirty zone.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 4
8.9.3 Definitions 8.11 Repair of defects

The following definitions relevant to liquid penetrant indi-
cations apply: 8.11.1
Indication : In the dye penetrant examination an indication Reference is made to [1.11] [1.12].
is the presence of detectable bleed-out of the
penetrant liquid from the material discontinu- 8.11.2 Repair procedures
ities appearing at least 10 minutes after the
Indications exceeding the acceptance standard of Ch 3, Sec
developer has been applied.
1, Tab 5, cracks, shrinkage cavities, sand, slag and other
Linear indication : An indication in which the length is at non-metallic inclusions, blow holes and other discontinu-
least three times the width. ities which may impair the safe service of the propeller are
Circular indication: An indication of circular or elliptical defined as defects and must be repaired.
shape with a length less than three times the
In general the repairs shall be carried out by mechanical
width.
means, e. g. by grinding, chipping or milling. Welding may
Aligned indication: Three or more indications in a line, sep- be applied subject to the agreement of the Society if the rel-
arated by 2mm or less edge to edge. evant requirements detailed hereafter are satisfied.
Relevant indication: An indication that is caused by a con-
dition or type of discontinuity that requires eval- After milling or chipping, grinding is to be applied for such
uation. Only indications which have any defects which are not to be welded. Grinding is to be car-
dimension greter than 1,5 mm shall be consid- ried out in such a manner that the contour of the ground
ered relevant. depression is as smooth as possible. Complete elimination
of the defective material is to be verified by liquid penetrant
Reference area: The reference area is defined as an area of
testing.
100cm² which may be square or rectangular
with the major dimension not exceeding Small defects, such as pores less than 1mm in diameter, can
250 mm. generally be disregarded except where they occur in closely
spaced groups.
8.9.4 Acceptance standard
The surface is to be divided into reference areas of 100cm² Localised pores on the end face or bore of a propeller boss,
as given in the definitions. The indications detected are, which themselves do not affect the strength of the casting,
with respect to their size and number, not to exceed the can be filled with a suitable plastic filler after the appropri-
value given in Tab 15. The area shall be taken in the most ate preparation of the defective area. The foundry is to keep
unfavourable location relative to the indication being evalu- records and details of all castings which have been rectified.
ated.
8.11.3 Repair of defects in zone A
8.10 Radiographic and ultrasonic examination In zone A, repair welding will generally not be allowed
unless specially approved by the Society.
8.10.1 Where serious doubts arise suggesting that the cast-
Grinding can be carried out to an extent which maintains
ings are not free from internal defects, further non-destruc-
the blade thickness of the approved drawings.
tive examinations are to be carried out. The acceptance
criteria are to be agreed between the manufacturer and the The possible repair of defects which are deeper than those
Society in accordance with a recognized standard. referred to above is to be considered by the Society.
Table 15 : Allowable number and size of indications in a reference area of 100 cm2, depending on severity zones
Max. total number Max. number of Max. acceptable value for “a” or
Severity zones Type of indication
of indications each type (1) (2) “” of indications (mm)
A 7 circular 5 4
linear 2 3
aligned 2 3
B 14 circular 10 6
linear 4 6
aligned 4 6
C 20 circular 14 8
linear 6 6
aligned 6 6
(1) Singular circular indications less than 2 mm for zone A and less than 3 mm for the other zones may be disregarded.
(2) The total number of circular indications may be increased to the maximum total number, or part thereof, represented by the
absence of linear/aligned indications.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 4
8.11.4 Repair of defects in zone B Figure 1 : Weld test assembly

Defects that are not deeper than dB = (t/40)mm (t is the min-
imum local thickness in mm according to the Rules) or
~ 300 mm
2mm, whichever is greatest, below minimum local thick-
Discard
ness according to the Rules should be removed by grinding.
Those defects that are deepest than allowable for removal
by grinding may be repaired by welding. Macro specimen
8.11.5 Repair of defects in zone C Tensile test specimen
In zone C, repair welds are generally permitted.

Bend test specimen
~ 400 mm
8.12 Weld repair
CVN test specimens
8.12.1 All weld repairs are to be documented by means of
sketches or photographs showing the location and major
dimensions of the grooves prepared for welding. Weld Bend test specimen
repairs are to be undertaken only when they are considered
to be necessary and have prior agreement of the Surveyor.
Tensile test specimen
8.12.2 Before welding is started, the company concerned

shall prepare and submit to the Society a detailed welding Macro specimen
procedure specification covering the weld preparation,
welding position, welding parameter, welding consum- Discard
ables, preheating and post weld heat treatment and inspec-
tion procedures.
30mm
min.
8.12.3 Areas which are prepared for welding are to be liq-
uid penetrant tested and independent of their location
• Two transverse side bend test specimens shall be pre-
always to be assessed in accordance with criteria for zone A.
pared. The mandrel diameter shall be four times the
thickness except for austenitic steels, in which case the
8.12.4 The scope of tests for the qualification of the weld- mandrel diameter shall be three times the thickness. The
ing procedure is as follows: test specimen when visually inspected after bending,
shall show no surface imperfections greater than 2mm
• A test assembly of minimum 30 mm in thickness is to be in length.
welded following the welding procedure specification;
• Where the base material is impact tested, two sets of
The type of specimens to be prepared are shown in Fig 1. Charpy V impact test specimens are to be taken, one set
• The test assembly is to be visually inspected and liquid with the notch positioned in the center of the weld and
one set with the notch positioned in the fusion line,
penetrant tested. Imperfections shall be assessed in
respectively. The test temperature and average energy
accordance with [8.9]. shall comply with the requirements specified for the
base metal.
• Two macro-sections shall be prepared and etched on
one side to clearly reveal the weld metal, the fusion line • Two flat transverse tensile test specimens shall be pre-
pared and tested. The tensile strength shall meet the
and the heat affected zone. The sections are to be exam-
specified minimum value of the base material.
ined for any imperfections present in the weld metal
and the HAZ. Cracks or crack like imperfections, slag 8.12.5 Welding of areas less than five square centimeters is
inclusions, and pores greater than 3 mm in diameter are to be avoided.
not permitted.
8.12.6 For new propellers, the area of any single repair and
• One of the macro-sections shall be used for HV5 hard- the maximum total area in any zone or region are generally
ness testing. Indentations shall traverse 2mm below the to be kept within the following limits, where S is the blade
surface. At least three individual indentations are to be surface:
made in the weld metal, the HAZ (both sides) and the a) Zone A: not generally permitted
base metal (both sides). The values are to be reported for b) Zone B and C, single: 0,006S or 60 cm2, whichever is
information. the greater
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 4
c) Zone B (leading edge), total: 0,008S or 100 cm2, which- 8.12.12 The foundry is to keep full records detailing the
ever is the greater welding procedure, heat treatment and extent and location
of repairs made on each casting. These records are to be
d) Zone B+C, total: 0,02S or 20 cm2, whichever is the
available for review by the surveyor and copies to be
greater
handed over to the surveyor on his request.
e) Other zones, total for each zone: 0,05S or 50 cm2,
whichever is the greater. Other zones means in particu- 8.13 Identification and marking
lar the following zones:
• for integrally cast propellers:
tion which will enable all castings to be traced back to their
- within the bore heats.
- outer surfaces of the boss to the start of the fillet
8.13.2 In addition to the indications required in Ch 1, Sec 1,
radius
[4.1.1], all castings which have been tested and inspected
- forward and aft end faces of the boss. with satisfactory results are to be marked with the following
• for separately cast propeller blades: details:
- surfaces of the flange to the start of the fillet a) Manufacturer‘s mark
radius. b) grade of cast material
c) heat number, casting number or another mark enabling
8.12.7 All weld repairs are to be made by qualified welders the manufacturing process to be traced back
following qualified procedures.
d) number of the Society’s certificate
8.12.8 Welding is to be done under cover in conditions e) skew angle if in excess of 25°; see Ch 3, Sec 1, [3.9.1].
free from draughts and adverse weather.
8.13.3 The Manufacturer is to supply the Surveyor with a
8.12.9 Metal arc welding with electrodes of filler wire used certificate containing the following details:
in the qualification procedure tests is to be used. The weld- a) purchaser and order number
ing consumables are to be stored and handled in accord- b) shipbuilding project number, if known
ance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. The groove
prepared for welding are to be ground smooth and com- c) description of casting with drawing number
plete elimination of the defective material is to be verified d) diameter, number of blades, pitch, direction of turning
by liquid penetrant testing. Slag, undercuts and other imper- e) grade of alloy and chemical composition of each heat
fections are to be removed before depositing the next run.
f) heat or casting number
8.12.10 After weld repair, the castings made of martensitic g) final weight
stainless steel are to be furnace re-tempered. Subject to h) results of non-destructive tests and details of test proce-
prior approval, however, local stress relieving may be con- dure, where applicable
sidered for minor repairs. i) results of the mechanical tests
8.12.11 When welding operations are completed, includ- j) casting identification number
ing stress relief heat treatment, welds are to be ground k) skew angle for high skew propellers; see Ch 3, Sec 1,
smooth for visual examination and liquid penetrant testing. [3.9.1].
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 5
SECTION 5 IRON CASTINGS
1 General 1.4 Quality of castings

1.4.1 Castings are to be free from surface or internal defects
1.1 Scope which would be prejudicial to their proper application in
service.
1.1.1 The requirements of this Section apply to grey lamel-
lar graphite (GG) and spheroidal graphite (SG) iron castings, 1.5 Visual, dimensional and non-destructive
to be used for the construction of ship structures, machin- examination
ery, boilers, pressure vessels and piping systems.
The use of cast iron components and the types of cast iron 1.5.1 Reference is made to the general provisions given in
permitted are either regulated by the Sections of the Rules Ch 1, Sec 1, [3.6].
relevant to the construction of the above-mentioned com-
1.5.2 All castings are to be cleaned and adequately pre-
ponents, or stipulated in each case.
pared for examination. The surfaces are not to be ham-
This Article specifies the requirements common to all the mered or treated in any way which may obscure defects.
above cast iron products, while the appropriate specific
requirements are indicated in Articles [2] and [3]. 1.5.3 Before acceptance, all castings are to be visually
examined including, where applicable, the examination of
1.1.2 Mass production internal surfaces.
For mass produced small castings, the Manufacturer may 1.5.4 Supplementary examination of castings by suitable
adopt modified procedures for testing and inspection sub- non-destructive testing may be required by the Surveyor.
ject to the approval of the Society.
1.5.5 Dimensions, tolerances and their verification are the
responsibility of the Manufacturer.
1.2 Casting designation
1.5.6 When requested in the relevant parts of the Rules,
1.2.1 The designations used in these Rules are as follows: castings are to be pressure tested before final acceptance.
These tests are to be carried out in the presence of the Sur-
a) a first symbol depending on the type of cast iron:
veyor.
“GG” for grey lamellar graphite
“SG” for spheroidal or nodular graphite 1.6 Repair of defects
b) a second symbol representing the value of the minimum 1.6.1 At the discretion of the Surveyor, small surface blem-
specified tensile strength Rm, in N/mm2. ishes may be removed by grinding.
1.6.2 Subject to the prior approval of the Surveyor, local

1.3 Manufacture porosity may be rectified by impregnation with a suitable
plastic filler, provided that the extent of the porosity is such
1.3.1 All castings are to be made by foundries recognised that it does not adversely affect the strength of the casting.
by the Society as per Ch 1, Sec 1, [2.1.1]. For this purpose
the Society may request to proceed with a preliminary visit 1.6.3 Repairs by welding are generally not permitted. How-
of the premises and may ask for preliminary tests. ever, in certain circumstances and in particular when the
mechanical strength of the casting is not involved, a repair
1.3.2 Suitable mechanical methods are to be employed for by welding may be considered.
the removal of surplus material from castings. Thermal cut- In such case, all details of the proposed repair together with
ting processes (flame cutting, arc-air cutting) are not accept- the welding procedure foreseen are to be submitted to the
able, except as a preliminary operation prior to mechanical Society for examination and approval before starting the
methods. repair.
1.3.3 In connection with [1.1.2] the Manufacturer is to 1.7 Chemical composition

carry out any tests necessary to prove the quality of the pro-
totype castings and is also to make periodical examinations 1.7.1 The chemical composition of the iron used is left to
to verify the continued efficiency of the manufacturing tech- the discretion of the Manufacturer, who is to ensure that it is
nique. The Surveyor is to be given the opportunity to wit- suitable to obtain the mechanical properties specified for
ness these tests. the castings.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 5
1.8 Condition of supply 1.11 Documentation and certification
1.8.1 Except as required in [1.8.2], castings may be sup- 1.11.1 The testing documentation indicated in Ch 1, Sec 1,
plied in either the as cast or the heat treated condition. [4.2.1] is to be issued by the Foundry and is to include all
the information, as appropriate.
1.8.2 For certain applications such as elevated temperature Where applicable, the reports relevant to the non-destruc-
service, or where dimensional stability is important, cast- tive examination and pressure test are to be enclosed with
ings may be required to be given a suitable tempering or the testing documentation.
stress relieving heat treatment. This is to be carried out after
any refining heat treatment and before machining.
2 Grey iron castings
1.9 Sampling and testing 2.1 Scope
1.9.1 Test material sufficient for the required tests and pos- 2.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to grey iron
sible re-tests is to be provided for each casting or batch of castings (GG iron castings).
castings. The general requirements specified in Article [1] are also to
be complied with, as appropriate.
1.9.2 Where separately cast test samples are used, they are
to be cast in moulds made from the same type of material as
that used for the castings and are to be taken towards the 2.2 Mechanical tests
end of pouring of the castings. The samples are not to be
stripped from the moulds until the metal temperature is 2.2.1 Unless otherwise agreed with the Society, separately
below 500°C. cast test samples are to be used in the form of bars of
30 mm in diameter and of a suitable length; when two or
more test samples are cast simultaneously in a single
1.9.3 Where castings are supplied in the heat treated con- mould, the bars are to be at least 50 mm apart as given in
dition, the test samples are to be heat treated together with Fig 1.
the castings which they represent. For cast-on samples, the
sample is not to be cut off from the casting until the heat In the case of specific components, test samples of other
treatment is completed. dimensions may be specially required.
2.2.2 Integrally cast samples may be used when a casting is

1.9.4 All test samples are to be suitably marked to identify
more than 20 mm thick and its mass exceeds 200 kg, sub-
them with the castings which they represent.
ject to agreement between the Manufacturer and the pur-
chaser. The type and location of the sample are to be
1.9.5 Where the results of a tensile or impact test do not selected to provide approximately the same cooling condi-
comply with the requirements, the re-test procedure indi- tions as for the casting it represents and are subject to agree-
cated in Ch 1, Sec 2 is to be applied. ment as well.
1.10 Identification and marking Figure 1 : Test sample for grey cast iron
ø 50
1.10.1 All castings which have been tested and inspected
with satisfactory results are to be marked with the following
50
details:
c) identification mark for material designation, as indi-

L
cated in [1.2]
d) cast number or other marking which will enable the his-

tory of the fabrication of the casting to be traced
e) test pressure, where applicable

50
f) additional optional marks such as file number and code

of the local inspection office, Surveyor’s personal brand. 50 50
Modified arrangements for identification and marking of ø 30+20

small castings manufactured in large numbers may be
agreed. Dimensions in millimetres
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 5
2.2.3 With the exception of [2.2.5] a batch consists of the 3.1.2 The general requirements specified in Article [1] are
castings poured from a single ladle of metal; provided that also to be complied with, as appropriate.
they are all of similar type and dimensions. A batch is not
normally to exceed 2 tonnes of fettled castings and a single 3.2 Manufacture and condition of supply
casting constitutes a batch if its mass is 2 tonnes or more.
3.2.1 The manufacturing process is be approved for cast-
2.2.4 With the exception of [2.2.6] at least one test sample ings intended for crankshafts.
is to be provided for each batch of castings.
3.2.2 In addition to the general requirements in [1.8.2], a
2.2.5 For continuous melting of the same grade of cast iron ferritising heat treatment is to be performed for the special
in large tonnages the mass of a batch may be increased to qualities SG 350 and SG 400.
the output of two hours of pouring.
3.2.3 Where it is proposed to locally harden the surfaces of
2.2.6 If one grade of grey cast iron is melted in large quan- a casting full details of the proposed procedure and specifi-
tities and if production is carefully monitored by systematic cation are to be submitted to the Society for approval.
checking of the melting process, such as chill testing, chem-
ical analysis or thermal analysis, test samples may be taken 3.3 Mechanical tests
at longer intervals as agreed with the Surveyor.
3.3.1 The test samples are generally to be one of the stan-
2.2.7 One tensile test specimen is to be prepared from dard types detailed in Fig 2, Fig 3 and Fig 4, with a thick-
each test sample. For 30 mm diameter samples, the speci- ness of 25 mm.
men is to be machined to the dimensions as shown in Ch 1, However, test samples of other dimensions, as detailed in
Sec 2, [2.1.7]. In the case of test samples of other dimen- Fig 2 to Fig 4, may be required in some special cases.
sions, the tensile test specimens are to be machined to
agreed dimensions. 3.3.2 At least one test sample is to be provided for each
casting and unless otherwise agreed may be either gated to
2.2.8 All tensile tests are to be carried out in accordance the casting or separately cast. Alternatively test material of
with test procedures given in Ch 1, Sec 2, [2]. Unless other- other suitable dimensions may be provided integral with the
wise agreed all tests are to be carried out in the presence of casting.
the Surveyor.
For large castings where more than one ladle of treated
metal is used, additional test samples are to be provided so
2.3 Mechanical properties as to be representative of each ladle used.
2.3.1 Only the tensile strength is to be determined and the Figure 2 : Type A test samples (U type)
results obtained from the tests are to comply with the mini-
mum value specified for the castings supplied. The value V Z
selected for the specified minimum tensile strength is to be
not less than 200 N/mm2 and not greater than 350 N/mm2.
In any event it is to be in accordance with any requirements
indicated by the Society on the approved drawings or in the
Rules dealing with the relevant parts.
The fractured surfaces of all tensile test specimens are to be
granular and grey in appearance. Y
2.3.2 Hardness tests may be required in specific cases as a

check of homogeneity and are to be performed after the test
area has been skinned. R = 5mm
X
The measured hardness is generally to be between 160 and
220 Brinell units.
U 3" taper
3 Spheroidal or nodular graphite iron
castings Table 1 : Type A test samples (U type)
Standard Alternative samples when

3.1 Scope Dimensions
sample (mm) specially required (mm)
3.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to spheroidal U 25 12 50 75
or nodular graphite iron castings (SG cast irons) intended V 55 40 90 125
for use at ambient temperature.
X 40 30 60 65
For other applications, in particular when the castings are
Y 140 80 150 165
intended for service at either low or elevated temperatures,
additional requirements and tests may be necessary. Z to suit testing machine
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 5
Figure 3 : Type B test samples (double U type) Figure 4 : Type C test samples (Y type)
V Z V Z
3" taper
Y
X
R = 5 mm
U U U Y
Table 2 : Type B test samples (double U type)
Dimensions Standard sample (mm)

X
U 25
V 90
U
X 40
Y 100 Table 3 : Type C test samples (Y type)
Z to suit testing machine
Standard Alternative samples
Dimensions sample when specially required
3.3.3 As an alternative to [3.3.2], a batch testing procedure
(mm) (mm)
may be adopted for castings with a fettled mass of 1 tonne
or less. All castings in a batch are to be of similar type and U 25 12 50 75
dimensions, and cast from the same ladle of treated metal. V 55 40 100 125
One separately cast test sample is to be provided for each X 40 25 50 65
multiple of 2 tonnes of fettled castings in each batch. Y 140 135 150 175
Z to suit testing machine
3.3.4 One tensile test specimen is to be prepared from
each test sample and machined to the dimensions given in thickness of mould
40 40 80 80
surrounding test
Ch 1, Sec 2. mini mini mini mini
sample
3.3.5 All tensile tests are to be carried out in accordance

with test procedures given in Ch 1, Sec 2, [2]. Unless other-
wise agreed all tests are to be carried out in the presence of
3.5.1 The metallographic examination is required for cast-
the Surveyor.
ings intended for crankshafts.
Impact tests may be required and in such cases a set of
three test specimens of agreed type is to be prepared from 3.5.2 When required, a representative sample from each
each sample. Where Charpy V-notch test specimens are ladle of treated metal is to be prepared for metallographic
examination.
used, the dimensions and testing procedures are to be in
accordance with Ch 1, Sec 2, [4]. These samples may be taken from the tensile test speci-
mens, or by an alternative procedure agreed with the Sur-
veyor provided they are taken from the ladle they represent
3.4 Mechanical properties towards the end of the casting period.
3.4.1 Unless otherwise agreed only the tensile strength and 3.5.3 The metallographic examination is to show that at
elongation are to be determined. least 90% of the graphite is in a dispersed spheroidal or
nodular form.
3.4.2 The minimum requirements are given in Tab 4. Typi- Details of typical matrix structures are given in Tab 4 for
cal Brinell hardness values are also given in Tab 4 and are information purposes only.
intended for information purpose only.
3.4.3 Castings may be supplied to any specified minimum
tensile strength selected within the general limits detailed in 3.6.1 In addition to the requirements in [1.5], castings
Tab 4 but subject to any additional requirements of the rele- intended for crankshafts are to be subjected to a magnetic
vant Rules of the Society. particle inspection. Crack like indications are not allowed.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 5
Specified minimum Yield strength Impact energy

Elongation Typical Brinell Typical structure of
Qualities tensile strength Rm Rp0,2 (N/mm2) Test temp KV (J)
on 5 d (%) hardness values matrix
(N/mm2) min. (°C) min (2)
Ordinary 370 230 17 120 - 180   Ferrite
400 250 12 140 - 200   Ferrite
500 320 7 170 - 240   Ferrite/Perlite
600 370 3 190 - 270   Ferrite/Perlite
700 420 2 230 - 300   Perlite
800 480 2 250 - 350   Perlite or
Tempered structure
Special 350 220 22 (1) 110 - 170 +20 17 (14) Ferrite
400 250 18 (1) 140 - 200 +20 14 (11) Ferrite
(1) In the case of integrally cast samples, the elongation may be 2 percentage points less.
(2) Average value measured on 3 Charpy V-notch specimens. One result may be below the average value but not lower than the
minimum value shown in brackets
Note 1: For intermediate values of specified minimum tensile strength, the minimum values for 0,2% proof and elongation may be
obtained by interpolation.
NR 216, Ch 2, Sec 5
NR 216
Chapter 3
NON FERROUS ALLOY PRODUCTS
SECTION 1 COPPER AND COPPER ALLOYS
SECTION 2 ALUMINIUM ALLOYS
NR 216, Ch 3, Sec 1
SECTION 1 COPPER AND COPPER ALLOYS
1 General 2.2 Manufacture

2.2.1 The approval of the manufacturing procedure may be
1.1 Scope required by the Society on a case-by-case basis for products
intended for important uses.
1.1.1 The requirements of this Section apply in addition to
those of Chapter 1 and Chapter 2 to copper or copper alloy
tubes and castings including propeller and propeller blade
castings. 2.3.1 Copper alloy castings may be supplied, at the discre-
tion of the Manufacturer, in either the as cast or heat treated
1.1.2 Copper alloys and products other than those indi-
condition unless otherwise specified.
cated in this Section complying with national or interna-
tional standards or proprietary specifications deemed 2.3.2 When castings are supplied in the heat treated condi-
equivalent to these requirements may be accepted subject tion, the Manufacturer is to provide the Surveyor with the
to the approval of the Society. details of the heat treatment used on the casting.
1.1.3 Where welding is envisaged, procedures and prepa-

rations for the welded joints are to be submitted for
approval. 2.4.1 The chemical compositions are to comply with the
requirements given in Tab 1.
1.2 Manufacture
2.4.2 The Manufacturer is to issue a cast certificate. When
1.2.1 The manufacturing procedure and heat treatments castings are made from ingots for which an analysis is
suitable to obtain products having the required properties already available, and provided that no alloy additions are
are, in principle, left to the discretion of the Manufacturer. made, the certified analysis made by the maker of the ingots
may be accepted subject to occasional checks as requested
1.2.2 The manufacturing process is to ensure that copper or by the Surveyor.
copper alloy products are free from internal or surface
defects which may impair their proper workability and use. 2.5 Mechanical properties
1.2.3 Reference is made to the general provisions given in 2.5.1 Mechanical properties are to comply with the appro-
Ch 1, Sec 1, [3.6] for visual, dimensional and non-destruc- priate requirements specified in Tab 2.
tive examination.
1.3 Testing
2.6.1 Test material sufficient for the required tests and pos-
1.3.1 Tensile tests required in this Section are to be carried sible re-tests is to be provided for each copper alloy casting.
out on cylindrical test specimens of the type defined in Ch 1,
Sec 2, [2.1.4] with a gauge length equal to: 2.6.2 The batch is to be made by castings from the same
heat, and treated in the same furnace charge if delivered in
L 0 = 5 ,65 So = 5d (specimen A) the heat treated condition.
2.6.3 In the case of heat treated material, test samples are

1.4 Documentation and certification to be treated in the same way and, in general, together with
the material they represent.
1.4.1 The testing documentation is to contain the informa-
tion required in Ch 1, Sec 1, [4.2.1]. 2.6.4 For each test sample, a tensile test specimen is pre-
pared, machined at the dimensions specified in [1.3].
2 Copper alloy castings
2.1 Scope 2.7.1 All castings are to be cleaned and adequately pre-
pared for inspection.
2.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to copper alloy
castings intended for various uses, with the exception of 2.7.2 The Manufacturer is responsible for compliance with
castings intended for propeller and propeller blades. dimensions and tolerances.
NR 216, Ch 3, Sec 1
2.7.3 Before acceptance, all castings are to be presented batch and, if necessary, the dye-penetrant test for copper-
for visual examination. This is to include the examination of aluminium and copper-nickel castings.
the external and internal surfaces of each casting of the
Table 1 : Castings - Chemical composition (%)
Name of alloy Cu Sn Pb Zn Fe Ni Al Mn Si P Others

High tensile brass 57/65 1,0  0,5 rem. 0,5/2,0 3,0 0,5/2,5 0,1/3,0 0,10 Sb+P+As
 0,40
Leaded bronze 80/87 4,0/6,0 8,0/11  2,0 0,25  2,0 0,01 0,2 0,01 0,10 S  0,10
(1)
Phosphor bronze 86/89,5 9,5/12 0,5 0,5 0,10 0,2 0,01  0,02 0,15/1,5
(1)
Bronze 86/89 9,0/11 1,5 1,0/3,0 0,25 2,0 0,01 0,2 0,01 0,05 S 0,10
Cu Sn10 Zn2 Sb 0,30
(Gunmetal)
Bronze Cu Pb5 84/86 4,0/6,0 4,0/6,0 4,0/6,0 0,30 2,5 0,01  0,01 0,05
Sn5 Zn5 (leaded (1)
Gunmetal)
Copper- 88/92 0,30 0,02 0,40 2,0/5,0 3,0 8,5/11 1,0 0,20
aluminium (1) (2)
Nickel copper > 76 0,20 0,02 0,50 3,5/5,5 3,5/6,5 8,0/11 3,0 0,10 Cu+Fe+Ni+Al
aluminium (2) (4) +Mn 99,2
Copper-nickel rem.  0,02 0,50 1,0/1,8 9,0/11  0,5/1,0  0,20 S 0,20 (3)
90 / 10 (2) (2) C 0,05
Copper-nickel rem.  0,02 0,50 0,4/1,0 29/32  0,5/1,5  0,20 S 0,20
70 / 30 (2) (2) C 0,05
(1) Nickel included.
(2) When no welding is to be done on the pieces, Pb content may be in the range from 0,1% to 0,3%, Zn content may be up to
1,0% and there are no requirements for C, S and P.
(3) Cu + Fe + Mn + Ni +Pb 99,5%
(4) If this nickel copper aluminium is to withstand sea corrosion, it is necessary that Al 8,2 + Ni/2
Note 1: rem. = remainder.
Table 2 : Castings - Mechanical characteristics
Rm Rp 0,2 A (%) on 5d
Name of Alloy
(N/mm2) (N/mm2) (1)  or 5.65 So 
High tensile brass  450  170  20
Leaded bronze  230  130  9
Phosphor bronze  220  130  6
Bronze (Gunmetal) Cu Sn10 Zn2  240  120  12
Bronze Cu Pb5 Sn5 Zn5 (leaded Gunmetal)  200  90  13
Copper-aluminium  450  160  15
Nickel copper aluminium  600  250  12
Copper-nickel 90 / 10  320  160  20
Copper-nickel 70 / 30  420  220  20
(1) Values of yield stress at 0,2% offset are indicated for guidance only and, unless specially requested, are not required to be
checked during the tensile test.
In addition, for certain copper alloy castings submitted to undergo a hydrostatic test at a pressure equal to twice the
heavy stresses, the Surveyor may require radiographic and service pressure.
ultrasonic testing. The Manufacturer is to issue a certificate for these tests and
the Surveyor may ask to attend all or part of such tests.
2.7.4 Unless otherwise required in other relevant Society’s
Rules, copper alloy castings submitted to pressure are to
NR 216, Ch 3, Sec 1
2.8 Rectification of defective castings 3.2 Manufacture
2.8.1 The evaluation of defects, where present, and the 3.2.1 All castings are to be manufactured at foundries
necessity and the acceptance of the means of rectification approved by the Society.
are left to the discretion of the Surveyor; to this end, addi-
3.2.2 These castings are to be manufactured and tested in
tional checks may be required.
accordance with the appropriate requirements of Chapter 1
and Chapter 2 and the specific requirements of this Article.
2.8.2 The Surveyor may accept that castings containing
local porosities are rectified by impregnation with a suitable
plastic filler, provided that the porosities do not adversely
affect the mechanical strength of the casting.
3.3.1 All castings are to be free from surface or internal
defects liable to impair their use. Minor casting defects
2.8.3 Welded repairs are not acceptable, as a rule, unless which may still be visible after machining, such as small
expressly authorised by the Surveyor. cold shots and scabs, are to be trimmed off by the Manufac-
turer.
Any proposal to repair a defective casting by welding is to
be previously submitted to the Surveyor, who may require
that tests are performed to qualify the proposed welding
procedure.
3.4.1 At the option of the Manufacturer, castings may be
supplied in the “as cast” or heat treated condition.
tion which will enable all finished castings to be traced to 3.5.1 Typical copper propeller alloys are grouped into the
the original cast. four types CU1, CU2, CU3, and CU4 depending on their
chemical composition as given in Tab 3. Copper alloys
In addition to the indications required in Ch 1, Sec 1, whose chemical composition deviates from the typical val-
[4.1.3], all castings which have been tested and inspected ues of Tab 3 are to be specially approved by the Society.
details: 3.5.2 The Manufacturer is to maintain records of the chem-
ical analyses of the production casts, which are to be made
a) Manufacturer’s name or trade mark available to the Surveyor so that he can satisfy himself that
the chemical composition of each casting is within the
b) identification number, cast number or other markings specified limits.
which will enable the full history of the casting to be
traced 3.5.3 For copper-based alloys CU1 and CU2, in order to
ensure adequate cold ductility and corrosion fatigue resis-
c) test pressure, where applicable. tance, the proportion of beta phase is to be kept low. For
this purpose, the zinc equivalent defined by the following
2.9.2 Modified arrangements for identification and marking formula is not to exceed a value of 45%:
of small castings manufactured in large numbers may be Zinc equivalent (%) = 100  (100.%Cu / (100 + A))
agreed with the Surveyor.
in which A is the algebraic sum of the following values:
1 . %Sn
3 Cast copper alloy propellers and
propellers blades 5 . %Al
0,5 . %Mn
3.1 Scope 0,1 . %Fe

2,3 . %Ni
3.1.1 The requirements of this Article are applicable to the
moulding, casting, inspection and repair procedures of new Note 1: The negative sign in front of the element Mn, Fe and Ni sig-
nifies that these elements tend to reduce the proportion of beta
cast copper alloy propellers, blades and bosses.
phase.
3.1.2 These requirements may also be applied for the repair 3.5.4 In addition to [3.5.3], the CU1 and CU2 type alloys
and inspection of propellers which become damaged are to contain an alpha phase component of at least 25%;
during service. this is to be checked on a test bar by the Manufacturer.
NR 216, Ch 3, Sec 1
Table 3 : Typical chemical composition of propeller and propeller blade castings
Alloy CHEMICAL COMPOSITION (%)

Type Cu Sn Zn Pb Ni Fe Al Mn
CU1 52 - 62 max. 1,5 35 - 40 max. 0,50 max. 1,0 0,5 - 2,5 0,5 - 3,0 0,5 - 4,0
CU2 50 - 57 max. 1,5 33 - 38 max 0,50 3,0 - 8,0 0,5 - 2,5 0,5 - 2,0 1,0 - 4,0
CU3 77 - 82 max. 0,10 max. 1,0 max 0,03 3,0 - 6,0 2,0 - 6,0 7,0 - 11,0 0,5 - 4,0
CU4 70 - 80 max. 1,00 max. 6,0 max 0,05 1,5 - 3,0 2,0 - 5,0 6,5 - 9,0 8,0 - 20,0
3.6 Mechanical properties Table 4 : Mechanical properties of cast copper alloys

for propellers and propeller blade castings
3.6.1 The requirements relevant to the mechanical proper-
ties are shown in Tab 4. Proof stress Tensile Elongation
Alloy type Rp 0,2 (N/mm2) strength Rm A5 (%)
The values given in Tab 4 are applicable to test specimens
min. (N/mm2) min. min.
taken from separately cast samples in accordance with Fig 1,
or with any other recognised national standard. CU1 175 440 20
CU2 175 440 20
It is to be noted that these properties are generally not rep-
resentative of the mechanical properties of the propeller CU3 245 590 16
casting itself, which may be lower than that of a separately CU4 275 630 18
cast test coupon.
Note 1: The values shown are related to specimens taken
For integrally cast test specimens, the requirements are to from separately cast samples as per Fig 1 or recognised
be specially agreed with the Society; wherever possible, the national standards.
test samples are to be located on the blades in an area lying Note 2: The 0,2% proof stress values are to be determined
between 0,5 to 0,6 R, where R is the radius of the propeller. for all keyless type propeller castings. For other types of pro-
peller casting, these values are given for information pur-
The test sample material is to be removed from the casting
poses only and, unless expressly required, their
by non-thermal procedures. determination may be omitted during testing.
The mechanical properties of alloys not meeting the limiting
values of Tab 4 are to comply with the requirements of the Figure 1 : Keel block test sample casting
relevant specification to be approved by the Society.
3.7 Sampling and testing L
B
3.7.1 Test samples are to be provided from each cast used
for the manufacture of propeller blade casting.
3.7.2 The test samples are to be of keel block type, in

accordance with the dimensions in Fig 1, and are to be cast H
in moulds made from the same type of materials as used for
the castings. T
3.7.3 Where castings are supplied in the heat treated con-

dition, the test samples are to be heat treated together with
the casting which they represent. D
3.7.4 At least one tensile test specimen is to be taken from

each ladle. H = 100 mm; B = 50 mm; L > 150 mm; T = 15 mm; D = 25 mm
3.7.5 The results of all tensile tests are to comply with the
requirements given in Tab 4.
3.7.6 Metallographic examination of alloy types CU1 and 3.8.1 Propeller castings are to be visually inspected during
CU2 is to be verified by determining the proportion of alpha the various stages of manufacture.
phase. For this purpose, at least one specimen is to be taken
from each heat. The proportion of alpha phase is to be 3.8.2 All finished castings are to be presented for examina-
determined as the average value of 5 counts. The require- tion by the Surveyor, and this is to include the bore and the
ments of [3.5.4] are to be fulfilled. examination of internal surfaces where applicable.
NR 216, Ch 3, Sec 1
3.8.3 The dimensions, the dimensional and geometrical Figure 2 : Definition of skew angle
tolerances and their verification are the responsibility of the
Manufacturer. The report on the relevant examinations is to Skew angle
be submitted to the Surveyor, who may require checks to be
made in his presence. Leading
3.8.4 Static balancing is to be carried out on all propellers.

Dynamic balancing is required for propellers running above
500 rpm. Locus of
mid-chord line

3.9.1 The skew of a propeller is defined as follows:
The maximum skew angle of a propeller blade is defined as
the angle, in the projected view of the blade, between a line Projected
drawn through the blade tip and the shaft centreline and a
second line through the shaft centreline which acts as a tan- Figure 3 : Severity zones
gent to the locus of the mid-points of the helical blade sec- for integrally cast low skew propellers
tion; see Fig 2.
High skew propellers have a skew angle greater than 25°, Leading edge
Trailing
low skew propellers a skew angle of up to 25°. edge
C
C
3.9.2 Severity zones for low skew propellers are as follows:
Zone A is the area on the pressure side of the blade, from
Cr
and including the fillet to 0,4R, and bounded on either side
by lines at a distance 0,15 times the chord length Cr from R 0,7 R
the leading edge and 0,2 times Cr from the trailing edge, 0,7 B
B
Cr 0,15
respectively (see Fig 3). Where the hub radius (Rb) exceeds 0,2 Cr
0,27R, the other boundary of zone A is to be increased to A
1,5Rb. Zone A also includes the parts of the separate cast 0,
4
Fillet R
propeller hub which lie in the area of the windows as
described in Fig 5 and the flange and fillet area of controlla- Rb
ble pitch and built-up propeller blades as described in Fig 6.
C C
Zone B is on the pressure side the remaining area up to
0,7 R and on the suction side the area from the fillet to
0,7 R (see Fig 3). PRESSURE SIDE SUCTION SIDE
Zone C is the area outside 0,7 R on both sides of the blade. Cr : Local chord length
It also includes the surface of the hub of a controllable pitch
propeller other than those designated Zone A above.
Figure 4 : Severity zones in blades with skew angles > 25°
Leading edge
0,5 Cr
0,
9
A B R
A
R
9
B 0,
0,
3
Cr
0,
0,1
7
5C
R
0,
A r
7
R
0,
4
R
PRESSURE SIDE SUCTION SIDE
Cr : Local chord length
NR 216, Ch 3, Sec 1
3.9.3 Severity zones for high skew propellers are as fol- 3.10.2 Extent of examination
lows: The severity zones A as defined above are to be subjected to
Zone A is the area on the pressure face contained within the a dye penetrant examination in the presence of the sur-
blade root-fillet and a line running from the junction of the veyor. In zones B and C the dye penetrant examination is to
leading edge with the root fillet to the trailing edge at 0,9 R be performed by the manufacturer and may be witnessed by
and at passing through the mid-point of the blade chord at the surveyor upon his request.
0,7 R and a point situated at 0,3 of the chord length from
the leading edge at 0,4 R. It also includes an area along the If repairs have been made either by grinding or by welding
trailing edge on the suction side of the blade from the root the repaired areas are additionally to be subjected to the
to 0,9 R and with its inner boundary at 0,15 of the chord dye penetrant examination independent of their location
length from the trailing edge. and/or severity zone.
Zone B constitutes the whole of the remaining blade surfaces.
3.10.3 Definitions
Zones A and B are illustrated in Fig 4.
The following definitions relevant to liquid penetrant indi-
Figure 5 : Severity zones cations apply:
for controllable pitch propeller boss Indication: In the dye penetrant examination an indication
is the presence of detectable bleed-out of the
d2
penetrant liquid from the material discontinu-
d1 ities appearing at least 10 minutes after the
Zone C developer has been applied.
Linear indication: An indication in which the length is at
Zone A least three times the width.
(inside and outside)
Circular indication: An indication of circular or elliptical
shape with a length less than three times the
width.
Aligned indication: Three or more indications in a line, sep-
arated by 2mm or less edge to edge.
Relevant indication: An indication that is caused by a con-
dition or type of discontinuity that requires eval-
1,2 x d2
uation. Only indications which have any
dimension greater than 1.5mm shall be consid-
ered relevant.
3.10 Dye penetrant examination Shape of indications: A distinction is made between circu-
3.10.1 General lar, linear and aligned indications, see Fig 7.
Propeller castings are to be cleaned and adequately pre- Reference area: The reference area is defined as an area of
pared. The dye penetrant examination is to be carried out in 100 cm2 which may be square or rectangular
accordance with a recognised standard or an approved pro- with the major dimension not exceeding
cedure. 250 mm.
Figure 6 : Severity zones for controllable pitch and built-up propeller

Zone A
20 mm
Leading edge
Zone A
End of the fillet
(see Section b - b)
Zone A
Trailing edge
Section b - b
b
a a
Zone B
Zone A
(including bore holes) Zone B
b
Section a - a
NR 216, Ch 3, Sec 1
Figure 7 : Shape of indications
a a
b
b
d
di
dn
a a
< 3 ≥ 3 0 < di ≤ 2 mm
b b
circular linear aligned
3.10.4 Acceptance standard impair the safe service of the propeller are defined as
The surface is to be divided into reference areas of 100 cm2 defects and must be repaired.
as given in the definitions. The indications detected are, In general the repairs shall be carried out by mechanical
with respect to their size and number, not to exceed the val- means, e. g. by grinding, chipping or milling. Welding may
ues given in Tab 5. The area shall be taken in the most unfa- be applied subject to the agreement of the Society if the rel-
vourable location relative to the indication being evaluated. evant requirements detailed hereafter are satisfied.
After milling or chipping, grinding is to be applied for such
3.11 Radiographic and ultrasonic defects which are not to be welded. Grinding is to be car-
examination ried out in such a manner that the contour of the ground
depression is as smooth as possible. Complete elimination
3.11.1 When required by the Society or when deemed nec- of the defective material is to be verified by liquid penetrant
essary by the manufacturer, further non-destructive exam- testing.
inations are to be carried out. The acceptance criteria are to
be agreed between the manufacturer and the Society in Small defects, such as pores less than 1mm in diameter, can
accordance with a recognized standard. generally be disregarded except where they occur in closely
spaced groups.
3.12 Repair of defects Localised pores on the end face or bore of a propeller boss,
which themselves do not affect the strength of the casting,
3.12.1 Repair procedures can be filled with a suitable plastic filler after the appropri-
Indications exceeding the acceptance standard of Tab 5, ate preparation of the defective area. The foundry is to keep
cracks, shrinkage cavities, sand, slag and other non-metallic records and details of all castings which have been recti-
inclusions, blow holes and other discontinuities which may fied.
Table 5 : Allowable number and size of indications in a reference area of 100 cm2, depending on severity zones
Max. total number Max. number of Max. acceptable value for “a” or
Severity zones Type of indication
of indications each type (1) (2) “” of indications (mm)
A 7 circular 5 4
linear 2 3
aligned 2 3
B 14 circular 10 6
linear 4 6
aligned 4 6
C 20 circular 14 8
linear 6 6
aligned 6 6
(1) Singular circular indications less than 2 mm for zone A and less than 3 mm for the other zones may be disregarded.
(2) The total number of circular indications may be increased to the maximum total number, or part thereof, represented by the
absence of linear/aligned indications.
NR 216, Ch 3, Sec 1
3.12.2 Repair of defects in zone A Figure 8 : Test specimen

In zone A, repair welding will generally not be allowed
unless specially approved by the Society. ~ 280 mm
Grinding can be carried out to an extent which maintains
the blade thickness of the approved drawings. Discard
The possible repair of defects which are deeper than those Macro -etch specimen
referred to above is to be considered by the Society.
Tensile test specimen
~ 250 mm
3.12.3 Repair of defects in zone B
Defects that are not deeper than dB = (t/40) mm (t is the Macro -etch specimen
minimum local thickness in mm according to the Rules) or
2 mm, whichever is greatest, below minimum local thick- Tensile test specimen
ness according to the Rules should be removed by grinding.
Macro -etch specimen
Those defects that are deepest than allowable for removal
by grinding may be repaired by welding. Discard
3.12.4 Repair of defects in zone C Face to be macro etched

In zone C, repair welds are generally permitted.
mm
30
Macro -etch specimen
3.13 Weld repair
3.13.1 All weld repairs are to be documented by means of
sketches or photographs showing the location and major
dimensions of the grooves prepared for welding. Weld Table 6 : Required tensile strength values
repairs are to be undertaken only when they are considered
to be necessary and have prior agreement of the Surveyor. Alloy type Tensile strength Rm (N/mm2) min.
CU1 370
3.13.2 Before welding is started, the company concerned
shall prepare and submit to the Society a detailed welding CU2 410
procedure specification covering the weld preparation, CU3 500
welding position, welding parameter, welding consum-
CU4 550
ables, preheating and post weld heat treatment and inspec-
tion procedures.
3.13.5 Welding of areas less than 5cm2 is to be avoided.
3.13.3 Areas which are prepared for welding are to be liq-
3.13.6 For new propellers, the area of any single repair and
uid penetrant tested and independent of their location
the maximum total area in any zone or region are generally
always to be assessed in accordance with criteria for zone A.
to be kept within the following limits, where S is the blade
3.13.4 The scope of tests for the qualification of the weld- surface:
ing procedure is as follows: a) Zone A: not generally permitted
• A test assembly of minimum 30mm in thickness is to be b) Zone B and C, single: 0,006S or 60cm2, whichever is
welded following the welding procedure specification; the greater
The type of specimens to be prepared are shown in Fig 8.
c) Zone B (leading edge), total: 0,008S or 100cm2, which-
• The test assembly is to be visually inspected and liquid
ever is the greater
penetrant tested. Imperfections shall be assessed in
accordance with [3.10]. d) Zone B+C, total: 0,02S or 200cm2, whichever is the
• Three macro-sections shall be prepared and etched on greater
one side to clearly reveal the weld metal, the fusion line e) Other zones, total for each zone: 0,05S or 50cm2,
and the heat affected zone. The sections are to be exam- whichever is the greater. Other zones means in particu-
ined for any imperfections present in the weld metal lar the following zones:
and the HAZ. Cracks or crack like imperfections, slag • for integrally cast propellers
inclusions, and pores greater than 3mm in diameter are
not permitted. - within the bore
• One of the macro-sections shall be used for HV5 hard- - outer surfaces of the boss to the start of the fillet
ness testing. Indentations shall traverse 2mm below the radius
surface. At least three individual indentations are to be - forward and aft end faces of the boss
made in the weld metal, the HAZ (both sides) and the • for separately cast propeller blades
base metal (both sides). The values are to be reported for - surfaces of the flange to the start of the fillet
information. radius
• Two flat transverse tensile test specimens shall be pre-
pared and tested. The tensile strength shall meet the val- 3.13.7 All weld repairs are to be made by qualified welders
ues given by Tab 6. following qualified procedures.
NR 216, Ch 3, Sec 1
3.13.8 Welding is to be done under cover in conditions of repairs made on each casting. These records are to be
free from draughts and adverse weather. available for review by the surveyor and copies to be
handed over to the surveyor on his request.
3.13.9 Metal arc welding with electrodes of filler wire used
in the qualification procedure tests is to be used. The weld-
3.14 Straightening
ing consumables are to be stored and handled in accor-
dance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. The
3.14.1 Application of load
groove prepared for welding are to be ground smooth and
complete elimination of the defective material is to be veri- For hot and cold straightening purposes, static loading only
fied by liquid penetrant testing. Slag, undercuts and other is to be used.
imperfections are to be removed before depositing the next
run. 3.14.2 Hot straightening
Hot straightening of a bent propeller blade or a pitch modi-
3.13.10 With the exception of alloys type CU3 (Ni-Al fication is to be carried out after heating the bent region and
bronze) all weld repairs are to be stress relief heat treated. approximately 500 mm wide zone on either side of it to the
However, stress relief heat treatment of alloy type CU3 cast- following suggested temperature range:
ings is required after major repairs in zone B (and zone A
when specially approved) or if a welding consumable • alloy grade CU1: 500°C - 800°C
depositing a metal susceptible to stress corrosion cracking is • alloy grade CU2: 500°C - 800°C
used (e.g. with chemical composition of alloy type CU4).
• alloy grade CU3: 700°C - 900°C
3.13.11 Stress relief heat treatment is to be within the fol- • alloy grade CU4: 700°C - 850°C
lowing temperature range:
The heating is to be slow and uniform and the concentrated
• CU1: 350°C - 500°C flames, such as oxy-acetylene and oxy-propane, are not to
• CU2: 350°C - 550°C be used. Sufficient time is to be allowed for the temperature
to become fairly uniform through the full thickness of the
• CU3: 450°C - 500°C
blade section. The temperature is to be maintained within
• CU4: 450°C - 600°C the suggested range throughout the straightening operation.
A thermocouple instrument or temperature indicating cray-
Soaking times are to be in accordance with Tab 7. The heat- ons is/are to be used for measuring the temperature.
ing and cooling are to be suitably controlled to minimize
residual stresses. The cooling rate after any stress relieving 3.14.3 Cold straightening
heat treatment is not to exceed 50°C/h until the temperature
Cold straightening is to be used for minor repairs of tips and
of 200°C is reached.
edges only. Cold straightening on castings made of alloy
type CU1, CU2 and CU4 are always to be followed by a
3.13.12 When welding operations are completed, includ-
stress relief heat treatment; see Tab 7.
ing stress relief heat treatment, welded areas in finished
machined and/or grinded condition are to be subjected to
visual examination and liquid penetrant test and assessed to 3.15 Identification and marking
zone A.
3.13.13 The foundry is to keep full records detailing the tion which will enable all castings to be traced back to their
welding procedure, heat treatment and extent and location heats.
Table 7 : Soaking times for stress relief heat treatment of copper alloy propellers
Alloy Grade Cu 1 and Cu 2 Alloy Grade Cu 3 and Cu 4

Stress relief
temperature (°C) Hours per 25 mm of Maximum recommended Hours per 25 mm of Maximum recommended
thickness total hours thickness total hours
350 5 15  
400 1 5  
450 1/2 2 5 15
500 1/4 1 1 5
550 1/4 1/2 1/2 2
600   1/4 (1) 1 (1)
650   1/4 (1) 1/2 (1)
(1) 600°C and 650°C applicable to CU4 alloys only.
NR 216, Ch 3, Sec 1
3.15.2 In addition to the indications required in Ch 1, Sec 1, 4 Copper alloy pipes

[4.1.1], all castings which have been tested and inspected
details: 4.1 Scope
a) Manufacturer‘s mark 4.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to copper alloy
pipes intended for condensers, heat exchangers and pres-
b) grade of cast material sure lines.
c) heat number, casting number or another mark enabling
the manufacturing process to be traced back 4.2 Condition of supply
d) number of the Society’s certificate 4.2.1 Copper and copper alloy pipes are to be delivered
annealed (recrystallised with fine grain). Copper pipes may
e) skew angle if in excess of 25°; see [3.9.1].
also be delivered hard drawn.
3.15.3 The Manufacturer is to supply the Surveyor with a 4.2.2 Aluminium brass pipes may additionally be required
certificate containing the following details: to be given a suitable stress relieving heat treatment when
subjected to a cold straightening operation after annealing.
a) purchaser and order number
b) shipbuilding project number, if known 4.3 Chemical composition

c) description of casting with drawing number
4.3.1 The chemical composition of copper alloys used for
d) diameter, number of blades, pitch, direction of turning the manufacture of pipes is to comply with the require-
ments given in Tab 8 and a corresponding heat certificate is
e) grade of alloy and chemical composition of each heat to be issued by the Manufacturer.
f) heat or casting number
g) final weight
h) results of non-destructive tests and details of test proce- appropriate requirements given in Tab 9.
dure, where applicable
i) portion of alpha-structure for CU1 and CU2 alloys 4.5 Mechanical tests
j) results of the mechanical tests 4.5.1 One series of tests is to be conducted on each batch
k) casting identification number of 200 pipes coming from the same fabrication and same
heat, and having the same size and delivery condition (heat
l) skew angle for high skew propellers; see [3.9.1]. treatment).
Table 8 : Pipes - Chemical composition (%)
Name of alloys Cu (1) Sn Al Ni (1) Pb Fe Zn Mn As Residual elements

Copper-phosphorus 99,85 0,30/0,50 P = 0,013/0,050
(arsenical or deoxidised
non arsenical)
Tin Brass 70/73 0,9/1,2 0,07 0,06 remainder 0,02/0,06 total impurities
(naval) + Pb + Fe  0,3
Aluminium Brass 76/79 1,8/2,5 0,07 0,06 remainder 0,02/0,06 total impurities
+ Pb + Fe  0,3
Copper-nickel remainder 9,0/11 0,02 1,0/2,0  0,5 0,3/1,0 C 0,05S+P 0,02
90/10 (2) total others 0,1
Copper-nickel remainder 29/33 0,02 0,4/1,0  0,5 0,5/1,5 C 0,05S+P  0,02
70/30 (2) total others 0,1
Special copper- remainder Sn+Pb 29/32 0,02 1,5/2,0  0,5 1,5/2,0 C 0,05S+P 0,02
nickel 70/30 (2) 0,05 total others 0,1
Copper-Alu 6 93,0 0,15/0,5 5,0/6,5 0,02  1,0  0,3 total impurities 0,5
(1) Silver is considered as copper; cobalt as nickel.
(2) When no welding is to be done on copper-nickel pipes, there are no requirements regarding P, S and C, and the Zn content may
be up to 1%, the Pb content up to 0,05%.
NR 216, Ch 3, Sec 1
Table 9 : Pipes - Mechanical properties
Rm Re0,2 A (%) on
Name of Alloy
(N/mm2) (N/mm2) 5 ,65 So
Copper-phosphorus  220  100  35 (annealed)

(arsenical or non arsenical)  230  155  20 (quarter-hard temper)
(1)  270 for guidance  10 (half-hard temper)
Tin Brass  310  105  35
Aluminium Brass  345  125  35
Copper-nickel 90/10  290  105  30
Copper-nickel 70/30  360  125  30
Special copper-nickel 70/30  420  125  30
Copper-Alu 6  345  130  40
(1) In the case of copper-phosphorus, the tensile test may be replaced by the HV hardness test when this is specified in certain
national standards.
4.5.2 At least one length is to be selected at random from The water solution is to contain 10gr of mercurous nitrate
each batch for the following tests: and 10 cm3 of nitric acid (specific gravity 1,41) per litre of
solution. The specimen is then to be immediately washed,
• one tensile test
rinsed and inspected.
• one flattening test
No signs of cracking are to appear within eight days follow-
• one drift expanding test. ing the immersion.
The procedures for mechanical tests and the dimensions of 4.6.2 The test may be carried out in accordance with an
the test specimens are to be in accordance with Ch 1, Sec 2, acceptable national standard using a mercurous nitrate
with the additions and/or modifications as per the present solution.
item.
4.6.3 Should any specimen fail to meet the requirements of
4.5.3 A tensile test is to be carried out on a specimen con- this test, then all tubes represented by that specimen are to
sisting of a pipe length of full section, or of a strip cut longi- be rejected but may be resubmitted after a stress relieving
tudinally in the pipe and of the same thickness as the pipe. treatment.
4.5.4 The flattening test consists of slowly flattening a sec- 4.7 Hydrostatic test - Eddy current test
tion of pipe 50 mm long by one stroke of a press.
4.7.1 All pipes are to be tested to a pressure equal to 1,5
After flattening to a distance between platens equal to three times their design service pressure without exceeding
times the thickness of the pipe, no cracking, rupture or 6,90 MPa (70 bar), unless otherwise specified.
defects are to be visible to the unaided eye on the external
surface of the pipe. 4.7.2 If the service pressure is unknown at the time of the
hydrostatic test, a test pressure calculated according to the
4.5.5 The drift expanding test consists of expanding a sec- following formula may be applied:
tion of pipe between 30 mm and 50 mm in length until the
0 ,5  t  R
external diameter is increased by 20% (15% for half-hard P = -------------------------m-
D
pipes), at ambient temperature, by means of a tapered pin
having a 45° included angle. P : Test pressure, in MPa (to be multiplied by 10,2
to obtain the value in bar)
No cracking or rupture is to be visible to the unaided eye
after completion of tests. t : Nominal wall thickness, in mm
D : Nominal outside diameter, in mm
4.6 Stress corrosion cracking test Rm : Minimum guaranteed tensile strength, in
N/mm2, according to Tab 9.
4.6.1 The stress corrosion test (Hg-nitrate test) is designed
to reveal the presence of residual stresses which could lead 4.7.3 The test pressure is to be maintained for sufficient
to stress corrosion cracks. time to permit proof and inspection. There is to be no evi-
dence of leakage or sweating.
The test consists of immersing for 30 minutes a 150 mm
specimen in a water solution with the required Hg-nitrate 4.7.4 An Eddy current test may be accepted in lieu of the
concentration after proper cleaning. hydrostatic test.
NR 216, Ch 3, Sec 1
4.7.5 The Eddy current testing facilities are to be submitted 4.9 Rectification of defects
to special approval with particular attention to the calibrat-
ing conditions of the equipment used; it is to be demon- 4.9.1 Small surface imperfections may be removed by
strated that testing with Eddy currents as proposed is at least
grinding provided that the thickness of the pipe after grind-
as rigorous as the hydrostatic test.
ing and dressing is not less than the required minimum
4.7.6 The Surveyor may need to check that the equipment thickness. The dressed areas are to be blended into the con-
used is calibrated. tour of the tube with very large radius fillets.
4.7.7 Unless otherwise agreed, the Manufacturer’s certifi-
cate of satisfactory hydraulic or Eddy current testing will be 4.9.2 Repair of defects by welding is not permitted; thus
accepted. any defects which cannot be removed by grinding will nec-
essarily lead to the rejection of the pipe.
4.8.1 The Manufacturer is to prepare a report relative to the 4.10 Identification and marking
inspection and verification of dimensions of all of the tubes
presented. 4.10.1 All pipes and tubes are to be identified and marked
The dimensional tolerances (diameter, thickness) are to in conformity with the requirements of Ch 1, Sec 1, [4.1.3].
comply with applicable national standards. The following additional details are to be shown on all
materials which have been accepted:
4.8.2 The Surveyor may require that all pipes are presented
for visual examination and verification of dimensions. a) Manufacturer’s name or trade mark
Internal and external surfaces of pipes are to have a clean
and smooth finish, and be free from harmful defects. b) grade of material or designation code.
The Manufacturer is to provide adequate equipment to
enable an internal and external examination of the pipes to 4.10.2 Identification is to be by rubber stamp or stencils.
be carried out Hard stamping is not permitted.
NR 216, Ch 3, Sec 2
SECTION 2 ALUMINIUM ALLOYS
1 General • purchaser and order number

• construction project number, when known
1.1 Scope • number, dimensions and weight of the product
• designation of the aluminium alloy (grade) and of its
1.1.1 General temper condition (delivery heat treatment)
The requirements of this Section apply to wrought alumin- • identification mark or manufacturing batch number
ium alloys, rivets, transition joints and cast aluminium • chemical composition
alloys. • test results.
1.1.2 Other standards Where the alloy is not produced at the works at which it is
wrought, a certificate is to be supplied by the Manufacturer of
Alloys and tempers other than those defined in Articles [2],
the alloy stating the cast number and chemical composition.
[3], [4] and [5], complying with national or international
standards or proprietary specifications may be considered 2 Wrought aluminium alloy products
by the Society further to detailed study of their properties
and their weldability. (plates, bars, sections and tubes)
2.1 Scope
1.2 Manufacture
2.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to wrought alu-
1.2.1 Manufacturing process minium alloys used in the construction of hulls, superstruc-
tures and other marine structures.
Manufacturing processes and heat treatments suitable to
obtain products having the specified quality and properties 2.1.2 These requirements are applicable to wrought alu-
are, in principle, left to the discretion of the Manufacturer. minium products within a thickness range between 3 mm
and 50 mm inclusive.
1.2.2 Quality of material
2.1.3 The application of these provisions to aluminium
All products are to be free from internal and surface defects alloy products outside this thickness range requires the prior
prejudicial to the use of the concerned material for the agreement of the Society.
intended application.
The general requirements specified in Article [1] are also to
Reference is made to the general provisions given in Ch 1, be complied with, as appropriate.
Sec 1, [3.6] for visual, dimensional and non destructive
examination. 2.1.4 In the case of applications involving the storage and
transport of liquefied gases, reference is to be made to Soci-
1.2.3 Marking ety’s Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships Pt D, Ch 9, and,
to the International Code for the Construction and Equipment
Products are to be clearly marked by the Manufacturer in
of Ships Carrying Liquefied Gases in Bulk (IGC Code).
accordance with the requirements of Chapter 1.
For gas fuelled ships, reference is to be made to Society Rule
The following details are to be shown on all materials Note NR 529, and, to the International Code of Safety for
which have been accepted: Ships using Gases or other Low-flash point Fuels (IGF Code).
• Manufacturer’s mark Materials intended for the construction of cargo tanks or
• grade of alloy and temper condition storage tanks for liquefied gases and for other low tempera-
ture applications are in general to be manufactured in 5083
• number of the manufacturing batch enabling the manu- alloy in the annealed condition.
facturing process to be traced back
• Classification Society’s brand. 2.1.5 The numerical designation (grade) of aluminium
alloys and their temper designation are based on those of
When extruded products are bundled together or packed in the Aluminium Association.
crates for delivery, the marking is to be affixed by a securely Temper conditions (delivery heat treatment) are defined in
fastened tag or label. the European standard EN 515 or ANSI H35.1.
1.2.4 Certification and documentation 2.2 Approval

For each tested batch, the manufacturer is to supply to the 2.2.1 All materials, including semi-finished products, are to
Surveyor a test certificate or shipping statement containing be manufactured at works which are approved by the Soci-
the following details: ety for the grades of aluminium alloy supplied.
NR 216, Ch 3, Sec 2
2.3 Aluminium grades and their temper and

conditions • 6005A
• 6061
2.3.1 Rolled products (sheets, strips and plates)
• 6082
The following aluminium alloys are covered by these
requirements: with the hereunder temper conditions:
• T5 or T6
• 5083
2.3.3 The alloy grades 6005A and 6061 of the 6000 series
• 5086 are not to be used in direct contact with sea water unless
• 5383 protected by anodes and/or a paint system.
• 5059
2.4.1 The Manufacturer is to determine the chemical com-
• 5754
position of each cast. Product analysis is to be made where
• 5456 the final product chemistry is not well represented by the
analysis from the cast.
with the hereunder temper conditions:
2.4.2 The chemical composition of aluminium alloys is to
• O, H111, H112 comply with the requirements given in Tab 1.
• H116 The Manufacturer’s declared analysis is accepted subject to
occasional checks if required by the Surveyor.
• H321
2.4.3 When the aluminium alloys are not cast in the same
2.3.2 Extruded products (sections, shapes, bars works in which they are manufactured into semi-finished
and closed profiles) products, the Surveyor is to be given a certificate issued by
the works in question which indicates the reference num-
The following aluminium alloys are covered by these bers and chemical composition of the heats.
requirements:
• 5083 2.5 Mechanical properties
• 5086 2.5.1 Mechanical properties are to comply with the

requirements given in Tab 2 and Tab 3.
• 5383 Mechanical properties of the welded joint are lower for
strain hardened or heat treated alloys, when compared with
• 5059
those of the base material in general. Reference is to be
with the hereunder temper conditions: made to the applicable requirements for approval of weld-
ing consumables (see Ch 5, Sec 2, [15]) welding procedures
• O, H111, H112 (see Ch 5, Sec 4, [9]).
Other elements
Si Fe Cu Mn Cr Zn Ti
Grade Mg (1)
Each Total
5083 0,40 0,40 0,10 0,40-1,00 4,00-4,90 0,05-0,25 0,25 0,15 0,05 0,15
5383 0,25 0,25 0,20 0,70-1,00 4,00-5,20 0,25 0,40 0,15 0,05 (4) 0,15 (4)
5059 0,45 0,50 0,25 0,60-1,20 5,00-6,00 0,25 0,40-0,90 0,20 0,05 (5) 0,15 (5)
5086 0,40 0,50 0,10 0,20-0,70 3,50-4,50 0,05-0,25 0,25 0,15 0,05 0,15
5754 0,40 0,40 0,10 0,50 (2) 2,60-3,60 0,30 (2) 0,20 0,15 0,05 0,15
5456 0,25 0,40 0,10 0,50-1,00 4,70-5,50 0,05-0,20 0,25 0,20 0,05 0,15
6005-A 0,50-0,90 0,35 0,30 0,50 (3) 0,40-0,70 0,30 (3) 0,20 0,10 0,05 0,15
6061 0,40-0,80 0,70 0,15-0,40 0,15 0,80-1,20 0,04-0,35 0,25 0,15 0,05 0,15
6082 0,70-1,30 0,50 0,10 0,40-1,00 0,60-1,20 0,25 0,20 0,10 0,05 0,15
Note 1: Composition in percentage mass by mass maximum unless shown as a range or as a minimum.
(1) Includes Ni, Ga, V and listed elements for which no specific limit is shown. Regular analysis need not be made.
(2) Mn + Cr: 0,10-0,60
(3) Mn + Cr: 0,12-0,50
(4) Zr: maximum 0,20. The total for other elements does not include Zirconium.
(5) Zr: 0,05-0,25. The total for other elements does not include Zirconium.
NR 216, Ch 3, Sec 2
Table 2 : Mechanical properties for rolled products with 3 mm  t  50 mm
Thickness t Yield strength Rp 0,2 min Tensile strength Rm min Elongation min (%) (1)
Grade Temper condition
(mm) (N/mm2) or range (N/mm2) A50 mm A5d
O 3  t  50 125 275 - 350 16 14
H111 3  t  50 125 275 - 350 16 14
5083 H112 3  t  50 125 275 12 10
H116 3  t  50 215 305 10 10
H321 3  t  50 215 - 295 305 - 385 12 10
O 3  t  50 145 290 17
H111 3  t  50 145 290 17
5383
H116 3  t  50 220 305 10 10
H321 3  t  50 220 305 10 10
O 3  t  50 160 330 24
H111 3  t  50 160 330 24 24
3  t  20 270 370 10 10
5059 H116
20  t  50 260 360 10 10
3  t  20 270 370 10 10
H321
20  t  50 260 360 10 10
O 3  t  50 95 240 - 305 16 14
H111 3  t  50 95 240 - 305 16 14
5086 3  t  12,5 125 250 8
H112
12,5  t  50 105 240 9
H116 3  t  50 195 275 10 (2) 9
5754 O 3  t  50 80 190 - 240 18 17
H111 3  t  50 80 190 - 240 18 17
3  t  6,3 130 - 205 290 - 365 16
O
6,3  t  50 125 - 205 285 - 360 16 14
3  t  30 230 315 10 10
H116 30  t  40 215 305 10
5456
40  t  50 200 285 10
3  t  12,5 230 - 315 315 - 405 12
H321 12,5  t  40 215 - 305 305 - 385 10
40  t  50 200 - 295 285 - 370 10
(1) Elongation in 50 mm applies for thicknesses up to and including 12,5 mm and in 5d for thicknesses over 12,5 mm.
(2) 8% for thicknesses up to and including 6,3 mm.
2.6 Repairs Dimensional tolerances other than underthickness toler-

ances are to comply with a recognized national or interna-
tional standard.
2.6.1 Slight surface imperfections may be removed by
smooth grinding or machining as long as the thickness of
the material remains within the tolerances given in [2.7]. 2.8 Tests and examinations
2.8.1 Visual and non-destructive examination
2.7 Tolerances on dimensions In general, the non-destructive examination of material is
not required for acceptance purposes.
2.7.1 The underthickness tolerances for rolled products Unless otherwise agreed, the following products are to be
given in Tab 4 are minimum requirements. submitted to the Surveyor for visual examination:
The underthickness tolerances for extruded products are to • plates for the construction of cargo tanks, secondary
be in accordance with the requirements of recognized barriers and process pressure vessels
national or international standards. • pressure pipes.
NR 216, Ch 3, Sec 2
Table 3 : Mechanical properties for extruded products with 3 mm  t 50 mm
Yield strength Rp 0,2 min Tensile strength Rm min Elongation min (%) (1) (2)
Grade Temper condition Thickness t (mm)
(N/mm2) or range (N/mm2) A50mm A5d
O 3  t  50 110 270 - 350 14 12
5083 H111 3  t  50 165 275 12 10
H112 3  t  50 110 270 12 10
O 3  t  50 145 290 17 17
5383 H111 3  t  50 145 290 17 17
H112 3  t  50 190 310 13
5059 H112 3  t  50 200 330 10
O 3  t  50 95 240 - 315 14 12
5086 H111 3  t  50 145 250 12 10
H112 3  t  50 95 240 12 10
T5 3  t  50 215 260 9 8
6005A 3  t  10 215 260 8 6
T6
10 < t  50 200 250 8 6
6061 T6 3  t  50 240 260 10 8
T5 3  t  50 230 270 8 6
6082 3t5 250 290 6
T6
5 < t  50 260 310 10 8
(1) The values are applicable for longitudinal and transverse tensile test specimens as well.
(2) Elongation in 50 mm applies for thicknesses up to and including 12,5 mm and in 5d for thicknesses over 12,5 mm.
Table 4 : Under thickness tolerances 2.8.4 Sampling

for rolled products Tests samples are to be taken:
a) at one third of the width from a longitudinal edge of
Thickness tolerances for nominal width
Nominal
(mm) rolled products
thickness
from 1500 from 2000 b) in the range from 1/3 to 1/2 of the distance from the
(mm) up to 1500
to 2000 to 3500 edge to the centre of the thickest part of extruded prod-
ucts.
from 3 to 4 0,10 0,15 0,15
from 4 to 8 0,20 0,20 0,25
Test samples are to be taken so that the orientation of test
specimens is as follows:
from 8 to 12 0,25 0,25 0,25
a) Rolled products (plates, sheets)
from 12 to 20 0,35 0,40 0,50
Normally, tests in the transverse direction are required.
from 20 to 50 0,45 0,50 0,65
If the width is insufficient to obtain transverse test speci-
mens, or in the case of strain hardening alloys, tests in
2.8.2 Dimensions the longitudinal direction are permitted.
It is the manufacturer’s responsibility to check the materials b) Extruded products
for compliance with the dimensions and tolerances.
Extruded products or extruded drawn materials (pipes,
bars, miscellaneous sections) are tested in the longitudi-
2.8.3 Batch composition
nal direction.
Each batch is made up of products: After removal of test samples, each test specimen is to
a) of the same alloy grade and from the same cast be marked so that its original identity, location and ori-
entation are maintained.
b) of the same product form and similar dimensions (for
plates, the same thickness) 2.8.5 Tensile tests
The requirements are detailed in [2.9].
c) manufactured by the same process
d) having been submitted simultaneously to the same tem- 2.8.6 Corrosion tests
per condition. The requirements are detailed in [2.11].
NR 216, Ch 3, Sec 2
2.8.7 Verification of proper fusion of press welds for 2.10 Drift expansion tests
closed profiles
The manufacturer has to demonstrate by macrosection tests 2.10.1 General
or drift expansion tests (see [2.10]) of closed profiles that When required (see [2.8.7]), the tests are to be carried out
there is no lack of fusion at the press weld. in accordance with the requirements of this Article.
Every fifth profile is to be sampled after heat treatment. One 2.10.2 Test specimens
profile is to be sampled from batches of five profiles or less. The test specimens are to be cut with the ends perpendicu-
Profiles with length exceeding 6m is to be sampled every lar to the axis of the profile. The edges of the end may be
profile in the start of the production. The number of tests rounded by filing.
may be reduced to every fifth profile if the results from the The specimen is to be in accordance with Ch 1, Sec 2,
first 3-5 profiles are found acceptable. [7.2].
Each profile sampled will have two samples cut from the 2.10.3 Test procedure
front and back end of the production profile. The test is to be carried out at ambient temperature. The test
procedure is to be in accordance with Ch 1, Sec 2, [7.2]
2.9 Tensile test with a mandrel angle of at least 60°.
2.9.1 General 2.10.4 Test result

The sample is considered to be unacceptable if the sample
The test specimens and procedures are to be in accordance
fails with a clean split along the weld line which confirms
with Ch 1, Sec 2, [2].
lack of fusion.
2.9.2 Number of tensile test specimens
2.11 Corrosion tests
a) Rolled products
One tensile test specimen is to be taken from each batch 2.11.1 Rolled 5xxx alloys of type 5083, 5383, 5059, 5086
of the product. If the weight of one batch exceeds and 5456 in the H116 and H321 tempers intended for use
2000 kg, one extra tensile test specimen is to be taken in marine hull construction or in marine applications where
from every 2000 kg of the product or fraction thereof, in frequent direct contact with seawater is expected are to be
each batch. corrosion tested with respect to exfoliation and intergranu-
For single plates or for coils weighing more than lar corrosion resistance.
2000 kg each, only one tensile test specimen per plate
2.11.2 The manufacturers have to establish the relationship
or coil is to be taken.
between microstructure and resistance to corrosion when
For plates to be used in the construction of cargo tanks, the above alloys are approved. A reference photomicro-
secondary barriers and process pressure vessels with graph taken at 500x, under the conditions specified in
design temperatures below 55°C, one tensile test spec- ASTM B928 Section 9.4.1, is to be established for each of
imen is to be taken from each plate. the alloy tempers and thickness ranges relevant. The refer-
ence photographs are to be taken from samples which have
b) Extruded products
exhibited no evidence of exfoliation corrosion at a pitting
For the products with a nominal weight of less than ration of PB or better, when subjected to the test described
1 kg/m, one tensile test specimen is to be taken from in ASTM G66 (ASSET). The samples are also to have exhib-
each 1000 kg, or fraction thereof, in each batch. For ited resistance to intergranular corrosion at a mass loss not
nominal weights between 1 and 5 kg/m, one tensile test greater than 15 mg/cm2, when subjected to the test
is to be taken from each 2000 kg or fraction thereof, in described in ASTM G67 (NAMLT). Upon satisfactory estab-
each batch. If the nominal weight exceeds 5 kg/m, one lishment of the relationship between microstructure and
tensile test specimen is to be taken for each 3000 kg of resistance to corrosion, the master photomicrographs and
the product or fraction thereof, in each batch. the results of the corrosion tests are to be submitted to the
For pipes, one test sample from each batch is to be Society for approval.
taken. The manufacturer is responsible to maintain the production
practices unchanged after approval of the reference micro-
Batches are to be made up of no more than 50 pipes of
graphs.
the same diameter and wall thickness, manufactured
from the same cast with the same final condition or heat Other test methods may also be accepted at the discretion
treatment. of the Society.
At the discretion of the Surveyor, pipes having slightly 2.11.3 For batch acceptance of 5xxx alloys in the H116
different diameters and/or thicknesses may be included and H321 tempers, metallographic examination of one
in the same batch. sample selected from mid width at one end of a coil or ran-
dom sheet or plate is to be carried out.
2.9.3 Location of tensile test specimen A longitudinal section perpendicular to the rolled surface is
The location of test specimens is to be in accordance with to be prepared for metallographic examination, under the
Ch 1, Sec 2, [2]. conditions specified in ASTM B928 Section 9.6.1.
NR 216, Ch 3, Sec 2
The microstructure of the sample is to be compared to the 3.2 Chemical composition and heat
reference photomicrograph of acceptable material in the treatment
presence of the Surveyor. If the microstructure shows evi-
dence of continuous grain boundary network of aluminium- 3.2.1 For rivets or rivet bars which are made up of magne-
magnesium precipitate in excess of the reference photomi- sium alloys, the magnesium content is not to exceed a max-
crographs of acceptable material, the batch is either to be imum of 3,9%.
rejected or tested for exfoliation-corrosion resistance sub-
In particular, the chemical composition of bars used for the
ject to the agreement of the Surveyor. In that case, the cor-
manufacture of rivets is to comply with the requirements of
rosion tests are to be in accordance with ASTM G66 and
Tab 5.
G67 or equivalent standards. If the results from testing sat-
isfy the acceptance criteria stated in [2.11.2]
Table 5 : Chemical composition, percentage
As an alternative to metallographic examination, each batch
may be tested for exfoliation-corrosion resistance and inter- Element 5154A 6082
granular corrosion resistance, in accordance with ASTM G66 Copper 0,10 max. 0,10 max.
and G67 under the conditions specified in ASTM B928 or
Magnesium 3,10 - 3,90 0,60 - 1,20
equivalent standards accepted by the Society.
Silicon 0,50 max. 0,70 - 1,30
2.11.4 When the products have been tested with satisfac- Iron 0,50 max. 0,50 max.
tory results in accordance with this article, the mark “M” is Manganese 0,10 - 0,50 0,40 - 1,00
to be added after the temper condition e.g. 5083 H321 M
for subsequent reporting and marking (see [1.2.3] and Zinc 0,20 max. 0,20 max.
[1.2.4]). Chromium 0,25 max. 0,25 max.
Titanium 0,20 max. 0,10 max.
2.12 Re-test procedures Other elements: each 0,05 max. 0,05 max.
total 0,15 max. 0,15 max.
2.12.1 When the tensile test from the first piece selected in Aluminium remainder remainder
accordance with [2.9.2] fails to meet the requirements, two
further tensile tests may be made from the same piece. If
3.3 Heat treatment
both of these additional tests are satisfactory, this piece and
the remaining pieces from the same batch may be accepted.
3.3.1 Rivets are to be supplied in the following conditions:
2.12.2 If one or both of the additional tests referred to in 5154A - annealed
[2.12.1] is/are unsatisfactory, the piece is to be rejected, but 6082 - solution treated.
the remaining material from the same batch may be
accepted, provided that two of the remaining pieces in the
batch selected in the same way are tested with satisfactory 3.4 Test material
results.
3.4.1 Bars intended for the manufacture of rivets are to be
If unsatisfactory results are obtained from either of these presented for testing in batches of no more than 250 kg.
two pieces, then the batch of material is rejected.
The material in each batch is to be of the same alloy, manu-
2.12.3 In the event of any material bearing the Society’s facturing process and final heat treatment and have the
brand failing to comply with the test requirements, the same or a comparable diameter. One test sample is to be
brand is to be unmistakably defaced by the Manufacturer. taken from each batch and, prior to testing, heat treated in
full cross-section and in a manner simulating the heat treat-
ment applied to the finished rivets.
2.13.1 Pipes intended for pressure parts are to be subjected 3.5 Mechanical tests
to hydrostatic testing.
3.5.1 At least one tensile specimen and one flattening test
Unless otherwise required, the test pressure is to be at least specimen are to be prepared from each test sample.
1,5 times the maximum working pressure.
3.5.2 The tensile test specimen is to be a short length of bar
having the original diameter of the product.
3 Rivets
3.5.3 The flattening test consists of compressing the speci-
3.1 Application men between two rigid and parallel flat plates in a direction
perpendicular to its longitudinal axis; the plates are to cover
3.1.1 Generality the whole specimen after flattening.
The requirements of this Article apply to aluminium alloy The flattening test specimen is to consist of a full section of
rivets intended for use in the construction of marine struc- bar having the original diameter of the product and a length
tures. of 1,5 times the diameter cut from the bar.
NR 216, Ch 3, Sec 2
The test is to be continued until the distance between the 4.3 Visual and non-destructive examination
two plates, measured under load, reaches a value corre-
sponding to one half of the original length of the specimen. 4.3.1 Each composite plate is to be subjected to visual of
all surfaces and full ultrasonic examination in accordance
The test is to be performed at ambient temperature.
with a recognised standard accepted by the Society to
The result of the test is satisfactory if, after compression, the determine the extent of any unbonded areas. The latter are
specimen is free from cracks. unacceptable and any such area plus 25 mm of surrounding
sound material is to be discarded.
3.5.4 The results of tensile tests are to comply with the
appropriate requirements of Tab 6.
4.4 Inspection
Table 6 : Mechanical properties 4.4.1 The series of tests includes, from each end of one
plate in a batch of three plates:
Mechanical properties 5154A 6082
• one through thickness tensile test
0,2% proof stress (N/mm2) min 90 120
• one shear test
Tensile strength (N/mm2) min 220 190
• one bend test.
Elongation (%) on 5 65 Somin 18 16
4.4.2 Tests are made on specimens equivalent to those
specified at the approval.
3.5.5 At least three samples are to be selected from each
consignment of manufactured rivets. Flattening tests as The results of these tests are to comply with the require-
detailed in [3.5.3] are to be carried out on each sample. ments of the manufacturing specification.
3.6 Identification 5 Aluminium alloy castings
3.6.1 Each package of manufactured rivets is to be identi- 5.1 General

fied with attached labels giving the following details:
5.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to aluminium
alloy castings used in the construction of hulls and other
b) alloy grade marine structures, and for cryogenic applications where the
design temperature is not lower than 165°C.
c) rivet size.
5.2 Aluminium grades

3.7 Certification
5.2.1 Alloy castings may be manufactured with magne-
3.7.1 The test certificate for each consignment of manufac- sium, silicon or magnesium-silicon alloys as follows:
tured rivets is to include the following particulars:
a) magnesium alloys: Al-Mg 3 and Al-Mg 6
a) purchaser’s name and order number
b) silicon alloys: Al-Si 12
b) description and dimensions
c) magnesium-silicon alloys: Al-Si 7 Mg 0,3; Al-Si 7 Mg 0,6;
c) specification of the alloy. Al-Si 10 Mg; and possibly: Al-Si 2 Mg.
5.2.2 Alloys Al-Mg 3, Al-Mg 6 and Al-Si 12 are not gener-

4 Transition joints ally submitted to heat treatment after casting; this is not the
case for magnesium-silicon alloys which may undergo such
4.1 General treatment.
4.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to explosion 5.2.3 The use of other alloys or of alloys which have been
bonded composite aluminium/steel transition joints used for submitted to a specific heat treatment is subject to the Soci-
the connection of aluminium structures to steel plating. ety’s agreement.
4.2 Manufacture 5.3 Manufacture
4.2.1 Transition joints are to be manufactured at works 5.3.1 Approval

which are approved by the Society. The specification of the Alloy castings are to be manufactured at works which are
Manufacturer is to be submitted for approval. The maxi- approved by the Society for the grade of aluminium alloy
mum temperature allowable at the interface during welding supplied.
is to be indicated; approval tests are required.
5.3.2 Quality of castings
4.2.2 The aluminium material is to comply with the All castings are to be free from surface or internal defects
requirements of [2] and the steel is to be of an appropriate which would be prejudicial to their proper application in
grade complying with the requirements of Ch 2, Sec 1. service.
NR 216, Ch 3, Sec 2
5.3.3 Visual examination 5.5 Mechanical properties

All castings are to be cleaned and adequately prepared for
inspection. 5.5.1 The mechanical properties are given in Tab 8.
The visual examination and verification of dimensions are
the responsibility of the Manufacturer, unless otherwise 5.5.2 The mechanical properties given in Tab 8 correspond
agreed. to the non-heat treated condition. However, the test pieces
may be heat-treated.
Before acceptance, all castings are to be presented to the
Surveyor for visual examination, unless otherwise agreed. In the case of heat treatment, test samples are to be treated
in the same way and, as a rule, together with the material
5.3.4 Non-destructive tests they represent.
If non-destructive tests are required, the procedures are to
Generally, only tensile strength and elongation values are
be submitted by the Society.
rule requirements; the values of yield stress are given for
5.3.5 Repairs information.
At the discretion of the Surveyor, small surface defects may
be removed by grinding. 5.6 Mechanical tests
Where repairs by welding are necessary, the welding proce-
dure is to be preliminarily approved by the Society and 5.6.1 At least one tensile specimen is to be tested from
qualification tests may be required. each batch.
The agreed repairs are then to be surveyed as required. Batches are to have a total mass not exceeding 500kg and
be made up of pieces having the same or comparable shape
5.3.6 Pressure testing and dimensions, manufactured from the same cast with the
Where required by the relevant construction Rules, casting same condition of heat treatment.
are to be pressure tested before final acceptance.
The number of pieces in each batch is not to exceed 25 in
Unless otherwise agreed, these tests are to be carried out in
the case of castings for pistons and for pressure parts or
the presence and to the satisfaction of the Surveyor.
pieces of considerable importance; a greater number may
be accepted for small pieces, to the Surveyor’s satisfaction.
The homogeneity of batches of aluminium alloy castings
5.4.1 The chemical composition of aluminium alloys used may be checked by means of a Brinell type hardness test
to manufacture castings is given in Tab 7 and the relevant when small castings manufactured in large quantities are
certificate is to be provided by the producer. concerned.
Table 7 : Aluminium alloy castings - Chemical composition (see Note 1)
Designation Cu Mn Mg Ni Zn Pb Sn Others (%)

Si (%) Fe (%) Ti (%)
ISO (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) each total
Al-Mg 3 Mini 2,50 0,05
Maxi 0,50 0,50 0,10 0,50 3,50 0,05 0,20 0,05 0,05 0,25 0,05 0,15
Al-Mg 6 (1) Mini 5,00
Maxi 0,40 0,50 0,10 0,50 7,00 0,05 0,20 0,05 0,05 0,20 0,05 0,15
Al-Si 2 Mg Mini 1,60 0,30 0,45 0,05
Maxi 2,40 0,60 0,10 0,50 0,65 0,05 0,10 0,05 0,05 0,20 0,05 0,15
Al-Si 7 Mg (2) Mini 6,50 0,20 0,05
Maxi 7,50 0,55 0,15 0,50 0,40 0,05 0,10 0,05 0,05 0,25 0,05 0,15
Al Si 7 Mg 0,3 (2) Mini 6,50 0,25 0,08
Maxi 7,50 0,20 0,10 0,10 0,40 0,05 0,10 0,05 0,05 0,25 0,03 0,10
Al Si 7 Mg 0,6 (2) Mini 6,50 0,45 0,08
Maxi 7,50 0,20 0,10 0,10 0,70 0,05 0,10 0,05 0,05 0,25 0,03 0,10
Al Si 10 Mg (2) Mini 9,00 0,17
Maxi 11,00 0,60 0,10 0,50 0,40 0,05 0,10 0,05 0,05 0,20 0,05 0,15
Al Si 12 (2) Mini 11,00
Maxi 13,50 0,70 0,10 0,50 0,10 0,05 0,15 0,05 0,05 0,15 0,05 0,15
(1) This alloy may contain less than 0,04% of beryllium, which is not to be considered as an impurity.
(2) These alloys may contain elements necessary to the eutectic modification with contents of less than 0,20%, which are not to be
considered as impurities.
Note 1: Small variations in the contents of some elements in comparison to the values mentioned in this Table are possible in
agreement with the Society.
NR 216, Ch 3, Sec 2
Table 8 : Aluminium alloy casting - Mechanical characteristics
Guaranteed minimum values

Designation ISO (3) Minimum tensile Minimum yield stress Elongation A (%) Brinell Hardness HB
strength R (N/mm2) Re 0,2 (N/mm2) (1) on 5 ,65 So (2)
Al Mg 3-F 170 70 7,0 60

Al Mg 6-F 180 100 4,0 65
Al Si 2 Mg-F 170 70 5,0 50
Al Si 7 Mg-F 170 80 4,0 55
Al Si 7 Mg 0,3-T6 250 180 4,0 75
Al Si 7 Mg 0,6-T6 290 210 4,0 90
Al Si 10 Mg-F 170 90 4,0 55
Al Si 10 Mg-T6 250 180 1,5 80
Al Si 12-F 170 75 5,0 55
(1) For information only.
(2) Minimum hardness which can be specified for heat treated elements.
(3) F = as cast.
T6 = quenched and tempered.
5.6.2 The test samples are to be separately cast in moulds agreed with the Surveyor. The identification marks are to be
made from the same type of material as used for the cast- maintained during the preparation of test specimens.
ings. These moulds are to conform to national standards, as
5.6.4 Where the results of a test do not comply with the
appropriate. requirements, the re-test procedure detailed in Chapter 1 is
to be applied. When castings are to be used in the heat
5.6.3 The method and procedures for the identification of treated condition, the re-test sample is also to be heat
the test specimens, and the casting they represent, are to be treated together with the castings it represents.
NR 216, Ch 3, Sec 2
NR 216
Chapter 4
MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS
SECTION 1 EQUIPMENT FOR MOORING AND ANCHORING
SECTION 2 OFFSHORE MOORING CHAIN CABLES AND ACCESSORIES
SECTION 3 OTHERS
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 1
SECTION 1 EQUIPMENT FOR MOORING AND ANCHORING
1 Anchors • cast steel anchor flukes, shanks, swivels and shackles

are to be manufactured and tested in accordance with
the requirements of Ch 2, Sec 4 and are to comply with
1.1 Scope the requirements for castings for welded construction.
The steel is to be fine grain treated with aluminium.
1.1.1 General Charpy V-notch impact testing is required when drop
The requirements of this Article apply to anchors and asso- tests and hammering tests are not carried out (see
ciated components for ships (heads, shanks and shackles) [1.5.3]). For the manufacture of swivels, the use of other
produced from cast or forged steel, or fabricated by welding grades of steel is subject to special consideration by the
of rolled steel plate and bars. Society
• forged steel anchor pins, shanks, swivels and shackles

1.1.2 Types of anchors are to be manufactured and tested in accordance with
The types of anchors covered include: Ch 2, Sec 3. Shanks, swivels and shackles are to comply
with the requirements for carbon and carbon-manga-
• ordinary anchors (stockless and stocked anchors)
nese steels for welded construction. For the manufacture
• high holding power (HHP) anchors of swivels, the use of other grades of steel is subject to
special consideration by the Society
• very high holding power anchors (VHHP) anchors not
exceeding 1500 kg in mass. • rolled billets, plate and bar for fabricated steel anchors
are to be manufactured and tested in accordance with
Any changes to the design made during manufacture are to the requirements of Ch 2, Sec 1
have prior written agreement from the Society.
• rolled bar intended for pins, swivels and shackles are to
1.1.3 Modified testing procedure be manufactured and tested in accordance with the
requirements of Ch 2, Sec 1 or Ch 2, Sec 3 as applicable.
For anchors having mass lower than 100 kg, or 75 kg in the
case of high holding power anchors, continuously pro-
duced by Manufacturers who have been approved by the 1.3.2 Materials for VHHP anchors
Society for this purpose, a batch testing procedure may be
In addition to the requirements of [1.3.1], the following
accepted.
applies:
The composition of the batches is to be agreed with the
• rolled plate and bars in welded VHHP are to be selected
Society with regards to the homogeneity of material, manu-
in accordance with the requirements given in Tab 1
facturing, heat treatment and dimensions.
• material for shackles is to be Charpy V-notch impact
1.2 Design tested with an energy average not less than 60 J at 0°C
• cast steel used for VHHP anchors is to be Charpy V-

1.2.1 Drawings of ordinary anchors are to be submitted to notch impact tested with an energy average not less
the Society for review. than 27 J at 0°C.
Type approval according to procedures agreed with the
Society is required for high and very high holding power Table 1 : Material grade for VHHP anchors
anchors as per Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships.
Gross thickness, Normal strength Higher
1.2.2 The mass of anchors and the percentage of the mass in mm steel strength steel
of components in relation to the total mass are to be as
required in the various parts of the Rules relevant to the t  15 A AH
equipment. 15 < t  20 A AH
20 < t  25 B AH
1.3 Materials 25 < t  30 D DH
30 < t  35 D DH
1.3.1 Materials for anchors
35 < t  40 D DH
All anchors are to be manufactured from materials meeting
the requirements of these Rules as indicated in the following: 40 < t  50 E EH
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 1
1.4 Manufacture 1.4.3 Heat treatment

Fabricated anchors may require to be stress relieved after
1.4.1 Tolerances welding depending upon weld thickness. Stress relief is to
If not otherwise specified on standards or on drawings be carried out as indicated in the approved welding proce-
demonstrated to be appropriate and accepted by the Soci- dure. Stress relief temperature is not to exceed the temper-
ety, the following assembly and fitting tolerance are to be ing temperature of the base material.
applied.
1.4.4 Quality of anchors
The clearance either side of the shank within the shackle
All parts must have a clean surface consistent with the
jaws should be no more than 3mm for anchors up to
method of manufacture and be free from cracks, notches,
3 tonnes weight, 4 mm for anchors up to 5 tonnes weight,
inclusions and other defects which would be prejudicial to
6mm for anchors up to 7 tonnes weight and should not
their proper application in service.
exceed 12 mm for larger anchors.
The shackle pin should be a push fit in the eyes of the 1.4.5 Repairs
shackles, which are to be chamfered on the outside to Any necessary repairs to forged and cast anchors are to be
ensure a good tightness when the pin is clenched over on agreed by the Surveyor and carried out in accordance with
fitting. The shackle pin to hole tolerance should be no more the repair criteria respectively indicated in Ch 2, Sec 3 and
than 0,5 mm for pins up to 57 mm and 1,0 mm for pins of Ch 2, Sec 4. Repairs to fabricated anchors are to be agreed
larger diameter. by the Surveyor and carried out in accordance with the
qualified weld procedures, by qualified welders.
The trunnion pin should be a snug fit within the chamber
and be long enough to prevent horizontal movement. The
1.4.6 Anchor assembly
gap should be no more than 1% of the chamber length.
Assembly and fitting are to be done in accordance with the
The lateral movement of the shank should not exceed 3°, design details.
see Fig 1.
Securing of the anchor pin, shackle pin or swivel by welding
is to be done in accordance with an approved procedure.
Figure 1 : Allowable lateral movement of shank
1.5 Tests and examination
1.5.1 General
3° All types of anchors are not to be painted until all tests and
inspections have been completed.
examination.
1.5.2 Proof load test

Each forged or cast steel anchor, complete in all its parts, is
to be subjected, in the presence of the Surveyor, to a proof
load test at the load indicated in Tab 2 depending on the
mass.
This requirement may be waived for anchors having a mass
of 15000 kg and over, subject to special conditions agreed
with the Society in each case.
The following mass is to be used in determining the test
load:
• for stocked anchors, the mass of the anchor without the
stock
• for stockless anchors, the total mass of the anchor
• for high holding power anchors, a mass equal to 1,33
times the total mass of the anchor
1.4.2 Welding
• for very high holding power anchors, a mass equal to
Welded construction of fabricated anchors is to be done by twice the total mass of the anchor.
qualified welders in accordance with procedures approved
by the Society in accordance with Ch 5, Sec 4 and using Testing machines are to be in accordance with requirements
approved welding consumables. indicated in Ch 1, Sec 2.
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 1
The load is to be applied between the shackle at one end As far as the point of application of the load on the arms is
and, at the other end, the arm/arms at a point located concerned, the length of the arm is defined as:
approximately one third of the length from its/their end. The
test is to be performed in duplicate, in accordance with the • the length between the tip of each arm and the crown of
following procedure: the anchor, or
• for anchors having four fixed arms, the load is to be • the distance between the tips of the arms and the axis of
applied first to one pair of arms and then to the opposite rotation, in the case of stockless anchors with hinged
pair, applying it simultaneously to the pair concerned arms.
• for stocked anchors with two fixed arms, the load in
both tests is to be applied separately to both arms For further details on the proof test, see Fig 2.
• for stockless anchors with hinged arms, the load is to be The difference between the gauge lengths a, defined in Fig 2,
applied in both opposite anchoring positions, and in measured where 10% of the proof load was applied first and
each test it is to be applied simultaneously to the points measured where the load has been reduced to 10% of the
of the arms mentioned above. proof load from the proof load is not to exceed 0,01 a.
Table 2 : Proof load test
Proof Proof Proof Proof Proof Proof

Mass Mass Mass Mass Mass Mass
load load load load load load
(kg) (kg) (kg) (kg) (kg) (kg)
(kN) (kN) (kN) (kN) (kN) (kN)
50 23,2 550 124 2200 376 4800 645 7800 861 17500 1390
55 25,2 600 132 2300 388 4900 653 8000 877 18000 1410
60 27,1 650 140 2400 401 5000 661 8200 892 18500 1440
65 28,9 700 149 2500 414 5100 669 8400 908 19000 1470
70 30,7 750 158 2600 427 5200 677 8600 922 19500 1490
75 32,4 800 166 2700 438 5300 685 8800 936 20000 1520
80 33,9 850 175 2800 450 5400 691 9000 949 2100 1570
90 36,3 900 182 2900 462 5500 699 9200 961 22000 1620
100 39,1 950 191 3000 474 5600 706 9400 975 23000 1670
120 44,3 1000 199 3100 484 5700 713 9600 987 24000 1720
140 49,0 1050 208 3200 495 5800 721 9800 998 25000 1770
160 53,3 1100 216 3300 506 5900 728 10000 1010 26000 1800
180 57,4 1150 224 3400 517 6000 735 10500 1040 27000 1850
200 61,3 1200 231 3500 528 6100 740 11000 1070 28000 1900
225 65,8 1250 239 3600 537 6200 747 11500 1090 29000 1940
250 70,4 1300 247 3700 547 6300 754 12000 1110 30000 1990
275 74,9 1350 255 3800 557 6400 760 12500 1130 31000 2030
300 79,5 1400 262 3900 567 6500 767 13000 1160 32000 2070
325 84,1 1450 270 4000 577 6600 773 13500 1180 34000 2160
350 88,8 1500 278 4100 586 6700 779 14000 1210 36000 2250
375 93,4 1600 292 4200 595 6800 786 14500 1230 38000 2330
400 97,9 1700 307 4300 604 6900 794 15000 1260 40000 2410
425 103 1800 321 4400 613 7000 804 15500 1270 42000 2490
450 107 1900 335 4500 622 7200 818 16000 1300 44000 2570
475 112 2000 349 4600 631 7400 832 16500 1330 46000 2650
500 116 2100 362 4700 638 7600 845 17000 1360 48000 2730
Note 1: Masses shown refer either to stockless anchors or to stocked anchors excluding stocks. The proof load for intermediate
masses may be determined by linear interpolation.
Note 2: For high holding power (HHP) anchors, the required proof load is derived from the Table, using a mass equal to 1,33 times
the actual mass of the HHP anchor.
Note 3: For very high holding power (VHHP) anchors, the required proof load is derived from the Table, using a mass equal to twice
the actual mass of the VHHP anchor.
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 1
Figure 2 : Proof load test 1.5.7 Hammering test

After the drop test, hammering tests are carried out on each
anchor fluke and shank, which is slung clear of the ground,
using a non-metallic sling, and hammered to check the
soundness of the component. A hammer of at least 3 kg
mass is to be used.
1.5.8 Visual examination

a
1/3
After proof loading visual inspection of all accessible sur-

b
faces is to be carried out.

b
FOUR - ARMED ANCHOR 1.5.9 General non-destructive examination

When required general non-destructive examination is to
be carried out after proof load test as indicated in Tab 3
depending on the type of anchor.
Table 3 : General NDE for

ordinary, HHP and VHHP anchors
1/3
a Method for
Method for
b
b
Location ordinary and

VHHP anchors
HHP anchors
STOCKED ANCHOR
Feeders of castings PT or MT PT or MT and UT
Risers of castings PT or MT PT or MT and UT
All surfaces of castings not required PT or MT
Weld repairs PT or MT PT or MT
Forged components not required not required
1/3
a Fabrication welds PT or MT PT or MT
b
b
1.5.10 Extended non-destructive examination

STOCKLESS ANCHOR When required extended non-destructive examination is to
be carried out after proof load test as indicated in Tab 4.
1.5.3 Test programme for cast components Table 4 : Extended NDE for
Cast components can be subjected to the following pro- ordinary, HHP and VHHP anchors
grammes at the discretion of the Society:
Location Method of NDE
• drop test as per [1.5.6], hammering test as per [1.5.7],
visual examination as per [1.5.8] and general non- Feeders of castings PT or MT and UT
destructive examination as per [1.5.9] Risers of castings PT or MT and UT
• Charpy V-notch impact test on material to demonstrate All surfaces of castings PT or MT
at least 27 J average at 0°C, visual examination as per
Random areas of castings UT
[1.5.8] and extended non-destructive examination as
per [1.5.10]. Weld repairs PT or MT
Forged components not required
1.5.4 Test programme for forged components
Fabrication welds PT or MT
Forged components are to be subjected to visual examina-
tion as per [1.5.8] and weld repairs are to be examined as 1.5.11 Repairs
indicated in [1.5.10].
If defects are detected by non-destructive examinations,
1.5.5 Test programme for fabricated/welded repairs are to be carried out in accordance with [1.4.5].
components For fracture and unsoundness detected in a drop test or
Fabricated/welded components are to be subjected to visual hammering test, repairs are not permitted and the compo-
examination as per [1.5.8] and extended non-destructive nent is to be rejected.
examination as per [1.5.10].
1.5.12 Mass and dimensional inspection
1.5.6 Drop test The verification of mass and dimensions is the responsibility
Each anchor fluke and shank is individually raised to a of the manufacturer. The surveyor may require to be present
height of 4 m and dropped on to a steel slab without fractur- during these checks.
ing. The steel slab is to be suitable to resist the impact of the The mass of the anchor is to exclude the mass of the swivel,
dropped component. unless this is an integral component.
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 1
1.5.13 Retests 2.2 Chain cable grades

Tensile and/or Charpy V-notch impact retests are permitted
in accordance with the requirements of Ch 1, Sec 2, [2.3] 2.2.1 Stud link anchor chain cable grades are detailed as
and Ch 1, Sec 2, [4.4]. follows according to the steel grade used and the method of
manufacture:
1.6 Identification, marking and certification a) grade Q1a, flash butt welded links made in Q1 steel
grade
1.6.1 Identification b) grade Q2a, flash butt welded or drop forged links made
The Manufacturer is to adopt a system of identification in Q2 steel grade
which will enable all finished anchors to be traced to the c) grade Q2b, cast links made in Q2 steel grade
original materials and their manufacturing. d) grade Q3a, flash butt welded or drop forged links made
in Q3 steel grade
1.6.2 Marking
e) grade Q3b, cast links made in Q3 steel grade.
Anchors which meet the requirements are to be stamped on
the shank and the fluke. The markings on the shank should
be approximately level with the fluke tips. On the fluke, 2.3 Approval of chain cable manufacturers
these markings should be approximately at a distance of
2.3.1 The manufacturing process of stud link anchor chain
two thirds from the tip of the bill to the center line of the
cables and accessories is to be approved by the Society.
crown on the right hand fluke looking from the crown
Provisions for the approval are given in Rule Note NR480
towards the shank. The markings are to include:
Approval of the Manufacturing Process of Metallic Materi-
• mass of anchor als.
• identification, e.g. test number or certificate number Where materials with chemical composition or properties
• Society’s stamp other than those given in [2.4] are proposed, their accep-
tance is at the Society’s discretion. The same applies in the
• Manufacturer’s mark.
case of design of links different from [2.8.2].
Additionally the unique cast identification is to be cast on
the shank and the fluke. 2.4 Rolled steel bars
1.6.3 Certification 2.4.1 Manufacturing process and approval
The testing documentation indicated in Ch 1, Sec 1, [4.2.1] Approval of manufacturing process is required for grades
is required and is to include all the information, as appro- Q2 and Q3. Provisions for the approval are given in Rule
priate. Note NR480 Approval of the Manufacturing Process of
Metallic Materials.
Anchors which meet the requirements are to be certified by
the Society. Steel grade Q1 steel is to be cast in killed condition and steel
grades Q2 and Q3 are to be killed and fine grain treated.
Steelmaker or chain cable manufacturer is to submit specifi-
2 Stud link chain cables and cations of the steels used for grade Q3. These specifications
accessories are to contain all necessary details, such as manufacturing
procedure, deoxydation practice, specified chemical com-
2.1 Scope position, heat treatment and mechanical properties.
2.1.1 General 2.4.2 Supply condition

Unless otherwise stipulated (i.e. heat treatment), the rolled
The requirements of this Article apply to the materials,
bars are supplied in the as-rolled condition.
design, manufacture and testing of stud link anchor chain
cables and accessories used for ships. 2.4.3 Chemical composition
Reference is made to the general provisions given in Ch 1, The chemical composition on ladle samples is to comply
Sec 1, [3.6] for visual, dimensional and non destructive with the limits given in Tab 5 and the approved specifica-
examination. tion where applicable.
Table 5 : Chemical composition on ladle for rolled steel bars
Chemical composition
Grade
C (%) max. Si (%) Mn (%) P (%) max. S (%) max. Al tot (%) min. (1)
Q1 0,20 0,15 - 0,35 min. 0,40 0,040 0,040 
Q2 (2) 0,24 0,15 - 0,55 max. 1,60 0,035 0,035 0,020
Q3 According to the approved specification
(1) Al may be replaced partly by other fine graining elements.
(2) Subject to the agreement of the Society, additional alloying elements may be added.
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 1
Table 6 : Mechanical properties of chain cable materials
ReH (N/mm2) Notched bar impact test

Grade Rm (N/mm2) A5 (%) min Z (%) min
min Test temp. (°C) KV (J) av. (1) min
Q1  370 - 490 25   
Q2 295 490 - 690 22  0 27 (2)
Q3 410 min 690 17 40 0 60
(20) (35) (3)
(1) Energy average value of 3 tests. One individual value may be lower than the average value, but not below 70% of the average
value stipulated.
(2) The impact test of grade 2 materials may be waived if the chain cable is supplied in a heat treated condition.
(3) In general, Charpy V impact tests are to be performed at the temperature of 0°C. At the discretion of the Society, the impact test
of grade 3 materials may alternatively be carried out at 20°C; in such case the energy required, as shown in the Table, is 35 J.
2.4.4 Mechanical tests Re-tests requirements for Charpy V-notch impact tests are to
For performance of mechanical tests, the steel bars are to be be in accordance with Ch 1, Sec 2, [4.4]. Failure to meet the
sorted according to heats and diameters into batches not requirements results in rejection of the batch represented.
exceeding 50 t each. From each batch a test sample is to be If failure to pass the test is definitely attributable to improper
taken and subjected in full diameter to the heat treatment heat treatment of the test sample, a new test sample may be
provided for the finished chain cable; see Tab 6. Details of taken from the same piece and re-heat treated. The com-
the heat treatment must be indicated by the chain cable plete test (both tensile and impact tests) is to be repeated;
manufacturer. the original results obtained may be disregarded.
From each test sample, one tensile and when required one 2.4.6 Freedom from defects
set of three Charpy V notch impact test specimens with the
All products are to be checked by Manufacturers in relation
notch axis radial to the bar are to be taken in the longitudi-
to their surface conditions.
nal direction at a distance of 1/6 diameter from the surface
or as close as possible to this position (see Fig 3). The rolled bars are to be free from internal and surface
defects which might impair proper workability and use. Sur-
Mechanical tests are to be carried out by the steel mill or face defects may be repaired by grinding, provided the per-
the chain cable manufacturer or a laboratory recognized by missible tolerance is not exceeded.
the Society, as agreed with the chain cable manufacturer
and witnessed by a Society Surveyor. 2.4.7 Dimensional check - tolerances
When required, Charpy V notch impact test specimens are The diameter and roundness are to be within the tolerances
to be tested at the temperature prescribed in Tab 6 for the specified in Tab 7, unless otherwise agreed.
steel grade tested.
Table 7 : Dimensional tolerances of rolled bars
The mechanical test results are to comply with the require-
ments of Tab 6 for the steel grade tested. Nominal Tolerance on Tolerance on
diameter diameter roundness
2.4.5 Re-tests (mm) (mm) dmax  dmin (mm)
Re-tests requirements for tensile tests are to be in accor- less than 25 0 +1,0 0,60
dance with Ch 1, Sec 2, [2.3]. Failure to meet the specified 25 - 35 0 +1,2 0,80
requirements of either of both additional tests results in 36 - 50 0 +1,6 1,10
rejection of the batch represented. 51 - 80 0 +2,0 1,50
81 - 100 0 +2,6 1,95
Figure 3 : Sampling of chain cable steel
101 - 120 0 +3,0 2,25
Specimen for Charpy-V 121 - 160 0 +4,0 3,00
notched bar impact test
2.4.8 Identification of material
d/6
Manufacturers are to establish an identification system

ensuring traceability of the material to the original cast.
2.4.9 Marking
The minimum markings required are the steelmaker’s brand
mark, the steel grade and an abbreviated symbol of the
heat. Steel bars having diameters up to and including
d/6
40 mm, combined into bundles, may be marked on perma-

Tensile specimen nently affixed labels.
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 1
2.4.10 Material certification whichever is specified for the relevant cast steel grade in
Bar material grade Q2 and Q3 is to be certified by the Soci- Tab 8.
ety. For each consignment, the steelmaker is to provide the
Surveyor with a certificate containing at least the following 2.7 Materials for studs
data:
• steel maker’s name and/or purchaser’s order number 2.7.1 The studs are to be made of rolled, cast or forged
• number and dimensions of bars and weight of consign- steel corresponding to that of the chain cable or from ordi-
ment nary steel grade with a carbon content generally not
exceeding 0,25%. The use of other materials, e.g. grey or
• steel grade
nodular cast iron is not permitted. Generally mechanical
• heat number tests are not required.
• manufacturing procedure
• chemical composition 2.8 Design and manufacture of chain cables
• details of heat treatment of the test sample and accessories
• results of mechanical tests (where applicable)
• nos. of test specimens (where applicable). 2.8.1 Design
The form and proportion of links and accessories are to be
2.5 Forged steels in accordance with recognized standards accepted by the
Society, e.g. ISO 1704 standard, or approved specification.
2.5.1 General requirements Typical designs are given in Fig 4 and Fig 5. Where designs
Forged steels used for the manufacture of chain cables and do not comply with these figures and where accessories are
accessories are to be in compliance with Ch 2, Sec 3, of welded construction, drawings and specifications giving
unless otherwise specified in the following requirements. full details of the manufacturing process and the heat treat-
ment are to be submitted to the Society for approval.
2.5.2 Chemical composition A length of chain cable is to comprise an odd number of
The chemical composition of ladle samples is to comply links.
with the approved specification. The steel maker is to deter-
mine and certify the chemical composition of each heat. 2.8.2 Manufacturing process
Stud link chain cables are preferably to be manufactured by
2.5.3 Supply condition
hot bending and flash butt-welding of rolled bars from steel
The raw material may be supplied in the as-rolled condi-
grades Q1, Q2 or Q3. Manufacture of links by drop forging
tion. Finished forgings are to be properly heat treated, i.e.
or steel casting is permitted.
normalised, normalised and tempered or quenched and
tempered, whichever is specified for the relevant steel grade The stud may be either forced, or forced and secured by
in Tab 8. welding, or solid with the link.
Table 8 : Heat treatment of chain cables 2.8.3 Heat treatment and supply condition
According to the steel grade, chain cables are to be sup-
Grade Condition of supply plied in one of the conditions specified in Tab 8. The heat
Q1 (Q2) (1) As-welded or normalised condition treatment is to be performed before the proof and breaking
load tests.
Q2 Normalised, normalised and tempered
Q3 or quenched and tempered condition 2.8.4 Mechanical properties
(1) Grade Q2 chain cables are generally to be normalised. The mechanical properties of finished chain cables and
The Society may, however, waive this requirement on accessories are to be in accordance with Tab 6 depending
the basis of an approval test, in which case additional on the relevant chain cable grade.
requirements may be specified.
2.8.5 Proof and breaking load properties
2.6 Cast steels Chain cables and accessories are to be manufactured in a
manner such to withstand the proof and breaking loads
2.6.1 General requirements indicated in Tab 11, depending on the diameter and the rel-
Cast steels used for the manufacture of chain cables and evant chain cable grade.
accessories are to be in compliance with Ch 2, Sec 4,
unless otherwise specified in the following requirements. 2.8.6 Freedom from defects
All individual parts are to have a clean surface consistent
2.6.2 Chemical composition
with the method of manufacture and be free from cracks,
The chemical composition of ladle samples is to comply
notches, inclusions and other defects that might impair
with the approved specification. The foundry is to deter-
proper workability, use and strength. The burrs produced by
mine and certify the chemical composition of each heat.
upsetting or drop forging are to be properly removed.
2.6.3 Heat treatment Minor surface defects may be ground off so as to leave a
All castings are to be properly heat treated, i.e. normalised, gentle transition to the surrounding surface provided the
normalised and tempered or quenched and tempered, acceptable tolerances are not exceeded.
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 1
2.8.7 Dimensions and tolerances c) The maximum allowable tolerance on a length of five
The dimensions of links and accessories are to conform to links, measured after proof load test with the chain
the relevant recognised standard (see Fig 4 and Fig 5) or the loaded to about 10% of the proof load, is + 2,5%. No
approved specification. negative tolerance is permitted.
d) All other dimensions are subject to a manufacturing tol-
The manufacturing tolerances on stud link chain are as fol-
erance of  2,5%, provided always that all components
lows:
of the chain cable fit together properly.
a) The cross-sectional area at the crown of the link is to e) Studs are to be located in the links centrally and at right
have no negative tolerance. The plus tolerance on the angles to the sides of the link, although the studs of the
diameter at the crown measured out of the plane of the final link at each end of any length may also be located
link is not to exceed 5%. The negative tolerance on the off-centre to facilitate the insertion of the joining
diameter at the crown measured in the plane of the link shackle.
is not to exceed:
The following tolerances are regarded as being inherent
•  1 mm when nominal diameter is  40 mm in the method of manufacture and are acceptable pro-
•  2 mm when nominal diameter is > 40 mm and vided that the stud fits snugly and its ends lie flush
 84 mm against the inside of the link.
•  3 mm when nominal diameter is > 84 mm and Maximum off-centre distance “X”: 10% of the nominal
 122 mm diameter d,
Maximum deviation “” from the 90°- position: 4°.
•  4 mm when nominal diameter is > 122 mm.
The tolerances are to be measured in accordance with
b) The diameter measured at locations other than the Fig 6.
crown is to have no negative tolerance. The plus toler-
The manufacturing tolerances on accessories are as follows:
ance is to be in accordance with Tab 7 except at the butt
weld where it is to be in accordance with the agreed • nominal diameter: + 5%, no negative tolerance
manufacturer’s specification. • other dimensions: + or  2,5%.
Figure 4 : Typical design of chain links

All dimensions are shown as multiples of the nominal diameter d of the common link.

The dimensions in brackets may be chosen for end studless links in outboard end swivel pieces. The diameter of enlarged links and end studless
links may be chosen in the range of chain cable diameters shown in Tab 11.
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 1
Figure 5 : Typical design of shackles and swivels

All dimensions are shown as multiples of the nominal diameter d of the common link.
4
4,2 1,52
1,3
1,8
67
3
0,
∅ 0,4
3,4
7,1
0,
4
6
1,6
0,
5
0,8
0,2 1,3
2,8
a - Kenter shackle b - Joining shackle
5,2 3,4 4,7
2
1,4
1,2
1,4
3,35
4,6
8,7
7,4
9,7
1,75
1,8
(3,2)
3,1
0,9
1,4 0,2 1,4

1,1
1,25
3,1 (1,45)
c - End shackle d - Swivel
For swivels, dimensions in brackets may apply to cast steel swivels.
Figure 6 : Manufacturing tolerances a) all welds are to be carried out before the final heat treat-
ment of the chain cable
a b) the stud ends are to fit the inside of the link without
appreciable gap and the weld is restricted to one end
only, i.e., opposite to the flash butt-weld. In general, the
full periphery of the stud end is to be welded
d
c) welding is to be made preferably in horizontal position

Off-centre distance :
by qualified welders, following an approved procedure
A-a and using suitable welding consumables
X=
2 d) the welds are to be free from defects liable to impair the
proper use of the chain. Undercuts, end craters and sim-
=
ilar defects are, where necessary, to be ground off.
A 2.9 Testing of finished chain cables

2.9.1 Proof load test
2.8.8 Welding of studs Each chain cable length (27,5 m maximum) is to be sub-
jected to a loading test at the proof load appropriate to the
Where studs are welded into the links of flash butt-welded particular chain cable as shown in Tab 11 and using a test-
chain cable, welding is to be carried out in compliance ing machine approved for the purpose. The chain cable is to
with the following conditions: be free from paint and anti-corrosive media.
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 1
Should a proof load test fail, the defective link(s) is (are) to The location of tensile and Charpy V-notch test specimens is
be replaced. If the entire chain cable length is not re-heat to be as per [2.4.4] and Fig 3.
treated, each new link is to be subjected to a satisfactory
At the discretion of the Society, additional tests as men-
method of heat treatment (normalising, normalising and
tioned above may be required for non-heat treated grade
tempering, quenching and tempering) as required, without
Q2 chain cables, as stated at the approval.
affecting adjacent links. In such case, extra link is to be man-
ufactured and tested in the same way as the new link and The extra link(s) for taking the mechanical test specimens
subjected to mechanical tests as required by [2.9.3]. The (or where the links are small, several links) is (are) to be
repaired length is then to be subjected to a repeat of the made as part of the chain cable and is (are) to be heat
proof load test. In addition, the manufacturer shall make treated with it. This (these) link(s) is (are) not to be part of
appropriate investigations to identify the cause of the failure. the same length as that from which the breaking test speci-
men is taken, unless each length is subjected to breaking
load test.
2.9.2 Breaking load test
The tensile and Charpy V impact test results are to comply
On every four chain cable lengths, a breaking test speci-
with the requirements set in Tab 10.
men, comprising at least three links, is to be taken and
tested at the breaking load appropriate to the particular
2.9.4 Marking
chain cable as shown in Tab 11. The breaking load is to be
maintained for a minimum of 30 seconds. The links of the Chain cables which meet the requirements are to be
breaking test specimen are to be made at the same time and stamped at both ends of each length at least with the follow-
in the same way as the chain cable and heat treated ing marks, as indicated in Fig 7:
together with it. Only after this, the breaking test specimen • chain cable grade
may be separated from the chain cable in the presence of
the surveyor. The breaking test specimen is to be free from • certificate number
paint and anti-corrosive media. • Society’s stamp.
Should a breaking load test fail, a further test specimen may
be taken from the same length of chain cable and tested. Figure 7 : Marking of chain cables
The test will be considered successful if the requirements
Certificate No
are then satisfied.
If the retest fails, the length of chain cable concerned is

rejected. If the manufacturer so wishes, the remaining three
lengths belonging to the batch may then be individually XXXXXXX
subjected to testing at the breaking load. If one of such tests

fails to meet the requirements, the entire batch is rejected.
In addition, the manufacturer shall make appropriate inves-

tigations to identify the cause of the failure. XX XXX
If the tensile loading capacity of the testing machine is

Society's stamp
insufficient to apply the breaking load for chain cables of
large diameter, the Society may agree an alternative testing Chain cable grade
procedure upon special consideration.
2.9.3 Mechanical tests on chain cables grade Q2 2.9.5 Certification

and Q3
The testing documentation indicated in Ch 1, Sec 1, [4.2.1]
The scope of the mechanical tests on finished chain cables is required and is to include all the information, as appro-
is given in Tab 9. priate.
For grade Q3 and where required for grade Q2 chain Chain cables which meet the requirements are to be certi-
cables, one tensile and one set of Charpy V-notch impact fied by the Society.
test specimens are to be taken in a link at the side opposite
the weld from every four lengths of chain cable. 2.10 Testing of accessories
For grade Q3 chain cable and where required for grade Q2,
an additional tensile test specimen across the weld and an 2.10.1 Proof load test
additional set of Charpy V-notch impact test specimens hav- All accessories are to be subjected to the proof load test at
ing the notch located in the fusion line of the weld are to be the proof load specified for the corresponding chain in Tab
taken in a link from every four lengths of chain cable. 11, and in accordance with the provisions of [2.9.1].
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 1
Table 9 : Scope of the mechanical tests for finished chain cables and accessories
Condition of Number of tests on every four lengths

Grade Manufacturing method supply Breaking load Tensile test base Charpy V-notch impact test
(1) test (2) material Base material Weldment
Q1a flash-butt welding AW 1 not required not required not required
Q2a flash-butt welding AW 1 1 3 3
N 1 not required not required not required
Q3a flash-butt welding N, N+T, Q+T 1 1 (4) 3 3
Q2a, Q2b forged or cast N 1 1 3 (3) not applicable
Q3a, Q3b forged or cast N, N+T, Q+T 1 1 3 not applicable
(1) AW= as welded; N = normalising; N+T= normalising and tempering; Q + T = quenching and tempering.
(2) For test sampling, see [2.9.2].
(3) For chain cables, Charpy V-notch impact test is not required.
(4) Additional tensile test across the weld.
Table 10 : Mechanical properties for finished chain cables and accessories
Welded area
Grade Base material Tensile test (1) Charpy V-notch impact test
Elongation A5 (%) min. Test temperature (°C) Impact energy (J) min. (2)
Q1 25 not required not required
The requirements
Q2a, Q2b of Tab 6 18 0 27
Q3a, Q3b are 14 0 50
applicable
Q3a, Q3b 20 (27) (3)
(1) For the tensile and yield strengths, the requirements of Tab 6 are applicable; for grade Q3 a reduction of area is not specified.
(2) Average value from 3 test specimens. One individual value may be lower than the average value, but not below 70% of the
average value stipulated.
(3) In general, Charpy V impact tests are to be performed at the temperature of 0°C. However, at the discretion of the Society, the
impact test of grade Q3 materials may alternatively be carried out at 20°C; in such case, as shown in the Table, the energy
required is 27 J.
Table 11 : Proof and breaking loads for stud link chain cables
Minimum mass
Chain Grade Q1 Grade Q2 Grade Q3
per length of 27,50m (1)
diameter
(mm) Proof load Breaking Proof load Breaking Proof load Breaking with D shackle with lugless
(kN) load (kN) (kN) load (kN) (kN) load (kN) (kg) shackle (kg)
11 35,8 51 51 71,7 71,7 102 - -
12,5 46 65,7 65,7 92 92 132 100 98
14 57,9 82 82 116 116 165 122 120
16 75,5 107 107 150 150 216 157 155
17,5 89 127 127 179 179 256 186 184
19 105 150 150 211 211 301 218 215
20,5 123 175 175 244 244 349 253 250
22 140 200 200 280 280 401 290 287
24 167 237 237 332 332 476 343 339
26 194 278 278 389 389 556 400 395
28 225 321 321 449 449 642 462 456
30 257 368 368 514 514 735 530 523
32 291 417 417 583 583 833 603 594
34 328 468 468 655 655 937 680 670
36 366 523 523 732 732 1050 760 750
(1) These values are not mandatory and are given for information only.
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 1
Minimum mass
Chain Grade Q1 Grade Q2 Grade Q3
per length of 27,50m (1)
diameter
(mm) Proof load Breaking Proof load Breaking Proof load Breaking with D shackle with lugless
(kN) load (kN) (kN) load (kN) (kN) load (kN) (kg) shackle (kg)
38 406 581 581 812 812 1160 850 835
40 448 640 640 896 896 1280 930 915
42 492 703 703 981 981 1400 1030 1010
44 538 769 769 1080 1080 1540 1140 1120
46 585 837 837 1170 1170 1680 1235 1210
48 635 908 908 1270 1270 1810 1345 1320
50 686 981 981 1370 1370 1960 1460 1430
52 739 1060 1060 1480 1480 2110 1585 1555
54 794 1140 1140 1590 1590 2270 1700 1665
56 851 1220 1220 1710 1710 2430 1840 1800
58 909 1290 1290 1810 1810 2600 1980 1930
60 969 1380 1380 1940 1940 2770 2120 2065
62 1030 1470 1470 2060 2060 2940 2255 2200
64 1100 1560 1560 2190 2190 3130 2395 2330
66 1160 1660 1660 2310 2310 3300 2570 2505
68 1230 1750 1750 2450 2450 3500 2715 2635
70 1290 1840 1840 2580 2580 3690 2900 2815
73 1390 1990 1990 2790 2790 3990 3150 3065
76 1500 2150 2150 3010 3010 4300 3425 3315
78 1580 2260 2260 3160 3160 4500 3620 3500
81 1690 2410 2410 3380 3380 4820 3880 3745
84 1800 2580 2580 3610 3610 5160 4135 3980
87 1920 2750 2750 3850 3850 5500 4485 4315
90 2050 2920 2920 4090 4090 5840 4840 4655
92 2130 3040 3040 4260 4260 6080 5040 4845
95 2260 3230 3230 4510 4510 6440 5410 5190
97 2340 3340 3340 4680 4680 6690 5610 5375
100 2470 3530 3530 4940 4940 7060 5980 5725
102 2560 3660 3660 5120 5120 7320 6170 5900
105 2700 3850 3850 5390 5390 7700 6540 6245
107 2790 3980 3980 5570 5570 7960 6910 6610
111 2970 4250 4250 5940 5940 8480 7270 6930
114 3110 4440 4440 6230 6230 8890 7885 7505
117 3260 4650 4650 6510 6510 9300 8260 7850
120 3400 4850 4850 6810 6810 9720 8630 8190
122 3500 5000 5000 7000 7000 9990 9065 8605
124 3600 5140 5140 7200 7200 10280 9200 8725
127 3750 5350 5350 7490 7490 10710 9870 9370
130 3900 5570 5570 7800 7800 11140 10250 9690
132 4000 5720 5720 8000 8000 11420 10730 10145
137 4260 6080 6080 8510 8510 12160 11575 10920
142 4520 6450 6450 9030 9030 12910 12420 11690
147 4790 6840 6840 9560 9560 13660 13265 12455
152 5050 7220 7220 10100 10100 14430 14090 13195
157 5320 7600 7600 10640 10640 15200 15030 14080
162 5590 7990 7990 11170 11170 15970 16000 14990
(1) These values are not mandatory and are given for information only.
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 1
2.10.2 Breaking load test 2.10.4 Marking

From each manufacturing batch (same grade, size and heat Accessories which meet the requirements are to be stamped
as follows:
treatment batch, but not necessarily representative of each
heat of steel or individual purchase order) of 25 units or less • chain cable grade
of detachable links, shackles, swivels, swivel shackles, • certificate number
enlarged links and end links, and from each manufacturing • Society’ stamp.
batch of 50 units or less of kenter shackles, one unit is to be
subjected to the breaking load test specified for the corre- 2.10.5 Certification
sponding chain given by Tab 11 and in accordance with the The testing documentation indicated in Ch 1, Sec 1, [4.2.1]
provisions of [2.9.2], as appropriate. Parts tested in this way is required and is to include all the information, as appro-
may not be put to further use. Enlarged links and end links priate.
need not be tested provided that they are manufactured and Accessories which meet the requirements are to be certified
heat treated together with the chain cable. by the Society.
The Society may waive the breaking load test if:
3 Studless chain cables
a) the breaking load has been demonstrated during the
approval testing of parts of the same design,
3.1 Scope
b) the mechanical properties, inclusive of impact energy,
3.1.1 General
of each manufacturing batch are proved, and
The requirements of this Article apply to the materials and
c) the parts are subjected to suitable non-destructive test- testing of studless chain cables used for ships.
ing. Reference is made to the general provisions given in Ch 1,
Notwithstanding the above, the accessories, which have
examination.
been successfully tested at the prescribed breaking load
appropriate to the chain, may be used in service, on a case 3.1.2 Manufacture
by case basis, where the accessories are manufactured with
The requirements of [2.3.1] are to be complied with.
the following:
3.1.3 Studless chain cable grades
a) the material having higher strength characteristics than
those specified for the part in question (e.g. grade Q3 Depending on the nominal tensile strength of the steel used
for manufacture, studless chain cables are divided into the
materials for accessories for grade Q2 chain)
following grades:
b) or, alternatively, the same grade material as the chain • SL1, SL2 and SL3 for steels in compliance with require-
but with increased dimensions subject to successful test ments for stud link steel grades Q1, Q2 and Q3, respec-
proving that the breaking strength of such accessories is tively.
not less than 1,4 times the prescribed breaking load of
the chain for which they are intended. 3.1.4 Short and long links
The provisions of this Article apply to short studless link
2.10.3 Mechanical properties and tests chain cables.
When long studless link chain cables are intended to be
Unless otherwise accepted by the Society, the forging or used, the steel properties are to be submitted by the Manu-
casting must at least comply with the mechanical properties facturer. The tensile strength and yield stress minimum val-
given in Tab 10, when properly heat treated. ues are to be specially adapted for each grade, so that the
chain cable can withstand the proof and breaking loads
For test sampling, forgings and castings of similar dimen-
indicated in Tab 12 depending on the relevant chain cable
sions originating from the same heat treatment charge and grade.
the same heat of steel are to be combined into one batch.
As a rule, the use of long links is not permitted for SL3 stud-
Mechanical tests are to be carried out in the presence of the less chain cables.
Surveyor, depending on the type and grade of material
used. From each batch, one tensile test specimen and three 3.2 Materials for studless chain cables
Charpy V-notch impact test specimens are to be taken in
accordance with Tab 9 and tested in accordance with Ch 1, 3.2.1 Requirements for materials
Sec 2. The general requirements concerning material Manufactur-
ers, manufacturing procedure, supply condition, freedom
Enlarged links and end links need not be tested provided from defects and dimensional tolerances are the same as
that they are manufactured and heat treated together with those given in [2.3.1], [2.4.1], [2.4.2], [2.4.6] and [2.4.7]
the chain cable. for stud link chain cables.
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 1
The chemical composition and mechanical properties of 3.3.2 Proof load test
steels to be used for manufacturing chains of grades SLl, SL2
and SL3 are to comply with the prescriptions given in Tab 6 All finished studless chain cables are to be subjected, over
(mechanical properties) and Tab 5 (chemical composition) their full length, to a loading test at the proof load appropri-
for grades Q1, Q2 and Q3, respectively. ate to the particular chain as shown in Tab 12. For the load
For SL3 chain cables, the minimum tensile requirements may test, an approved testing machine is to be used.
be reduced down to 365 N/mm2 (instead of 410 N/mm2) for Tests are to be conducted as indicated in [2.9.1] for stud
yield stress and 610 N/mm2 (instead of 690 N/mm2) for ten- link chain cables.
sile strength on condition that the finished chain can with-
stand the required proof and breaking loads.
3.3.3 Breaking load tests
3.2.2 Testing of materials
Sample lengths, comprised of at least three links and taken
The requirements for testing of material for studless chain
every four 27,5 m lengths or every 110 m from the chain
cables of grades SL1, SL2 and SL3 are the same as for testing
of the corresponding grades Q1, Q2 and Q3, given in cables, are to be tested at the breaking loads shown in Tab
[2.4.4]. 12.
However, for grades SL1 and SL2, material testing in the The conditions for execution and separation of the three
presence of the Surveyor is not required, and the supply of a link samples are the same as those prescribed in [2.9.2].
works’ certificate may be admitted on condition that all the
bars can be identified with the corresponding certificate. Tests are to be conducted as indicated in [2.9.2] for stud
link chain cables.
3.3.4 Mechanical tests on grade SL3 studless chain
3.3.1 General
cables
Studless chain cables and corresponding accessories are to
withstand the proof and breaking loads indicated in Tab 12, For grade SL3, tensile tests and Charpy V-notch tests are to
depending on the relevant studless chain cable grade. be performed as required for Q3 stud link chain cables (see
Mechanical testing on links is required for grade SL3 only. [2.9.3]).
Table 12 : Proof and breaking loads for studless chain cables
Chain cable Grade SL1 Grade SL2 Grade SL3 Mass of 100 m of chain
diameter Proof load Breaking Proof load Breaking Proof load Breaking Normal link Short link
(mm) (kN) load (kN) (kN) load (kN) (kN) load (kN) (kg) (kg)
6,0 6,5 13 9 18 13 26 79 86
8,0 12,0 24 17 34 24 48 141 153
10,0 18,5 37 26 52 37 74 240 240
11,0 22,5 45 32 64 45 90 265 289
12,5 29,0 58 41 82 58 116 345 375
14,5 39,0 78 55 110 78 156 462 503
16,0 47,5 95 67 134 95 190 563 612
17,5 56,5 113 80 160 113 226 675 732
19,0 67,0 134 95 190 134 268 794 865
20,5 78,0 156 111 222 156 312 928 1005
22,0 90,0 180 128 256 180 360 1063 1155
24,0 106 212 151 302 212 424 1268 1380
25,5 120 240 170 340 240 480 1432 1560
27,0 135 270 192 384 270 540 1610 1742
28,5 150 300 213 426 300 600 1788 1942
30,0 166 332 236 472 332 664 1984 2155
32,0 189 378 268 536 378 756 2255 2480
33,0 201 402 285 570 402 804 2396 2605
35,0 226 452 321 642 452 904 2705 2940
37,0 253 506 359 718 506 1012 3020 3380
38,0 267 534 379 758 534 1068 3200 3460
40,0 296 592 420 840 592 1184 3520 3830
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 1
The values to be obtained are: 4.1.2 Continuous production

• tensile properties: the same values as required for the In the case of continuous production, a specific procedure
round bars used to manufacture the chain cables for testing and inspection may be allowed by the Society for
• Charpy V-notch impact tests: the same as prescribed in approved Manufacturers at their request.
Tab 10 for Q3 stud link chain cables.
4.2 Manufacture
No mechanical tests are required on links with a nominal
diameter under 20 mm. 4.2.1 General
Wire ropes are to be manufactured in accordance with
3.3.5 Dimensions and tolerances
national or international standards recognised by the Soci-
The dimensions of links are to comply with a recognised ety. In particular, ISO 2408 Standard is recognised.
standard. Typical design of a studless link is given in Fig 8.
The type and size of ropes are to be in accordance with the
The tolerances are the same as those prescribed in [2.8.7] requirements specified for each application by the relevant
for stud link chain cables. part of the Rules or the approved plans relative to each
installation.
Figure 8 : Studless link for studless chain cable
Ropes of type and size different from those covered by this
Article are considered in each case, taking into account
3 d their application; see also [4.2.4].
(3,5)
4.2.2 Rope materials
Ropes are to be manufactured with wires drawn from steel
billets of appropriate and homogeneous quality; the steel is
to be made by a process in accordance with Ch 2, Sec 1,
[1.2].
Wires are not to show signs of defects and their surface is to
be smooth and regular.
3,6
All the steel wires of a wire rope are to be of the same ten-
sile grade, generally including those forming the metal core,
if any.
As a rule, wires having the minimum nominal tensile
5 strength Rm in the range 1420 - 1960 N/mm2 are to be used.
(5,5)
All dimensions are shown as multiples of the nominal diameter d.

The fibre core of the ropes or of the strands may be made of
natural fibres (manilla, abaca, sisal, hemp, jute, cotton) or
The dimensions in brackets correspond to long link chain cables.
of synthetic fibres (polyethylene, polypropylene, polyamid,
3.3.6 Galvanising in manufacture polyester).
When galvanising is required (mainly for pleasure craft), 4.2.3 Galvanising
this is to be made by the hot process, following the standard
All types of wire ropes are to be zinc-coated, except in spe-
ISO 1461.
cial cases to be considered individually by the Society and
The average mass of the coating (for chains above 5 mm in generally involving limitation in the use of the wire ropes
diameter) is not to be under 500 g/m2. The tolerances given concerned.
in [3.3.5] are to be maintained after the galvanising opera- Galvanising procedures and their results (in particular,
tions. degree of bonding and uniformity of the coating) are to be
The required proof and breaking load tests are to be carried suitable and to the satisfaction of the Society.
out after the galvanising is completed. The wires are to be galvanised so that the zinc mass satisfies
the values specified in Tab 13.
3.3.7 Marking
Studless chain cables which meet the requirements are to 4.2.4 Manufacturing process and facilities
be stamped at both ends of each length as indicated in The manufacturing procedures and relevant facilities are to
[2.9.4] for stud link chain cables. be suitable and such as to ensure production of the required
quality. The manufacturing procedures of ropes having wire
4 Steel wire ropes with nominal tensile strength equal to or greater than 1960
N/mm2 and ropes of different construction are to be
4.1 Scope approved for the individual Manufacturers in accordance
with the requirements of the document “Approval of Manu-
4.1.1 General facturers”.
The requirements of this Article apply to unalloyed steel The required tests and examinations are to be performed
wire ropes, round stranded, intended for warping, towing, with the appropriate equipment and procedures recognised
rigging and similar applications. by the Society; the testing machine is to be calibrated.
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 1
Table 13 : Galvanising of the wires of wire ropes b) ropes with 6 equal strands around a fibre core; each
strand includes a fibre core and 24 steel wires (total
Diameter d of Minimum mass of zinc coating (g/m2) number of wires: 144 plus 6 fibre cores); see Tab 16
galvanised wires c) Warrington 6x19 ropes with 6 equal strands around a
(mm) Class A Class B
fibre core; each strand includes 19 steel wires (total
0,45  d < 0,50 75 40 number of wires: 114); see Tab 17
0,50  d < 0,60 90 50 d) Warrington-Seale 6xn ropes with 6 equal strands around
0,60  d < 0,80 110 60 a fibre core; each strand includes n = 26, 31, 36 or 41
steel wires; see Tab 17.
0,80  d < 1,00 130 70
Other types of ropes which may be used depending on the
1,00  d < 1,20 150 80 applications are also indicated in Tab 15 to Tab 19.
1,20  d < 1,50 165 90
4.3.2 Main characteristics
1,50  d < 1,90 180 100
The typical characteristics of the ropes are generally the fol-
1,90  d < 2,50 205 110
lowing:
2,50  d < 3,20 230 125
• diameter (of the circumference enclosing a cross-sec-
3,20  d < 4,00 250 135 tion of the rope; to be measured with the rope strained
under a load of approximately 1/20 of its minimum
4.2.5 Quality of materials breaking strength)
• construction (number and type of the cores, strands and
Ropes are to be free from material or manufacturing defects
wires)
which might impair their intended application, their effi-
ciency, or their expected life span; in particular, they are to • coating or type of surface finish of the steel wires
be free from oxidising or corrosion traces and there is to be • breaking load.
no sign of broken wires, scratching, crushing or defective
twisting. As regards the ropes considered by the Rules, the following
applies to the above characteristics:
4.2.6 Dimensional tolerances • the wire coating is to be of zinc in all cases
Unless otherwise specified, the tolerances on the diameter • the minimum breaking loads applicable when testing
given in recognised standards such as ISO 2408 apply; in full sections of ropes are given in Tab 15 to Tab 19 for
particular, for the ropes considered in these Rules, the toler- each type of rope in relation to its diameter.
ances on the diameter are specified in Tab 14.
Table 14 : Permissible tolerances
on nominal diameter 4.4.1 Sampling
Acceptance tests are be performed on each rope length
Nominal Tolerance on the nominal diameter (%) (defined as either one single length or multiple lengths man-
diameter of Ropes having strands Ropes having strands ufactured with continuity).
rope (mm) with fibre core with metal core Where the rope length is greater than 10000 m, the accep-
<8 +7; 1 +5; 1 tance tests are to be carried out for every portion of
10000 m or fraction thereof.
8 +6; 1 +4; 1
When the base material used has the same origin and char-
acteristics, the acceptance tests required in [4.4] for each
4.3 Types of ropes
rope length may be performed for each rope construction
and diameter.
4.3.1 General
Suitable sampling and identification procedures are to be
The wire ropes consist of an assembly of several strands (as adopted, to the Surveyor’s satisfaction.
a rule, at least six and a maximum of eight, except for non-
rotating ropes) laid around a fibre or metal core. The tests and examinations under [4.4.2], [4.4.3] or [4.4.4],
[4.4.6] and [4.4.8] are to be performed for acceptance.
Each strand is to include at least seven wires. In the case of The tests under [4.4.5] and [4.4.7] are to be carried out
a fibre core, the strands are to include at least two layers of when required by the Surveyor as a production check.
wires.
4.4.2 Visual examination and check of the diameter
The following types of ropes are the most commonly used:
and construction
a) ropes with 6 equal strands around a fibre core; each The examination and checks are to be performed by the
strand may include either 7, 19 or 37 steel wires (total Manufacturer and random checks are to be carried out by
number of wires: 42, 114 or 222); see Tab 15 the Surveyor to the extent deemed necessary.
Table 15 : Minimum breaking loads, in kN, of steel wire ropes with fibre core (non-parallel lay ropes with 6 ordinary strands)
Composition of
wire rope
6x7 6 x 19 6 x 37
Composition and 1+6 1 + 6 + 12 1 + 6 + 12 + 18

type of strands Ordinary Ordinary Ordinary

Diameter of rope Tensile grade Tensile grade Tensile grade
(mm) 1420 1570 1770 1960 1420 1570 1770 1960 1420 1570 1770 1960
10 44,3 49,0 55,2 61,2 42,9 47,4 53,5 59,2
11 53,6 59,3 66,8 74,0 51,9 57,4 64,7 71,6
12 63,8 70,5 79,5 88,1 61,8 68,3 77,0 85,2
13 74,9 82,8 93,3 103 72,5 80,1 90,3 100
14 86,8 96,0 108 120 84,1 92,9 105 116
16 121 134 150 167 113 125 141 157 110 121 137 152
18 153 169 190 211 144 159 179 198 139 154 173 192
20 189 208 235 260 177 196 221 245 172 190 214 237
22 228 252 284 315 214 237 267 296 208 229 259 286
24 272 300 338 375 255 282 318 352 247 273 308 341
26 319 352 397 440 299 331 373 413 290 321 361 400
28 370 409 461 510 347 384 433 479 336 372 419 464
32 483 534 602 666 454 502 565 626 439 486 547 606
Bureau Veritas - Rules on Materials and Welding

36 611 676 762 843 574 635 716 793 556 614 693 767
40 (754) 834 940 1041 709 784 884 978 686 759 855 947
44 858 948 1069 1184 830 918 1035 1146
48 1021 1129 1272 1409 988 1092 1232 1364
52 1198 1325 1493 1654 1160 1282 1445 1601
56 1389 1536 1732 1918 1345 1487 1676 1856
60 1544 1707 1924 2131
64 1757 1942 2189 2425
68 1983 2192 2472 2737
72 2223 2458 2771 3069
76 2477 2739 3088 3419
Note 1: For wire ropes with metal core, the minimum breaking loads given in this table are to be increased by 8%.
For preformed wire ropes, the values in the table are to be reduced by 3%.
167
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 1
Table 16 : Minimum breaking loads, in kN, of steel wire ropes with fibre core (non parallel lay ropes with 6 ordinary strands)
168
Composition of
wire rope
6 x 61 6 x 24 6 x 30
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 1
Composition and 1 + 6 + 12 + 18 + 24 Fibre core + 9 + 15 Fibre core + 12 + 18

type of strands Ordinary Ordinary Ordinary
(mm) 1420 1570 1770 1960 1420 1570 1770 1960 1420 1570 1770 1960
10 39,8 44,0 49,6 54,9
11 48,1 53,2 60,0 66,4
12 57,3 63,3 71,4 79,0
13 67,2 74,3 83,8 92,7 61,0 67,4 76,0 84,1
14 77,9 86,2 97,1 108 70,7 78,2 88,1 97,6
16 102 113 127 140 92,3 102 115 127
18 129 142 161 178 117 129 146 161
20 165 182 205 227 159 176 198 220 144 160 180 199
22 199 220 248 275 192 213 240 266 175 193 218 241
24 237 262 296 327 229 253 285 316 208 230 259 287
26 278 308 347 384 269 297 335 371 244 270 304 337
28 323 357 402 446 312 345 389 430 283 313 352 390
32 422 466 526 582 407 450 507 562 369 408 460 510

36 534 590 665 737 515 570 642 711 467 517 583 645
40 659 728 821 909 636 703 793 878 577 638 719 797
44 797 881 994 1100 770 851 959 1062 698 772 870 964
48 949 1049 1183 1310 916 1013 1142 1264 831 919 1036 1147
52 1114 1231 1388 1537 1075 1189 1340 1484 975 1078 1216 1346
56 1291 1428 1610 1783 1247 1379 1554 1721 1131 1251 1410 1561
60 1482 1639 1848 2046 1431 1583 1784 1976 1298 1436 1618 1792
64 1687 1865 2102 2328 1629 1801 2030 2248 1477 1633 1841 2039
68 1904 2105 2373 2628 1668 1844 2079 2302
72 2135 2360 2661 2947 1870 2067 2331 2581
76 2379 2630 2965 3283 2083 2303 2597 2876

Table 17 : Minimum breaking loads, in kN, of steel wire ropes with fibre core (Warrington and Warrington-Seale lay ropes with 6 strands)
Composition of
wire rope
6 x 19 6 x 26 6 x 31 6 x 36 6 x 41 6 x 52
Composition of type 1 + n + (n + n) + 2n
Composition and 1 + 6 + (6 + 6) 1 + 6 + 9 + (9 + 9) + 18
n=5 n=6 n=7 n=8
type of strands

Warrington Warrington - Seale Warrington - Seale
(mm) 1420 1570 1770 1960 1420 1570 1770 1960 1420 1570 1770 1970
10 46,9 51,8 58,4 64,7
11 56,7 62,7 70,7 78,3
12 67,7 74,8 84,4 93,4 67,5 74,6 84,1 93,1
13 79,4 87,8 99,0 110 79,2 87,6 98,7 109
14 92,1 102 115 127 91,8 102 114 127
16 120 133 150 166 120 133 150 166
18 152 168 190 210 152 168 189 210
20 188 208 234 260 187 207 234 259 169 187 211 234
22 227 252 284 314 227 251 283 313 205 226 255 283
24 271 299 337 374 270 298 336 373 244 269 304 336
26 318 351 396 439 317 350 395 437 286 316 357 395
28 368 407 459 509 367 406 458 507 332 367 414 458
32 481 532 600 664 480 531 598 662 433 479 540 598

36 609 673 759 841 607 671 757 838 548 606 684 757
40 752 831 937 1038 750 829 935 1035 677 749 844 935
44 910 1006 1134 1256 907 1003 1131 1252 819 906 1021 1131
48 1083 1197 1350 1495 1080 1194 1346 1490 975 1078 1215 1346
52 1267 1401 1579 1749 1144 1265 1426 1579
56 1470 1625 1832 2028 1327 1467 1654 1832
60 1687 1865 2103 2328 1523 1684 1899 2103
64 1919 2122 2392 2649 1733 1916 2160 2392
68
72
76
169
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 1
Table 18 : Minimum breaking loads, in kN, of steel wire ropes with fibre core (Seale lay ropes with 6 strands)
170
Composition of
wire rope
6 x 19 F (**) 6 x 19 6 x 25 6 x 37
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 1
Composition and 1+9+9 1 + (6 + 6 F) + 12 1+6+9+9 1 + 6 + 15+ 15

type of strands Seale (1) Seale Seale
(mm) 1420 1570 1770 1960 1420 1570 1770 1960 1420 1570 1770 1960
10 47,0 52,0 58,6 64,9
11 56,9 62,9 70,9 78,5
12 67,7 74,8 84,4 93,4
13 79,4 87,8 99,0 110
14 92,1 102 115 127
16 120 133 150 166
18 152 168 190 210 148 164 185 204
20 188 208 234 260 183 202 228 252
22 227 252 284 314 221 245 276 305
24 271 299 337 374 263 291 328 364 268 297 334 370
26 318 351 396 439 309 342 385 427 315 348 392 435
28 368 407 459 509 358 396 447 495 365 404 455 504
32 481 532 600 664 468 518 584 646 477 527 594 658
36 609 673 759 841 593 655 739 818 604 667 752 833

40 752 831 937 1038 732 809 912 1010 745 824 929 1029
44 885 979 1103 1222 902 997 1124 1245
48 1053 1165 1313 1454 1073 1186 1338 1481
52 1236 1367 1541 1707 1259 1392 1570 1738
56 1461 1615 1821 2016
60 1677 1854 2090 2314
64 1908 2109 2378 2633
68
72
76
(1) Minimum breaking loads as indicated correspond to 6 x 19 Seale lay ropes.
For 6 x 19 F Seale Filler lay ropes, sometimes called 6 x 25 Filler, the given values are to be increased by 2%.

Table 19 : Minimum breaking loads, in kN, of steel wire ropes with fibre core (ropes with 8 strands and non-rotating ropes)
Composition of
wire rope
8 x 19 8 x 19 F 17 x 7 or 18 x 7
34 x 7 or 36 x 7
Composition and 1+9+9 1 + (6 + 6 F) + 12 1+6 1+6

type of strands Seale (1) Ordinary Ordinary

(mm) 1420 1570 1770 1960 1420 1570 1770 1960 1420 1570 1770 1960
10 41,6 46,0 51,9 57,4 46,6 51,5 58,1 64,3
11 50,3 55,7 62,8 69,5 56,4 62,3 70,2 77,8
12 59,9 66,2 74,7 82,7 67,1 74,2 83,6 92,6
13 70,3 77,7 87,6 97,1 78,7 87,0 98,1 109
14 81,5 90,2 102 113 91,3 101 114 126
16 107 118 133 147 119 132 149 165 116 128 144 160
18 135 149 168 186 151 167 188 208 146 162 182 202
20 166 184 207 230 186 206 232 257 181 200 225 249
22 201 223 251 278 225 249 281 311 219 242 272 302
24 240 265 299 331 268 297 334 370 260 288 324 359
26 281 311 351 388 315 348 392 435 305 337 380 421
28 326 361 407 450 365 404 455 504 354 391 441 489
32 426 471 531 588 447 527 594 658 462 511 576 638
36 539 596 672 744 604 667 752 833 585 647 729 808
40 745 824 929 1029 722 799 901 997

44 902 997 1124 1245 874 967 1090 1207
48 1073 1186 1338 1481 1040 1150 1297 1436
52 1259 1392 1570 1738 1221 1350 1522 1685
56 1416 1566 1765 1955
60 1626 1797 2026 2244
64 1850 2045 2305 2553
68 2088 2309 2603 2882
72 2341 2588 2918 3231
76 2608 2884 3251 3600
(1) Minimum breaking loads as indicated correspond to 8 x 19 Seale lay ropes.
For 8 x 19 F Seale Filler lay ropes, sometimes called 8 x 25 Filler, the given values are to be increased by 2%.
171
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 1
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 1
4.4.3 Breaking test on full size specimens The result of the test may be disregarded if the specimen
Samples and testing procedures are to be in compliance breaks outside the gauge length, in particular in way of the
with recognised standards, such as ISO 3108. terminals.
The test sample is to be long enough to obtain a clear dis-
tance, between the grips of the testing machine, at least 4.4.4 Breaking test on individual wires
equal to 30 times the diameter of the ropes, with a mini-
mum of 600 mm. As an alternative, when the breaking test on full size speci-
mens cannot be performed, the breaking strength of the
The above clear distance may be reduced to 300 mm if the
rope may be determined, in agreement with the Surveyor, as
diameter is less than 6 mm.
the sum of the actual breaking strengths determined on the
During the test, when the applied load has exceeded individual wires, multiplied by the factor K (realisation fac-
approximately 80% of the required breaking load, the load tor) applicable in relation to the type and construction of
is to be applied slowly and steadily (about 10 N/mm2 per the rope.
second).
The breaking load is to be not less than the minimum value The factor K applicable to types of rope in current use is
required in Tab 15 to Tab 19 for each type and diameter of given in Tab 20 (for other types of ropes, the factor K is
rope. stated by the Society in each case).
Table 20 : Realisation factor K
Construction of rope Construction of strands Type of rope Realisation factor K (4)

(1) (2) stranding (3) Fibre core (5) Metal core (6)
6x7 1+6 O 0,90 0,870
6 x 19 1 + 6 + 12 O 0,87 0,835
6 x 19 1+9+9 S 0,87 0,835
6 x 19 F (7) 1 + (6 + 6 F) + 12 S-F 0,87 0,835
6 x 19 1 + 6 + (6 + 6) W 0,87 0,835
6 x 24 fibre core + 9 + 15 O 0,87 
6 x 25 1+6+9+9 S 0,86 0,825
6 x 26 1 + 5 + (5 + 5) + 10 W-S 0,85 0,815
6 x 30 fibre core + 12 + 18 O 0,87 
6 x 31 1 + 6 + (6 + 6) + 12 W-S 0,85 0,815
6 x 36 1 + 7 + (7 + 7) + 14 W-S 0,85 0,815
6 x 37 1 + 6 + 12 + 18 O 0,85 0,815
6 x 37 1 + 6 + 15 + 15 S 0,85 0,815
6 x 41 1 + 8 + (8 + 8) + 16 W-S 0,85 0,815
6 x 52 1 + 6 + 9 + (9 + 9) + 18 W-S 0,81 0,775
6 x 61 1 + 6 + 12 + 18 + 24 O 0,81 0,775
8 x 19 1+9+9 S 0,83 
8 x 19 F (7) 1 + (6 + 6 F) + 12 S-F 0,83 
17 x 7 1+6 O 0,84 0,815
18 x 7 1+6 O 0,84 0,815
34 x 7 1+6 O 0,80 0,790
36 x 7 1+6 O 0,80 0,790
(1) The first figure gives the number of strands, the second the number of wires in each strand.
(2) The figures give the number of wires for each layer; the figures in brackets are relevant to wires of the same layer but of two dif-
ferent diameters. The letter F indicates filler wires.
(3) The type of rope stranding indications are as follows:
• O: ordinary strands (non-parallel wires);
• S, S-F, W and W-S (strands with parallel wires): designate Seale, Seale-Filler, Warrington and Warrington-Seale strandings,
respectively.
(4) The coefficient K is to be reduced by 3% for preformed ropes.
(5) The fibre core is not considered in the breaking load of the rope.
(6) The metal core consists of an independent rope (in general 6x7 with centre strand of 7 wires); it may, however, consist of a sin-
gle strand for wire ropes of 6x7 and 6x19 wires with ordinary strands.
(7) 6x19 and 8x19 Filler wire ropes are sometimes designated by 6x25 Filler and 8x25 Filler, respectively.
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 1
The tensile test is to be performed on at least 10% of the • Coiling test

wires of the rope to be tested, with a minimum of two wires
The test consists of coiling a specimen of wire of suffi-
per strand.
cient length 8 times, in closed coils, around a cylindri-
The wires tested are to satisfy the tensile requirements spec- cal mandrel having a diameter equal to that of the wire;
ified for the wires and the total breaking load of the n wires the wire is to be subsequently uncoiled and straight-
tested multiplied by the ratio N/n (where N is the total num- ened.
ber of wires of the rope) and by the factor K (depending on After having been coiled, the zinc coating is not to show
the type of the rope) is to be not less than the minimum any sign of significant cracks or laminations. In the sub-
value specified by the recognised standard applied. sequent uncoiling and straightening, fracture of the wire
The acceptance of the check of the breaking load of the is not to occur.
rope by means of tensile tests on individual wires is, in gen-
eral, subject to a number of proof tests on samples of full 4.4.7 Checks of the zinc mass
size ropes which are representative of the production for The mass of zinc coating per unit area is required to be
comparison purposes. checked in accordance with a recognised standard.
4.4.5 Check of the strength of individual wires The results of this test are to demonstrate compliance with
the minimum required values specified in Tab 22.
This check, consisting of tensile tests on individual wires, is
performed only when required by the Surveyor as a check 4.4.8 Check of the uniformity and continuity of the
on the base materials employed. zinc coating
This test is performed when required by the Surveyor as a
4.4.6 Torsion test and coiling test on individual
wires production check. It applies only to wires of diameter 
1mm if galvanised of class A and of diameter  0,6 mm if
In general only one of these tests is to be performed. galvanised of class B.
The tests are to be carried out on specimens obtained after The tests are to be carried out on specimens obtained after
galvanising from at least 5% of the number of wires taken at galvanising from at least 5% of the number of wires taken at
random in several strands with a minimum of 6 wires and a random in several strands with a minimum of 6 wires and a
maximum of 10 wires for each diameter. maximum of 10 wires for each diameter.
• Torsion test Unless otherwise specified, the test is performed by sub-
The gauge length of the wire specimens, measured merging a specimen in a water solution of pure cristalline
between the end terminals, is to be 100 times the wire copper sulphate (Cu SO4 · 5 H2O) containing at least 360g
diameter, but need not exceed 300 mm for wire diame- of salt per litre of distilled water at a temperature of 20°C
ters above 3 mm. 2°C.
The wire is to be well clamped at the ends and well The specimen is to be immersed for a length of at least 80
strained, e.g., under an axial load not exceeding 2% of mm and is to be maintained in vertical position.
its nominal breaking load.
Tab 22 shows the minimum number of one-minute submer-
The wire is then subjected to torsion until fracture sions, in relation to the wire diameter and galvanising class.
occurs; the torque is to be applied as uniformly as possi- After each submersion, the specimen is to be rinsed in run-
ble, at the approximate rate of 60 - 70 revolutions per ning water so as to wash away unbonded copper deposits.
minute. The minimum required number of twists with-
The test is regarded as satisfactory when the specimen does
out fracture is specified in Tab 21.
not show (beyond 25 mm from the immersed end) indica-
The torsion test is not required for wires of diameter tions of bonded copper deposits, which would mean local
lower than 0,5 mm. lack of zinc coating on the steel surface.
Table 21 : Torsion test for wires - Minimum number of twists
Galvanising class A Galvanising class B

Diameter d
Tensile grade Tensile grade
(mm)
1420 1560 1770 1420 1560 1770 1960
d < 1,3 19 18 17 31 29 26 18
1,3  d < 1,8 18 17 16 30 28 25 17
1,8  d < 2,3 18 17 16 28 26 25 16
2,3  d < 3,0 16 14 12 26 24 22 15
3,0  d < 3,5 14 12 10 24 22 20 13
3,5  d < 3,7 12 10 8 20 20 18 12
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 1
Table 22 : Check of zinc continuity on wire coating 5.2 General
Diameter d Number of one-minute submersions (1) 5.2.1 Ropes, rope material, rope construction and size are
of galvanised to be in accordance with the ISO standards specified below,
wire (mm) Class A Class B or another consistent set of recognised standards accepted
by the Society:
0,6  d < 1,0  0,5
1,0  d < 1,5 1,5 1,0 • ISO 9554: Fibre ropes - General specifications
1,5  d < 1,9 2,0 1,0 • the ISO product standard proposed by the manufacturer
for the concerned material and construction.
1,9  d < 2,5 2,0 1,5
2,5  d < 3,2 2,5 1,5 Ropes are to be of the size (reference number, or “nominal
diameter” or circumference) needed to meet the specified
3,2  d < 3,7 3,0 2,0
breaking strength, or other relevant requirement of the
(1) 1,5 submersion means one submersion lasting 1 minute Rules.
followed by another lasting 30 seconds (the same crite-
ria applies for the other numbers).
4.5 Identification marking and certification 5.3.1 General
The following examinations and tests, as defined in [5.3.3]
4.5.1 Upon satisfactory completion of the required tests to [5.3.5], are to be performed in accordance with the rele-
and examinations, the ropes, packed in the required length vant provisions of ISO 2307: “Fibre ropes - Determination
for supply, are to be tagged with lead seals stamped with the of certain physical and mechanical properties”:
Society’s brand and further indications, as necessary for
identification with the respective test certificates. • linear density
• breaking strength on a full size sample, or determination
4.5.2 The certificates are to contain the essential elements of rope strength from yarn testing, when applicable.
relevant to the rope characteristics, the results of the test
and the stamps and markings mentioned in [4.5.1]. The required tests and examinations are to be performed
with the appropriate machinery, equipment and proce-
Special marking and certification methods may be agreed dures.
upon for supplies by Manufacturers granted the use of an
alternative testing procedure. The machines for load testing and weighing are to be cali-
brated.
5 Fibre ropes 5.3.2 Sampling

Acceptance tests are to be performed on each length manu-
5.1 Scope factured in continuous production, but not less than once
every 2000 m.
5.1.1 General 5.3.3 Linear density
The requirements of this Article apply to fibre ropes, The linear density of the rope under the reference tension,
intended for towing and mooring lines, emergency towing measured following the procedure and requirements in ISO
arrangement, cargo handling gear or similar applications, 2307, is to be in accordance with the value for the specified
other than those specified in [5.1.2] [5.1.3]. rope size in the applicable product standard.
5.1.2 Single Point Mooring Hawsers 5.3.4 Breaking test on full size specimen
Hawsers intended for mooring oil tankers (single point The breaking strength of the rope is to be verified by testing
mooring) at an offloading buoy are to be made of fibres of to destruction a sample of rope, following the procedure
an approved type, as per annex 4 in NI 432, and are to be and requirements in ISO 2307.
inspected and tested in accordance with the OCIMF The achieved breaking load is to be recorded, and is to be
“Guidelines for the purchasing and testing of single point not less than that given in the applicable product standard
mooring hawsers”, 2000, under survey by the Society. for the specified size, taking into account acceptance crite-
ria in ISO 2307.
5.1.3 Fibre ropes for deep water offshore services
Requirements for the certification of fibre ropes intended for 5.3.5 Breaking test on individual yarns
use as load-bearing components in the stationkeeping sys- When the breaking test on full size test pieces cannot be
tem of a floating offshore unit, or for other offshore deepwa- performed, and subject to agreement by the Society, the
ter applications, are defined in Guidance Note NI 432 breaking strength is to be obtained by calculation based on
Certification of Fibre Ropes for Deepwater Offshore Ser- breaking strength tests on yarns, according to the procedure
vices. given in Annex B of ISO 2307.
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 1
This is applicable only to ropes having a breaking strength 5.4 Marking

above 250 kN, made from a single fibre material and size,
and for those materials and construction where a realisation 5.4.1 Upon satisfactory completion of the required tests
factor is given in the standard.
and examinations, the packed ropes are to tagged with the
The relevant testing documentation is to include a mention Society’s stamp and identification of the inspection certifi-
stating that the breaking strength has been calculated. cate issued by the Society.
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 2
SECTION 2 OFFSHORE MOORING CHAIN CABLES AND

ACCESSORIES
1 General requirements 1.3 Approval of chain manufacturers

1.3.1 Offshore mooring chains are to be manufactured
1.1 Scope only by works approved by the Society. For this purpose
approval tests are to be carried out, the scope of which is to
1.1.1 These requirements apply to offshore units and single include proof and breaking load tests, measurements and
point moorings contracted for construction on or after mechanical tests including fracture mechanics tests.
1st July 2017 and when the application for certification of 1.3.2 Manufacturers are to submit for review and approval
mooring chains and accessories is dated on or after 1st July the sequence of operations from receiving inspection to
2017. shipment and details of the following manufacturing pro-
cesses:
1.1.2 The requirements of this Section apply to the materi-
a) bar heating and bending including method, tempera-
als, design, manufacture and testing of offshore mooring
tures, temperature control and recording
chain and accessories intended to be used for application
such as: mooring of mobile offshore units, mooring of float- b) flash welding including current, force, time and dimen-
ing production units, mooring of offshore loading systems sional variables as well as control and recording of
and mooring of gravity based structures during fabrication. parameters, maintenance procedure and programme for
welding machine
Mooring equipment covered are common stud and studless c) flash removal including method and inspection
links, connecting common links (splice links), enlarged
links, end links, detachable connecting links (shackles), end d) stud insertion method, for stud link chain
shackles, subsea connectors, swivels and swivel shackles. e) heat treatment including furnace types, means of speci-
fying, controlling and recording of temperature and
Studless link chain is normally deployed only once, being chain speed and allowable limits, quenching bath and
intended for long-term permanent mooring systems with agitation, cooling method after exit
pre-determined design life.
f) proof and break loading including method/machine,
Each grade is to be individually approved. Approval for a means of horizontal support (if applicable), method of
higher grade does not constitute approval of a lower grade. measurement and recording
If it is demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Society that the g) non-destructive examination procedures
higher and lower grades are produced to the same manu- h) the manufacturer’s surface quality requirement of moor-
facturing procedure using the same chemistry and heat ing components is to be submitted
treatment, consideration will be given to qualification of a
i) the manufacturer’s procedure for removing and replac-
lower grade by a higher. The parameters applied during
ing defective links without heat treatment of the entire
qualification are not to be modified during production.
chain.
1.1.3 Reference is made to the general provisions given in 1.3.3 For initial approval CTOD tests are to be carried out
Ch 1, Sec 1, [3.6] for visual, dimensional and non destruc- on the particular mooring grade of material. CTOD tests are
tive examination. to be done in accordance with a recognized standard such
as BS 7448 Parts 1 & BS EN ISO 15653:2010.
The CTOD test piece is to be a standard 2 x 1 single edge
1.2 Chain grades
notched bend piece, test location as shown in Fig 1. The
notch of the CTOD specimen is to be located as close to the
1.2.1 Depending on the nominal tensile strength of the surface as practicable.
steels used for manufacture, chains are to be subdivided
The minimum test piece size shall be 50 mm x 25 mm for
into five grades, i.e.: QR3, QR3S, QR4, QR4S and QR5.
chain diameters less than 120 mm, and 80 mm x 40 mm for
Manufacturers propriety specifications for QR4S and QR5 diameters 120 mm and above. CTOD specimens are to be
may vary subject to design conditions and the acceptance taken from both the side of the link containing the weld and
of the Society. from the opposite side. Three links are to be selected for
testing, a total of 6 CTOD specimens. The tests are to be
Each grade is to be individually approved. Approval for a taken at 20°C and the lowest CTOD of each set of 3 speci-
higher grade does not constitute approval of a lower grade. mens shall meet the minimum values indicated in Tab 1.
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 2
Table 1 : Minimum CTOD test values for chain type
QR3, in mm QR3S, in mm QR4, in mm QR4S and QR5, in mm

Chain type
BM WM BM WM BM WM BM WM
Stud link 0,20 0,10 0,22 0,11 0,24 0,12 0,26 0,13
Studless 0,20 0,14 0,22 0,15 0,24 0,16 0,26 0,17
Figure 1 : Location of CTOD test specimens
Weld side Non-weld side
1.3.4 Calibration of furnaces shall be verified by measure- 1.4 Approval of quality system at chain and
ment and recording of a calibration test piece. accessory manufacturers
The manufacturer shall submit a procedure for calibration
of furnaces and temperature uniformity surveys which shall 1.4.1 Chain and accessory manufacturers are to have a
include the following requirements: documented and effective quality system approved by the
Society. The provision of such a quality system is required in
a) the temperature uniformity of furnaces is to be surveyed
whenever approval of manufacturer is requested and at addition to, and not in lieu of, the witnessing of tests by a
least annually during normal operating conditions Surveyor as specified in this Section.
b) a calibration test piece with dimensions equivalent to

the maximum size of link manufactured, and, instru- 1.5 Approval of steel mills - Rolled bar
mented with two thermocouples is to be used. One
thermocouple shall be attached to the surface of the 1.5.1 Bar materials intended for chain and accessories are
straight part and one thermocouple shall be imbedded to be manufactured only by works approved by the Society.
in a drilled hole located at the mid thickness position of
The approval is limited to a nominated supplier of bar mate-
the straight part of the calibration test piece
rial. If a chain manufacturer wishes to use material from a
c) furnaces are to be checked by conveying the calibration number of suppliers, separate approval tests must be carried
test piece through the furnaces at representative travel out for each supplier.
speed
d) the time-temperature curves shall show that the tem- 1.5.2 Approval will be given only after successful testing of
peratures throughout the cross section and the soaking the completed chain.
times are within specified limits as given in the heat
Each grade is to be individually approved. Approval for a
treatment procedure.
higher grade does not constitute approval of a lower grade.
If it is demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Society that the
1.3.5 For QR4S and QR5 chain and accessories, prior to
approval, the manufacturer is to have undertaken experi- higher and lower grades are produced to the same manu-
mental tests or have relevant supporting data to develop the facturing procedure using the same chemistry and heat
chain and accessory material. treatment, consideration will be given to qualification of a
lower grade by a higher. The parameters applied during
The tests and data may include: fatigue tests, hot ductility
tests (no internal flaws are to develop whilst bending in the qualification are not to be modified during production.
link forming temperature range), welding parameter
The approval will normally be limited up to the maximum
research, heat treatment study, strain age resistance, temper
diameter equal to that of the chain diameter tested. The roll-
embrittlement study, stress corrosion cracking (SCC) data
and hydrogen embrittlement (HE) study, using low strain test ing reduction ratio is to be recorded and is to be at least 5:1.
pieces in hydrated environments. Reports indicated the The rolling reduction ratio used in production can be
results of experimental tests are to be submitted. higher, but should not be lower than that qualified.
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 2
1.5.3 The steelmaker is to submit a specification of the 1.6.3 Forgings are to have wrought microstructure and the
chemical composition of the bar material, which must be minimum reduction ratio is to be 3 to 1. The forging reduc-
approved by the Society and by the chain manufacturer. The tion ratio, used in the qualification tests, from cast
steelmaker is to confirm by analysis and testing that the ingot/slab to forged component is to be recorded. The forg-
specification is met. ing reduction ratio used in production can be higher, but
For grades QR4, QR4S and QR5 chain the steel shall con- should not be lower than that qualified.
tain a minimum of 0,20 percent of molybdenum. The degree of upsetting during qualification is to be
recorded and maintained during production. Heat cycling
1.5.4 A heat treatment sensitivity study simulating chain forging and reheating is to be monitored by the manufac-
production conditions shall be applied in order to verify turer and recorded in the forging documentation.
mechanical properties and establish limits for temperature
and time combinations. All test details and results are to be The manufacturer is to have a maintenance procedure and
submitted to the Society. schedule for dies and tooling which shall be submitted to
the Society.
1.5.5 The bar manufacturer is to provide evidence that the
manufacturing process produces material that is resistant to 1.6.4 The forge or foundry is to submit a specification of
strain ageing, temper embrittlement and for QR3S, QR4, the chemical composition of the forged or cast material,
QR4S and QR5, hydrogen embrittlement. All test details which must be approved by the Society. For grades QR4,
and results are to be submitted to the Society. QR4S and QR5 chain the steel should contain a minimum
of 0,20 per cent of molybdenum.
1.6 Approval of forges and foundries - 1.6.5 Forges and foundries are to provide evidence that the
Accessories manufacturing process produces material that is resistant to
strain ageing, temper embrittlement and for QR4S and QR5
1.6.1 Forges and foundries intending to supply finished or grades, hydrogen embrittlement.
semi-finished accessories are to be approved by the Society.
A heat treatment sensitivity study simulating accessory pro-
A description of manufacturing processes and process con-
duction conditions shall be applied in order to verify
trols is to be submitted to the Society. The scope of approval
mechanical properties and establish limits for temperature
is to be agreed with the Society.
and time combinations (cooling after tempering shall be
The approval is to be limited to a nominated supplier of appropriate to avoid temper embrittlement). All test details
forged or cast material. If an accessory manufacturer and results are to be submitted to the Society.
whishes to use material from a number of suppliers, a sepa-
rate approval must be carried out for each supplier. 1.6.6 For initial approval CTOD tests are to be carried out
on the particular mooring grade of material. Three CTOD
1.6.2 Approval will be given only after successful testing of tests are to be done in accordance with a recognized stan-
the completed accessory. dard such as BS 7448 Parts 1 & BS EN ISO 15653:2010. For
Each grade is to be individually approved. Approval for a rectangular accessories, the CTOD test piece is to be a stan-
higher grade does not constitute approval of a lower grade. dard 2 x 1 single edge notched bend specimen of thickness
If it is demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Society that the equal to full thickness of material to be tested. Sub-sized
higher and lower grades are produced to the same manu- specimens can be used subject to approval of the Society.
facturing procedure using the same chemistry and heat For circular geometries the minimum cross section of the
treatment, consideration will be given to qualification of a test piece shall be 50 x 25 mm for accessory diameters less
lower grade by a higher. The parameters applied during than 120 mm, and 80 x 40 mm for diameters 120 mm and
qualification are not to be modified during production. above.
The approval will normally be limited to the type of acces- The notch of the CTOD specimen is to be located as close
sory and the IACS designated mooring grade of material up to the surface as practicable.
to the maximum diameter or thickness equal to that of the
completed accessory used for qualification unless otherwise The tests are to be taken at 20°C and the lowest CTOD of
agreed by the Society. each set of 3 specimens shall meet the minimum values
indicated in Tab 2.
For different accessories that have the same geometry, the
tests for initial approval are to be carried out on the one Fig 2(a) shows the CTOD location for circular and rectan-
having the lowest reduction ratio. gular cross sections such as those of the D-shackle and
accessories fabricated from rectangular sections. The orien-
Qualification of accessory pins to maximum diameters is tation of the specimen shall consider the direction of the
also required. grain flow. Fig 2(b) shows two possible positions for CTOD
Individual accessories of complex geometries will be sub- test specimens with notch orientation for rectangular type
ject to the Society requirements. accessories.
Table 2 : Minimum CTOD test values for accessories
Grade of accessory QR3, in mm QR3S, in mm QR4, in mm QR4S and QR5, in mm

CTOD 0,20 0,22 0,24 0,26
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 2
Figure 2 : Location of CTOD test specimens: a) Circular type accessory and b) rectangular type accessory, B corre-
sponds to the thickness of material, the grain flow is considered in the longitudinal direction X
Z thickness
X longitudinal
Y transverse
B=t z
B=t
y
a) D-Type Shackle b) Rectangular type accessories
1.6.7 Calibration of furnaces shall be verified by measure- c) the austenitic grain size for all grades is to be 6 or finer
ment and recording of a calibration test piece with dimen- in accordance with ASTM E112 or equivalent grain size
sions equivalent to the maximum size of accessory index in accordance to ISO 643. Measurements for cir-
manufactured. Thermocouples are to be placed both on the cular sections are to be taken at 1/3 radius
surface and in a drilled hole located at the mid thickness
d) for grade QR4S and QR5 the following information is to
position of the calibration block.
be supplied by the bar manufacturer to the mooring
The furnace dimensions shall be such as to allow the whole chain manufacturer and the results included in the
furnace charge to be uniformly heated to the necessary tem- chain documentation:
perature. Temperature uniformity surveys of heat treatment
furnaces for forged and cast components shall be carried • each heat is to be examined for non-metallic inclu-
out according to API Spec 6A/ISO 10423 Annex M or ASTM sions. The level of micro inclusions is to be quanti-
A991. fied and assessed in accordance with recognised
national or international standards; to check that
The initial survey shall be carried out with maximum charge inclusion levels are acceptable for the final product
(load) in the furnace. Subsequent surveys shall be carried
out annually and may be carried out with no furnace • a sample from each heat is to be macro etched
charge. according to ASTM E381 or equivalent, to check
that there is no injurious segregation or porosity
The quench bath maximum temperature and the maximum
heat treatment transfer times from furnace to quench are to • hardenability data, according to ASTM A255, or
be established and documented. During production the equivalent, is to be supplied with each heat.
established quenching parameters are to be followed and
records of bath temperatures and transfer times are to be 2.2.2 Chemical composition
maintained. The chemical composition of ladle samples of each heat is
to be determined by the steel maker and is to comply with
1.6.8 For QR4S and QR5 refer to additional requirements the approved specification.
in [1.3.5].
2.2.3 Mechanical tests
2 Materials a) Bars of the same nominal diameter are to be presented
for test in batches of 50 tonnes or fraction thereof from
2.1 Scope the same heat. Test specimens are to be taken from
material heat treated in the same manner as intended for
2.1.1 These requirements apply to rolled steels, forgings the finished chain.
and castings used for the manufacture of offshore mooring b) Each heat of grade QR3S, QR4, QR4S and QR5 steel is
chain and accessories. to be tested for hydrogen embrittlement. In case of con-
tinuous casting, test samples representing both the
2.2 Rolled steel bars beginning and the end of the charge shall be taken. In
case of ingot casting, test samples representing two dif-
2.2.1 Steel manufacture ferent ingots shall be taken.
a) the steels are to be manufactured by basic oxygen, elec- Two (2) tensile test specimens shall be taken from the
tric furnace or such other process as may be specially central region of bar material which has been subjected
approved. All steels are to be killed and fine grain to the heat treatment cycle intended to be used in pro-
treated duction. A specimen with a diameter of 20 mm is pre-
b) steel for bars intended for grade QR4S and QR5 chain is ferred (consideration will be given to a diameter of
to be vacuum degassed. 14 mm).
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 2
One of the specimen is to be tested within a maximum Z2 : Reduction of area after baking.
of 3 hours after machining (for a 14 mm diameter speci-
If the requirement Z1 / Z2  0,85 is not met, the bar
men, the time limit is 1½ hour). Where this is not possi-
material may be subjected to a hydrogen degassing
ble, the specimen is to be immediately cooled to 60°C treatment after agreement with the Society. New tests
after machining and kept at that temperature for a maxi- shall be performed after degassing.
mum period of 5 days.
c) For all grades, one tensile and three Charpy V-notch
The second specimen is to be tested after baking at specimens are to be taken from each sample selected.
250°C for 4 hours, alternatively 2 hours for 14 mm The test specimens are to be taken at approx. one-third
diameter specimen. radius below the surface, as shown in Fig 3.
A slow strain rate < 0,0003 s1 must be used during the The results of all tests are to be in accordance with the
entire test, until fracture occurs (this is approximately 10 appropriate requirements of Tab 3
minutes for a 20 mm diameter specimen). d) Re-test requirements for tensile tests are given in Ch 1,
Tensile strength, elongation and reduction of area are to Sec 2, [2.3].
be reported. The requirement for the test is: e) Re-test requirements for Charpy V-notch impact tests are
Z1 / Z2  0,85 given in Ch 1, Sec 2, [4.4].
where: f) Failure to meet the requirements will result in rejection

of the batch represented unless it can be clearly attribut-
Z1 : Reduction of area without baking able to improper simulated heat treatment.
Figure 3 : Sampling of steel bars, forgings and castings

Specimen for notched
r/3 bar impact test
r/3
Tensile Alternatively the 3 CVN test pieces may

specimen be taken in series at one location of r/3
Table 3 : Mechanical properties of offshore mooring chain and accessories
Yield stress Tensile strength Elongation Reduction (3) Charpy V-notch impact tests
Grade (N/mm2) (N/mm2) (%) of area (%) Test temperature Average energy J Average energy flash
minimum (1) minimum (1) minimum minimum (°C) (2) minimum weld J minimum
QR3 410 690 17 50 0 60 50
20 40 30
QR3S 490 770 15 50 0 65 53
20 45 33
QR4 580 860 12 50 20 50 36
QR4S 700 960 12 50 20 56 40
(4)
QR5 760 1000 12 50 20 58 42
(4)
(1) Aim value of yield to tensile ratio: 0,92 max.
(2) At the option of the Society, the impact test of grade QR3 and QR3S may be carried out at either 0°C or 20°C.
(3) Reduction of area of cast steel is to be for grades QR3 and QR3S: min. 40%, for QR4, QR4S and QR5: min. 35%, see [2.4.4].
(4) Aim maximum hardness is HB330 for QR4S and HB340 for QR5.
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 2
2.2.4 Tolerances on dimensions Provided that their depth is not greater than 1% of the bar
The diameter and roundness shall be within the tolerances diameter, longitudinal discontinuities may be removed by
specified in Tab 4, unless otherwise agreed. grinding and blending to a smooth contour.
All bars supplied in a machined (peeled) condition shall be
Table 4 : Tolerances on dimensions of bar stock
100% visually inspected. The Society may also required
10% inspected with magnetic particle testing (MT) or eddy
Nominal Tolerance on Tolerance on roundness
current testing (ET) or magnetic leakage flux testing (MLFT),
diameter (mm) diameter (mm) dmax  dmin (mm)
for longitudinal imperfections. The maximum depth of peel-
less than 25 0 +1,0 0,60 ing is to be agreed and documented in the approval of each
25 - 35 0 +1,2 0,80 supplier.
36 - 50 0 +1,6 1,10 The frequency of NDE may be reduced at the discretion of
51 - 80 0 +2,0 1,50 the Society provided it is verified by statistical means that
the required quality is consistently achieved.
81 - 100 0 +2,6 1,95
Weld repair of bar is not permitted.
101 - 120 0 +3,0 2,25
121 - 160 0 +4,0 3,00 2.2.6 Marking
161 - 222 0 +5,0 4,00 Each bar is to be stamped with the steel grade designation
and the charge number (or a code indicating the charge
2.2.5 Non-destructive examination and repair number) on one of the end surfaces. Other marking meth-
Non-destructive examination is to be performed in accor- ods may be accepted subject to agreement.
dance with recognized standards such as those indicated
below or others recognized standards: 2.3 Forged steel
a) magnetic particle testing (MT) of bars:
• ASTM E1444 and ISO 9934 2.3.1 Manufacture
b) magnetic leakage flux testing (MLFT): a) forged steels used for the manufacture of accessories
must be in compliance with approved specifications
• JIS Z2319 and the submitted test reports approved by the Society.
c) eddy current testing (ET) of bars: Steel is to be manufactured by basic oxygen, electric
furnace or such other process as may be specially
• ISO 15549.
approved. All steel is to be killed and fine grain treated.
Non-destructive examination procedures, together with
rejection/acceptance criteria are to be submitted to the b) steels for forgings intended for QR4S and QR5 chain is
Society. to be vacuum degassed
Manufacturer shall prepare written procedures for NDE. c) the austenitic grain size for all steel grades is to be 6 or
NDE personnel shall be qualified and certified according to finer in accordance with ASTM E112 or equivalent grain
ISO 9712, ACCP or equivalent. Personnel qualification to size index in accordance to ISO 643. Measurements for
an employer or responsible agency based qualification circular sections are to be taken at 1/3 radius. Measure-
scheme as SNT-TC-1A may be accepted if the employer’s ments for non-circular sections are to be taken at 1/4t
written practice is reviewed and found acceptable and the d) for steels intended for QR4S and QR5 accessories the
Level III is ASNT Level III, ISO 9712 Level III or ACCP pro- following information is to be supplied by the steel
fessional Level III and certified in the applicable method. manufacturer to the mooring accessory manufacturer
NDE operators shall be qualified to at least level II. and the results included in the accessory documenta-
The manufacturer shall ensure that 100 percent of each bar tion:
material intended for either chain or fittings is subjected to • each heat is to be examined for non-metallic inclu-
ultrasonic examination at an appropriate stage of the manu- sions. The level of micro inclusions is to be quanti-
facture to procedures approved by the Society and to the fied and assessed in accordance with recognised
acceptance criteria required. The bars shall be free of pipe, national or international standards; to check that
cracks and flakes. If the end length of the delivered bars is inclusion levels are acceptable for the final product
not subject to UT then it must be agreed between the bar
supplier and the chain manufacturer of what length of bar is • a sample from each heat is to be macro etched
to be removed from the ends. The details are to be docu- according to ASTM E381 or equivalent, to check
mented in the approval of each bar supplier. Phased array that there is no injurious segregation or porosity
UT procedures may be applied, subject to approval by the • hardenability data, according to ASTM A255, or
Society. equivalent, is to be supplied with each heat.
The manufacturer shall ensure that 100 percent of each bar
material is subjected to examination by magnetic particle 2.3.2 Chemical composition
(MT) or eddy current (ET) or magnetic leakage flux testing The chemical composition of ladle samples of each heat is
(MLFT) methods. The bars shall be free of injurious surface to be determined by the steel maker and is to comply with
imperfections such as seams, laps and rolled-in mill scale. the approved specification.
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 2
2.3.3 Heat treatment b) ultrasonic testing (UT) of forgings:

Finished forgings are to be properly heat treated in compli- • EN 10228-3, ASTM A388, ISO 13588.
ance with specifications submitted and approved.
Non-destructive examination procedures, together with
2.3.4 Mechanical properties rejection/acceptance criteria are to be submitted to the
Society.
The forgings must comply with the mechanical properties
given in Tab 3, when properly heat treated. Manufacturer shall prepare written procedures for NDE.
NDE personnel shall be qualified and certified according to
2.3.5 Mechanical tests ISO 9712, ACCP or equivalent. Personnel qualification to
a) For test sampling, forgings of similar dimensions (diame- an employer or responsible agency based qualification
ters do not differ by more than 25mm) originating from scheme as SNT-TC-1A may be accepted if the employer’s
the same heat treatment charge and the same heat of written practice is reviewed and found acceptable and the
steel are to be combined into one test unit. From each Level III is ASNT Level III, ISO 9712 Level III or ACCP pro-
test unit one tensile and three impact test specimens are fessional Level III and certified in the applicable method.
to be taken and tested. For the location of the test speci- NDE operators shall be qualified to at least level II.
mens see Fig 3.
Each forging is to be subjected to 100 percent ultrasonic
b) Each heat of grade QR3S, QR4, QR4S and QR5 steel is examination at an appropriate stage of manufacture and in
to be tested for hydrogen embrittlement. In case of con- compliance with the standard submitted and approved.
tinuous casting, test samples representing both the
Defects on non-machined surfaces may be removed by
beginning and the end of the charge shall be taken. In
grinding to a depth of 5% of the nominal diameter. Grind-
case of ingot casting, test samples representing two dif-
ing is not permitted on machined surfaces, except for slight
ferent ingots shall be taken.
inspection grinding on plane surfaces to a maximum depth
Two (2) tensile test specimens shall be taken from the of 0,8 mm in order to investigate spurious indications.
central region of forged material which has been sub-
jected to the heat treatment cycle intended to be used in Welding repairs are not permitted.
production. A specimen with a diameter of 20 mm is
preferred (consideration will be given to a diameter of 2.3.7 Marking
14 mm). Marking is to be similar to that specified in [2.2.6].
One of the specimen is to be tested within a maximum
of 3 hours after machining (for a 14 mm diameter speci- 2.4 Cast steel
men, the time limit is 1½ hours). Where this is not possi-
ble, the specimen is to be immediately cooled to 60°C 2.4.1 Manufacture
after machining and kept at that temperature for a maxi-
a) cast steel used for the manufacture of accessories must
mum period of 5 days.
be in compliance with approved specifications and the
The second specimen is to be tested after baking at submitted test reports approved by the Society. Steel is
250°C for 4 hours, alternatively 2 hours for 14 mm to be manufactured by basic oxygen, electric furnace or
diameter specimen. such other process as may be specially approved. All
A slow strain rate < 0,0003 s1 must be used during the steel is to be killed and fine grain treated
entire test, until fracture occurs (this is approximately 10 b) steels for castings intended for QR4S and QR5 chain is
minutes for a 20 mm diameter specimen). to be vacuum degassed
Tensile strength, elongation and reduction of area are to
c) the austenitic grain size for all steel grades is to be 6 or
be reported. The requirement for the test is:
finer in accordance with ASTM E112 or equivalent grain
Z1 / Z2  0,85 size index in accordance to ISO 643. Measurements for
where: circular sections are to be taken at 1/3 radius. Measure-
Z1 : Reduction of area without baking ments for non-circular sections are to be taken at 1/4t
Z2 : Reduction of area after baking. d) for steels intended for QR4S and QR5 accessories the
following information is to be obtained and the results
If the requirement Z1 / Z2  0,85 is not met, the bar
included in the accessory documentation:
material may be subjected to a hydrogen degassing
treatment after agreement with the Society. New tests • each heat is to be examined for non-metallic inclu-
shall be performed after degassing. sions. The level of micro inclusions is to be quanti-
fied and assessed in accordance with recognised
2.3.6 Non-destructive examination and repair national or international standards; to check that
Non-destructive examination is to be performed in accor- inclusion levels are acceptable for the final product
dance with recognized standards such as those indicated • a sample from each heat is to be macro etched
below or others recognized standards: according to ASTM E381 or equivalent, to check
a) magnetic particle testing (MT) of forgings: that there is no injurious segregation or porosity
• EN 10228-1, ASTM A275, using wet continuous • hardenability data, according to ASTM A255, or
magnetization technique. equivalent, is to be supplied with each heat.
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 2
2.4.2 Chemical composition Where the repair entails removal of more than 5% of the
nominal diameter or thickness, the defective area shall be
The chemical composition of ladle samples of each heat is repaired by welding. The excavations shall be suitably
to be determined by the steel maker and is to comply with shaped to allow good access for welding. The resulting
the approved specification. grooves shall be subsequently ground smooth and complete
elimination of the defective material shall be verified by
2.4.3 Heat treatment non-destructive examination.
All castings are to be properly heat treated in compliance Weld repairs are classified as major or minor. A weld repair
with specifications submitted and approved. is considered major when the depth of the groove prepared
for welding exceeds 25% of the diameter/thickness or
2.4.4 Mechanical properties 25mm, whichever is smaller. All other weld repairs are con-
sidered minor.
The castings must comply with the mechanical properties
given in Tab 3. The acceptance requirement for reduction of Minor and major weld repairs must be recorded on
area is, however, reduced to 40% for grades QR3 and QR3S sketches or photographs showing the extent and positions
and to 35% for grades QR4, QR4S and QR5. of the repairs.
Before major welding repair is started, full details of the

2.4.5 Mechanical tests
extent and location of the repair, the proposed welding pro-
For test sampling, castings of similar dimensions originating cedure specification, heat treatment and subsequent proce-
from the same heat treatment charge and the same heat of dure are to be submitted to the Society for approval.
steel are to be combined into one test unit. From each test
unit one tensile and three impact test specimens are to be A grain refining heat treatment shall be given to the whole
taken and tested. For the location of the test specimens see casting prior to major weld repairs. A post weld heat treat-
Fig 3. ment or repeat of original heat treatment of castings shall be
carried out.
2.4.6 Non-destructive examination and repair All weld repairs shall be done by qualified welders using
qualified procedures. Welders shall be qualified according
Non-destructive examination is to be performed in accor-
to ISO 9606, ASME IX, ASTM A488 or other recognized
dance with recognized standards such as those indicated
standard. Procedures shall be qualified according to ISO
below or others recognized standards:
15614, ASME IX, ASTM A488 or other recognized standard
a) magnetic particle testing (MT) of castings: with the following additional requirements:
• ASTM E709, using wet continuous magnetization- a) charpy V notch impact tests with notch locations in
technique. weld metal, fusion line and heat affected zone +2 mm
and +5 mm from fusion line, respectively
b) ultrasonic testing (UT) of castings:
b) test results shall meet the requirements specified for the
• ASTM A609, ISO 13588. parent metal.
Non-destructive examination procedures, together with 2.4.7 Marking

rejection/acceptance criteria are to be submitted to the Soci-
ety. Marking is to be similar to that specified in [2.2.6].
Manufacturer shall prepare written procedures for NDE.

NDE personnel shall be qualified and certified according to 2.5 Materials for studs
ISO 9712, ACCP or equivalent. Personnel qualification to
an employer or responsible agency based qualification 2.5.1 Studs intended for stud link chain cable are to be
scheme as SNT-TC-1A may be accepted if the employer’s made of steel corresponding to that of the chain or in com-
written practice is reviewed and found acceptable and the pliance with specifications submitted and approved. In gen-
Level III is ASNT Level III, ISO 9712 Level III or ACCP pro- eral, the carbon content should not exceed 0,25 percent if
fessional Level III and certified in the applicable method. the studs are to be welded in place.
NDE operators shall be qualified to at least level II.
Each casting is to be subjected to 100 percent ultrasonic 3 Design and manufacture

examination in compliance with the standard submitted
and approved.
3.1 Design
Defects on non-machined surfaces may be removed by
grinding to a depth of 5% of the nominal diameter. Grind- 3.1.1 Drawings accompanied by design calculations, giv-
ing is not permitted on machined surfaces, except for slight ing detailed design of chain and accessories made by or
inspection grinding on plane surfaces to a maximum depth supplied through the chain manufacturer are to be submit-
of 0,8 mm in order to investigate spurious indications. ted for approval. Typical designs are given in ISO 1704.
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 2
For studless chain the shape and proportions are to comply For electric resistance heating or induction heating, the
with the requirements of this section. Other studless propor- heating phase shall be controlled by an optical heat sensor.
tions are to be specially approved. It should be considered The controller shall be checked at least once every 8 hours
that new or non-standard designs of chain, shackles or fit- and records made.
tings, may require a fatigue analysis and possible perfor- For furnace heating, the heat shall be controlled and the
mance, fatigue or corrosion fatigue testing. temperature continuously recorded using thermocouples in
close proximity to the bars. The controls shall be checked at
In addition, for stud link chain, drawings showing the
least once every 8 hours and records made.
detailed design of the stud shall be submitted for informa-
tion. The stud shall give an impression in the chain link 3.2.4 Flash welding of chain cable
which is sufficiently deep to secure the position of the stud,
The following welding parameters shall be controlled
but the combined effect of shape and depth of the impres-
during welding of each link:
sion shall not cause any harmful notch effect or stress con-
centration in the chain link. a) platen motion
b) current as a function of time
Machining of Kenter shackles shall result in fillet radius
min. 3 percent of nominal diameter. c) hydraulic pressure.
The controls shall be checked at least every 4 hours and
records made.
3.2 Chain cable manufacturing process
3.2.5 Heat treatment of chain cable
3.2.1 General Chain shall be austenitized, above the upper transformation
temperature, at a combination of temperature and time
Offshore mooring chains shall be manufactured in continu-
within the limits established.
ous lengths by flash butt welding and are to be heat treated in
a continuous furnace; batch heat treatment is not permitted, When applicable, chain shall be tempered at a combination
except in special circumstances where short lengths of chain of temperature and time within the limits established. Cool-
are delivered, such as chafing chain as specified in [6]. ing after tempering shall be appropriate to avoid temper
embrittlement.
The use of joining shackles to replace defective links is sub-
Temperature and time or temperature and chain speed shall
ject to the written approval of the end purchaser in terms of
be controlled and continuously recorded.
the number and type permitted. The use of connecting com-
mon links is restricted to 3 links in each 100 m of chain. Grain determination shall be made for the final product.
The austenitic grain size for all grades is to be 6 or finer in
accordance with ASTM E112 or equivalent grain size index
3.2.2 Chain cable manufacturing process records
in accordance to ISO 643. Measurements for circular sec-
Records of bar heating, flash welding and heat treatment tions are to be taken at surface, 1/3 radius and centre for the
shall be made available for inspection by the Surveyor. base material, HAZ and weld.
3.2.6 Mechanical properties

3.2.3 Bar heating
The mechanical properties of finished chain and accessories
Bars for links shall be heated by electric resistance, induc- are to be in accordance with Tab 3. For the location of test
tion or in furnace. specimens see Fig 3 and Fig 4.
Figure 4 : Sampling of chain links
Specimen for notched Specimen for notched

r/3 bar impact test r/3 bar impact test
r/3
Tensile
specimen
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 2
Table 5 : Formulas for proof and break test loads, weight and length over 5 links
Test load, Stud link chains

in kN Grade QR3 Grade QR3S Grade QR4 Grade QR4S Grade QR5
0,0148 d2 0,0180 d2 0,0216 d2 0,0240 d2 0,0251 d2
Proof
(44  0,08 d) (44  0,08 d) (44  0,08 d) (44  0,08 d) (44  0,08 d)
0,0223 d2 0,0249 d2 0,0274 d2 0,0304 d2 0,0320 d2
Break
(44  0,08 d) (44  0,08 d) (44  0,08 d) (44  0,08 d) (44  0,08 d)
Test load, Studless chains

in KN Grade QR3 Grade QR3S Grade QR4 Grade QR4S Grade QR5
2 2 2 2
0,0148 d 0,0174 d 0,0192 d 0,0213 d 0,0223 d2
Proof
(44  0,08 d) (44  0,08 d) (44  0,08 d) (44  0,08 d) (44  0,08 d)
0,0223 d2 0,0249 d2 0,0274 d2 0,0304 d2 0,0320 d2
Break
(44  0,08 d) (44  0,08 d) (44  0,08 d) (44  0,08 d) (44  0,08 d)
Chain weight, Stud link = 0,0219 d2

in kg/m Studless chain: weight calculations for each design are to be submitted
Pitch length Five link measures
Minimum 22 d
Maximum 22,55 d
Note 1:
d : Nominal diameter of chain, in mm.
3.2.7 Proof and breaking test loads Note 2: The cross sectional area at the crown is to be calculated
using the average of the diameters with negative tolerance and
Chains and accessories are to withstand the proof and break
plus tolerance, measurements are to be taken from at least 2
test loads given in Tab 5.
locations approximately 90 degrees apart.
3.2.8 Freedom from defects The cross sectional area at the crown must have no negative
All chains are to have a workmanlike finish consistent with tolerance.
the method of manufacture and be free from defects. Each
b) Diameter measured at locations other than the crown:
link is to be examined in accordance with [4.5] using
approved procedures. The diameter is to have no negative tolerance. The plus
tolerance may be up to 5 percent of the nominal diame-
3.2.9 Dimensions and dimensional tolerances ter except at the butt weld where it is to be in accor-
The shape and proportion of links and accessories must dance to manufacturer’s specification, which is to be
conform to ISO 1704 or the designs specially approved. agreed with the Society. For diameters less than 20mm,
The following tolerances are applicable to links: the plus tolerance is to be agreed with the Society at
time of approval.
a) The negative tolerance on the nominal diameter mea-
sured at the crown: c) The allowable manufacturing tolerance on a length of
five links is + 2,5 percent, but is not to be negative.
• up to 40 mm nominal diameter:1 mm
• over 40 up to 84 mm nominal diameter:2 mm d) All other dimensions are subject to a manufacturing tol-
erance of  2,5 percent, provided always that all parts fit
• over 84 up to 122 mm nominal diameter:3 mm
together properly.
• over 122 up to 152 mm nominal diameter:4 mm
e) The tolerances for stud link and studless common links
• over 152 up to 184 mm nominal diameter:6 mm are to be measured in accordance with Tab 6 and Tab 7.
• over 184 up to 222 mm nominal diameter: 7,5 mm.
f) For stud link chains studs must be located in the links
Note 1: The cross sectional area at the crown must have no nega- centrally and at right angles to the sides of the link. The
tive tolerance. For diameters of 20 mm or greater, the plus tol-
tolerances in Tab 6 and Tab 7 are acceptable provided
erance may be up to 5 percent of the nominal diameter. For
diameters less than 20 mm the plus tolerance is to be agreed that the stud fits snugly and its ends lie flush against the
with the Society at time of approval. inside of the link.
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 2
Table 6 : Stud link common link, proportions 3.2.10 Stud link chain - welding of studs
dimensions and tolerances
A welded stud may be accepted for grades QR3 and QR3S
Desig- Nominal chains. Welding of studs in grades QR4, QR4S and QR5
Minus Plus chain is not permitted unless specially approved.
nation Description dimension
tolerance tolerance
(1) of the link
Where studs are welded into the links this is to be com-
a Link length 6d 0,15 d 0,15 d
pleted before the chain is heat treated.
b Link half a*/2 0,1 d 0,1 d
length The stud ends must be a good fit inside the link and the
c Link width 3,6 d 0,09 d 0,09 d weld is to be confined to the stud end opposite to the flash
butt weld. The full periphery of the stud end is to be welded
e Stud angular 0 degree 4 degrees 4 degrees
misalignment unless otherwise approved.
R Inner radius 0,65 d 0 - Welding of studs both ends is not permitted unless specially
(1) Dimension designation is shown in Fig 5. approved.
d : Nominal diameter of chain, in mm.
a* : Actual link length. The welds are to be made by qualified welders using an
approved procedure and low-hydrogen approved consum-
Figure 5 : Stud link ables.
The size of the fillet weld shall as a minimum be as per API

Crown
Specification 2F.
R The welds are to be of good quality and free from defects

c
such as cracks, lack of fusion, gross porosity and undercuts
exceeding 1 mm.
b All stud welds shall be visually examined. At least 10% of

all stud welds within each length of chain shall be exam-
a ined by dye penetrant or magnetic particles after proof test-
ing. If cracks or lack of fusion are found, all stud welds in
Table 7 : Studless common link, proportions that length are to be examined.
dimensions and tolerances
3.2.11 Connecting common links (splice links)
Desig- Nominal
Minus Plus
nation Description dimension Single links to substitute for test links or defective links with-
tolerance tolerance
(1) of the link out the necessity for re-heat treatment of the whole length
a Link length 6d 0,15 d 0,15 d are to be made in accordance with an approved procedure.
b Link width 3,35 d 0,09 d 0,09 d Separate approvals are required for each grade of chain and
the tests are to be made on the maximum size of chain for
R Inner radius 0,60 d 0 -
which approval is sought.
(1) Dimension designation is shown in Fig 6.
d : Nominal diameter of chain, in mm. Manufacture and heat treatment of connecting common
Note 1: Other dimension ratios are subject to special link is not to affect the properties of the adjoining links. The
approval. temperature reached by these links is nowhere to exceed
250°C.
Figure 6 : Studless
Each link is to be subjected to the appropriate proof load
and non-destructive examination as detailed in Tab 5 and in
[4.5]. A second link shall be made identical to the connect-
b ing common link; the link shall be tested and inspected as
per [4.4] and [4.5].
Each connecting common link is to be marked either; on

a the stud for stud link chain or, on the outer straight length
on the side opposite the flash butt weld for studless chain.
This marking is to be in accordance with [4.7] plus a unique
d
number for the link. The adjoining links are also to be
marked on the studs or straight length as above.
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 2
4 Testing and inspection of finished Table 8 : Frequency of break and mechanical tests
chain
Nominal chain diameter Maximum sampling interval
(mm) (m)
4.1 General
Min - 48 91
49 - 60 110
4.1.1 This section applies to but not limited to finished
chain cable such as common stud and studless links, end 61 - 73 131
links, enlarged end links and connecting common links 74 - 85 152
(splice links).
86 - 98 175
All chain is to be subjected to proof load tests, sample break 99 - 111 198
load tests and sample mechanical tests after final heat treat-
112 - 124 222
ment in the presence of a Surveyor. Where the manufac-
turer has a procedure to record proof loads and the 125 - 137 250
Surveyor is satisfied with the adequacy of the recording sys- 138 - 149 274
tem, he need not witness all proof load tests. The Surveyor 150 - 162 297
is to satisfy himself that the testing machines are calibrated
163 - 175 322
and maintained in a satisfactory condition.
176 - 186 346
Prior to inspection the chain is to be free from scale, paint 187 - 198 370
or other coating and is to have a suitably prepared surface
199 - 210 395
as per applied NDE testing standard. The chain shall be
sand or shot blast to meet this requirement. 211 - 222 420
4.3 Dimensions and dimensional tolerances

4.3.1 After proof load testing measurements are to be taken
4.2.1 The entire length of chain shall withstand the proof on at least 5 per cent of the links in accordance with
load specified in Tab 5 without fracture and shall not crack [3.2.9].
in the flash weld. The load applied shall not exceed the
proof load by more than 10% when stretching the chain. 4.3.2 The entire chain is to be checked for the length, five
Where plastic straining is used to set studs, the applied load links at a time. By the five link check the first five links shall
is not to be greater than that qualified in approval tests. be measured. From the next set of five links, at least two
links from the previous five links set shall be included. This
procedure is to be followed for the entire chain length. The
4.2.2 A break-test specimen consisting of at least 3 links is
measurements are to be taken preferably while the chain is
to be either taken from the chain or produced at the same loaded to 5-10% of the minimum proof load. The toler-
time and in the same manner as the chain. The test fre- ances for the 5 link measurements are indicated in Tab 5,
quency is to be based on tests at sampling intervals accord- any deviations from the 5 link tolerances are to be agreed
ing to Tab 8 provided that every cast is represented. Each by the client and the Society. The links held in the end
specimen shall be capable of withstanding the break load blocks may be excluded from this measurement.
specified without fracture and shall not crack in the flash
weld. It shall be considered acceptable if the specimen is 4.3.3 Chain dimensions are to be recorded and the infor-
loaded to the specified value and maintained at that load mation retained on file.
for 30 seconds.
4.2.3 For chain diameters over 100 mm, alternative break
test proposals to the above break test will be considered 4.4.1 Links of samples detached from finished, heat treated
whereby a one link specimen is used. Alternatives are to be chain shall be sectioned for determination of mechanical
approved by the Society, every heat is to be represented, the properties. A test unit shall consist of one tensile and nine
test frequency is to be in accordance with Tab 8, and it is to impact specimens. The tensile specimen shall be taken in
be demonstrated and proven that the alternative test rep- the side opposite the flash weld. Three impact specimens
shall be taken across the flash weld with the notch centered
resents an equivalent load application to the three links test.
in the middle. Three impact specimens shall be taken across
the unwelded side and three impact specimens shall be
4.2.4 If the loading capacity of the testing machine is insuf- taken from the bend region.
ficient, an alternative load testing machine is to be used that
does have sufficient capacity (e.g. two loading machines in 4.4.2 The test frequency is to be based on tests at sampling
parallel) provided the testing and calibration procedure are intervals according to Tab 8 provided that every cast is repre-
agreed with the Society. sented. Mechanical properties shall be as specified in Tab 3.
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 2
4.4.3 The frequency of impact testing in the bend may be 4.5.4 Ultrasonics shall be employed to examine the flash
reduced at the discretion of the Society provided it is veri- weld fusion. Procedures are to be submitted to the Society
fied by statistical means that the required toughness is confor approval. Procedures and equipment in accordance
sistently achieved. with those approved shall be used. On-site calibration stan-
dards for chain configurations shall be approved.
4.4.4 Hardness tests are to be carried out on finished chain.
The frequency and locations are to be agreed by the Society. Frequency of examination shall be every link.
The recorded values are for information only and used as an The flash weld shall be free from defects causing ultrasonic
additional check to verify that the heat treatment process back reflections equal to or greater than the calibration
has been stable during the chain production. standard. The flash butt welds shall be ultrasonic tested (UT)
in accordance with ASTM E587 or another recognized stan-
4.5 Non-destructive examination after proof dard using single probe, angle-beam shear waves in the
load testing range from 45 to 70°.
Single probe technique has limitations as far as testing of
4.5.1 All surfaces of every link shall be visually examined.
the central region is concerned and the flash weld imper-
Burrs, irregularities and rough edges shall be contour
fections such as flat spots may have poor reflectivity. Where
ground. Links shall be free from mill defects, surface cracks,
it is deemed necessary, detectability of imperfections may
dents and cuts, especially in the vicinity where gripped by
need to be carried out by using a tandem technique, TOFD
clamping dies during flash welding. Studs shall be securely
or phased array.
fastened. Chain is to be positioned in order to have good
access to all surfaces. In order to allow optimal access to
the surface area it is recommended that chain be hung in 4.5.5 Stud welds, if used, shall be visually inspected. The
the vertical position, however access to inspect the interlink toes of the fillets shall have a smooth transition to the link
area may only be possible with the chain in the horizontal with no undercuts exceeding 1,0 mm. Additionally, at least
position. 10% of the stud welds distributed through the length shall
be dye penetrant tested according to ASTM E1417 or mag-
4.5.2 Testing is to be performed in accordance with a rec- netic particle tested according to ASTM E1444 or other rec-
ognized standard and the procedures, together with accep- ognized standard.
tance/rejection criteria are to be submitted to the Society for Cracks, lack of fusion or gross porosity are not acceptable. If
review. defects are found, testing shall be extended to all stud welds
Manufacturer shall prepare written procedures for NDE. in that length.
NDE personnel shall be qualified and certified according to
ISO 9712, ACCP or equivalent. Personnel qualification to
an employer or responsible agency based qualification 4.6 Retest, rejection and repair criteria
scheme as SNT-TC-1A may be accepted if the employer’s
written practice is reviewed and found acceptable and the 4.6.1 If the length over 5 links is short, the chain may be
Level III is ASNT Level III, ISO 9712 Level III or ACCP pro- stretched by loading above the proof test load specified pro-
fessional Level III and certified in the applicable method. vided that the applied load is not greater than that approved
NDE operators shall be qualified to at least level II. and that only random lengths of the chain need stretching.
If the length exceeds the specified tolerance, the overlength
4.5.3 Magnetic particles shall be employed to examine the
chain links shall be cut out and [4.6.2] shall apply.
flash welded area including the area gripped by the clamp-
ing dies. Procedures are to be submitted to the Society for
approval. Procedures and equipment in accordance with 4.6.2 If single links are found to be defective or do not meet
those approved shall be used. other applicable requirements, defective links may be cut
out and a connecting common link inserted in their place.
Frequency of examination shall be every link. Additionally, The individual heat treatment and inspection procedure of
10% of links are to be tested on all accessible surfaces. connecting common links is subject to the Society's
Link surface at the flash weld shall be free from cracks, lack approval.
of fusion and gross porosity.
Other methods for repair are subject to the written approval
Testing shall be performed in accordance with ASTM E709 of the Society and the end purchaser. Weld repair of chain
or another recognized standard (e.g. ISO 9934) using wet is not permitted.
continuous fluorescent magnetization technique. Non fluo-
rescent techniques can be accepted in special cases where 4.6.3 If a crack, cut or defect in the flash weld is found by
the standard inspection procedures are impractical. visual or magnetic particle examination, it shall be ground
Links shall be free from: down no more than 5% of the link diameter in depth and
streamlined to provide no sharp contours. The final dimen-
• relevant linear indications exceeding 1,6 mm in trans-
sions must still conform to the agreed standard.
verse direction
• relevant linear indications exceeding 3,2 mm in longitu- 4.6.4 If indications of interior of flash weld defects in refer-
dinal direction ence to the accepted calibration standards are detected
• relevant non-linear indications exceeding 4,8 mm. during ultrasonic examination, [4.6.2] shall apply.
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 2
4.6.5 If link diameter, length, width and stud alignment do 4.6.10 Re-test requirements for Charpy V-notch impact
not conform to the required dimensions, these shall be tests are given in Ch 1, Sec 2, [4.4].
compared to the dimensions of 40 more links; 20 on each
Failure to meet the requirements will result in rejection of
side of the affected link. If a single particular dimension fails the sampling length represented and [4.6.2] shall apply.
to meet the required dimensional tolerance in more than 2
of the sample links, all links shall be examined and [4.6.2]
shall apply. 4.7 Marking
4.6.6 If a break load test fails, a thorough examination with 4.7.1 The chain shall be marked at the following places:
the Surveyor informed in a timely manner is to be carried • at each end
out to identify the cause of failure. Two additional break test
specimens representing the same sampling length of chain • at intervals not exceeding 100 m
are to be subjected to the break load test. Based upon satis- • on connecting common links
factory results of the additional tests and the results of the
failure investigation, it will be decided what lengths of • on links next to shackles or connecting common links.
chain can be accepted. Failure of either or both additional
tests will result in rejection of the sampling length of chain 4.7.2 All marked links shall be stated on the certificate, and
the marking shall make it possible to recognize leading and
represented and [4.6.2] shall apply.
tail end of the chain. In addition to the above required
marking, the first and last common link of each individual
4.6.7 If a link fails during proof load testing, a thorough charge used in the continuous length shall be traceable and
examination with the Surveyor informed in a timely manner adequately marked.
is to be carried out to identify the probable cause of failure of
the proof test. In the event that two or more links in the proof The marking shall be permanent and legible throughout the
expected lifetime of the chain.
loaded length fail, that section of proof loaded length is to be
rejected. The above failure investigation is to be carried out
4.7.3 The chain shall be marked on the studs as follows:
especially with regard to the presence in other lengths of fac-
tors or conditions thought to be causal to failure. • chain grade
• certificate No.
4.6.8 In addition to the above failure investigation, a break
test specimen is to be taken from each side of the one failed • Society's stamp.
link, and subjected to the breaking test. Where multiple
chains are produced simultaneously it is recognised that the 4.7.4 The Certificate number may be exchanged against an
preceding flash butt welded link and subsequent flash butt abbreviation or equivalent. If so, this shall be stated in the
welded link will be on an alternative chain length or the certificate.
other end of the chain length. In such cases the Society may
require that two additional break tests are to be taken from 4.7.5 The chain certificate shall contain information on
the lengths of chain that include the preceding and subse- number and location of connecting common links. The cer-
quent welded links. Based upon satisfactory results of both tificate number and replacement link number may be
break tests and the results of the failure investigation, it will exchanged against an abbreviation or equivalent. If so, this
shall be stated in the certificate.
be decided what length of chain can be considered for
acceptance. Failure of either or both breaking tests will
result in rejection of the same proof loaded length. 4.8 Documentation
Replacement of defective links is to be in accordance with
4.8.1 A complete Chain Inspection and Testing Report in
[4.6.2]. booklet form shall be provided by the chain manufacturer
for each continuous chain length. This booklet shall include
If the investigation identifies defects in the flash butt weld or
all dimensional checks, test and inspection reports, NDT
a lower strength flash weld “a glue-weld” is found, addi-
reports, process records, photographs as well as any non-
tional NDE such as phased array UT is to be carried out to
conformity, corrective action and repair work.
identify if other links are affected. A full assessment of the
flash butt welding machine is to be carried out, together 4.8.2 Individual certificates are to be issued for each con-
with assessment of the condition of the bar ends prior to tinuous single length of chain.
welding.
4.8.3 All accompanying documents, appendices and reports
4.6.9 Re-test requirements for tensile tests are given in Ch shall carry reference to the original certificate number.
1, Sec 2, [2.3]. Failure to meet the specified requirements of
either or both additional tests will result in rejection of the 4.8.4 The manufacturer will be responsible for storing, in a
sampling length of chain represented and [4.6.2] shall safe and retrievable manner, all documentation produced
apply. for a period of at least 10 years.
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 2
5 Testing and inspection of accessories 5.2.4 The accessories which have been subjected to the
break load test are to be destroyed and not used as part of
an outfit, with the exceptions given in [5.2.5].
5.1 General
5.2.5 Where the accessories are of increased dimension or
5.1.1 This section applies to but is not limited to mooring alternatively a material with higher strength characteristics
equipment accessories such as detachable connecting links is used, they may be included in the outfit at the discretion
(shackles), detachable connecting plates (triplates), end of the Society, provided that:
shackles, swivels and swivel shackles and subsea connec-
tors. a) the accessories are successfully tested at the prescribed
breaking load appropriate to the chain for which they
5.1.2 All accessories are to be subjected to proof load tests, are intended, and
sample break load tests and sample mechanical tests after b) it is verified by procedure tests that such accessories are
final heat treatment in the presence of a Surveyor. Where so designed that the breaking strength is not less than
the manufacturer has a procedure to record proof loads and 1,4 times the prescribed breaking load of the chain for
the Surveyor is satisfied with the adequacy of the recording which they are intended
system, he needs not witness all proof load tests. The Sur-
c) strain age properties have been carried out on the mate-
veyor is to satisfy himself that the testing machines are cali-
rial grade produced to the same parameters
brated and maintained in a satisfactory condition.
d) strain gauges are to be applied during the break load
Prior to testing and inspection the chain accessories are to
test in the high stress locations to monitor that the
be free from scale, paint or other coating.
strains stay within allowable limits.
5.1.3 For accessory production a Manufacturing Procedure
Specification (MPS) is to be submitted to the Society that 5.3 Dimensions and tolerances on
details all critical aspects of accessory production, casting, dimensions
forging, heat treating (including arrangement and spacing of
components in the heat treatment furnaces), quenching, 5.3.1 At least one accessory (of the same type, size and
mechanical testing, proof and break loading and non- nominal strength) out of 25 is to be checked for dimensions
destructive examination. after proof load testing. The manufacturer is to provide a
statement indicating compliance with the purchaser's
5.2 Proof and break load tests requirements.
5.3.2 The following tolerances are applicable to accesso-

5.2.1 All accessories are to be subjected to the proof load
ries:
specified for the corresponding stud link chain.
a) nominal diameter: + 5 percent, -0 percent
5.2.2 Chain accessories are to be tested at the break load b) other dimensions: ± 2½ percent
prescribed for the grade and size of chain for which they are
These tolerances do not apply to machined surfaces.
intended. At least one accessory out of every batch or every
25 accessories, whichever is less, is to be tested. For indi-
vidually produced, individually heat treated, accessories or 5.4 Mechanical tests
accessories produced in small batches (less than 5), alterna-
tive testing will be subject to special consideration. Alterna- 5.4.1 Accessories are to be subjected to mechanical testing
tive testing is to be approved by the Society and the as described in [2.3] and [2.4]. Mechanical tests are to be
following additional conditions may apply: taken from proof loaded full size accessories that have been
heat treated with the production accessories they represent.
a) alternative testing is described in a written procedure
At least one accessory out of every batch or every 25 acces-
and manufacturing procedure specification (MPS)
sories, whichever is less, is to be tested.
b) a finite element analysis is provided at the break load
Hardness tests are to be carried out on finished accessories.
and demonstrates that the accessory has a safety margin
The frequency and locations are to be agreed by the Society.
over and above the break load of the chain
The recorded values are for information only and used as an
c) strain age testing, as per approved procedure by the additional check to verify that the heat treatment process
Society, is carried out on the material grade produced to has been stable during the accessory production.
the same parameters at the time of qualification The use of separate representative coupons is not permitted
d) if an accessory is of a large size that will make heat except as indicated in [5.4.5]below.
treating in batches unfeasible or has a unique design,
strain gauges are to be applied during the proof and 5.4.2 Test location of forged shackle bodies and forged
break load tests during initial qualification and during Kenter shackles are to have a set of three impact tests and a
production. The strain gauge results from production are tensile test taken from the crown of the shackle. Tensile tests
to be comparable with the results from qualification. on smaller diameter shackles can be taken from the straight
part of the shackle, where the geometry does not permit a
5.2.3 A batch is defined as accessories that originate from tensile specimen from the crown. The tensile properties and
the same heat treatment charge and the same heat of steel. impact values are to meet the requirements of Tab 3, with
Refer to [2.3] and [2.4]. the Charpy pieces on the outside radius.
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 2
5.4.3 The locations of mechanical tests of cast shackles and 5.5 Non-destructive examination after proof
cast Kenter shackles can be taken from the straight part of load testing
the accessory. The tensile properties and impact values are
to meet the requirements of Tab 3 in the locations specified 5.5.1 All chain accessories are to be subjected to a close
in Fig 3. visual examination. Special attention is to be paid to
machined surfaces and high stress regions. Prior to inspec-
5.4.4 The locations of mechanical tests of other accessories tion, chain accessories are to have a suitably prepared sur-
with complex geometries are to be agreed with the Society. face as per the applied NDE testing standard. All non-
machined surfaces are to be sand or shot blast to permit a
For non-circular sections, 1/4t (thickness) from the surface is thorough examination. Where applicable, accessories shall
considered appropriate. be dismantled for inspection of internal surfaces. All acces-
sories are to be checked by magnetic particles or dye pene-
Rolled plates are to be tested to the Standard to which they trant technique.
are produced.
5.5.2 Testing is to be performed in accordance with a rec-
5.4.5 For individually produced, individually heat treated, ognized standard, such as those indicated below, or others
accessories or accessories produced in small batches, (less recognized standards:
than 5), alternative testing can be proposed to the Society.
Each proposal for alternative testing is to be detailed in a a) magnetic particle testing (MT) of forgings:
written procedure and submitted to the Society, and the fol- • EN 10228-1, ASTM A275, using wet continuous
lowing additional conditions may apply: magnetization technique or equivalent standards
such as ISO 4986, IACS Rec.69.
a) if separately forged or cast coupons are used, they are to
have a cross-section and, for forged coupon, a reduction b) ultrasonic testing (UT) of forgings:
ratio similar to that of the accessories represented, and
• EN 10228-3, ASTM A388, ISO 13588.
are to be heat treated in the same furnace and quenched
in the same tank at the same time, as the actual forgings c) magnetic particle testing (MT) of castings:
or castings. Thermocouples are to be attached to the
coupon and to the accessories • ASTM E709, using wet continuous magnetization-
technique.
b) if separately forged or cast coupons are agreed, it is to
d) ultrasonic testing (UT) of castings:
be verified by procedure test that coupon properties are
representative of accessory properties. • ASTM A609, ISO 13588.
The procedures, together with acceptance/rejection criteria
5.4.6 A batch is defined as accessories that originate from
are to be submitted to the Society for review.
the same heat treatment charge and the same heat of steel.
refer to [2.3] and [2.4].
5.5.3 Manufacturer shall prepare written procedures for
NDE. NDE personnel shall be qualified and certified
5.4.7 Mechanical tests of pins are to be taken as per Fig 3 according to ISO 9712, ACCP or equivalent. Personnel
from the mid length of a sacrificial pin of the same diameter qualification to an employer or responsible agency based
as the final pin. For oval pins, the diameter taken is to repre- qualification scheme as SNT-TC-1A may be accepted if the
sent the smaller dimension. Mechanical tests may be taken employer’s written practice is reviewed and found accept-
from an extended pin of the same diameter as the final pin able and the Level III is ASNT Level III, ISO 9712 Level III or
that incorporates a test prolongation and a heat treatment ACCP professional Level III and certified in the applicable
buffer prolongation, where equivalence with mid length test method. NDE operators shall be qualified to at least level II.
values have been established. The length of the buffer is to
be at least equal to 1 pin diameter dimension which is 5.5.4 All surfaces shall be magnetic particle tested (MT).
removed after the heat treatment cycle is finished. The test Testing shall be performed in accordance with standards
coupon can then be removed from the pin. The buffer and referenced using the fluorescent technique. As a minimum
test are to come from the same end of the pin as per Fig 7. surfaces shall be free from:
• relevant linear indications exceeding 1,6 mm in trans-
Figure 7 : Buffer and test piece location verse direction
PIN TEST BUFFER • relevant linear indications exceeding 3,2 mm in longitu-

dinal direction
• relevant non-linear indications exceeding 4,8 mm.
When required by the Society, ultrasonic testing is to be car-

ried out on 100% of cast or forged accessories. The accep-
tance/rejection criteria established for the design is to be met.
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 2
5.5.5 The manufacturer is to provide a statement that non 6 Chafing chain for single point
destructive examination has been carried out with satisfac-
mooring arrangements
tory results. This statement should include a brief reference
to the techniques and to the operator's qualification.
6.1 Scope
5.5.6 Weld repairs of finished accessories are not permit-
ted. 6.1.1 These requirements apply to short lengths (approxi-
mately 8 m) of 76 mm diameter chain to be connected to
hawsers for the tethering of oil carriers to single point moor-
5.6 Test failures ings, FPSO’s and similar uses.
5.6.1 In the event of a failure of any test the entire batch

6.2 Approval of manufacturing
represented is to be rejected unless the cause of failure has
been determined and it can be demonstrated to the Sur- 6.2.1 The chafing chain is to be manufactured by works
veyor's satisfaction that the condition causing the failure is approved by the Society according to [1.3].
not present in any of the remaining accessories.
6.3 Materials
5.7 Marking
6.3.1 The materials used for the manufacture of the chafing
5.7.1 Each accessory is to be marked as follows: chain are to satisfy the requirements of [2].
• Chain grade
6.4 Design, manufacturing, testing and
• Society’s marks.
certification
5.7.2 The certificate number may be exchanged against an 6.4.1 The chafing chain is to be designed, manufactured,
abbreviation or equivalent. If so, this shall be stated in the tested and certified in accordance with [3] [4] [5], except
certificate. that batch heat treatment is permitted.
5.8 Documentation 6.4.2 The arrangement of the end connections is to be of an

approved type.
5.8.1 A complete Inspection and Testing Report in booklet
6.4.3 The common link is to be of the stud link type - grade
form shall be provided by the manufacturer for each order.
QR3 or QR4.
This booklet shall include all dimensional checks, test and
inspection reports, NDT reports, process records and exam- 6.4.4 The chafing chain is to be capable of withstanding
ple photographs of components positioned in furnaces, as the breaking test loads of 4884 kN (grade QR3) and
well as any nonconformity, corrective action and repair 6001 kN (grade QR4). See Note 1.
work.
6.4.5 The chain lengths shall be proof load tested in accor-
5.8.2 Each type of accessory shall be covered by separate dance with [4.2]. The test load is 3242 kN for grade QR3
certificates. and 4731 kN for grade QR4.
Note 1: Documented evidence of satisfactory testing of similar
5.8.3 All accompanying documents, appendices and reports diameter mooring chain in the prior 6 month period may be used in
shall carry reference to the original certificate number. lieu of break testing subject to agreement with the Society.
Note 2: The requirements herein are also applicable to other diam-
5.8.4 The manufacturer will be responsible for storing, in a eter chafing chains, such as 84 mm and 96 mm, subject to compli-
safe and retrievable manner, all documentation produced ance with the proof and break load requirements specified for the
for a period of at least 10 years. chain grade and diameters in [3.2.7] Tab 5.
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 3
SECTION 3 OTHERS
1 Side scuttles, windows and their a) a bend test, as indicated below, depending on the type
of material:
glass panes
• brass products: d1s   60°
1.1 Scope • light alloy products: d  3 s   60°
1.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to fixed frames, • cast iron: d4s   60°
window frames, dead covers and glass panes. where:
The types of sidescuttles and windows which, in relation to
s : Thickness of the specimen (which, as far as
their position, are to be tested are indicated in the Society’s
possible, should be equal to the thickness of
Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships Pt B, Ch 8, Sec 10.
the product)
1.2 Manufacture d : Diameter of the mandrel

 : Required bend angle, which is to be
1.2.1 General attained without cracks or other defects.
Sidescuttles and windows which are subject to inspection
are to be manufactured in accordance with approved plans b) for castings, as an alternative to the bend test performed
or standards and specifications recognised by the Society. on specimens, it may be agreed to perform a bend test
directly on a completed piece. Such test may also be
Manufacturing procedures are to be of appropriate type, to
required by the Surveyor as an additional random
the Surveyor’s satisfaction.
check. When this test is performed as an alternative to
1.2.2 Frame materials that on specimens, the number of pieces tested is to be
Materials are to be of appropriate type and properties, as one for every batch of not more than 50 equal pieces
required in the approved plans or applicable standards. (25 in the case of cast iron products) originating from
the same heat.
They are to comply with the requirements of Chapter 2, in
relation to the type of material and the nature of the product. These tests are to be performed on a mandrel having a
diameter equal to twice the thickness of the piece (but not
Subject to approval for each case or application, the follow-
less than 50 mm in the case of cast iron products); the
ing types of material and products are generally regarded as
required bend angles which are to be attained without
appropriate:
cracks or other defects depending upon the material and the
• hull steel plates, shapes and bars having Rm in the range finished product are as follows:
400-490 N/mm2
• steel castings:
• steel forgings and castings
• brass plates, shapes, bars and castings fixed frames, window frames and dead covers:   20°
• light alloy castings and semi-finished products, of cate- • brass castings:
gory Al-Mg or Al-Mg-Si. fixed frames and window frames:   10°
Subject to approval in individual cases, nodular cast iron of dead covers:   15°
type GS400 or GS370 may also be used.
• light alloy castings:
1.2.3 Glass panes fixed frames and window frames:   6°
The glass panes are to be of appropriate type and quality,
manufactured in accordance with suitable procedures, to dead covers:   15°
the satisfaction of the Society, by recognised Manufacturers. • malleable or nodular cast iron:   15°.
1.2.4 Quality of materials 1.3.2 Glass panes

The product is to be free from detrimental defects.
Glass panes are to be in toughened safety glass in accor-
dance with ISO 21005 standard. The acceptance of ordi-
1.3 Inspections and tests nary glass is subject to special approval by the Society in
each case.
1.3.1 Frame material tests
Materials are to comply with the applicable requirements The glass Manufacturer is to certify the homogeneity of the
and to be tested or certified accordingly; depending on the batches submitted for tests, as regards material, manufactur-
individual cases, they are also to be submitted to the following procedure, heat treatment and suitability to meet the
ing additional tests: specified test requirements.
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 3
Glass panes are to be tested as specified in the following Figure 1 : Testing apparatus for punch testing
items a) or b). toughened glass panes
a) a hydrostatic test of one glass pane for each batch of

100 (or fraction of 100) glass panes equal in shape and
dimensions and manufactured with continuity and
using the same procedure and treatments; the pane is to
be tested with a load uniformly distributed on the net
area, at the test pressures indicated in Tab 1, in relation 4
to the diameter and thickness of the pane.
5 O 50
The test pressure is to be applied for at least one minute; r=25
the glass pane is not to break. 3
In the case of glass panes having shape other than circu- 2

lar, the test is to be performed on a disk obtained from a
glass pane for each batch homogeneous as regards 1
dimensions, manufacturing procedure and heat treat-
ment and with a total surface of 25m2 or fraction
thereof. The disk, for the test and possible re-tests, is to O 200
3
be taken before the tempering process and treated with
the glass panes of the batch which it represents.
2
If a test produces unsatisfactory results, the test is to be
repeated in duplicate on two new glass panes from the 6
same batch; for the acceptance of the batch, both new
tests are to be satisfactory; in the case of tempered glass 1
panes of non-circular shape, in order not to have to
reject the batch in the case of unsatisfactory test results,
it is recommended that two additional disks should be
O 150
taken for possible re-testing from the batch before the
tempering treatment. Note 1: Testing equipment
The equipment can be used for glass panes of sidescuttles having
b) a punch test in accordance with ISO 614 as an alterna- nominal diameter 200, 250 mm or greater and for glass of rectan-
tive to the hydrostatic test mentioned in a). gular windows of any size.
The base of the testing equipment is formed by:
This test method is applicable both to non-opening and
opening sidescuttles and rectangular windows; when • a steel platform with upper flat surface provided with a 200
mm central hole with rounded edges (1);
tested, the glass edges are to be not less than 25mm
from the inner edge of the rubber ring (see Fig 1). • a rubber ring (2), having hardness in the range from 40 to 60
IRHD (International Rubber Hardness Degrees), with an inside
The test consists of applying to the glass pane, which is diameter of 200 mm, thickness of 2 mm and width of at least
15 mm, located around the hole, between the steel plate and
supported by a steel plate with a circular hole, the
the glass pane, so as to compensate for any slight irregularities
required load through a rounded steel shaft acting along of the platform and to prevent the edges of the platform from
the centre of the hole. bearing directly against the glass pane;
The test is to be performed on 4 glass panes for each • a suitable adapter provided with a hole of 150 mm (6) with
rounded edges, to be used when testing glass panes have a
batch homogeneous as specified in a).
diameter of 200 mm (in these cases, a rubber ring (2) having an
In the case of batches of 4 glass panes or less, the test is inside diameter of 150 mm is to be interposed between the
upper surface of the adapter and the glass pane).
to be performed on each glass pane.
The glass pane to be tested (3) is positioned over the hole in the
In the case of matt glass panes obtained by a special platform and a shaft (4) with a diameter of 50 mm and a fully
treatment of one of the surfaces of a transparent glass rounded end is arranged above the glass pane along the axis of the
hole.
pane, the test is to be performed after the treatment and
the load is to be applied to the surface which has not A felt disk (5) having a thickness of 5mm is arranged between the
shaft and the glass pane, for the purpose of distributing the load.
been treated.
Note 2: Testing procedure
The required test loads are indicated in Tab 2, in relation The applied load is to be increased at a rate of 1000 N per second
to the thickness of the glass pane and the diameter of up to the test load specified in Tab 2. The test load is to be main-
the hole in the support plate. tained for a period of at least 5 seconds and is then to be removed
gradually.
The test is to be performed using the equipment and the The glass panes are to withstand the required test load without frac-
procedure specified in ISO 614 Standard (see Fig 1). ture.
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 3
Table 1 : Hydrostatic test pressure 2 Pressure bottles

for glass panes of sidescuttles and windows
2.1 Scope
Thickness Pressure (N/mm2)
of glass for a glass pane net diameter (mm) of: 2.1.1 General
pane (mm) 200 250 300 350 400 450 The requirements of this Article apply to seamless pressure
bottles in carbon, carbon manganese and alloy steels, and
6 0,33 0,21    
to welded bottles in carbon and carbon manganese steels.
8 0,58 0,37 0,26 0,19  
Seamless bottles are mainly used for carbon dioxide sys-
10 0,92 0,58 0,41 0,30 0,23 0,18 tems and welded bottles for portable fire extinguishers.
12 1,32 0,84 0,59 0,43 0,33 0,26 Steel grades to be used for the manufacture are to comply
15  1,32 0,92 0,67 0,51 0,41 with those specified in Chapter 2 as applicable or with rec-
ognised standards.
19   1,47 1,08 0,83 0,65
The steel is to be killed and for certain applications, for
example low temperature applications, fine grained steel is
Table 2 : Punch test load
to be used.
Thickness of glass Test loads (N) for a 2.1.2 Mass production

pane (mm) hole diameter in support plate of: In the case of small bottles mass produced by Manufactures
(tolerance: 0 +2) 200 mm 150 mm who have been approved by the Society for this purpose,
alternative testing procedures to those indicated in [2.3.2]
6 3400 3500
may be accepted.
8 6500 6700
10 10200 11000
2.1.3 Materials other than steel
The requirements relevant to bottles in material other than
12 15500 16500 steel are to be considered on a case-by-case basis, with cri-
15 24000 25500 teria and procedures as similar as possible to those speci-
19 33400 36800 fied in this Article.
1.3.3 Visual and dimensional examination 2.2 Manufacture

The following examinations are to be performed: 2.2.1 Bottles are to be manufactured according to
a) visual examination approved plans.
The manufacturing process of seamless bottles is to be
b) dimensional and conformity checks to be performed by approved for the individual Manufacturers.
the Manufacturer, with checks at the discretion of the
Surveyor. The approval of the manufacturing process is also required
for welded bottles intended for portable fire extinguishers
having thickness of the cylindrical shell less than 3 mm.
The materials used in the bottle manufacture are to be
tested or provided with a Manufacturer’s certificate of con-
1.4.1 All glass panes tested with satisfactory results are to
formity.
be marked by the Manufacturer in a suitable position which
remains clearly visible after the glass pane has been
installed, as follows: 2.3 Inspection and tests
• trade mark and/or name of the Manufacturer 2.3.1 Reference is made to the general provisions given in
• Society’s brand Ch 1, Sec 1, [3.6] for visual, dimensional and non destruc-
tive examination.
• nominal thickness, in mm.
2.3.2 General
In the case of glass panes tested with the punch test, the The following inspections and tests are to be performed:
special marking mentioned in ISO 614 is to be used as fol-
lows: a) sectioning of one bottle from each batch formed of
200 pieces or fraction thereof, homogeneous as regards
• transparent glass panes: single line triangle dimensions, manufacturing process and heat treatment
• matt glass panes: double line triangle. for the execution of:
• thickness measurements of the shell on three trans-
The nominal thickness of the glass pane, in mm, is to be verse sections in way of neck, middle and bottom
marked inside the above triangles. end
The markings identifying the origin of the glass pane are to • 1 tensile test on longitudinal test specimen, 2 bend-
be specified to the Society when the individual Manufactur- ing tests to be performed along the curvature and,
ers are recognised. for thicknesses  5 mm, 3 Charpy V-notch impact
NR 216, Ch 4, Sec 3
tests on longitudinal specimens, to be performed at Table 3 : Coefficient n for determination of

20°C. For low temperature applications, the test the maximum allowed mandrel diameter in bend test
temperature is to be specified in the individual
cases. Rm (N/mm2) n
 430 2
b) hardness tests to be performed on bottles of quenched
431 - 510 3
and tempered steel and, at the discretion of the Sur-
511 - 590 4
veyor, also in other cases
591 - 690 5
c) external and internal visual examination (direct exam- 691 - 790 6
ination or, in the case of insufficient size of openings, 791 - 890 7
examination by auxiliary means), dimensional check,
> 890 8
determination of tare and capacity (such examinations
are to be performed by the Manufacturer with checks at
Table 4 : Impact test - requirements
the Surveyor’s discretion)
Tensile
d) hydrostatic test on each bottle; test pressure as required Average impact energy
Steel types strength
by the relevant Rules or by the particular requirements at 20°C min. KV (J/cm2)
(N/mm2)
applicable in the individual cases
Carbon and
 510 34
e) non-destructive checks as indicated on the plans at the carbon- manganese
time of the approval of the manufacturing process Alloy steels quenched
> 510 49
and tempered
f) for welded bottles, additional tests on welded joints as
specified at the time of the approval of the manufactur- 2.4 Identification, marking and certification
ing process or indicated on the approved plans.
2.3.3 Tensile test tion which will enable all finished bottles to be traced to the
original materials and their manufacturing.
In the tensile test, the values of the yield strength ReH and
All bottles which have been tested and inspected with satis-
Rp0,2 , the tensile strength Rm and the elongation A (%) are to factory results are to be marked with the following details:
comply with the values specified for the corresponding
steel. a) Manufacturer’s name or trade mark
The value of A (%) min, for thicknesses equal to or greater
than 3 mm, is to be not less than the value calculated with c) place and date of testing
the following formula, and in no case less than 14%: d) production number or other marking enabling the trace-
ability
2500
A  -------------------------- e) test pressure
0 ,224  R m
f) additional optional marks such as file number and code
where Rm is the value, in N/mm2, of the tensile strength of the local inspection office, Surveyor’s personal stamp.
determined by the tensile test.
Special marking and certification procedures may be agreed
This requirement for A (%) min may be reduced by 15% for upon for supplies by Manufacturers granted the use of an
thicknesses less than 3 mm down to 2 mm, and by 30% for alternative testing procedure.
thicknesses less than 2 mm.
2.4.2 The testing documentation indicated in Ch 1, Sec 1,
[4.2.1] is required and is to include all the information, as
2.3.4 Bend test appropriate.
In the bending test, the angle to which the specimen is to be The testing or works’ certificate of the material used is to be
bent without showing defects is 180°; a mandrel having a enclosed with the testing documentation.
diameter not exceeding “n” times the thickness of the spec- Where applicable, the reports relevant to the non-destruc-
imen, depending on the minimum specified tensile strength tive examination, pressure test and heat treatment are to be
Rm for the steel, as specified in Tab 3, is to be used. enclosed with the testing documentation.
2.3.5 Impact test 2.4.3 Before signing the Society’s inspection certificate, the
Surveyor is to be provided by the Manufacturer with a writ-
In the Charpy V-notch impact test, the value of the absorbed ten declaration stating that the bottles have been manufac-
energy, determined as an average of three tests, is to be not tured by a process approved by the Society, they comply
less than the value indicated in Tab 4 depending on the with the applicable requirements and they have been satis-
minimum tensile strength of the steel. factorily tested in accordance with the Society’s Rules.
NR 216
Chapter 5
WELDING
SECTION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 2 APPROVAL OF WELDING CONSUMABLES

SECTION 3 APPROVAL OF OVER WELDABLE SHOP PRIMERS
SECTION 4 APPROVAL OF WELDING PROCEDURES
SECTION 5 APPROVAL OF CO2 LASER WELDING PROCEDURES
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 1
SECTION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1 Scope Rules concerning the application or at the time of plan

approval.
1.1 General 2.2.3 Welders and welding operators
Welders for manual welding and for semiautomatic welding
1.1.1 This Section specifies the general requirements for
processes are to be properly trained and are to be certified
fabrication by welding, and the other Sections of the Chap-
by the Society, as required in the individual applications,
ter concern the requirements for approval of welding con-
unless otherwise agreed.
sumables ( Sec 2), over weldable shop primers ( Sec 3) and
welding procedures ( Sec 4 and Sec 5). Welders are to be certified according to the procedures
given in Rule Note NR476 Approval Testing of Welders.
1.1.2 The requirements are essentially intended for the The certification is to be in due course of validity.
welding of weldable steels and aluminium alloy grades cov-
ered by the applicable Articles of these Rules. Personnel manning the automatic welding machines are to
be competent and sufficiently trained.
1.1.3 Different materials, applications and procedures, as
well as other standards and specifications, may be consid- 2.2.4 Welding supervision
ered by the Society on a case-by-case basis. Welders are to be supervised and assisted, in the course of
the welding operation, by an adequate number of compe-
tent supervisors, such as to ensure efficient control of the
2 Fabrication by welding welding production.
Certification of the welding inspectors is not compulsory
2.1 General and is left to the discretion of the Manufacturer, except in
particular cases where it may be required by the Society.
2.1.1 Fabrication by welding is to be carried out in compli-
ance with the applicable Society Rules and according to 2.2.5 NDT operators
normal good practice, general or specific to the individual Non-destructive tests are to be carried out by qualified per-
processes, to the Surveyor’s satisfaction; in particular the sonnel certified or by recognised bodies in compliance with
conditions stated at the time of approval and authorisation appropriate standards.
for the use of individual processes are to be complied with.
The qualifications are to be appropriate to the particular
The welded structures, the relevant details and the size of application.
welds are to comply with the applicable requirements; any
other requirements indicated on the approved plans or 2.2.6 In case of non-destructive testing carried out by an
specified during survey of construction are also to be com- independent company from the manufacturer or shipyard,
plied with. such company has to comply with the requirements set out
in NR669 “Recognition of non-destructive testing suppliers”.
2.2 Approval
2.3 Type of joints, edge preparations and size
2.2.1 Plans
The constructional plans are to be submitted for approval 2.3.1 General
when required by the Rules or in individual cases and are to The types of joints and the edge preparations are to be
contain the necessary data relevant to the fabrication by appropriate to the welding processes adopted, to the partic-
welding of the structures and items represented. In particu- ular structures and to the stresses to which they are sub-
lar, material types, welding details, welding processes and jected, to the satisfaction of the Society.
weld size are to be indicated; any details not represented in Size and design are to be in accordance with requirements
the plans are, in any case, to comply with the applicable given in the Rules relevant to the applications, approved
requirements. plans, and specific provisions stipulated for hulls and for
pressure systems and machinery.
2.2.2 Welding procedures and consumables
Welding to be used in hull construction, machinery, pres-
sure systems and equipment subject to the inspection of the
2.4 Welding execution and control
Society, is to be carried out with approved welding consum- 2.4.1 Edge preparation, surface conditions, assembly pre-
ables and in accordance with approved welding proce- and post- weld heating, welding sequences and inspections
dures. of the welded structures are to be in accordance with good
Requirements regarding the use of the various grades of practice and, where applicable, are to comply with the
approved consumables are indicated in the parts of the requirements given in the Rules relevant to the applications.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 2
SECTION 2 APPROVAL OF WELDING CONSUMABLES
1 General 1.2.2 Consumables for C and C-Mn steels and for Q-T
steels
1.1 Scope Welding consumables intended for welding C and C-Mn
steels are divided into groups related to the strength level
1.1.1 The requirements of this Section apply to the
approval and periodical control tests of consumables for (minimum specified yield strength) of the steel; each group
welding carbon and carbon manganese steels, high strength is subdivided into grades depending on the impact test tem-
quenched and tempered steels, chromium and chromium- peratures, as indicated in Tab 1.
molybdenum steels, nickel steels for low temperature appli-
cations, austenitic and austenitic-ferritic stainless steels, and 1.2.3 Consumables for Mo and Cr-Mo steels
aluminium alloys.
Consumables intended for welding Mo and Cr-Mo steels are
This Article specifies the requirements common to all the
above-mentioned welding consumables, while the appro- designated by a symbol indicating the nominal Mo and Cr
priate specific requirements are indicated in Articles [2] to percentage content of the deposited weld metal, as follows:
[15].
a) M for Mo = 0,5
The following categories of welding consumables are con-
sidered: b) C1M for Cr = 1,25 and Mo = 0,5
• covered electrodes for manual and gravity welding
c) C2M1 for Cr = 2,25 and Mo = 1
• wire/flux combinations for submerged arc welding
• solid wire/gas combinations for continuous wire arc
1.2.4 Consumables for Ni steels for low temperature
welding
applications
• flux cored wires for continuous wire arc welding with or
without shielding gas Consumables intended for welding nickel steels are desig-
• consumables for electrogas and electroslag welding. nated by a symbol indicating the type of nickel steel for
which the consumables are intended, as follows:
1.2 Grading and designation
a) N15 for steels with Ni = 1,30 - 1,70(%)
1.2.1 General
b) N35 for steels with Ni = 3,25 - 3,75 (%)
Consumables are classified depending on the mechanical
and chemical properties of the filler metal; different grades c) N50 for steels with Ni = 4,75 - 5,25 (%)
or type of consumables may be considered for specific
applications or materials on a case-by-case basis. d) N90 for steels with Ni = 8,50 - 10,0 (%)
Table 1 : Consumable grades for C-Mn steels
Steel Consumable grades based on impact test temperature at (°C)

strength level + 20 0 20 40 60
Normal strength 1 2 3 4 
Higher strength (1)
•  315, < 360 N/mm2 1Y (2) 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y

•  360, < 400 N/mm2 2Y40 3Y40 4Y40 5Y40
Extra high strength (1) 3Y42, 3Y46, 3Y50, 4Y42, 4Y46, 4Y50, 5Y42, 5Y46, 5Y50,
3Y55, 3Y62, 3Y69, 4Y55, 4Y62, 4Y69 5Y55, 5Y62, 5Y69
3Y89, 3Y96 4Y89, 4Y96
(1) The symbol Y, which indicates the high strength groups is followed, for steels having the minimum specified yield strength
equal to, or higher than, 355 N/mm2, by a number related to the minimum specified yield strength value of the weld metal (e.g.
42 for a minimum yield strength of 420 N/mm2).
(2) Grade not applicable to covered electrodes.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 2
1.2.5 Consumables for austenitic and austenitic- 1.3.3 Approval tests

ferritic (duplex) stainless steels
The welding consumables are approved subject to a satis-
Consumables intended for welding austenitic steels are des-
factory inspection of the Manufacturer’s works by the Sur-
ignated by a symbol corresponding to the AWS designation
veyor and to satisfactory results of approval tests.
of the weld deposit, as follows: 308, 308L, 316, 316L,
316LN, 317, 317L, 309L, 309, 309Mo, 310, 310Mo, 347. The approval tests required are to be performed on samples
Consumables intended for welding austenitic-ferritic steels of consumables representative of the production.
are designated by a symbol indicating the nominal percent-
age content of Cr and Ni in the deposited metal (e.g. 2205 Sampling procedures are to be agreed with the Surveyor.
means 22% Cr and 5% Ni).
In general, the approval tests consist of the following
1.2.6 Consumables for aluminium alloys checks:
Consumables intended for welding aluminium alloys are a) check of the mechanical properties of the deposited
designated by the initial letter R or W for rod or wire prod- metal and welded joints and of the chemical composi-
ucts, respectively, and by the letters A, B, C, D depending tion of the deposited metal
on the alloy type and strength level used for the approval
tests. b) check of the hydrogen contents, where required
1.2.7 Additional symbols c) check, at the request of the interested parties, of free-
Further symbols may be added, as appropriate, as a prefix dom from hot cracks, under specific test conditions.
or suffix to the grade as indicated in the following: Welding and inspection of the test samples and mechanical
a) prefix S or SA for semiautomatic welding process tests are to be carried out in the presence of the Surveyor.
b) prefix A for automatic welding process The tests are to be carried out in laboratories and test rooms
c) prefix AV for electrogas or electroslag welding process recognised by the Society.
d) suffix T, M, TM, U for automatic process with two run Unless otherwise specified, test specimens and procedures
(T), multi-run (M), both (TM) or one-side (U) welding are to be in accordance with the applicable Society require-
techniques ments or standards recognised by the Society.
e) suffix H or H15, HH or H10, HHH or H5 for controlled
hydrogen content of weld metal as per Tab 8 1.3.4 Certification
f) suffix D when mechanical properties on weld metal Upon satisfactory completion of the approval tests, a certifi-
have also been verified in the stress relieved condition. cate of approval, stating the grade under which the consum-
able has been approved and the terms of validity of the
1.3 Approval procedure approval, is issued by the Society to the Manufacturer.
1.3.1 Request for approval The approved welding consumables and relevant grades are
entered in the special lists of consumables approved by the
The request for approval is to be submitted to the Society by
Society.
the Manufacturer, together with the specific information indi-
cated in the Articles relevant to the various consumables.
1.3.5 Annual inspections and tests
1.3.2 Quality of manufacturing
The workshops where approved materials are manufactured
The Manufacturer’s plant, method of production and quality are subject to annual inspections by the Surveyor.
control of welding consumables are to be such as to ensure
reasonable uniformity in manufacture. During the inspection, samples of the approved consum-
ables are selected by the Surveyor and subjected to the tests
The Manufacturer is to ascertain this uniformity by means of
detailed in the Articles relevant to the various products.
analysis and systematic testing on each production batch.
These tests are to be repeated annually so as to provide an
In general, the consumables are to maintain the specified average of at least one test per year.
characteristics for a period of time of at least six months
after the date of delivery, when properly stored in a dry At the Society’s discretion, the consumables to be used in
atmosphere and kept in the original packaging. the above tests may be obtained, instead of from the Manu-
facturer as stated above, from users or dealers; the consum-
The consumables are to be supplied so packaged as to
ables are to be recently produced (in general less than 6
ensure compliance with the above requirement; the pack-
aging is to be sufficiently strong to resist the usual transpor- months).
tation and handling operations. Alternative procedures based on quality control and quality
The Manufacturer is to stamp on each container or bag, as assurance systems may be considered and accepted subject
applicable, the markings which are necessary to trace back to special approval by the Society, which will state the rele-
each production. vant acceptance conditions on a case-by-case basis.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 2
1.3.6 Manufacturer’s responsibilities 1.3.10 Additional tests

After the approval has been obtained, and irrespective of The Society may, in some specific cases, request additional
the periodical tests carried out by the Society, the Manufac- tests or requirements as deemed necessary.
turer is fully responsible for the quality of the finished prod-
uct and compliance with the specified requirements, as 1.4 Preparation and welding of test assem-
verified in the approval and periodical control tests.
blies
The Manufacturer is to keep up-to-date records of the man-
ufacture of the approved consumables, including details of 1.4.1 Base material
the history of the single productions and results of associ- The base material used for the test assemblies is to be of the
ated tests. The Society is to have free access to these records steel grade appropriate to the consumable grade as speci-
at all times. fied in the various Articles.
The Manufacturer is responsible for reporting to the Society For the preparation of all weld metal test assemblies, any
any major modifications introduced in the production pro- grade of structural steel may be used. When the chemical
cedure subsequent to its approval. composition of welded metal is substantially different from
the base material, an overlay of side walls and backing strip
Full compliance on the part of the Manufacturer with all the may be carried out, as deemed necessary.
requirements stated by the Society in connection with the
approval of consumables is an essential condition for grant- For the preparation of butt welded assemblies, steel grades
ing and renewing such approval. are to be chosen depending on the grade of consumables.
When a welded joint is performed, the edges of the plates
1.3.7 Firms with several workshops or dealers are to be bevelled either by mechanical machining or by
When consumables of the same brand are manufactured in oxygen cutting; in the latter case, a descaling of the bev-
different workshops belonging to the same Manufacturer, elled edges is necessary.
the complete series of tests is generally performed in one
workshop only. In the other workshops, a reduced test pro- 1.4.2 Welding conditions and type of current
gram, at least equivalent to annual tests, is permitted if the Welding conditions used, such as amperage, voltage, travel
Manufacturer certifies that the material used and the fabri- speed etc., are to be within the range recommended by the
cation process are identical to those used in the main Manufacturer for normal good welding practice.
works.
Where it is stated that a filler metal is suitable for both alter-
1.3.8 Different brand names nating current (a.c.) and direct current (d.c.), alternating
current is to be used for welding the test assemblies for
When a consumable already approved at a manufacturer is mechanical tests. When samples for checking the operating
transferred for sale under a different brand name to the characteristics are required, both types of current are gener-
manufacturer or to a dealer, the manufacturer and the ally to be used. When samples for hot cracking tests are
dealer where applicable have to certify that the consumable required, direct current is to be used.
with the alternative brand name is strictly identical to the
consumable already approved. Direct current is identified in the approval documentation
with the symbols:
1.3.9 Changes in grading • CC+ or DCEP for positive electrode
Changes in grading of welding consumables are to be con- • CC or DCEN for negative electrode.
sidered only at the Manufacturer’s request, in general at the
time of annual testing. For upgrading, tests from butt weld 1.4.3 Post-weld heat treatment
assemblies are generally required as a minimum in addition Post-weld heat treatment of the welded assemblies is not
to normal annual tests, as specified here below. allowed where the consumables are to be approved for the
For upgrading referring to impact properties, Charpy V- as welded condition only.
notch impact tests are to be performed at the upgrade tem-
perature on the respective butt weld assemblies required for 1.5 Mechanical tests
approval.
1.5.1 General
For upgrading referring to higher strength steels, all butt
weld tests required for the approval are to be effected using The test specimens for mechanical tests are to be taken from
higher strength steel as parent metal. the welded assemblies as indicated in the various Articles;
specimen preparation and test results are to comply with
For upgrading referring to hydrogen content, tests according the requirements from [1.5.2] to [1.5.6].
to [2.4] are to be carried out as appropriate.
The requirements relevant to the calibration of the equip-
Downgrading or withdrawal of the approval occurs when ment, preparation of test specimens and testing procedure,
the prescribed tests and re-tests fail to meet the require- detailed in Ch 1, Sec 2, are also to be complied with, as
ments. appropriate.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 2
1.5.2 Tensile tests 1.5.6 Impact tests

Round test specimens for longitudinal tensile tests and flat Charpy V-notch impact specimens are to be cut with their
test specimens for transverse tensile tests are to be taken as longitudinal axis transverse to the weld joint and positioned
described below: as follows:
a) round specimen:
a) for deposited metal and butt weld test assemblies with
The longitudinal axis is to coincide with the centre of the multi-run technique: at mid-thickness of the weld
weld and mid-thickness of the weld in the all weld metal
assemblies and second run in the two run welded assem- b) for two run welded test assemblies: on the second run
blies. The specimen is to be in accordance with Ch 1, Sec side, 2mm below the surface
2, [2.1.10]; the specimen may be heated to a temperature
not exceeding 250°C for a period not exceeding 16 hours, c) for electroslag and electrogas welded test assemblies:
for hydrogen removal prior to testing. 2 mm below the surface
The yield stress, tensile strength and elongation are to be d) for one side automatic welding processes: 2 mm below
determined and are to comply with the requirements the face side and 2 mm below the root side of the test
specified for the various consumables; the reduction of assemblies; for thicknesses  30 mm, specimens at mid-
area is to be determined and reported for information. thickness are also to be taken.
b) flat tensile specimen: The notch is to be cut in the face of the specimen perpen-
The test specimen is to be in accordance with Ch 1, Sec dicular to the surface of the plate and to be positioned in
2, [2.1.11]. the centre of the weld. For electrogas and electroslag weld-
The tensile strength is to be determined together with ing, an additional set with the notch at 2 mm from the
the fracture position and is to comply with the require- fusion line in the weld metal is to be taken.
ments specified for the various consumables. A set of three specimens is to be prepared and tested. The
average impact energy is to comply with the values speci-
1.5.3 Transverse bend tests
fied for the various consumables and only one individual
Face and root bend test specimens having 30 mm width and value may be lower than the average required, provided it is
full plate thickness are to be machined transverse to the not lower than 70% of it.
welded joint. The upper and lower surfaces of the weld are
to be filed, ground or machined flush with the surface of the
plate and the corners in tension rounded to a radius not 1.6 Test samples for checking the chemical
exceeding 2 mm. composition of deposited weld metal
Two bend specimens are required; one specimen is to be
tested with the face of the weld in tension and the other 1.6.1 For some products (see [12], [13], [14]), the chemical
with the root of the weld in tension. composition of weld metal deposited with electrodes is
required to be verified on samples welded for this purpose.
If the plate thickness exceeds 25 mm, it may be reduced to
this size by machining on the compression side of the test
1.6.2 The test samples consist of a test plate of the speci-
specimen.
fied steel having minimum sides 80 x 80 mm2 and 15 mm
Alternatively, two side bend specimens may be taken in lieu thickness.
of root and face bend specimens; side bend specimens may
also be required in addition to or in lieu of root and face On the above test plate, whose surface is to be cleaned by
bend specimens for specific applications [1.5.4]. grinding to remove any trace of oxide, grease and paint, a
weld pad is deposited in layers by welding in the flat posi-
Bend test specimens are to be bent without fracture or tion, each layer being formed by flanked beads. The mini-
cracks through an angle of 120°, unless a different angle is mum dimensions of the pad are to be as indicated in Tab 2.
specified over a former having diameter as indicated in the
various Articles; however superficial cracks or open defects The width of each bead of each layer is to be 1,5 to 2,5
not exceeding 3 mm may be disregarded. times the diameter of the electrode. It is recommended that
each layer should be deposited in a direction perpendicular
1.5.4 Side bend tests to the previous one.
Side bend test specimens, having full plate thickness and
width 10 mm, are generally required in addition to the root The current adopted for welding the test samples is to be
and face bend tests for the approval of wire/gas combina- within the range recommended by the Manufacturer; in the
tions, and are required in lieu of the root and face bend tests case of electrodes for use both with a.c. and d.c. current,
for electrogas or electroslag assemblies. the welding is to be carried out with alternating current.
After each layer has been deposited, the pad may be cooled
1.5.5 Longitudinal bend tests
to room temperature by immersion in water for 30 seconds.
When longitudinal face or root bend tests are required, test
specimens in accordance with an appropriate standard are The surface of each layer is to be free from slag inclusions
accepted. and blow holes.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 2
Table 2 : Pad dimensions 2 Covered electrodes for manual metal

arc welding of C and C-Mn steels
Diameter of Minimum length Minimum thickness
tested electrode and width of the of the pad 2.1 Scope
(mm) pad (mm) (mm)
2,5 30 x 30 13 2.1.1 General
3,25 - max. 40 x 40 16 The requirements of this Article apply to covered electrodes
for manual metal arc welding of hull structural steels, of the
corresponding grades of steel forgings and castings and of
1.6.3 After the welding is completed, the top surface of the
comparable steels intended for other structural applications
pad is to be removed by mechanical means and discarded.
or pressure systems.
Shavings sufficient for checking the chemical composition
are then to be taken in such a manner that no metal is 2.1.2 Designation
removed closer to the surface of the base plate than the dis- Electrodes are divided, for the various strength levels, into
tance indicated in Tab 3. the following grades as defined in [1.2.2]:
The use of lubricating oils during the mechanical machining a) 1, 2, 3, 4 for normal strength grades
for taking out the shavings is to be avoided.
b) 2Y, 3Y, 4Y, 5Y for high strength grades with specified
Table 3 : Sampling method minimum yield strength up to 355 N/mm2
c) 2Y40, 3Y40, 4Y40, 5Y40 for high strength grades with
Diameter of tested Minimum distance from the base plate specified minimum yield strength up to 390 N/mm2.
electrode (mm) for taking out the shavings (mm)
Depending on the hydrogen content of the weld metal, the
2,5 6 symbol H15 or H, H10 or HH, H5 or HHH is added to the
grade mark as in [1.2.7].
3,25 - max. 8
The symbols H15, H10, H5 indicate the hydrogen content
1.7 Re-test procedures determined with the mercury method and thermal conduc-
tivity detector method.
1.7.1 General
2.1.3 Information and documentation to be
When for one or more test samples the execution of the submitted
weld, the external examination, the radiographic examina- The following information and supporting documentation,
tion or the fracture produce results which are not consid- as appropriate, are generally to be submitted together with
ered satisfactory in some respects, and when the respective the request for approval:
causes may be traced back to the operator or operating con-
ditions, the test samples may be allowed to be repeated, in a) trade name of the electrode
duplicate if deemed necessary, with the same procedure. In b) type of covering
other cases, as well as when cracks are detected, the con-
sumable will not be approved. c) grades for which the application is made, including
additional symbols
The operating conditions for the re-test samples are to be
d) typical chemical composition of the deposited metal
agreed with the Surveyor, as deemed appropriate.
e) type of current and welding positions
For the approval of the consumable, or for the continuation
of the testing program, the re-test samples are to produce f) proposed range of application and operating character-
satisfactory results. istics
g) previous approvals granted to the electrodes with the
1.7.2 Tensile and bend tests necessary references.
Where the result of a tensile or bend test does not comply
with the requirements, duplicate test specimens of the same 2.2 Approval tests
type are to be prepared from the same sample and satisfac-
torily tested. Where insufficient original welded assembly is 2.2.1 General
available, a new assembly is to be prepared using welding
consumables of the same batch. If the new assembly is The approval tests specified in [1.3.3] are to be performed
made with the same procedure (in particular the same num- as indicated in [2.3] to [2.6] and summarised in Tab 4.
ber of runs) as the original assembly, only the duplicate re-
test specimens need to be prepared and tested. Otherwise, 2.3 Tests for checking the mechanical pro-
all test specimens are to be prepared for re-testing. perties
1.7.3 Charpy V-notch impact test 2.3.1 General
Reference is made to Ch 1, Sec 2, [4.4]. The following tests indicated in Tab 4 are to be performed.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 2
Table 4 : Test assemblies and mechanical tests required
Test assembly
Welding Number of Thickness Tests required (1)
Type Electrode diameter (mm) (3) Dimensions
position (2) samples (mm)
Deposited metal Flat 4 1 (4) 20 Fig 1 1TL-3KV
max. 1
Butt weld Flat First run: 4 - Intermediate: 5 1 (5) 15 - 20 Fig 2 1TT-1RB-1FB-3KV
Last two layers: max
Vertical First run: 3,25 1 1TT-1RB-1FB-3KV
upward Remaining runs: 4
Horizontal (6) First run: 4 1 1TT-1RB-1FB-3KV
Remaining runs: 5
Overhead First run: 3,25 1 1TT-1RB-1FB
Remaining runs: 4
Fillet (7) First side: min. diam. 1 15 - 20 Fig 3, Fig 4 Macro- Fracture-
Hardness
Second side: max.diam.
(1) Abbreviations: TL: longitudinal tensile test; TT: transverse tensile test; RB: root bend test; FB: face bend test;
KV: Charpy V-notch impact test.
(2) When the approval is requested only for one or more specified welding positions, the butt test samples are to be welded in such
positions.
(3) In the case of high efficiency (130) electrodes, electrodes having diameter 3,25 mm and 4 mm are to be used instead of 4 mm
and 5 mm, respectively.
(4) If only one diameter is to be approved, only one test assembly is required.
(5) For electrodes to be approved in flat position only, an additional test sample is to be welded using electrodes having diameter
4 mm for the first pass, 5 mm for the second pass and the maximum diameter to be approved for the following passes.
(6) The test sample in the horizontal position is not required when the same test sample is welded in flat and vertical positions.
(7) See [2.5].
2.3.2 Deposited metal test assemblies to include the content of all significant alloying elements, if
Two deposited metal test assemblies are to be welded in the any.
flat position as shown in Fig 1, one with 4 mm diameter
electrodes and the other with the largest size manufactured. 2.3.3 Butt weld tests
If an electrode is available in one diameter only, one test Butt weld test assemblies as shown in Fig 2 are to be
assembly is sufficient. Any grade of ship structural steel may welded as indicated from a) to e).
be used for the preparation of the test assembly. a) Flat position
The weld metal is to be deposited in a single or multi-run layers
• one test sample welded using 4 mm electrodes for
according to normal practice, and the direction of deposition
the first pass, 5 mm electrodes for the intermediate
of each layer is generally to alternate from each end of the
passes, and electrodes of the maximum diameter to
plate, each run of weld metal being not less than 2 mm and not
be approved for the last two passes
more than 4 mm thick. Between each run the assembly is to be
left in still air until it has cooled to less than 250°C but not • one test sample welded using 4 mm electrodes for
below 100°C, the temperature being taken in the centre of the the first pass, 5 mm electrodes for the second pass,
weld on the surface of the seam. After being welded, the test and electrodes of the maximum diameter to be
assemblies are not to be subjected to any heat treatment, approved for the remaining passes. This additional
except where approval has been requested also in the stress test sample is required in the case of electrodes to be
relieved condition [2.3.5]. In such case the symbol D is to be approved for the flat position only.
added to the grade designation. b) Vertical position upward technique
The specimens shown in Fig 1 are to be taken for the fol- one test sample welded using 3,25 mm electrodes for
lowing tests: the first pass and 4 mm electrodes for the remaining
a) one longitudinal tensile test passes, or 5 mm if this is recommended by the Manufac-
b) three Charpy V-notch impact tests. turer for welding in vertical position
The results of the tests are to comply with the requirements c) Vertical position downward technique
of Tab 6, as appropriate. one test sample welded using electrode diameters rec-
The chemical analysis of the deposited weld metal in each ommended by the Manufacturer, when the approval
test assembly is to be supplied by the Manufacturer and is with the downward technique has been requested
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 2
d) Overhead position After being welded, the test assemblies are not to be sub-
jected to any heat treatment except where approval has
one test sample welded using 3,25 mm electrodes for been requested also in the stress relieved condition [2.3.5].
the first pass and 4 mm electrodes (or possibly 5 mm if In such case the symbol D is to be added to the grade desig-
this is recommended by the Manufacturer) for the nation.
remaining passes It is recommended and may be required that the welded
assemblies should be subjected to a radiographic examina-
e) Horizontal position
tion to ascertain if there are any defects in the weld prior to
one test sample welded using 4 mm electrodes for the the preparation of test specimens.
first pass and 5 mm electrodes for the remaining passes. The test specimens shown in Fig 2 are to be taken for the
This test sample need not be welded in the case of elec- following tests:
trodes for which the execution of the same test sample a) one transverse tensile test
in flat and vertical positions is required.
b) three Charpy V-notch impact tests
The grade of steel to be used for the preparation of the test c) one root and one face bend test specimens.
assemblies is related to the grade of the electrodes as indi-
cated in Tab 5. Figure 2 : Butt weld test assembly
For electrodes to be approved under grades 4 and 5, in lieu

of the hull steels specified in Tab 5, C-Mn steels for pressure Discard
vessels of grades L40 and L60, respectively, and strength
50
3 charpy-V notch
appropriate to the electrode strength may be used.
55
The use of other type of steel is to be agreed with the Soci-

ety on a case-by-case basis.
Transverse
60
The welding is to be performed with the usual technique in tensile
compliance with the requirements specified in [2.3.2] for
30
Face bend
the deposited metal test, as applicable. For all assemblies,
the back sealing run is to be made with 4 mm diameter
50
30
Root bend
electrodes, in the welding position appropriate to each test
sample, after back gouging to sound metal. For electrodes Discard
suitable for downhand welding only, the test assemblies Min 100 Min 100
may be turned over to carry out the backing seal.
15- 20
30˚ 30˚
Figure 1 : Deposited metal test assembly
3 charpy test- 2-3

pieces taken
at mid-depth
of weld Charpy notch All the dimensions are in mm, unless otherwise indicated.
at right angles
to surface
or plate Table 5 : Grade of steel used for test assemblies
Electrode grade Steel grade (1)

1 A
Min
20
Line of cut 2 A, B, D
for tensile
specimen 3-4 A, B, D, E
1 tensile
2Y AH32-36, DH32-36
80 80 20 3Y AH32-36, DH32-36, EH32-36
10 4Y- 5Y AH32-36, DH32-36, EH32-36, FH32-36
16 min 2Y40 AH40, DH40
3Y40 AH40, DH40, EH40
4Y40 - 5Y40 AH40, DH40, EH40, FH40
Min 100 30 Min 100
(1) The tensile strength of grades AH32 to FH32 is to be
All the dimensions are in mm, unless otherwise indicated. greater than 490 N/mm2.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 2
Tensile test on Charpy V-notch impact test

Tensile test on deposited metal
butt weld Minimum average energy (J)
Grade
Yield stress ReH Tensile strength Elong. A5 Tensile strength Test temp. Flat, Horizontal,
Vertical
(N/mm2) min. Rm (N/mm2) (%) min. Rm (N/mm2) min. (°C) Overhead
1 305 400 - 560 22 400 + 20 47 34
2 0
3  20
4  40
2Y 375 490 - 660 22 490 0 47 34
3Y  20
4Y  40
5Y  60
2Y40 400 510 - 690 22 510 0 47 39
3Y40  20
4Y40  40
5Y40  60
2.3.4 Test requirements ment of the designation HHH, the hydrogen content is, in any
The required results of tensile and impact tests on deposited case, to be checked with the mercury or thermal conductivity
metal and butt weld tests are indicated in Tab 6. detector method according to the above ISO standard.
Bend tests are to be performed on a mandrel having a diam-
eter equal to three times the thickness of the specimen; the 2.4.2 Thermal Conductivity Detector method
results are to comply with requirements in [1.5.3]. Four weld assemblies are to be prepared.
2.3.5 Approval in the stress relieved condition The temperature of the specimens and minimum holding
When the approval of the electrode is required with the time are to be complied with Tab 7, according to the mea-
additional symbol D, relevant to the checking of the suring method respectively.
mechanical properties in the stress relieved condition, the
following additional tests are to be performed on samples Table 7 : Thermal Conductivity method
submitted to stress relieving in the furnace for 1 hour at
600-650°C:
Test Minimum
• one longitudinal tensile test and 3 Charpy V-notch Measuring method tempera- holding
impact tests on the deposited metal test assembly ture (°C) time (h)
welded with the maximum diameter to be approved
Thermal Gas 45 72
• alternatively or in addition, at the Surveyor’s discretion,
Conductivity Chromatography
3 Charpy V-notch impact tests on the butt weld test Detector 150 6
welded in flat and vertical position. method (1)
The impact tests are to be carried out at the temperature (1) The use of hot carrier gas extraction method may be
specified for the respective grades of electrodes. considered subject to verification of the testing proce-
dure to confirm that collection and measurement of the
2.4 Tests for checking the hydrogen content hydrogen occurs continuously until all of the diffusible
hydrogen is quantified.
2.4.1 General
When electrodes are to be approved with symbol H or H15, 2.4.3 Glycerine method
HH or H10, HHH or H5, tests are to be carried out to deter-
mine the hydrogen content of the weld metal. Four test samples are to be prepared measuring
12 x 25 mm2 in cross-section by about 125 mm in length.
Low hydrogen electrodes are subjected to a hydrogen test.
The parent metal may be any grade of structural steel and,
The hydrogen content is to be checked with the mercury before welding, the samples are to be weighed to the near-
method or thermal conductivity detector method according to est 0,1 gram. On the 25 mm width surface of each speci-
ISO standard 3690 or another comparable method with the men, a single bead of welding is to be deposited by a 4 mm
Society’s consent. Four weld assemblies are to be prepared. electrode burning a length of about 150 mm of the elec-
The use of the glycerine method described in [2.4.3] may be trode.The welding is to be carried out with an arc as short as
admitted by the Society for symbols H and HH. For the assign- possible and with current of about 150 amp. Alternating
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 2
current a.c. is to be used when the electrode is proposed for 2.5 Fillet weld test assemblies
approval with both a.c. and d.c. Before welding, the elec-
trodes may be submitted to the normal drying process rec- 2.5.1 Fillet weld test assemblies are required for electrodes
ommended by the Manufacturer. submitted for approval for fillet welding only and may be
required, during the first approval tests at the Surveyor’s dis-
The procedure for determining the hydrogen content is as cretion, for electrodes submitted for approval for both butt
follows: and fillet welding. In the latter case, only one sample in
horizontal-vertical position is generally to be welded.
a) within 30 seconds after the completion of the weld, the When the electrode is proposed for fillet welding only, fillet
slag is to be removed and the samples quenched in weld assemblies for each welding position (horizontal-verti-
water at approximately 20°C cal, vertical upward, vertical downward or overhead) rec-
ommended by the Manufacturer and deposited weld metal
b) after 30 seconds in water, the samples are to be cleaned test as indicated in [2.3.2] are to be welded. The test assem-
and deposited in an apparatus suitable for the collection blies, are to have a length L sufficient to allow at least the
of the hydrogen by the displacement of glycerin (or par- deposition of the entire length of the electrode being tested.
affin). During the test, the glycerin is to be maintained at The grade of steel to be used for the preparation of test
45°C. All four samples are to be welded and subjected assembly is related to the grade of the electrodes as indi-
to the hydrogen test within 30 minutes cated in Tab 5. Plates having a thickness from 15 mm to
20 mm are used.
c) the samples are to be kept soaking in glycerin for 48
hours; after being removed from the machine, the sam- 2.5.2 The test sample is to be welded on both sides; the first
ples are to be cleaned by means of water and alcohol, side is to be welded with the maximum diameter and the
second side with the minimum diameter. The sizes of the
dried and weighed to the nearest 0,1 gram in order to
beads are about 9 x 9 and 6 x 6 mm2 for the first and second
determine the amount of deposited metal
beads, respectively.
d) the amount of gas developed is to be measured to the
2.5.3 After visual examination and assessment, three sec-
nearest 0,05 cm3 and corrected for temperature and tions for macrographic examination are to be taken from
pressure to 20°C and 760 mm Hg, respectively each test sample as indicated in Fig 3 (one in the middle
and one at each end). These are to be examined for root
e) the individual and average diffusible hydrogen content penetration, satisfactory profile, freedom from cracking and
of the four specimens is to be reported and the average reasonable freedom from porosity and slag inclusions.
value in cm3, per 100 grams of deposited metal, is not to Vickers hardness measurements are to be carried out to the
exceed the values specified for the symbol of the elec- Surveyor’s satisfaction on the above sections in the positions
trode concerned. indicated in Fig 4.
The hardness of the weld metal obtained is to be:
2.4.4 Hydrogen test requirements
•  120 HV for normal strength level
The hydrogen content is not to exceed the values given in • 150 HV for high strength level up to ReH = 355 N/mm2
Tab 8.
•  170 HV for high strength level up to ReH = 390 N/mm2.
Table 8 : Diffusible hydrogen content of weld metal The hardness of both heat affected zone H.A.Z. and base
metal is also to be determined and is to be reported for
information.
Diffusible
hydrogen
Symbol Measuring method (3) Figure 3 : Sections for macrographic examination
content
(ml/100g)
20 25 25 25
H15 (H) 15 (1) Mercury method
H10 (HH) 10 (2) Thermal Conductivity Detector
method
Glycerine method
~ 150
H5 (HHH) 5 Mercury method

Thermal Conductivity Detector
method
~ 20
(1) 10 ml per 100 grams where the Gycerine method is

~ 150 50 50
used.
(2) 5 ml per 100 grams where the Glycerine method is ~ 1/2 L ~ 1/2 L
used.
(3) Glycerine method is not allowed for the welding con- L
sumables with H5 symbol.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 2
Figure 4 : Hardness readings 3 Covered electrodes for gravity or

20
contact welding
3.1 Scope
Base metal
3.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to covered
electrodes when submitted for approval for use in gravity
Hardness reading welding, using automatic gravity or similar welding devices.
3.2 Approval tests
20
3.2.1 Where the electrode is submitted for approval for the
gravity welding technique only, deposited metal tests
HAZ Base metal [2.3.2], fillet weld tests [2.5] and, where appropriate, butt
weld tests [2.3.3] similar to those for manual electrodes are
The dimensions are in mm.
to be carried out with such technique.
3.2.2 Where the electrode is submitted for approval for the

2.5.4 The two parts obtained upon sectioning the sample gravity welding technique in addition to normal manual
are to be subjected to fracture as in [2.3.2] after having pre- welding, fillet weld tests and, where appropriate, butt weld
viously removed the welding bead from one side (on one tests are to be carried out with the gravity process, in addi-
part the first and on the other the second deposited beads). tion to the normal approval tests.
The fractured surfaces are to be examined for root penetra- 3.2.3 The fillet weld test is to be gravity welded using the
longest size of electrode manufactured. The Manufacturer’s
tion, satisfactory profile, freedom from cracks and reason-
recommended current range is to be reported for each elec-
able freedom from porosity. trode size.
The results of the tests are to comply with the requirements
2.5.5 These tests may partially replace the T fillet joints specified in [2.5.3] and [2.5.4].
when required in [2.3.2].
2.6 Annual control tests 3.3.1 Where the electrode is approved only for gravity
welding, the annual test is to consist of at least one depos-
2.6.1 The annual tests are to include at least the following: ited weld metal test assembly using such process. If the
electrode is approved also for manual arc welding, the
a) two deposited metal test assemblies are to prepared in annual test is to be performed as indicated in [2.6.1].
accordance with [2.3.2] and the required tests (one lon-
gitudinal tensile test and 3 Charpy V-notch impact tests) 4 Covered electrodes for deep
are to be conducted. For electrodes approved for fillet penetration manual welding of C and
weld only, and not suitable for butt-joints, only one
C-Mn steels
deposited metal test with the maximum diameter is to
be carried out
4.1 Scope
b) at the discretion of the Society, a butt weld test to be
4.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to deep pene-
welded in vertical position may be required in lieu of tration electrodes to be used for downhand butt and fillet
the deposited metal test with electrodes of 4 mm welding and horizontal-vertical fillet welding.
Deep penetration electrodes may be approved as grade 1
c) the check of the hydrogen content is required for elec-
electrodes only and are to be given the additional symbol
trodes approved with symbol HHH (or H5) and may be D.P.
required for electrodes approved with symbol HH (or
Approvals limited to butt-joints only may be considered. In
H10) these cases, the test sample specified in [4.2.2] is not
required.
d) the chemical composition may be required to be
checked under conditions corresponding to those of the 4.1.2 The welding of butt-joints in flat position is to be per-
approval tests. formed on square groove edges.
When the Manufacturer requires that the approval is
The welding and test procedures, the type of current, the
extended to cover butt-welded joints having a single Vee
materials, the test results and the re-test procedures, where edge preparation, all the tests required in [2] for normal
applicable, are regulated by the requirements relative to the type electrodes used in flat position are to be carried out, in
approval tests. addition to the tests required in this Article.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 2
4.1.3 Test samples relative to the approval of deep penetra- Figure 5 : Deep penetration butt weld test assembly
tion electrodes are to be welded with the type and the
Thickness of plate twice
intensity of current recommended by the Manufacturer. core of electrode plus 2 mm
When it is intended that the approval is valid for use with

both d.c. and a.c. currents, the test samples are to be
welded with a.c. current.
4.1.4 As regards the procedure for the approval, the prepa-
35
ration and welding of samples, the specimens and testing, Discard
Macro
10
the requirements specified in [2] for ordinary electrodes are
to be complied with, in so far as applicable.
Charpy V-notch
4.2 Approval tests
4.2.1 Butt weld test assembly Face bend
30
The following test sample in grade A structural steel or
Root bend
30
equivalent steel to the Surveyor’s satisfaction is to be
welded:
• one butt-welded sample, with square groove edges,
50
Transverse tensile
made of two plates having width  100 mm and a thick-
ness equal to twice the diameter of the core of the elec-
trode plus 2 mm; such sample is to be welded in flat
position with the maximum electrode diameter for
Transverse tensile
50
which the approval has been requested, with a single
pass on each side (see Fig 5).
10
Macro
The edges are to be accurately cut and in good contact (not Discard
35
more than 0,25 mm between edges for the full length of the
joint).
0,25 max
The specimens for the following tests are to be taken after
having discarded a length of 35 mm from each end: 100 min. 100 min.
• two transverse tensile tests
• one face and one root bend All the dimensions are in mm.
• three Charpy V-notch impact tests
Figure 6 : Deep penetration fillet weld test assembly
• two macrographic examinations.
12,5 - 15
4.2.2 Fillet weld test assembly
The following test sample in grade A structural steel or

equivalent steel to the Surveyor’s satisfaction is to be
4 mm electrode
welded:
• one Tee-joint sample having length  160 mm and Maximum size of

electrode manufactured
thickness about 12-15 mm, to be welded in horizontal
0,25
position with a 4 mm electrode on one side and with an

electrode of the maximum diameter to be approved on
the other side.
The edges are to be accurately cut and the gap between

12,5 - 15
the plates is to be not more than 0,25 mm for the full

length of the joint as shown in Fig 6. 4 min. Penetration to
be reported
Two cross-sections are to be obtained from the sample at
about 35 mm from each end; the two cross-sections are to
be subjected to a macrographic examination (see Fig 6).
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 2
4.2.3 Test requirements Approvals granted in accordance with these requirements

The results required for the tests mentioned in [4.2.1] and are valid for standard single wire welding.
[4.2.2] are specified in the following items a) and b):
Other techniques, such as tandem or multi-wire welding,
a) Butt weld test assembly: and one side welding on flux or backing, are to be submit-
ted to separate approval tests. These tests are generally to be
• bend tests on a mandrel having diameter equal to
carried out in accordance with the requirements of this Arti-
three times the thickness of the sample: bend angle
cle and are detailed, on a case-by-case basis, depending on
  120°
the welding procedure proposed.
• transverse tensile test: Rm  410 N/mm2
• impact tests at about +20°C; minimum absorbed 5.1.2 Type of wires
energy (average value of three tests): KV 47 J Types of wires identified by the chemical composition
• the macrographic examinations are to show a com- shown in Tab 9 are generally to be used.
plete compenetration of the welds on the two sides.
Chemical composition of wires other than those given in
b) Fillet weld test assembly: Tab 9 are to be submitted.
• the fillet deposited with the 4 mm electrode is to
show a penetration not less than 4 mm (see Fig 6) 5.1.3 Designation
• the penetration obtained by the fillet deposited with Wire flux combinations are divided, for the various strength
the maximum diameter of electrode on the other levels, into the following grades as defined in [1.2.2]:
side is to be measured and reported for information
purposes only. a) 1, 2, 3, 4 for normal strength grades
b) 1Y, 2Y, 3Y, 4Y, 5Y for high strength grades with specified
4.2.4 Maximum thickness which can be welded
minimum yield strength up to 355 N/mm2
Upon satisfactory completion of the tests mentioned in the
above paragraphs, the Manufacturer is to prepare and sub- c) 2Y40, 3Y40, 4Y40, 5Y40 for high strength grades with
mit to the Society a table showing the maximum thickness specified minimum yield strength up to 390 N/mm2.
which can be welded, with square groove edges, with each
diameter of electrode included in the approval and with the The prefix A is added to the grade.
intensity of current necessary for the relevant electrode.
Depending on the welding technique, the following sym-
The table, which forms an integral and essential part of the bols are added as a suffix to the grade:
approval documentation, is to substantially conform to the
maximum thickness value verified in the test in [4.2.1]. • T for use with two-run technique
• M for use with multi-run technique

4.3 Annual control tests • TM for use with both techniques.
4.3.1 One test sample, as illustrated in Fig 5 or Fig 6 as
applicable, is required; such sample is to be welded with 5.1.4 Information and documentation to be
submitted
electrodes having the maximum approved diameter.
The required tests and the relevant requirements are those The following information and supporting documentation,
indicated in [4.2.1], [4.2.2] and [4.2.3]; however, only one as applicable, are generally to be submitted together with
transverse tensile test is required. the request for approval:
For electrodes approved for both normal and deep penetra- a) commercial name of the flux, for which the approval is
tion welding in the downhand position, a deep penetration requested; type of flux (fused or conglomerate)
weld test, as above, is to be carried out in addition to the
deposited weld metal tests required for normal penetration. b) commercial name of the associated wire, limits of
chemical composition and diameters to be approved
5 Flux-wire combination for submerged c) grading under which the approval is requested; type of
arc welding of C and C-Mn steels current and welding positions
d) typical chemical composition of the deposited metal,

5.1 Scope with particular reference to the contents of Mn, Si and
alloying elements
5.1.1 General
e) recommendations, where applicable, regarding the
The requirements of this Article apply to wire flux combina- range of the welding parameters (current, voltage and
tion for submerged arc welding of hull structural steels, of welding speed)
the corresponding grades of steel forgings and castings and
of comparable steels intended for other structural applica- f) previous approvals granted to the proposed wire-flux
tions or pressure systems. combination.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 2
Table 9 : Wire chemical composition
Type of Chemical composition

wire C max. Mn Si max. P max. S max. Al max. Cr max. Ni max. Cu max. Mo
1 0,13 0,40 - 0,65 0,15 (2) 0,03 0,03 0,03 0,15 0,25 0,30 (3)
2 0,15 0,80 - 1,20
3 0,15 1,30 - 1,70
4 0,15 1,80 - 2,20 (1)
5 0,16 2,30 - 2,70
(1) A content lower by not more than 0,05% is acceptable.
(2) Wires having chemical composition 1 may be of rimmed steel; the other wires may be of Si and/or Al killed or semi-killed
steels. Approval may be granted to wires having Si content up to 0,40%, depending on the type of wire concerned.
(3) For all wires Mo may be included in the proposed composition in the range 0,45-0,60%; the content is to be stated by the Man-
ufacturer at the time of the request for approval of the wire-flux combination.
Welding Test assembly Tests required (1)

technique Type Number Thickness (mm) Dimensions
M Deposited metal test 1 20 Fig 7 2TL - 3KV
Butt weld test 1 20 - 25 Fig 8 2TT - 2RB - 2FB - 3KV
T Butt weld test 1 12 - 15 Fig 9 2TT - 2RB - 2FB - 3KV
Butt weld test 1 20 - 25 Fig 9 1TL - 2TT - 2RB - 2FB - 3KV
Butt weld test 1 30 - 35 Fig 9 1TL - 2TT - 2RB -2FB - 3KV
TM (2)
(1) Abbreviations: TL = longitudinal tensile test; TT = transverse tensile test; RB = root bend test; FB = face bend test;
KV = Charpy V-notch impact test.
(2) Tests for both techniques are required; only one longitudinal tensile test is required on the deposited metal test.
5.2 Approval tests The weld metal is deposited in multi-run layers and the
direction of deposition of each layer is in general to alter-
5.2.1 General nate from each end of the plate. After completion of each
The test assemblies required for approval are specified in run, the flux and welding slag are to be removed. Between
[5.2.2] to [5.2.7] and summarised in Tab 10, depending on each run, the assembly is to be left in still air until it has
the welding technique to be approved. cooled to less than 250°C but not below 100°C, the tem-
A few preliminary samples may be required by the Surveyor perature being taken in the centre of the weld on the sur-
to be welded, in order to check the operating characteristics face of the seam. The thickness of each layer is to be neither
and set up the welding parameters. less than the diameter of the wire nor less than 4mm. After
being welded, the test assemblies are not to be subjected to
5.2.2 Multi-run technique (M) any heat treatment, except where approval has also been
Where approval for use with multi-run technique is requested in the stress relieved condition. In such case the
requested, deposited weld metal and butt weld tests are to symbol D is to be added to the grade designation.
be carried out as indicated in [5.2.3] and [5.2.4], respec-
The specimens shown in Fig 7 are to be taken for the fol-
tively.
lowing tests:
5.2.3 Deposited metal test
a) two longitudinal tensile tests
One deposited metal test is to be welded, as shown in Fig 7,
in general with a wire having diameter of 4 mm. b) three Charpy V-notch impact tests.
Any grade of ship structural steel may be used for the prepa-
ration of the test assembly.
of Tab 13, as appropriate.
The welding conditions (amperage, voltage and travel
speed) are to be in accordance with the recommendations The chemical analysis of the deposited weld metal of the test
of the Manufacturer and are to conform with normal good assembly is to be supplied by the Manufacturer and is to
welding practice. include the content of all significant alloying elements, if any.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 2
Figure 7 : Deposited metal test It is recommended that the welded assemblies should be
200 subjected to a radiographic examination to ascertain if there
are any defects in the weld prior to the preparation of test
10˚ specimens.
The test specimens, shown in Fig 8, are to be taken for the
following tests:
12
20
a) two transverse tensile tests
Tack weld
16
50
c) two root and two face bend tests.
of [5.2.6], as appropriate.
Tensile
Table 11 : Grade of steel used for test assemblies
Wire flux
Steel grade (1)
combination grade
1 A
30
2 A, B, D
10
Impact 10 3-4 A, B, D, E
10
10
1Y AH 32-36
10 2Y AH 32-36, DH 32-36
3Y AH32-36, DH32-36, EH32-36
Line of cut
4Y - 5Y AH32-36, DH32-36, EH32-36, FH32-36
Tensile 2Y40 AH40, DH40
3Y40 AH40, DH40, EH40
4Y40 - 5Y40 AH40, DH40, EH40, FH40
30
(1) The tensile strength of grades AH32 to FH32 is to be
greater than 490 N/mm2.
All the dimensions are in mm, unless otherwise indicated.
Figure 8 : Butt weld test assembly
5.2.4 Butt weld tests for multi-run technique 60˚
One butt weld test assembly is to be welded as shown in

Fig 8 in general with a wire having diameter of 4 mm.
The grade of steel to be used for the preparation of the test 4 20
assemblies is related to the grade of the wire-flux combina- 150 mm 150 mm
tion as indicated in Tab 11.
Discard
At the discretion of the Society, approval of multi-run weld-
ing of both normal and higher strength steel may be
obtained by making a butt weld on higher tensile steel only.
Tensile 50
For flux to be approved under grades 4 and 5, in lieu of the
hull steels specified in Tab 11, C-Mn steels for pressure ves- Bend 30
sels of grades L40 and L60, respectively, and strength appro-
Bend 30
priate to the wire flux combination strength may be used.
10
The use of other types of steel is to be agreed with the Soci- Impact
3 Charpy-V 10
ety on a case-by-case basis. Test-pieces
10
The welding is to be performed by the multi-run technique
and the welding conditions are to be the same as those Bend 30
adopted for the deposited weld metal assembly. The back

Bend 30
sealing run is to be made with the welding parameters used
for the filling pass, after back gouging to sound metal.
Tensile 50
After being welded, the test assemblies are not to be sub-
jected to any heat treatment except where approval has also
been requested in the stress relieved condition [5.2.7]. In Discard
such case the symbol D is to be added to the grade designa-
tion. All the dimensions are in mm, unless otherwise indicated.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 2
Figure 9 : Butt weld test assembly After the completion of the first run, the flux and welding
for two-run technique slag are to be removed and the assembly left in still air until
it has cooled to 100°C, the temperature being taken in the
Min. 150 Min. 150 centre of the weld, on the surface of the seam.
After being welded, the test assemblies are not to be sub-

jected to any heat treatment except where approval has also
Tensile specimen 50 been requested in the stress relieved condition. In such case
the symbol D is to be added to the grade designation.
Bend specimen 30
The test assemblies are to be subjected to radiographic
30 mm for plates up
Bend specimen to 25 mm thickness examination to ascertain freedom from lack of penetration
10 or other defects in the weld, prior to the preparation of test
Impact
10
specimens.
specimen
10 The test specimens, shown in Fig 9, are to be taken for the
Bend specimen 30 following tests:
Bend specimen 30 a) two transverse tensile tests

Tensile specimen 50
c) two root and two face bend tests.
Longitudinal
tensile Where the approval is required for two-run technique only,
(cylindrical one longitudinal tensile specimen is to be taken from the
specimen)
thicker plate, as shown in Fig 9.

of [5.2.6], as appropriate.
2 nd run The chemical analysis of the weld metal of the second run
2 max
in each test assembly is to be supplied by the Manufacturer
10
and is to include the content of all significant alloying ele-
ments, if any.
5.2.6 Tests requirements

The required results of tensile and impact tests on deposited
All the dimensions are in mm.
metal and butt weld tests are indicated in Tab 13.
5.2.5 Two-run technique (T)
Where approval for use with two-run technique only is eter equal to three times the thickness of the specimen; the
requested, two butt weld test assemblies are to be carried results are to comply with requirements in [1.5.3].
out as indicated in Tab 12 and no deposited metal test is
requested.
5.2.7 Approval in the stress relieved condition
The grade of steel to be used for the preparation of the test
assemblies is related to the grade of the wire flux combina- When the approval of the wire flux combination is required
tion as indicated in Tab 11. with the additional symbol D, relevant to the checking of
the mechanical properties in the stress relieved condition,
Each strength level requires separate approval. the following additional tests are to be carried out on sam-
For flux to be approved under grades 4 and 5, in lieu of the ples submitted to stress relieving in the furnace for one hour
hull steels specified in Tab 11, C-Mn steels for pressure ves- at 600-650°C:
sels of grades L40 and L60, respectively, and strength appro-
priate to the wire flux combination strength may be used. a) Two-run technique (T)
The use of other types of steel is to be agreed with the Soci- • one longitudinal and one transverse tensile test,
ety on a case-by-case basis. three Charpy V-notch impact tests on the face and
The welding is to be performed in two runs, one from each root side of the butt welded assembly having the
side, using voltage and travel speed in accordance with the maximum thickness.
recommendation of the Manufacturer and normal good
b) Multi-run technique (M)
welding practice. In general, the following values of current
parameters are to be complied with for welding the second • one longitudinal tensile test on the deposited metal
run: test and one transverse tensile test on the butt weld
• 700-800 A for samples having thickness 12-15 mm test
• 900-1000 A for samples having thickness 20-25 mm • three Charpy V-notch impact tests on deposited
• 1100-1200 A for samples having thickness 30-35 mm. metal and butt weld tests.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 2
Table 12 : Two-run technique butt weld test assemblies
Grade Plate thickness (mm) Recommended preparation (2) Maximum diameter of wire (mm)
1 - 1Y 12 - 15 Fig 10 (a) 5
20 - 25 Fig 10 (b) 6
2, 3, 4, 2Y, 3Y, 4Y, 5Y, 20 - 25 (1) Fig 10 (b) 6
2Y40, 3Y40, 4Y40, 5Y40 30 - 35 (1) Fig 10 (c) 7
(1) A limitation of the approval to the lower and medium thickness range (up to the maximum welded plate thickness) may be
agreed to by the Society and the test pieces are then to be welded from plates of thickness 12-15 mm and 20-25 mm, irrespec-
tive of the quality grade.
(2) Minor deviations in the weld preparation are admissible; the root gap is to be practically constant and generally is not to exceed
0,7 mm.
Figure 10 : Recommended edge preparation for two-run technique
70˚
25
60˚ 70˚
15
20
12
35
12
12
8
30
8
(a) (b) (c)
Table 13 : Required mechanical properties
Tensile test on deposited metal Tensile test on butt weld Charpy V-notch impact test
Grade Yield stress ReH Tensile strength Elong. A5 Tensile strength Rm Test temp. Minimum average
(N/mm2) min. Rm (N/mm2) (%) min. (N/mm2) min. (°C) energy (J)
1 305 400 - 560 22 400 + 20 34
2 0
3  20
4  40
1Y 375 490 - 660 22 490 + 20 34
2Y 0
3Y  20
4Y  40
5Y  60
2Y40 400 510 - 690 22 510 0 39
3Y40  20
4Y40  40
5Y40  60
5.3 Annual control tests b) multi-run technique (M)
5.3.1 The periodical control tests are to include at least the • one deposited metal test assembly from which one
following: all weld metal longitudinal tensile test and three
Charpy V-notch impact tests are to be taken.
a) two-run technique (T)
• one butt weld test assembly with plate thickness 20- c) T and M techniques (TM)
25 mm from which one transverse tensile, two bend
tests (one root and one face bend) and three impact • the test assemblies and relevant tests required for T
tests are to be taken. One longitudinal tensile test is and M techniques are to be carried out. The longitu-
also to be prepared for wire flux combinations dinal tensile test specified in a) for T technique is not
approved solely for the two-run technique. required.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 2
5.3.2 The weld and test procedures, the type of current, the Figure 11 : Position of Charpy V-notch impact test
materials, the test results and the re-test procedures, where for one side automatic welding
applicable, are regulated by the requirements relative to the 2
approval tests.
25
Where a wire flux combination is approved for welding 10
both normal strength and higher strength steels, the steels of
20
10
the highest strength approved are to be used for the prepa-
ration of the butt weld assembly required by the T tech- 2
nique, in order to also cover the lower strength levels.
2
6 Flux-wire combinations for one side
submerged arc welding of butt-joints 10
of C and C-Mn steels
35
10
30
6.1 Scope 10
6.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to flux- wire 2

combinations for submerged-arc welding processes with
high current, used for one side welding (U welding tech- 7 Wires and wire-gas combination for
nique) of butt-joints with one or more layers (in general not
semiautomatic welding of C and
more than two layers).
C-Mn steels
The welding machine may have one or more welding
heads. A suitable backing support, for example a flux layer 7.1 Scope
and support equipment, may be adopted.
7.1.1 The requirements of this Article apply to bare wire
The requirements of Article [5] are also to be complied gas combinations and flux cored or flux coated wires with
with, as applicable, unless otherwise stated in this Article. or without shielding gases, to be used for semiautomatic
welding of hull structural steels, of the corresponding
grades of steel forgings and castings and of comparable
6.2 Designation
steels intended for other structural applications or pressure
systems.
6.2.1 The prefix A and the suffix U are added to the grade The term semiautomatic is used to describe processes in
as defined in [1.2.7]. which the weld is made manually by a welder holding a
gun through which the wire is continuously feed. For the
6.3 Approval tests purpose of the approval designation, this technique is iden-
tified by the symbol S or SA.
6.3.1 The edge preparation of the various samples and the

welding parameters to be used are those proposed by the
7.2 Type of wires
Manufacturer and they are to be reported in the approval 7.2.1 The chemical composition of bare wires normally
certificate; they are to be appropriate to ensure complete used is shown in Tab 14.
fusion and satisfactory surface appearance.
Types G3Si1 and G4Si1 are particularly intended for weld-
The specimens which are required to be obtained from the ing processes under CO2 shielding gas and the other types
samples are the same as indicated in [5.2.5] except for for welding processes where mixtures of shielding gases are
impact test specimens, which are to be taken as follows (see used.
Fig 11): Chemical composition of wires other than those given in
Tab 14 are to be submitted to the society.
a) for samples of thickness s = 12-15 mm:
3 specimens at mid-thickness 7.3 Shielding gases
b) for samples of thickness s = 20-25 mm: 7.3.1 Where applicable, the composition of the welding
gas is to be reported.
6 specimens, 3 near each surface For the purpose of the approval, the type of gas and mixture
of gas are grouped as indicated in Tab 15.
c) for samples of thickness s = 30-35 mm:
Unless otherwise required for specific applications, gas
9 specimens, 3 near each surface and 3 at mid-thick- mixtures in the same group are considered equivalent for
ness. approval purposes.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 2
Table 14 : Solid wire chemical composition
Type of Chemical composition (%) (2)

wire C max Mn Si P max S max Cr max Ni max Cu max (1) Mo
G2Si 0,14 0,90 - 1,30 0,50 - 0,80 0,025 0,025 0,15 0,15 0,35 
G3Si1 0,14 1,30 - 1,60 0,70 - 1,00
G4Si1 0,14 1,60 - 1,90 0,80 - 1,20
G4Mo 0,14 1,70 - 2,10 0,50 - 0,80 0,40 - 0,60
G4Si 0,14 1,60 - 1,90 0,80 - 1,20 
(1) Including surface lining
(2) Al, Ti, Zr may be added by the Manufacturer and the values are to be submitted to the Society for consideration at the time of
the request for the approval; reference may be made to the limits of EN 440.
Table 15 : Composition of gas mixtures adjusting the deposition rate to give a weight of weld
for continuous wire welding process deposit per sample similar to that deposited when using
manual electrodes.
Composition of gas mixtures in volume (%) On the basis of the test results, the welding consumables
Group
symbol may be given one of the symbols H (or H15), HH (or H10),
Ar (1) H2 CO2 O2
HHH (or H5), as appropriate.
C1 100 
C2 70 - 99 1 - 30 7.5 Information and documentation to be
M11 90 - 98 1-5 1-5  submitted
M12 95 - 99 1-5 
7.5.1 The following information and supporting documen-
M13 97 - 99   1-3
tation, as appropriate, are generally to be submitted
M14 92 - 98  1-5 1-3 together with the request for approval:
M21 75 - 94  6 - 25 
a) commercial name, type of wire, limits of chemical com-
M22 90 - 96   4 - 10 position in the case of bare wires
M23 67 - 93  6 - 25 1-8
b) grading under which the approval is requested; type of
M31 50 - 74  26 - 50  current, welding positions
M32 85 - 89   11 - 15
c) type of shielding gas or gas mixture; commercial brand
M33 35 - 85  6 - 50 9 - 15 and Manufacturer, in the case of gas mixtures of special
(1) Argon may be replaced by Helium up to 95% of the types
argon content.
d) typical chemical composition of the deposited metal,
with particular reference to the contents of Mn, Si and
7.4 Designation alloying elements
e) recommendations, where applicable, regarding the

7.4.1 Wire gas combinations are divided, for the various
range of the welding parameters (current, voltage and
strength levels, into the following grades as defined in
welding speed)
[1.2.2]:
f) previous approvals granted to the proposed gas wire
a) 1, 2, 3, 4 for normal strength grades combination.
b) 1Y, 2Y, 3Y, 4Y, 5Y for high strength grades with specified
minimum yield strength up to 355 N/mm2 7.6 Approval tests
c) 2Y40, 3Y40, 4Y40, 5Y40 for high strength grades with
specified minimum yield strength up to 390 N/mm2. 7.6.1 General
Deposited metal and butt weld tests are to be performed as
The prefix S or SA is added to indicate semiautomatic weld-
indicated in [7.6.2] and [7.6.3], and summarised in Tab 16.
ing technique.
A few preliminary samples may be required by the Surveyor
7.4.2 Flux cored or flux coated wires may be required to be to be welded, in order to check the operating characteristics
submitted to the hydrogen test as detailed in [2.4], using the and set up the welding parameters. These tests may be lim-
Manufacturer’s recommended welding conditions and ited to the fillet test assemblies required in [7.6.7].
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 2
Test assembly
Welding position Wire diameter Number of Thickness Tests required (1)
Type Dimensions
(2) (mm) samples (mm)
Deposited Flat Max. 1 (3) 20 Fig 1 1 TL - 3KV
metal 1,2 or min. 1
Butt weld Flat First run: 1,2 or min. 1 (4) 15 - 20 Fig 12 1TT - 1RB - 1FB - 3KV
Vertical upward Remaining run: max 1 1TT - 1RB - 1FB - 3SB - 3KV
Vertical downward 1 1TT - 1RB - 1FB - 3SB - 3KV
Horizontal 1 1TT - 1RB - 1FB - 3SB - 3KV
Overhead 1 1TT - 1RB - 1FB - 3SB - 3KV
Fillet (5) First side: min. diam. 1 15 - 20 [2.5] Macro-Fracture-Hardness
Second side: max. Fig 3
diam. Fig 4
(1) Abbreviations: TL = longitudinal tensile test; TT = transverse tensile test; RB = root bend test; FB = face bend test;
SB = side bend test; KV = Charpy V-notch impact test.
(2) When the approval is requested only for one or more specified welding positions, the butt test samples are to be welded in such
positions.
(3) If only one diameter is to be approved, only one test assembly is required.
(4) When the approval is requested in flat position only, two test samples are to be welded - the first sample with the maximum
wire diameter and the second with increasing diameter from the first to the last pass.
(5) Fillet weld samples are to be welded in the position required for approval.
7.6.2 Deposited metal test In general the chemical composition (C, Mn, Si) is deter-
Two deposited metal test assemblies are to be welded in the mined near the surface of the final pass and is to be
flat position as shown in Fig 1, one using a wire of 1,2mm reported for information.
or the smallest size to be approved and the other using a
7.6.3 Butt weld tests
wire of 2,4 mm or the largest size to be approved. If only
one diameter is available, one test assembly is sufficient. Butt weld test assemblies as shown in Fig 12 are to be
Any grade of hull structural steel may be used for the prepa- welded for each welding position (flat, horizontal, vertical
ration of the test assembly. upwards and downwards and overhead) for which the wire
gas combination is to be approved.
The preparation is to be in accordance with Fig 1; however,
One test sample is to welded in downhand position using,
the angle of the bevel and the gap at the root may be modi-
for the first run, a wire of 1,2 mm or the smallest diameter to
fied depending on the welding process.
be approved and, for the remaining runs, wires of the maxi-
The weld metal is to be deposited in multi-run layers accord- mum diameter to be approved.
ing to the normal practice (with wide beads extending for the
Where wires are intended for flat position only, one addi-
full width of the bevel), as far as this is correctly feasible,
tional test sample is to be welded, if possible using wires of
regardless of the diameter of the wire; the direction of deposi-
different diameters from those required above. Where only
tion of each layer is in general to alternate from each end of
one diameter is manufactured, only one downhand butt
the plate, each run of weld metal having thickness in the range
weld assembly is to be prepared.
2 mm to 6 mm (compenetration included). Between each run
the assembly is to be left in still air until it has cooled to less The other test assemblies are to be welded in the vertical
than 250°C but not below 100°C, the temperature being taken upwards, downwards, horizontal and overhead positions,
in the centre of the weld on the surface of the seam. After using for the first run a wire of 1,2 mm or the smallest diam-
being welded, the test assemblies are not to be subjected to eter to be approved, and for the remaining runs the largest
any heat treatment except where approval has also been diameter to be approved for the position concerned.
requested in the stress relieved condition. In such case the The grade of steel to be used for the preparation of the test
symbol D is to be added to the grade designation. assemblies is related to the grade of the electrodes as indi-
The specimens shown in Fig 1 are to be taken for the fol- cated in Tab 5.
lowing tests: For the wires or flux-cored wires to be approved under
grades 4 and 5, in lieu of the hull steels specified in Tab 5,
a) one longitudinal tensile test
C-Mn steels for pressure vessels of grades L40 and L60,
b) three Charpy V-notch impact tests. respectively, and strength appropriate to the electrode
The chemical analysis of the deposited weld metal in each test strength may be used.
assembly is to be supplied by the Manufacturer and is to The use of other types of steel is to be agreed with the Soci-
include the content of all significant alloying elements, if any. ety on a case-by-case basis.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 2
Figure 12 : Butt weld test assembly 7.6.4 Test requirements

150 150 The required results of tensile and impact tests on deposited
metal and butt weld tests are indicated in Tab 17.
eter equal to three times the thickness of the specimen; the
S.B.
results are to comply with the requirements in [1.5.3].
T.T. 7.6.5 Approval in the stress relieved condition
The requirements set forth in [2.3.5] apply.
F.B.
7.6.6 Tests for checking the hydrogen content
When the additional symbols HH (or H10) or HHH (or H5)
are required, the provisions under [2.4] apply.
R.B.
7.6.7 Fillet weld test assemblies
Fillet weld test assemblies are generally required in addition to
M. the butt weld test and are to be welded in each of the positions
applied for approval (horizontal-vertical, vertical, overhead).
KV. The requirements set forth in [2.5] apply, as appropriate.
S.B.
KV.
7.7.1 The annual tests are to include at least the following
assemblies and tests:
a) One deposited metal test assembly is to be welded in
spare
accordance with [7.6.2] with wire having diameter

~ 200
within the range approved, and the required tests (one
longitudinal tensile test and three Charpy V-notch
10
S.B.
impact tests) are to be conducted.
20
b) At the discretion of the Society, a butt weld test, to be

discard welded in vertical position, may also be required and
three side bend tests and three Charpy V-notch impact
tests are to be performed.
The welding is to be performed with the usual technique in c) For flux cored wire electrodes approved with symbol
compliance with requirements specified in [7.6.2] for the HH (or H10) or HHH (or H5), the hydrogen content
deposited metal test, as applicable. For all assemblies, the may be required to be checked with the same procedure
back sealing run is to be made with the same diameter of used in the approval tests.
wire or with the largest diameter of wire used for the weld
d) The chemical composition may be required to be
on the other side.
checked under conditions corresponding to those of the
After being welded, the test assemblies are not to be sub- approval tests.
jected to any heat treatment except where approval has also The weld and test procedures, the type of current, the mate-
been requested in the stress relieved condition. In such case rials, the test results and the re-test procedures, where appli-
the symbol D is to be added to the grade designation. cable, are regulated by the requirements relative to the
approval tests.
It is recommended and may be required that the welded
assemblies should be subjected to a radiographic examina-
tion to ascertain if there are any defects in the weld prior to
8 Wires and wire-gas combinations for
the preparation of test specimens. automatic welding of C and C-Mn
steels
lowing tests:
8.1 Scope
a) one transverse tensile test
8.1.1 General
b) three Charpy V-notch impact tests The requirements of this Article apply to bare wire-gas combi-
nations and flux cored or flux coated wires with or without
c) one face and one root bend tests. shielding gases to be used for automatic welding processes
Three additional side bend tests [1.5.4] may be required by with multi-run technique (M) and two-run technique (T).
the Surveyor to be carried out for samples welded in verti- As regards preliminary information and requirements not
cal, horizontal and overhead positions. expressly stated in this Article, reference may be made as far
as applicable to the corresponding requirements of Article [7].
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 2
Tensile test on butt Charpy V-notch impact test

Tensile test on deposited metal
weld Minimum average energy (J)
Grade
Yield stress ReH Tensile strength Elong. A5 Tensile strength Test temp. Flat, Horizontal,
Vertical
(N/mm2) min. Rm (N/mm2) (%) min. Rm (N/mm2) min. (°C) Overhead
1 305 400 - 560 22 400 + 20 47 34
2 0
3  20
4  40
1Y 375 490 - 660 22 490 + 20 47 34
2Y 0
3Y  20
4Y  40
5Y  60
2Y40 400 510 - 690 22 510 0 47 39
3Y40  20
4Y40  40
5Y40  60
8.2 Designation 8.3.3 Deposited metal test

One deposited metal test is to be welded as shown in Fig 7;
8.2.1 Wire gas combinations are divided, for the various The base metal, the preparation of the test assembly weld-
strength levels, into the following grades as defined in ing, the checks and the number of tests required are to be as
[1.2.2]: indicated in [5.2.3], except that the thickness of each layer
is to be not less than 3 mm.
a) 1, 2, 3, 4 for normal strength grades
The wire diameter, type of current and welding parameters
b) 1Y, 2Y, 3Y, 4Y, 5Y for high strength grades with specified are to be in accordance with the recommendation of the
minimum yield strength up to 355 N/mm2 Manufacturer.
c) 2Y40, 3Y40, 4Y40, 5Y40 for high strength grades with The results of the tests are to comply with the requirements
of Tab 18.
specified minimum yield strength up to 390 N/mm2.
The prefix A is added to indicate automatic welding tech- 8.3.4 Butt weld tests for multi-run technique
nique. One butt weld assembly is to be welded as shown in Fig 8
for each position to be approved; the base metal, the prepa-
8.3 Approval tests ration of the test assembly welding, the checks and the
number of test specimens required are to be as indicated in
[5.2.4].
8.3.1 General
The diameter of the wire, type of current and welding
Test samples for the approval are to be carried out using the parameters are to be in accordance with the recommenda-
welding technique for which approval is requested (multi- tion of the Manufacturer.
run M or two-run T technique).
In the case of the multi-run welding technique using wire of Tab 18.
diameters approved with the semiautomatic process, the
tests are not to be repeated with the automatic process. 8.3.5 Two-run technique
Where approval for use with the two-run technique only (T)
8.3.2 Multi-run technique is requested, two butt weld test assemblies are to be carried
Where approval for use with the multi-run technique (M) is out and no deposited metal test is requested.
requested, deposited weld metal and butt weld tests are to The indications in [5.2.5] generally apply if not modified
be carried out as indicated in [8.3.3] and [8.3.4], respec- below, except that one test assembly is to be 12-15 mm
tively. thick and the other is to be 20 mm thick.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 2
Longitudinal tensile test Transverse tensile test Charpy V-notch impact test
Grade Yield stress ReH Tensile strength Elong. A5 Tensile strength Rm Test temp. Minimum average
(N/mm2) min. Rm (N/mm2) (%) min. (N/mm2) min. (°C) energy (J)
1 305 400 - 560 22 400 + 20 34
2 0
3  20
2Y 375 490 - 660 22 490 0 34
3Y  20
4Y  40
5Y  60
2Y40 400 510 - 690 22 510 0 39
3Y40  20
4Y40  40
5Y40  60
The bevel preparation of the test assemblies is to be as bend tests) are to be performed. One longitudinal ten-
shown in Fig 13. Small deviations in the edge preparation sile test is also required when the wire is approved for
may be allowed according to the Manufacturer’s recom- the two-run technique only.
mendations. b) The chemical composition may be required to be
If approval is requested for welding plates thicker than checked under conditions corresponding to those of the
20 mm, one assembly is to be prepared with plates 20 mm approval tests.
thick and the other with the maximum thickness for which
8.4.3 Test requirements
the approval is requested. For assemblies using plates over
25 mm in thickness, the edge preparation used is to be The weld and test procedures, the type of current, the mate-
reported for information. rials, the test results and the re-test procedures, where appli-
cable, are regulated by the requirements relative to the
The base metal, checks and number of test specimens approval tests.
required are to be as indicated in [5.2.5].
For flux cored wire electrodes approved with symbol HH
The diameter of the wire, type of current and welding (or H10) or HHH (or H5), the hydrogen content may be
parameters are to be in accordance with the recommenda- required to be checked with the same procedure used in the
tion of the Manufacturer. approval tests.
Figure 13 : Recommended edge preparation
of Tab 18.
for two-run butt weld test assemblies
60˚
8.4.1 Multi-run technique

The annual tests are to include at least the following:
15
6
a) One deposited metal test assembly is to be welded in
12
accordance with [8.3.3] with wires having minimum or

maximum diameter, and the required tests (one longitu-
dinal tensile test and three Charpy-V notch impact tests)
60˚
are to be conducted.
b) The chemical composition may be required to be
checked under conditions corresponding to those of the
8
approval tests.
25
8.4.2 Two-run technique CL

20
The annual tests are to include at least the following:

a) One butt weld test assembly is to be welded in accor-
dance with [8.3.5] with wires having minimum or maxi-
mum diameter, and the required tests (one transverse
tensile test, three Charpy V-notch impact tests and two 60˚
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 2
9 Consumables for welding C and C-Mn c) type of shielding gas or gas mixture; commercial brand
and Manufacturer, in the case of gas mixtures of special
steels with electrogas or electroslag types
process
d) type of flux, consumable insert when used
9.1 Scope e) type of current, range of current for which the approval
is requested
9.1.1 General
f) main characteristics of the welding equipment
The requirements of this Article apply to wire gas combina-
tions and flux cored or flux coated wires for electrogas (EG) g) typical chemical composition of the deposited metal
and electroslag (ES) vertical welding with or without con- h) main operating characteristics and welding techniques,
sumable nozzles of hull structural steels, of the correspond- associated recommendations and limitations in general
ing grades of steel forgings and castings and of comparable and in particular as regards edge preparation and weld-
steels intended for other structural applications. ing parameters
9.1.2 Type of wires i) previous approvals already granted to the proposed con-
sumables.
The wires are to be of the type recommended by the Manu-
facturer, obtained from original packages and of known
chemical composition. 9.3 Approval tests
For electrogas processes, wires having the chemical compo-
9.3.1 Two butt weld test assemblies are to be prepared: one
sition specified in Tab 14 may be used. Other wires of dif-
with plates 20/25 mm thick, the other with plates 35/40 mm
ferent chemical composition are to be submitted for
thick or more.
consideration.
The grade of steel to be used for each of these assemblies is
9.1.3 Shielding gases to be selected according to the requirements given in Tab
11 for submerged arc welding.
The requirements specified in [7.3.1] apply.
The chemical composition of the plate, including the con-
9.1.4 Designation tent of grain refining elements, is to be reported.
The consumables are divided, for the various strength lev- The welding conditions and the edge preparation adopted
els, into the following grades as defined in [1.2.2]: are to be in accordance with the recommendation of the
Manufacturer and are to be reported.
a) 1, 2, 3 for normal strength grades
The Manufacturer’s maximum recommended gap between
b) 2Y, 3Y, 4Y for high strength grades with specified mini-
plates is to be used in making the test assemblies.
mum yield strength up to 355 N/mm2
It is recommended that the welded assemblies be subjected
c) 2Y40, 3Y40, 4Y40 for high strength grades with speci-
to radiographic and or ultrasonic examination to ascertain
fied minimum yield strength up to 390 N/mm2. the absence of defects prior to the preparation of test speci-
The prefix AV is added to the grade to indicate electrogas or mens.
electroslag welding technique.
For high strength grades, the approval may be restricted for lowing tests:
use with steels of specific composition. This applies, in par-
a) two longitudinal tensile tests
ticular, in relation to the content of grain refining elements,
and if general approval is required, a Niobium treated steel b) two transverse tensile tests
is to be used for approval tests.
c) two side bend tests
9.2 Information and documentation to be d) two sets of three Charpy V-notch impact tests with notch
submitted located as shown in Fig 15 (i.e. one set with the notch
located in the centre of the weld and one set with the
notch located at 2 mm from the fusion line in the weld
9.2.1 Information and documentation to be submitted
metal)
The following information and supporting documentation
are to be submitted together with the request for approval: e) two macro sections (in the middle of the sample and
towards the end) and, if required, Vickers hardness
a) commercial name, type of wire, limits of chemical com- checks.
position in the case of bare wires
The chemical analysis of the deposited weld metal is to be
b) type of process and grading under which the approval is supplied by the Manufacturer and is to include the content
requested of all significant alloying elements, if any.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 2
Figure 14 : Butt weld test assembly for electrogas and electroslag welding
Min. 250 Min. 250
Longitudinal tensile
test specimen
(centre of weld)
Transverse
tensile test
specimen
Side bend
test specimen Macrography
1 set of 3 Charpy-V
Min. 1500
test specimen
(centre of line)
1 set of 3 Charpy-V
test specimen
(2 mm from fusion line)
Transverse
tensile test
specimen
Longitudinal tensile
test specimen
Side bend (centre of weld)
test specimen
Macrography
Figure 15 : Position of Charpy V-notch out on this sample and the following test specimens are to
impact test specimens be taken:
a) one longitudinal tensile test specimen
2
2
b) one transverse tensile test specimen

25 to 30
c) two side bend test specimens

2 d) one set of three Charpy V-notch impact tests with the
notch in the weld at 2 mm from the fusion line
1. Notch in centre of weld 2. Notch 2 mm from the fusion line,
weld metal side e) one set of three Charpy V-notch impact tests with the
notch in the centre of the weld
f) one section for macrographic examination.
The chemical composition may be required to be checked
9.3.2 The results of tensile and impact tests on butt weld
under conditions corresponding to those of the approval
tests are to comply with the requirements specified in Tab
tests.
17, as appropriate.
The weld and test procedures, the type of current, the mate-
Side bend tests [1.5.4] are to be performed on a mandrel rials, the test results and the re-test procedures, where appli-
having a diameter equal to three times the thickness of the cable, are regulated by the requirements relative to the
specimen; the results are to comply with requirements in approval tests.
[1.5.3].
10 Consumables for welding extra high
The Vickers hardness values, when verification is required,
are to be HV  270. strength steels
10.1 Scope
10.1.1 General
9.4.1 The annual tests are to include at least a butt weld The requirements of this Article apply to consumables used
test assembly having thickness 20/25 mm. The non-destruc- for weldable extra high strength steels with minimum speci-
tive examinations required for the approval may be carried fied yield strength from 420 N/mm2 to 960 N/mm2.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 2
Unless otherwise stated in this Article, the requirements rel- 10.3 Test requirements
evant to the procedure, tests samples and welding condi-
tions are generally to be in accordance with those of the 10.3.1 The requirements specified under Articles [2], [5]
previous Articles relevant to the approval of consumables and [7] for electrodes, submerged arc fluxes and wires for
for welding carbon and carbon-manganese steels, as fol- continuous wire processes, respectively, are to be met.
lows:
For chemical composition, the limits in percentage speci-
• Article [2]: Covered electrodes for manual metal arc fied and guaranteed by the Manufacturer are to be satisfied.
welding
For mechanical properties, the requirements specified in
• Article [5]: Flux-wire combination for submerged arc Tab 19 are to be met.
welding
The results of the bend tests are to comply with the require-
• Article [7]: Wires and wire-gas combination for semi- ments in [1.5.3].
automatic welding processes employing continuous
wire Where the required bending angle is not achieved, the
specimen may be considered as fulfilling the requirements
• Article [8]: Wires and wire-gas combination for auto- if the bending elongation LO on a gauge length equal to LS+t
matic welding processes employing continuous wire. (LO being the width of the weld and t the specimen thick-
ness) fulfils the minimum elongation requirements specified
10.1.2 Designation for the deposited metal tensile test.
The designation is given by the appropriate grade as defined
in [1.2.2] with the relevant prefix and/or suffix. 10.4 Annual control tests
10.2 Approval tests 10.4.1 For the annual control tests, the samples and tests
for checking the mechanical properties are to be carried out
10.2.1 The same samples are required as for C and C-Mn as required for C and C-Mn steel welding consumables.
steel welding consumables approval. For consumables grades 3Y89, 4Y89, 3Y96 and 4Y96,
The deposited metal, the butt weld and the fillet weld test annual hydrogen test is required.
samples are to be prepared using high strength steel having
mechanical properties corresponding, as appropriate, to 11 Consumables for welding EH47 steel
those of the welding consumable to be approved. and crack arrest steel EH47CAS
However, at the request of the Manufacturer, the all depos-
ited metal samples may be allowed to be prepared using 11.1 Scope
any C or C-Mn steels, provided that the bevels are duly but-
tered with the welding consumable to be approved. 11.1.1 General
10.2.2 The checking of the chemical composition is to be The requirements of this Article apply to consumables used
carried out on shavings taken from the deposited material for weldable structural steels EH47 and EH47CAS.
samples. Unless otherwise stated in this Article, the requirements rele-
The checking of C, Mn, Si, S, P, Cr, Cu, Ni, Mo, N and of vant to the procedure, tests samples and welding conditions
other alloying elements stated by the Manufacturer is to be are generally to be in accordance with those of the previous
carried out on all the samples. Articles relevant to the approval of consumables for welding
carbon and carbon-manganese steels, as follows:
10.2.3 Welding consumables other than solid wire-gas com- • Article [2]: Covered electrodes for manual metal arc
binations are to be subjected to a hydrogen test in accor- welding of C and C-Mn steels.
dance with [2.4] or recognised standards, as applicable.
• Article [7]: Wires and wires-gas combination for semi-
The above consumables are to satisfy the hydrogen test automatic welding processes employing continuous
requirement at least for the symbol HH (or H10) or HHH (or wire
H5) for steels having specified yield strength levels, respec-
• Article [8]: Wires and wires-gas combinations for auto-
tively, not higher or higher than 500 N/mm2.
matic welding processes employing continuous wire
10.2.4 Unless special requests are made by the Manufac- • Article [9]: Consumables for welding C and C-Mn steels
turer, the samples are not to be post-weld heat treated. with electrogas or electroslag process.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 2
Tensile test on Bend ratio

Tensile test on deposited metal Charpy V-notch impact test
butt weld and angle
Grade
Yield stress ReH Tensile strength Elong. A5 Tensile strength Test temp. Minimum average D/ t (1)
(N/mm2) min. Rm (N/mm2) (%) min. Rm (N/mm2) min. (°C) energy (J)   120°
3 Y42 420 520 - 680 20 520  20 47 4
4  40
5  60
3 Y46 460 540 - 720 20 540  20 47 4
4  40
5  60
3 Y50 500 590 - 770 18 590  20 50 5
4  40
5  60
3 Y55 550 640 - 820 18 640  20 55 5
4  40
5  60
3 Y62 620 700 -890 18 700  20 62 5
4  40
5  60
3 Y69 690 770 - 940 17 770  20 69 5
4  40
5  60
3 Y89 890 940 - 1100 14 940  20 69 6
4  40
3 Y96 960 980 - 1150 13 980  20 69 7
4  40
(1) D = mandrel diameter, t = specimen thickness
11.1.2 Designation 11.2.3 Welding consumables other than solid wire-gas

The designation 3Y47 is given with the relevant prefix combination are to be subjected to a hydrogen test in accor-
and/or suffix. dance with [2.4] or recognised standards, as applicable.
The above consumables are to satisfy the hydrogen test

11.2 Approval tests requirement at least for the symbol HH (or H10) or HHH (or
H5).
11.2.1 The same samples are required as for C and C-Mn
steel welding consumables approval.
11.2.4 Unless special requests are made by the Manufac-
The deposited metal, the butt weld and the fillet weld test turer, the samples are not to be post-weld heat treated.
samples are to be prepared using high strength steel having
mechanical properties corresponding, as appropriate, to
those of the welding consumable to be approved. 11.3 Test requirements
ited metal samples may be allowed to be prepared using 11.3.1 The requirements specified under Articles [2], [7],
any C or C-Mn steels, provided that the bevels are duly but- [8] and [9] are to be met.
tered with the welding consumable to be approved.
For chemical composition, the limits in percentage speci-
11.2.2 The checking of the chemical composition is to be fied and guaranteed by the Manufacturer are to be satisfied.
carried out on shavings taken from the deposited material
For mechanical properties, the requirements specified in
samples.
Tab 20 are to be met.
The checking of C, Mn, Si, S, P, Cr, Cu, Ni, Mo, N and of
other alloying elements stated by the Manufacturer is to be The results of the bend tests are to comply with the require-
carried out on all the samples. ments in [1.5.3].
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 2
Tensile test Bend ratio

on butt weld and angle
Grade Tensile Tensile Minimum
Yield stress Elong. A5 Test Temp. D/ t
strength Rm strength Rm average
ReH (N/mm2) (%) min. (°C)   120°
(N/mm2) (N/mm2) min. energy (J)
3Y47 460 570 - 720 19 570 -20 53 4
11.4 Annual control tests 12.2.2 When the approval is required for two types of the
same consumable, one with normal C content and the other
11.4.1 For the annual control tests, the samples and tests with “low C” content, i.e. with C content not higher than
for checking the mechanical properties are to be carried out 0,05%, and if the Manufacturer certifies that the only differ-
as required for C and C-Mn steel welding consumables. ence is the C content, for the approval of “low C” welding
consumables the tests for checking the mechanical proper-
12 Consumables for welding Mo and ties of the deposited material and the chemical composition
only are to be carried out.
Cr-Mo steels
12.2.3 With the exception of those for the hydrogen con-
12.1 Scope tent checking, the test samples are to be welded in the pre-
heating condition and are to be post-weld heat treated, as
12.1.1 General
indicated in Tab 21, depending on the grade of the consum-
The requirements of this Article apply to consumables used
able.
for welding Mo and Cr-Mo steels.
Unless otherwise stated in this Article, the requirements rel- 12.2.4 In the case of covered electrodes for manual weld-
evant to the procedure, tests samples and welding condi- ing, the checking of the chemical composition is to be car-
tions are generally to be in accordance with those of the ried out, as a rule, on samples of deposited metal described
previous Articles relevant to the approval of consumables in [1.6].
for welding carbon and carbon-manganese steels, as fol-
lows: Two samples are required with two different electrode
• Article [2]: Covered electrodes for manual metal arc diameters.
welding In the case of other types of welding consumables, the
• Article [5]: Flux-wire combination for submerged arc checking is to be carried out on shavings taken from the
welding deposited metal samples.
• Article [7]: Wires and wire-gas combination for semiau-
tomatic welding processes employing continuous wire The checking of C, Cr and Mo contents is to be carried out
on all the samples and, additionally, the checking of Mn, Si,
• Article [8]: Wires and wire-gas combination for auto- Cu, Ni, S and P contents and that of other alloy elements is
matic welding processes employing continuous wire. to be carried out on one sample.
12.1.2 Designation
Consumables are divided into the following grades, desig- 12.2.5 Consumables may be submitted, at the Manufac-
nated by a symbol indicating the nominal percentage Mo turer’s request, to hydrogen tests and have the additional
and Cr content of the deposited weld metal, as follows: symbol H10 (or HH) or H5 (or HHH) added to the grade
designation according to the hydrogen content.
a) M for Mo = 0,5
b) C1M for Cr = 1,25 and Mo = 0,5 Table 21 : Pre- and post-weld heating
c) C2M1 for Cr = 2,25 and Mo = 1
The relevant prefix and/or suffix are to be added to the Consumable grade M C1M C2M1
grade. Preheating:
Temperature (°C)  100 - 150 200 - 280
12.2 Approval tests
Post-weld heat treatment:
12.2.1 The same samples as for the C and C-Mn steel weld- Temperature T (°C) 620  10 660  10 710 10
ing consumables approval are required.
Soaking time at T (minutes) 30 30 60
The butt weld and the fillet weld test samples are to be pre-
pared using the corresponding grade of Mo or Cr-Mo steels. Cooling rate down to 150 - 250 150 - 250 100 - 200
500°C (°C/h) in furnace (1)
Instead of the above-mentioned Mo and Cr-Mo steels, at the
request of the Manufacturer, grades 460 and 510 C-Mn (1) When 500°C is reached, the cooling may be continued
steels for boilers and pressure vessels may be used. either in the furnace or in still air.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 2
12.3 Test requirements Unless otherwise stated in this Article, the requirements rele-
vant to the procedure, tests samples and welding conditions
12.3.1 The requirements specified in Articles [2], [5], [7] are generally to be in accordance with those in the previous
and [8] for electrodes, submerged arc fluxes and wires for Articles relevant to the approval of consumables for welding
continuous wire processes, respectively, are to be met. carbon and carbon-manganese steels, as follows:
For mechanical properties, the requirements specified in • Article [2]: Covered electrodes for manual metal arc
Tab 22 are to be met. welding
As a rule, transverse tensile tests on the welded joint are not
• Article [5]: Flux-wire combination for submerged arc
required.
welding
12.3.2 For chemical composition, the limits in percentage • Article [7]: Wires and wire-gas combination for semi-
of chemical composition specified in Tab 23 are to be met. automatic welding processes employing continuous
wire
• Article [8]: Wires and wire-gas combination for auto-
Tensile test on deposited Bend ratio and matic welding processes employing continuous wire.
metal (1) angle (2)
Grade 13.1.2 Designation
Tensile strength Elong. A5 D/ t
Rm (N/mm2) (%) min.   120° Consumables are divided into the following grades desig-
nated by a symbol indicating the type of nickel steel for
M 490 - 640 20 3
which the consumables are intended, as follows:
C1M 490 - 690 20 3
a) N15 for steels with Ni = 1,30 - 1,70 (%)
C2M1 540 - 785 18 4
b) N35 for steels with Ni = 3,25 - 3,75 (%)
(1) The values of the minimum yield strength ReH and
reduction of area are also to be recorded, for informa- c) N50 for steels with Ni = 4,75 - 5,25 (%)
tion purposes. d) N90 for steels with Ni = 8,50 - 10 (%).
(2) D = mandrel diameter, t = specimen thickness.
The relevant prefix and/or suffix are to be added to the
grade.
12.4.1 For the annual control tests, in addition to the sam- 13.2 Approval tests
ples and tests for checking the mechanical properties, as
required for the consumables for welding C and C-Mn 13.2.1 The same samples as for the C and C-Mn steel weld-
steels, the samples for checking the chemical composition, ing consumables approval are required.
requested for the approval, are to be effected.
The butt weld and the fillet weld test samples are to be pre-
12.4.2 For the “low C” welding consumables described in pared using the corresponding grade of Ni steel.
[12.2.2], the control tests are limited to one sample of Instead of the above-mentioned Ni steel, at the request of
deposited metal [1.6] and to the checking of the chemical the Manufacturer, steels with lower Ni content but having
composition. suitable mechanical properties for the tests to be carried out
may be used. In such case, if deemed necessary by the
13 Consumables for welding Ni steels Manufacturer, the bevels may be duly buttered with the
for low temperature applications welding consumable to be approved.
In the case of use of plates with buttered bevels and where the
13.1 Scope mechanical properties of the welding consumable are signifi-
cantly lower than those of the base material, longitudinal
13.1.1 General instead of transverse specimens may be allowed to be taken
The requirements of this Article apply to consumables used for face and root bend tests. In this case the length of the sam-
for welding Ni steels for low temperature applications. ple is to be such as to allow the taking of these specimens.

Grade
C Cr Mo Mn Si max. S max. P max. Cu max. Ni max.
M 0,12 (1) 0,15 0,40 - 0,65
C1M 0,12 (1) 1,0 - 1,5 0,40 - 0,65 0,50 - 0,90 (2) 0,60 (2) 0,040 0,040 0,20 0,30
C2M1 0,10 (1) 2,0 -2,5 0,90 - 1,20
(1) In the case of electrodes to be certified as “low carbon“, the carbon content is not to exceed 0,05%.
(2) The actual values of Mn and Si contents, guaranteed by the Manufacturer, within the limits specified in the Table, are to be
stated at the time of the approval of single electrodes.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 2

butt weld and angle
Grade
Yield stress ReH Tensile strength Elong. A5 Tensile strength Test temp. Minimum average D / t (1)
(N/mm2) min. Rm (N/mm2) min. (%) min. Rm (N/mm2) min. (°C) energy (J)   120°
N 15 355 470 22 490  80 34 3
N 35 355 470 22 490  100 34 3
N 50 380 520 22 540  120 34 4
N 90 480 670 22 690  196 34 4
13.2.2 In the case of covered electrodes for manual weld- 14 Consumables for welding Cr-Ni
ing, the checking of the chemical composition is to be car-
austenitic and austenitic-ferritic
ried out, as a rule, on samples of deposited metal described
in [1.6]. stainless steels
Two samples are required with two different electrode
diameters. 14.1 Scope
In the case of other types of welding consumables, the 14.1.1 General
checking is to be carried out on shavings taken from the
deposited metal samples. The requirements of this Article apply to consumables used
for welding Cr-Ni austenitic and austenitic-ferritic stainless
The checking of C, Ni, Mn and Si contents is to be carried steels.
out on all the samples and, additionally, the checking of
Cu, Cr, S, P and other alloy elements is to be carried out on Unless otherwise stated in this Article, the requirements rele-
one sample. vant to the procedure, tests samples and welding conditions
are, in general, to be in accordance with those in the previ-
13.2.3 Consumables may be submitted, at the Manufac- ous Articles relevant to the approval of consumables for
turer’s request, to hydrogen tests and have the additional welding carbon and carbon-manganese steels, as follows:
symbol H10 (or HH) or H5 (or HHH) added to the grade • Article [2]: Covered electrodes for manual metal arc
designation according to the hydrogen content. welding
13.2.4 Unless special requests are made by the Manufac- • Article [5]: Flux-wire combination for submerged arc
turer, the samples are not to be post-weld heat treated. welding
• Article [7]: Wires and wire-gas combination for semi-
13.3 Tests requirements automatic welding processes employing continuous
wire
13.3.1 The requirements specified in Articles [2], [5], [7], • Article [8]: Wires and wire-gas combination for auto-
[8] for electrodes, submerged arc fluxes and wires for con- matic welding processes employing continuous wire.
tinuous wire processes, respectively, are to be met.
For mechanical properties, the requirements specified in 14.1.2 Designation
Tab 24 are to be met. Consumables intended for welding austenitic steels are
As a rule, transverse tensile tests on the welded joint are not divided into the following grades designated by a symbol
required. corresponding to the AWS designation of the weld metal, as
follows: 308, 308L, 316, 316L, 316LN, 317, 317L, 309,
13.3.2 For chemical composition, the limits in percentage 309L, 309Mo, 310, 310Mo, 347.
of chemical composition specified and guaranteed by the The additional symbol BT is added when the requirements
Manufacturer are to be met. on impact test energy are satisfied at the temperature of -
196°C.
13.4 Annual control tests Consumables intended for welding austenitic-ferritic steels
are designated by a symbol indicating the nominal percent-
13.4.1 For the annual control tests, in addition to the sam- age content of Cr and Ni in the deposited metal (e.g. 2205
ples and tests for checking the mechanical properties as means 22% Cr and 5% Ni).
required for the consumables for welding C and C-Mn
steels, the samples for checking the chemical composition, The relevant prefix and/or suffix are to be added to the
requested for the approval, are to be effected. grade.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 2
14.2 Approval tests The checking of C, Cr, Ni contents is to be carried out on all
the samples, in addition to Mo, Nb and N contents where
14.2.1 The same samples as for the C and C-Mn steel weld- such elements characterise the welding consumable being
ing consumables approval are required, with the exception tested. For only one of the diameters tested, the chemical
of samples for hydrogen content checking. analysis of the remaining elements listed in Tab 26 is also to
be carried out.
The all deposited metal, the butt weld and the fillet weld
test samples are to be prepared using the corresponding 14.2.4 For consumables for welding austenitic-ferritic
grade of stainless steel. steels, the ratio ferrite/austenite is also to be determined in
the all deposited material.
ited metal may be allowed to be prepared using C and C-
14.2.5 Corrosion tests according to ASTM A262 Practice E,
Mn steels, provided that the bevels are duly buttered with
ASTM G48 Method A or equivalent recognised standards
the welding consumable to be approved.
may be required, on a case-by-case basis, for austenitic and
duplex stainless steel consumables.
14.2.2 When the approval is required for two types of the
same welding consumable, one with normal C content and 14.2.6 Unless special requests are made by the Manufac-
one with “low C” content, for the approval of “low C” weld- turer, the samples are not to be post-weld heat treated.
ing consumables the tests for checking the mechanical
properties of the deposited material and the chemical com-
position only are to be carried out. 14.3 Test requirements
14.3.1 The requirements specified in Articles [2], [5], [7],

14.2.3 In the case of covered electrodes for manual weld-
[8] for electrodes, submerged arc fluxes and wires for con-
ing, the checking of the chemical composition is to be car-
tinuous wire processes, respectively, are to be met.
ried out, as a rule, on samples of deposited metal and
described in [1.6]. For mechanical properties, the requirements specified in
Tab 25 are to be met.
One sample is required for each electrode diameter to be
approved. For consumables intended for welding Cr-Ni austenitic
steels for which the approval is required with the additional
In the case of other types of welding consumables, the symbol BT, the requirements on adsorbed energy in the
checking is to be carried out on shavings taken from the impact test specified in the table are to be satisfied at the
deposited metal samples. temperature of 196°C.
Table 25 : Required mechanical properties

butt weld and angle
Grade
Yield stress Rp0,2 Tensile strength Elong. A5 Tensile strength Test temp. Minimum average D / t (1)
(N/mm2) min. Rm (N/mm2) min. (%) min. Rm (N/mm2) min. (°C) energy (J)   120°
Austenitic
308 290 540 25 515  20 (2) 27 3
308L 275 490 25 485
316 290 540 25 515
316L 275 490 25 485
316LN 290 540 25 515
317 290 540 25 515
317L 275 490 25 515
309 290 540 22 515
309L 275 490 22 515
309Mo 290 540 22 515
310 290 540 25 515
310Mo 290 540 25 515
347 290 540 25 515
Austenitic-ferritic
2205 480 680 25 680  20 27
(2) The impact test temperature is 20°C, except when the additional symbol BT is required, in which case the test is to be carried
out at 196°C.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 2

Grade
C Mn Cr Ni Mo Others
308  0,08 0,5 - 2,5 18 - 21 8 - 11  0,75
308L  0,04 0,5 - 2,5 18 - 21 8 - 11  0,75
316  0,08 0,5 - 2,5 17 - 20 11 - 14 2-3
316L  0,04 0,5 - 2,5 17 - 20 11 - 14 2-3
316LN  0,04 0,5 - 2,5 17 - 20 10 - 14 2-3 0,15 N 0,20
317  0,08 0,5 - 2,5 17 - 21 11 - 14 2,5 - 4
317L  0,04 0,5 - 2,5 17 - 21 11 - 14 2,5 - 4
309  0,15 0,5 - 2,5 22 - 26 11 - 15  0,75
309L  0,04 0,5 - 2,5 22 - 26 11 - 15  0,75
309Mo  0,12 0,5 - 2,5 22 - 26 11 - 15 2-3
310 0,08 - 0,20 1,0 - 2,5 25 - 28 20 - 22,5  0,75
310Mo  0,12 1,0 - 2,5 25 - 28 20 - 22 2-3
347  0,08 0,5 - 2,5 18 - 21 9 -11  0,75 8xC Nb+Ta 1
14.3.2 For chemical composition of welding consumables tions are generally to be in accordance with those in
intended for Cr-Ni austenitic steels, the limits in percentage Articles [7] and [8] relevant to the approval of consumables
specified in Tab 26 are to be satisfied. for welding with continuous wire process.
For chemical composition of welding consumables The welding consumables preferably to be used for the alu-
intended for austenitic-ferritic steels, the limits in percent- minium alloys concerned are divided into two categories,
age specified and guaranteed by the Manufacturer are to be as follows:
satisfied.
a) W = wire electrode and wire gas combination for metal-
arc inert gas welding (MIG), tungsten inert gas welding
14.4 Annual control tests (TIG) or plasma arc welding (PAW)
14.4.1 For the annual control tests, in addition to the sam- b) R = rod-gas combinations for tungsten inert gas welding
ples and tests for checking the mechanical properties as (TIG) or plasma arc welding (PAW).
required for the consumables for welding C and C-Mn Note 1: For aluminium welding consumables, there is no unique
steels, the samples for checking the chemical composition relationship between the products (wire electrode, wire or rod) and
are also to be effected. the welding process used (TIG, MIG, PAW). Therefore the wire
electrodes, wire or rods, in combination with the relevant shielding
gas, will be approved on the basis of the above products form W
14.4.2 For the “low C” welding consumables described in
and R and may be used, as appropriate, for one or more of the
[14.2.2], the control tests are limited to one sample of
above processes.
deposited metal and to the checking of the chemical com-
position.
15.1.2 Grading
The consumables are graded as specified in Tab 27 in
15 Consumables for welding aluminium accordance with the alloy type and strength level of the
alloys base materials used for the approval tests.
15.1.3 Shielding gases

15.1 Scope
For the purpose of the approval, the type of gas and mixture
15.1.1 General of gas are grouped as indicated in Tab 28.
The requirements of this Article apply to wire or rod-gas Unless otherwise required for specific applications, gas
combinations to be used for welding the Al-Mg and Al-Si mixtures in the same group are considered equivalent for
aluminium alloys specified in Ch 3, Sec 2. approval purposes.
Unless otherwise stated in this Article, the requirements rel- Special gases in terms of composition or purity are to be
evant to the procedure, tests samples and welding condi- designated with the group “S”.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 2
Table 27 : Consumable grades and base materials Figure 16 : Deposited weld metal test assembly
for the approval tests
30 15
Base material for the tests
Consumable Sampling position
quality grade Alloy designation
(symbol)
Numerical Chemical symbol Tack Weld
RA/ WA 5754 AlMg3
RB/ WB 5086 AlMg4
15.2.2 Butt weld test assembly
5083 AlMg4,5Mn0,7
Butt weld test assemblies, in the material specified in Tab
5383 AlMg4,5Mn0,9 29 and having thickness 10-12 mm, are to be prepared for
RC/ WC
5456 AlMg5 each welding position (downhand, horizontal, vertical-
upwards and overhead) for which the consumable is recom-
5059 
mended by the Manufacturer (see Fig 17); see also [15.2.3].
6005A AlSiMg(A) Subject to the agreement of the Society, consumables satis-
RD/ WD 6061 AlMg1SiCu fying the requirements for the downhand and vertical-
upwards position will also be considered as complying with
6082 AlSi1MgMn the requirements for the horizontal position.
Note 1: Approval on higher strength AlMg base materials
covers also the lower strength AlMg grades and their combi- 15.2.3 Additional butt weld test assembly
nation with AlSi grades. One additional test assembly, having 20-25 mm, is to be
welded in the downhand position (see Fig 18).
Table 28 : Composition of shielding gases 15.2.4 Post-weld condition
On completion of welding, the assemblies are to be
Gas composition in volume (%) (1) allowed to cool naturally to ambient temperature. Welded
Group symbol
Argon Helium test assemblies and test specimens are not to be subjected
to any heat treatment. Grade D assemblies are to be
I-1 100  allowed to artificially age for a minimum period of 72 hours
I-2  100 from the completion of the welding and a maximum of one
I-3 (2) Balance > 0 to 33 week, before testing is carried out.
I-4 (2) Balance > 33 to 66

I-5 (2) Balance > 66 to 95
15.3.1 It is recommended that the weld assemblies are sub-
S Special gas composition to be specified
jected to radiographic examination to ascertain if there are
(1) Gases of other chemical composition (mixed gases) any defects in the welds prior to the preparation of the test
may be considered as special gases and are to be cov- specimens.
ered by separate tests
(2) Gas mixture to be used for the tests is as follows: 15.3.2 The test specimens are to be taken from the welded
• Group I-3: approx. 15% He assemblies as shown in Fig 17 and Fig 18. For each assem-
• Group I-4: approx. 50% He bly they are to include:
• Group I-5: approx. 75% He • one specimen for macrographic examination
• two transverse tensile specimens
15.2 Approval tests • two face bend specimens, and
• two root bend specimens.
15.2.1 Deposited weld metal
The macro specimen is to be examined for defects such as
For the testing of the chemical composition of the deposited cracks, lack of fusion, cavities, inclusions and pores. Cracks,
weld metal, a test piece according to Fig 16 is to be pre- lack of fusion or incomplete penetration are not allowed.
pared. The size depends on the type of the welding con- The transverse tensile test results are to meet the require-
sumable (and on the process used) and is to give a sufficient ments stated in Tab 29.
amount of pure metal for chemical analysis. The base metal
The bend test parameters are stated in Tab 29. After bending,
is to be compatible with the weld metal in respect of chem-
no crack or other open defect exceeding 3 mm in length is
ical composition.
to be seen on the outer surface. Defects which may appear
The chemical analysis of the deposited weld metal is to be at the corners of a bend specimen are not to be considered.
supplied by the Manufacturer and is to include the content It is recommended that the bending test is performed with
of all the significant elements. The results of the analysis are the “wrap around bending method” instead of the “free
not to exceed the limit values specified in the standards or bend test” in order to obtain uniform bending of the speci-
by the Manufacturer. men (see Fig 19).
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 2
Figure 17 : Butt weld test assembly for positional welding
BR
BC
T
BR
0
BC 35
T
30
35
10-12
350
T = flat tensile test specimen; BC = face bend test specimen; BR = root bend test specimen; M = macrographic section
Note 1: Edge preparation is to be single V or double V with an angle of 70°.

Note 2: Back sealing runs are allowed in single V weld assemblies.
Note 3: In case of double V assembly, both sides are to be welded in the same welding positions.
Figure 18 : Additional butt weld test assembly in downhand position
BR
BC
T
BR
0
BC 35
T
30
35
20-25
350
T = flat tensile test specimen; BC = face bend test specimen; BR = root bend test specimen; M = macrographic section
Note 1: Edge preparation is to be single V with an angle of 70°.
Note 2: Back sealing runs are allowed.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 2
Table 29 : Requirements for the transverse tensile and bend tests
Base material Tensile strength Rm Bending angle (1)

Grade Former diameter
used for the test (N/mm2) min. °) min.
RA/ WA 5754 190 3t
RB/ WB 5086 240 6t
5083 275 6t
180
RC/ WC 5383 or 5456 290 6t
5059 330 6t
RD/ WD 6061, 6005A or 6082 170 6t
(1) During testing, the test specimen is not to reveal any one single flaw greater than 3 mm in any direction. Flaws appearing at the
corners of a test specimen is to be ignored in the evaluation unless there is evidence that they result from lack of fusion.
Figure 19 : Wrap around bend test 15.4 Annual control tests

15.4.1 For the annual control tests, the deposited weld met
al test assembly as per Fig 16 and the butt weld test assem-
bly as per Fig 17 are to be welded.
The tests required in [15.2.1] and [15.3] are to be per-
formed.
The fixed edge of the test specimen is to be clamped to avoid sliding.

The whole welded zone (weld and heat affected zone), in the case of
transverse bending, is to be entirely positioned in the bent zone.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 3
SECTION 3 APPROVAL OF OVER WELDABLE SHOP

PRIMERS
1 Scope 3.2 Filler metal
1.1 General 3.2.1 Approved filler metals are to be used.
1.1.1 Shop primers applied on plates and sections to be 3.2.2 Basic covered electrodes are to be used for manual
welded without being removed are to be approved by the metal arc welding.
Society in accordance with the procedure detailed in this
Section.
3.3 Type and dimension of test samples
1.1.2 The approval is limited to the following welding pro-
cesses: 3.3.1 Test samples consist of double fillet welded T-joints
• manual metal arc welding with covered electrode formed by plates of the following dimensions:
• flux-cored wire metal arc welding • 300 mm x 120 mm x 15 mm for manual welding and
• solid wire metal arc welding. semiautomatic bare wire and flux cored arc welding
with gas shielding
The acceptance of shop primers for use with welding pro-
cesses other than those above will be specially considered
in connection with the approval of the welding procedure 3.4 Number of samples required
at the user’s works.
3.4.1 Two samples for each process are to be welded:
2 Information and documentation to be
a) manual metal arc welding with covered electrode of
submitted
diameter 4 mm
2.1 General b) flux-cored wire metal arc welding with wire of diameter
1,2 mm
2.1.1 The application for approval is to be submitted to the
Society by the shop primer Manufacturer or authorised sup- c) solid wire metal arc welding with wire of diameter
plier. 1,2 mm.
2.1.2 The following information and supporting documen-

tation, as applicable, are to be submitted: 3.5 Preparation of test samples
• type designation, product name
3.5.1 The shop primer is to be applied in compliance with
• product description including components of the the manufacturer’s specifications.
primer, type of diluent and mixture ratio
• product specification, data sheet giving characteristics The shop primer thickness (measure made on dry coat) of
of the shop primer and application instruction (surface the test samples is to be at least 30% greater than the maxi-
preparation, method of application, drying time, recom- mum foreseen in normal use.
mended dry coat thicknesses, etc.)
• documentation relevant to previous tests and approvals. 3.5.2 The pieces are to be tack welded such as to form a T
with adherent contact between the surfaces, without gap.
• welding procedure specifications used
• approval test results (see [3]). For each test a), b) and c) described in [3.4.1], one sample is
to be welded in horizontal-vertical position (PB), and the
other in vertical upwards position (PF), using electrodes of
3 Approval tests diameter 4 mm and wire of diameter 1,2 mm. Welding is to
be made in accordance with Welding Procedure Specifica-
3.1 Base material tion (WPS).
3.1.1 Normal strength hull steels or equivalent grades are The fillet weld is to be deposited in one bead having dimen-
to be used for the test samples. sions not exceeding 7 mm x 7 mm as shown in Fig 1.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 3
Figure 1 : Typical T welded sample Possible defects located within 10 mm from the ends of the
weld are disregarded.
Lack of penetration having total length not exceeding 1/4 of
the weld length is accepted.
Wormholes and pores having diameter not exceeding 3mm
A are generally acceptable where the total area of porosity is
not higher than 5% of the fracture section area.
B
A 3.7 Re-tests
3.7.1 Where tests on one sample fails, re-tests on two sam-
ples for the same welding process are admitted.
Both test samples are to provide satisfactory results. Failing
this, the shop primer is not approved.
4 Certification and validity

7 mm
4.1 Certification
A : Surfaces coated with the shop primer
B : Weld bead
4.1.1 Subject to the satisfactory outcome of the required
checks and tests, the Society will issue to the Manufacturer
or supplier concerned the approval certificate for the shop
3.6 Test requirements primer.
3.6.1 The test sample is to be fractured by suitable means
in order to locate the fracture in the throat of the fillet weld. 4.2 Validity
3.6.2 Visual examination is to be carried out consisting of 4.2.1 The approval certificate has five-year validity. For
checking the external and fractured surface to determine another five-year period, renewal survey is to be carried out
weld penetration and presence of worm-holes, pores and by the Society. The manufacturer has to declare that no
other defects. changes have been made to the production.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 4
SECTION 4 APPROVAL OF WELDING PROCEDURES
1 General 1.2.3 Preliminary welding procedure specification

A welding procedure specification is to be prepared by the
1.1 Scope Manufacturer or Shipyard which intends to perform the
qualification tests. This document is also referred to as a
1.1.1 General preliminary welding procedure specification (pWPS) and is
This Section specifies in Articles [2], [6], [7] and [8] the to be submitted to the Society for review prior to the tests.
requirements for the approval of arc welding procedures for
This pWPS may be modified and amended during the pro-
steel materials, in Article [9] those for aluminium alloys and
cedure tests as deemed necessary however it shall define all
in Article [10] those for copper alloys.
relevant variables as mentioned in the welding procedure
The requirements relevant to materials not covered herein specification, see [1.2.4].
are agreed on a case-by-case basis following, as far as
applicable, the criteria specified in this Section. In case that the test pieces welded according to the pWPS
show unacceptable results the pWPS shall be adjusted by
1.1.2 Other standards and specifications the Shipyard or Manufacturer. The new pWPS shall be pre-
Procedures considered equivalent by the Society may be pared and the test pieces welded in accordance with the
accepted. new pWPS.
1.1.3 Special requirements In general, the qualification tests shall reflect fabrication
In the case of applications involving the storage and trans- conditions in respect to welding equipment, inside or out-
port of liquefied gases, the appropriate requirements of the side fabrication, weld preparation, preheating and any post-
Society’s Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships also weld heat treatment. It shall be the manufacturer’s responsi-
apply. bility to establish and document whether a procedure is
suitable for the particular application.
1.2 Welding procedure The test pieces are to be chosen so as to cover all the pro-
duction welds in accordance with the approval range of
1.2.1 Welding processes parameters given in [2.6], [9.5] and [10.3].
Qualification tests are, as a rule, required for the manual or
semiautomatic or automatic processes indicated below 1.2.4 Approval of welding procedure specification
together with their relevant numbering according to ISO
The qualification tests when required, welding of test pieces
4063:
according to the proposed pWPS and testing of test speci-
• Manual metal arc welding: 111 mens, are to be witnessed by the Surveyor.
• Submerged Arc Welding with wire electrode (SAW): 12
Upon satisfactory completion of the tests, the Society may
• Flux-Cored wire metal Arc Welding without gas shield
approve the pWPS as a welding procedure specification.
(FCAW): 114
• Metal arc Inert Gas welding (MIG welding): 131 In its final version, the welding procedure specification
• Metal arc Active Gas welding (MAG welding): 135 (WPS) is to include all the parameters characterising the
welding process; in particular, as applicable:
• Flux-Cored wire metal Arc Welding with active gas
shied: 136 a) type of welding process and equipment, as appropriate
• Flux-Cored wire metal Arc Welding with inert gas
b) type of joint, preparation and backing material, if any
shield: 132
• Tungsten Inert Gas arc welding (TIG welding): 141 c) base metal and thickness range
• Plasma Arc Welding (PAW): 15. d) filler metal
1.2.2 Welding consumables e) welding position
Consumables approved in accordance with the require- f) minimum preheat, minimum and maximum interpass
ments of Sec 2 are to be used within the limits of their temperature
approval.
When non-approved welding consumables are used, the g) post-weld heat treatment if applicable
requirements relevant to the qualification of the welding h) shielding gas as applicable
procedures are established on a case-by-case basis and tests
on a deposited metal sample are required. i) welding parameters
Requirements relevant to the grade of welding consumables j) other information relevant to the welding techniques as
to be used are given in the relevant Society’s Rules. applicable.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 4
The actual parameters used for welding the approval test In the case of steel plates impact tested in the longitudinal
pieces and the results of the inspections and tests carried direction (CVN-L), the butt weld of the test piece is perpen-
out are to be recorded in the welding procedure qualifica- dicular to the rolling direction of the two plates.
tion record (WPQR) also referred to as welding procedure
approval record (WPAR). In the case of steel plates impact tested in the transversal
direction (CVN-T), the butt weld of the test piece is parallel
The WPQR is generally prepared by the shipyard or welding to the rolling direction of the two plates.
shops and endorsed by the attending Surveyor.
2.1.2 Examinations and tests
1.2.5 Inspections Non-destructive examinations and destructive tests required
Inspections and control tests may be periodically and ran- according to Tab 1 are to be carried out, while the location
domly required as deemed necessary by the Society and are of the test specimens is to be in accordance with Fig 2.
to yield satisfactory results in order to maintain the validity
of the approval. 2.1.3 Non-destructive examinations
The results of any suitable control performed during pro- Non-destructive examinations are to be carried out after
duction may be accepted, to the Surveyor’s satisfaction. any required or specified post-weld heat treatment and
prior to the cutting of test specimens.
1.2.6 Responsibilities of the users Imperfections detected by visual or non-destructive testing
The qualification tests are intended to verify that a manufac- shall be assessed in accordance with ISO 5817 class B,
turer is adequately qualified to perform welding operations except for the following imperfections for which the level C
applies:
using a particular procedure.
• excess weld metal or convexity,
Irrespective of the inspections carried out by the Surveyor,
the user is responsible for the use of the approved proce- • excess throat thickness, and
dures, within the limits of the range qualified and the condi-
• excess of penetration.
tions stated at the time of the approval.
Compliance with the above is essential for the validity of 2.1.4 Transverse tensile tests
the approval. Specimens for transverse tensile tests are to be in accor-
dance with Ch 1, Sec 2, [2.1.11].
2 Welding procedure qualification The tensile strength recorded for each specimen is to be not
tests for C and C-Mn steels for ship less than the minimum required for the parent metal; the
hull and other welded structures in location of the fracture is to be reported.
general When butt welds are made between plates of different
grades, the tensile strength to be obtained on the welded
assembly is to be in accordance with the requirement of the
2.1 Plates butt weld with full penetration grade having lower strength.
2.1.1 Assembly of test pieces

Figure 1 : Test assembly for plate butt weld
Preparation and welding are to be in accordance with the

pWPS and under the general condition of production weld-
ing which it represents.

If tack welds and / or start and stop points are a condition of

the weld process they are to be fused into the joint and are

to be included in the test pieces.

The test assembly is to be of a size sufficient to ensure a rea-

sonable heat distribution and is to have the minimum fol-

lowing dimensions (see Fig 1):

a) manual or semiautomatic welding:

length L = 6 t, minimum 350 mm

width W with W/2 = 3 t, minimum 150 mm.
b) automatic welding:

length L  1000 mm

width W with W/2 = 4 t, minimum 200 mm.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 4
Figure 2 : Location of test specimens
50
Discard
T1 Transverse tensile test
P1 Face bend test

or 2 side bend test
P2 Root bend test
Longitundinal tensile test
M Macro examination & Hardness test

P3 Face bend test

or 2 side bend test
P4 Root bend test
T2 Transverse tensile test

50
Discard
Thickness
Weld
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 4
Table 1 : Examinations and tests 2.1.7 Impact tests

Dimensions and testing of Charpy V-notch impact test spec-
Type of examination or test Extent of examination or test imens are to be in accordance with Ch 1, Sec 2.
Visual examination 100% Charpy V-notch impact test specimens in accordance with
Surface crack detection (1) 100%
Ch 1, Sec 2 are to be sampled from 1 to 2 mm below the
surface of the parent material, transverse to the weld and on
Radiographic or ultrasonic 100% the side containing the last run.
examination
The Charpy V-notch specimens are located in the butt-welded
Transverse tensile test 2 specimens
joint as indicated in Fig 3, Fig 4, Fig 5 and Fig 6, and the V-
Transverse bend tests (2) 2 root and 2 face specimens notch is to be cut perpendicular to the surface of the weld.
Charpy V-notch impact tests (3) 3 sets The test temperature and absorbed energy are to be in
Macro examination on 1 section accordance with Tab 2.
Hardness test (4) on 1 section When butt welds are made between different steel grades /
Longitudinal tensile test (5) 1 specimen types, the test specimens are to be taken from the side of the
(1) Dye penetrant according to ISO 3452 (or equivalent joint with steel of lower toughness level. Temperature and
accepted standard) or magnetic particle testing; for absorbed energy results are to be in accordance with the min-
non-magnetic materials, dye penetrant only. imum value required for the steel of lower toughness level.
(2) For t  12 mm, the face and root bends are preferably to Where more than one welding process or consumable has
be replaced by 4 side bends.
been used to make the test weld, impact test specimens are
(3) 3 sets each of 3 specimens as per [2.1.7].
to be removed from the respective areas where each was
(4) Only required for high strength steels with minimum
specified yield strength equal to or greater than employed. This should not apply to the process or consum-
355 N/mm2. ables used solely to make the first weld run or root deposit.
(5) Required only when the use of non-approved filler When cast or forged material with specified impact values
metal has been accepted (see [1.2.2]). is to be welded, test temperature and absorbed energy are
to be in accordance with the requirements of the base mate-
2.1.5 Tensile tests on cylindrical specimens
rial.
When required (see Tab 1), a round tensile specimen is to
be cut along the weld axis to the dimension given in Ch 1, Unless otherwise agreed with the Society, the test tempera-
Sec 2, Fig 3, in the all weld metal. ture and absorbed energy of steels not covered by these
requirements are to be in accordance with the specification
Where the size of the deposited metal is too small, a 6 mm of the parent metal.
diameter specimen may be taken or a deposited weld metal
test is to be carried out in accordance with the requirements
of Sec 2. 2.1.8 Macro examinations
The tensile properties recorded (yield stress ReH, tensile The test specimens are to be prepared and etched on one
strength Rm and elongation A5) are to be not less than the side to clearly reveal the weld metal, fusion line, the heat
minimum required for the approval of the appropriate grade affected zone (HAZ) and about 10mm of unaffected parent
of consumables. metal.
When more than one welding process or type of consum- The examination shall reveal a regular weld profile, through
able has been used to make the test weld, test specimens fusion between adjacent layers of weld and base metal and
are to be removed from the area of the weld where each the absence of defects such as cracks, lack of fusion etc.
was used with the exception of those processes or consum- 2.1.9 Hardness tests
ables used to make the first weld run or root deposit.
Hardness testing is required for steels with minimum speci-
2.1.6 Bend tests fied yield strength equal to or greater than 355N/mm2.
Transverse root bend, face bend and side bend specimens Unless otherwise agreed, the Vickers method HV10 is to be
are to be machined to the dimensions given in Ch 1, Sec 2, used.
[3.1]. The indentations are to be made in the weld, heat affected
For dissimilar or heterogeneous butt-joints, one longitudinal zones, and the parent metals measuring and recording the
bend test may be used instead of transverse bend tests. hardness values. Two rows of indentations are to be carried
out in accordance with Fig 7.
The test specimens are to be bent on a mandrel having a
diameter equal to 4 times the thickness of the specimen; the For each row of indentations, there is to be a minimum of
bending angle is to be 180°. 3 individual indentations in the weld, the heat affected
zones (both sides) and the parent metals (both sides).
After testing, the test specimens are not to reveal any open
defect, in any direction, greater than 3 mm. Defects appear- The distance between the indentations may vary from 0,5 to
ing at the corners of the test specimen during testing are to 2 mm depending on the zone tested.
be investigated case-by-case. Typical example of hardness indentations are given in Fig 7.
When butt welds are made between plates of different The results of hardness tests are not to exceed 350 HV for
grades, face and root longitudinal bend test specimens may steels with a specified minimum yield strength less than or
be used instead of the transverse bend test specimens. equal to 420 N/mm2.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 4
Table 2 : Impact test requirements for butt joints (t  50 mm)
Value of minimum average absorbed energy (J) (1)

Testing temperature For manually or semi-automatically welded joints
Grade of steel For automatically
(°C) Downhand, Horizontal, Vertical upward, welded joints
Overhead Vertical downward
A (2) 20
B (2), D 0
E 20
34 34
AH32, AH36 20
DH32, DH36 0
EH32, EH36 20 47
FH32, FH36 40
AH40 20
DH40 0 39 39
EH40 20
FH40 40
(1) For thickness above 50 mm, impact test requirements are to be agreed by the Society.
(2) For grade A and grade B steels, average absorbed energy in fusion line and heat affected zone is to be minimum 27 J.
Figure 3 : Location of V-notch for normal heat input  50 kJ/cm (t  50 mm)

t < 50 mm (1)
a b c a b c
1-2 mm 1-2 mm
2nd side
1st side
Note 1: For one side pass welding over 20 mm, is to be added on root side 3KV with notch located on (a).
3KV with notch located on:
a : Centre of weld “WM”
b : On fusion line “FL”
c : In HAZ, 2 mm from fusion line
Figure 4 : Location of V-notch for normal heat input  50 kJ/cm (t > 50 mm)
t > 50 mm
a b c a b c
1-2 mm 1-2 mm 2nd side
a b 1st side
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 4
Figure 5 : Location of V-notch for high heat input  50 kJ/cm (t  50 mm)

t < 50 mm (1)
a b c d e a bc d e
1-2 mm 1-2 mm
2nd side
1st side
Note 1: For one side pass welding over 20 mm, is to be added on root side 3KV with notch located on (a), (b) and (c).
d : In HAZ, 5 mm from fusion line
e : In HAZ, 10 mm from fusion line in case of heat input > 200 kJ/cm
Figure 6 : Location of V-notch for high heat input  50 kJ/cm (t > 50 mm)
t > 50 mm
a b c d e a b c d e
1-2 mm 1-2 mm 2nd side
a c
a b c 1st side

d : In HAZ, 5 mm from fusion line
e : In HAZ, 10 mm from fusion line in case of heat input > 200 kJ/cm
2.2 T butt joints in plates If tack welds are a condition of the weld process, they are to
be fused into the joint and are to be included in the test
2.2.1 General pieces.
Where this type of joints is predominant in production, The test assembly is to be of a size sufficient to ensure a rea-
qualification tests are to be performed on T butt joint assem- sonable heat distribution and is to have the minimum fol-
bly in addition to the equivalent qualification on butt joint. lowing dimensions (reference can be made to Fig 9):
The same principle applies when changes occur in the a) manual or semiautomatic welding:
geometry of the bevel which may significantly affect the
length L = 6 t, min. 350 mm
penetration or fusion.
width W = 3 t, min. 150 mm
2.2.2 Assembly and welding
length L = min. 1000 mm
ing which it represents. width W = 3 t, min. 150 mm.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 4
Figure 7 : Examples of hardness indentations The results of hardness tests are not to exceed 350 HV for
steels with a specified minimum yield strength less than or
2 mm
equal to 420 N/mm².
max
2 mm
max
Table 3 : Examinations and tests
t
t
for T butt joints in plates

t ≤ 5 mm t > 5 mm
Type of examination or test Extent of examination or test
2 mm
max
Visual examination 100%

Ultrasonic examination (4) 100%
Macro examination on 1 section
Hardness test (2) on 1 section
2 mm
max
Longitudinal tensile test (3) 1 specimen

(1) Dye penetrant according to ISO 3452 (or equivalent
accepted standard) or magnetic particle testing; for
non-magnetic materials, dye penetrant only.
(2) Only required for high strength steels with minimum
2 mm
max
specified yield strength equal to or greater than

Parent metal Weld Parent metal 355 N/mm².
(3) Required for thickness above 50 mm or when the use of
HAZ narrow HAZ wide non-approved filler metal has been accepted (see [1.2.2]).
(4) Applicable to full penetration weld or to verify the
extent of penetration in partial penetration welds
Non-destructive examinations and destructive tests are 2.3 Plates fillet weld
required according to Tab 3; a discard of 50 mm from both
edges is permitted. 2.3.1 Assembly and welding
2.2.4 Non-destructive examination pWPS and under the general condition of production weld-
Reference is made to [2.1.3].
If tack welds are a condition of the weld process they are to
2.2.5 Tensile tests on cylindrical specimens be fused into the joint and are to be included in the test
pieces.
The test assembly is welded on one side only. For single
pass manual and semi-automatic welding, a stop/restart is
2.2.6 Macro examination to be included in the test length and its position is to be
Reference is made to [2.1.8]. clearly marked for subsequent examination.
The test assembly is to be of a size sufficient to ensure a rea-
2.2.7 Hardness test sonable heat distribution and is to have the minimum fol-
lowing dimensions (see Fig 9):
fied yield strength equal to or greater than 355 N/mm². a) manual or semiautomatic welding:
Unless otherwise agreed, the Vickers method HV10 is to be length L = 6 t, minimum 350 mm
used.
width W = 3 t, minimum 150 mm
The indentations are to be made in the weld, heat affected
zones, and the parent metals measuring and recording the
hardness values. length L  1000 mm
Rows of indentations are to be carried out in accordance width W = 3 t, minimum 150 mm.
with Fig 8.
For each row of indentations, there is to be a minimum of 3 Non-destructive examinations and destructive tests required
individual indentations in the weld, the heat affected zones according to Tab 4; a discard of 50 mm from both edges is
(both sides) and the parent metals (both sides). permitted.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 4
Figure 8 : Hardness indentations
H≤2
H≤2
H ≤ 0,5

Heat affected zone
H ≤ 0,5 2

H≤
H ≤ 0,5

H ≤ 0,5
H≤2

with H, dimension in mm.
Figure 9 : T fillet joint on plates Table 4 : Examinations and tests

Weld one side or both
sides and fit-up as detailed
in the preliminary Welding Type of examination or test Extent of examination or test
t2 Procedure Specification
Visual examination 100%
W

Macro examination (2) 2 sections
W
t1 Hardness test (3) on 1section
Fracture test 1 test
(1) Dye penetrant according to ISO 3452 (or equivalent
accepted standard) or magnetic particle testing; for
non-magnetic materials, dye penetrant only.
(2) One of the macro sections is to be taken at the position
of the stop/restart; see [2.3.1].
(3) Only required for high strength steels having:
L
ReH  355 N/mm2
2.3.4 Macro examination
The test specimen is to be prepared and etched on one side

W to clearly reveal the weld metal, fusion line, root penetra-
tion, the heat affected zone and about 10mm of unaffected
base material.
2.3.3 Visual examination and surface crack
detection The examination shall reveal a regular weld profile, through
Non-destructive examinations are to be carried out after fusion between adjacent layers of weld and base metal and
any required or specified post-weld heat treatment and the absence of defects such as cracks, lack of fusion etc.
prior to the cutting of test specimens.
Imperfections detected are to be assessed in accordance The dimensions of leg size, throat and penetration are to be
with [2.1.3]. reported.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 4
2.3.5 Fracture test 2.4.3 Results

The fracture test is to be performed by folding the upright The results are to comply with the requirements for plate
plate onto the through plate. Evaluation is to be concen- butt weld in [2.1].
trated on cracks, porosity and pores, inclusions, lack of
fusion and incomplete penetration. Imperfections that are Figure 10 : Macro and hardness indentations
detected shall be assessed in accordance with ISO 5817
Class B.
2.3.6 Hardness test h≤2

fied yield strength equal to or greater than 355N/mm2.
Unless otherwise agreed, the Vickers method HV10 is to be
used.
h
≤

0,
The indentations are to be made in the weld, heat affected

h ≤ 0,5
zones, and the parent metals measuring and recording the
2
≤
h
hardness values. Two rows of indentations are to be carried
out in accordance with Fig 10.
h≤2

2
≤
h
For each row of indentations, there is to be a minimum of 3
individual indentations in the weld, the heat affected zones
(both sides) and the parent metals (both sides).

The results of hardness tests are not to exceed 350 HV for
steels with a specified minimum yield strength less than or
equal to 420 N/mm2.

Figure 11 : Pipe weld test assembly
Edge preparation and fit-up as detailed
in the preliminary Welding Procedure Specification
If tack welds are a condition of the weld process they are to be
fused into the joint and are to be included in the test pieces.
D
The test assembly is to be in accordance with Fig 11.

Non-destructive examinations and destructive tests required W W
according to Tab 1. The location of the test specimens is to
be in accordance with Fig 12. W = 150 mm minimum; D = outside diameter

Area A for :
Top for fixed pipe - 1 macro test specimen,
- 1 tensile specimen,
- 1 root and 1 face or
2 side bend specimens.
Area B for :
- impact and longitudinal tensile
test specimens if required
Area C for :
Area D for :
- 1 macro test specimen,
- 1 hardness test specimen.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 4
2.5 Re-testing 2.6.2 Parent metal

For hull structural steel grades A to FH40 as defined in Ch
2.5.1 If the test piece fails to comply with any of the 2, Sec 1, [2], the following applies:
requirements for visual or non-destructive testing, one fur-
a) For each strength level, welding procedures are consid-
ther test piece is to be welded and subjected to the same ered applicable to the same and lower toughness grades
examination. as that tested;
If this additional test piece does not comply with the rele- b) For each toughness grade, welding procedures are con-
vant requirements, the pWPS is to be regarded as not capa- sidered applicable to the same and two lower strength
ble of complying with the requirements without levels as that tested;
modification. c) For applying the above a) and b) to high heat input pro-
cesses above 50kJ/cm, e.g. the two-run technique with
2.5.2 If any test specimens fails to comply with the relevant either submerged arc or gas shielded metal arc welding,
requirements for destructive testing due to weld imperfec- electroslag and electrogas welding, welding procedure
is applicable that toughness grade tested and one
tion only, two further test specimens shall be obtained for
strength level below.
each one that failed. These specimens can be taken from
the same test piece if there is sufficient material available or Where steels used for construction are supplied from differ-
ent delivery conditions from those tested, the Society may
from a new test piece, and is to be subjected to the same
require additional tests.
test. If either of these additional test specimens does not
comply with the relevant requirements, the pWPS is to be For weldable C and C-Mn hull steel forgings as defined in
regarded as not capable of complying with the require- Ch 2, Sec 3, [2], the following applies:
ments without modification. a) Welding procedures are considered applicable to the
same and lower strength level as that tested;
2.5.3 If a tensile test specimen fails to meet the require- b) Qualification tests on quenched and tempered hull
ments, the re-testing is to be in accordance with Ch 1, Sec structural steel forgings do not qualify other delivery
2, [2.3]. condition and vice-versa.
For weldable C and C-Mn hull steel castings as defined in
2.5.4 If there is a single hardness value above the maxi- Ch 2, Sec 4, [2], the following applies:
mum values allowed, additional hardness tests shall be car-
a) Welding procedures are considered applicable to the
ried out (on the reverse of the specimen or after sufficient
same and lower strength level as that tested;
grinding of the tested surface). None of the additional hard-
ness values is to exceed the maximum hardness values b) Qualification tests on quenched and tempered hull
required. structural steel castings do not qualify other delivery
condition and vice-versa.
2.5.5 The re-testing of Charpy V-notch impact test speci-
2.6.3 Thickness
mens are to be carried out in accordance with Ch 1, Sec 2,
The qualification of a WPS carried out on a welded assembly
[4.4].
of thickness t is valid for the thickness range given in Tab 5.
2.5.6 Where there is not sufficient material remaining in In addition to the requirements of Tab 5, the range of
the test piece to provide the additional test specimens, a fur- approval for fillet welds shall be as follows:
ther assembly shall be welded using the same procedure to a) Single pass fillet welds; for throat thickness a, the range
provide the additional specimens. of approval is “0,75 a” to “1,5 a”
b) Multipass fillet welds; for throat thickness a, the range of
2.6 Range of approval approval is as for multipass butt welds (i.e. a = t).
For the vertical-down welding, the test piece thickness t is
2.6.1 General always taken as the upper limit of the range of application.
The approval of a WPS obtained by a yard or Manufacturer For unequal plate thickness of butt welds the lesser thick-
is valid for welding in workshops under the same technical ness is the ruling dimension.
and quality management, to the Society’s satisfaction. Notwithstanding the above, the approval of maximum base
material thickness for any technique is restricted to the test
The welding procedure is to be used within the range of the
assembly thickness if three of the hardness values in the
parameters indicated below; changes outside the range heat affected zone are found to be within 25 HV of the
specified of one or more of these parameters require a new maximum permitted, as stated in [2.1.9], in [2.2.7] and
qualification test. [2.3.6].
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 4
Table 5 : Approved thickness range For the manual metal arc welding process (111) and semi-
automatic welding process with flux cored wire without
Range of approval shielding gas (114), the approval obtained is valid for the
diameter of the electrode used in the welding procedure
Thickness t Butt and T-joint Butt and T-joint test plus or minus one electrode diameter size for each run,
of test piece welds with single welds with multi-run
(mm) (1)
except for the root run of the one side welded assembly
run or single run and
without backing strip, for which no size change is allowed.
from both sides fillet welds (2)
3 < t  12 0,7 t to 1,1 t 3 mm to 2 t For the gas metal arc welding processes (131, 135, 136), the
approval obtained for face and/or back shielding gas is
12 < t  100 0,7 t to 1,1 t (3) 0,5 t to 2 t (max.150) restricted to the type of gas (nominal composition) used
(1) For multi process procedures, the recorded thickness during the procedure test. The approval is restricted to the
contribution of each process is to be used as a basis for wire system used in the approval test (e.g. single wire or
the range of approval for the individual welding pro- multi-wire) and, in the case of automatic welding, to the rel-
cess. evant welding technique.
(2) For fillet welds, the range of approval is to be applied to
For the submerged arc processes (12), the approval
both parent materials.
obtained is restricted to the wire system used in the
(3) For high heat input process over 50 kJ/cm, the upper
approval test (e.g. single wire or multi-wire) and relevant
limit of range of approval is to be 1,0 t.
welding technique (T, M, U). Change in the flux trade mark
requires new welding procedure approval tests.
2.6.4 Pipe diameter
2.6.7 Welding consumables
Qualification tests on an assembly of pipes of diameter D is
valid for diameters in the range given in Tab 6. Except high heat input process (over 50KJ/cm), welding
consumables tested cover other approved welding consum-
ables having the same grade mark including all suffixes
Table 6 : Approved diameter range
specified in Sec 2 with that tested.
Diameter of the test piece (mm) Range of approval (1) Change in the trade name of filler metal requires new weld-
ing procedure approval tests when Charpy V-notch impact
D  25 0,5 D to 2 D tests are required at temperature strictly below 20°C.
D > 25  0,5 D (25 mm min.)
(1) Qualification for plates also covers pipes with outside 2.6.8 Heat input
diameter > 500 mm. The upper limit of heat input approved is 25% greater than
that used in welding the test piece or 50 kJ/cm whichever is
smaller, except that the upper limit is 10% greater than that
2.6.5 Welding position
for high heat input processes over 50 kJ/cm.
Standard positions are given in Fig 13 for plates and pipes.
The lower limit of heat input approved is 25% lower than
Approval for a test made in any position is restricted to that that used in welding the test piece.
position.
2.6.9 Preheat and interpass temperature
To qualify all positions, test assemblies are to be welded for The minimum preheat temperature is not to be less than that
highest and lowest heat input position and all applicable used in the qualification test.
tests are to be made on those assemblies.
The minimum interpass temperature is not to be less than
For plates butt welds with full penetration, the highest heat the specified preheat temperature.
input position is normally the vertical upwards position and The maximum interpass temperature is not to be higher
the lowest heat input position is normally the horizontal than that used in the qualification test.
position.
2.6.10 Post-weld heat treatment
2.6.6 Welding process The heat treatment used in the qualification test is to be
maintained during manufacture. Holding time may be
The approval is only valid for the welding process(es) used
adjusted as a function of thickness.
in the qualification tests. It is not permitted to change from a
multi-run to a single run.
2.6.11 Type of joint
For multi-process procedures the welding procedure The range of approval depending on type of welded joint
approval may be carried out with separate qualification tests for test assembly is given in Tab 7.
for each welding process. It is also accepted to make the New qualification tests may be required by the Surveyor
qualification test as a multi-process procedure test. The when changes occur in the geometry of the bevel which
approval of such a test is only valid for the process sequence may significantly affect the penetration or fusion.
carried out during the multi-process procedure test.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 4
Figure 13 : Welding positions according to ISO Standard
a) Butt welds for plates
PA Flat
PC Horizontal
PE Overhead
PG Vertical (downwards) PF Vertical (upwards)
b) Fillet welds for plates
PB Horizontal Vertical
PA Flat
PD Horizontal Overhead
PG Vertical (downwards) PF Vertical (upwards)
c) Pipes butt weld
Pipe : rotating Pipe : fixed

PA Axis : horizontal PG Axis : horizontal
Welding : flat Welding : vertical downwards
45
Pipe : fixed
PF Axis : horizontal
Welding : vertical upwards
Pipe : fixed Pipe : fixed

PC Axis : vertical HL045 Axis : inclined
Welding : horizontal Welding : inclined upward
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 4
Table 7 : Range of approval for type of joint
Range of approval
Type of Butt welds and T butt joints for plates with full or partial penetration
welded joint Welded from one side Welded from both sides Fillet welds on
for test assembly plate and pipe
with no with no
backing backing gouging gouging
One side with backing   x  x

Full
(1) no backing x  x x x
penetration
butt weld with gouging     x
for plates Both sides
no gouging   x  x
Fillet weld
      
for plates
Note 1:
 indicates the type of assembly of qualification test.
x indicates on the same line as the symbol  those welds for which the WPS is also approved.
 indicates on the same line as the symbol  those welds for which the WPS is not approved.
(1) Butt welds on a plate welded from one side approve butt welds on pipes having diameter > 500 mm within the limitations of
the Table.
3 Welding procedures for offshore Ships using Gases or other Low-flash point Fuels (IGF Code)
structures and equipment are to be applied.
3.1 General 6 Welding procedures for Cr-Ni

austenitic and austenitic-ferritic
3.1.1 The applicable requirements are given in Rule Note stainless steels for application with
NR426 Construction Survey of Steel Structures of Offshore
chemicals
Units and Installations, as amended.
6.1 General
4 Welding procedures for cargo tanks
and process pressure vessels of 6.1.1 Test pieces, tests and requirements for the approval of
liquefied gas carriers the welding procedures are agreed on a case-by-case basis
and are as far as applicable in accordance with those speci-
4.1 General fied in [2.1] to [2.6].
4.1.1 Reference is made to the requirements specified in 6.1.2 Checks of the chemical composition of the weld
[2.1] to [2.6] as far as applicable taking into account that metal may be required and, in the case of austenitic-ferritic
the requirements of the International Code for the Construc- steels, the examination of the metallographic structure of
tion and Equipment of Ships Carrying Liquefied Gases in the weld for the determination of the average ferrite content
Bulk (IGC Code) are to be applied. is generally to be performed (value required according to
ASTM E 562: min. 25% and max. 65%).
5 Welding procedures for fuel tanks Impact tests are not required in the case of austenitic steels
and process pressure vessels of gas and are required in the case of austenitic-ferritic steels and
fuelled ships performed at 20°C; the average value for the absorbed
energy is to be not lower than 27 J.
5.1 General Conventional corrosion tests according to recognised stan-

dards may be required depending on the type of steel.
5.1.1 Reference is made to the requirements specified in
[2.1] to [2.6] as far as applicable taking into account that 6.1.3 Typical selection of consumables grades depending
the requirements of the International Code of Safety for on the parent metal to be welded is given in Tab 8.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 4
Table 8 : Typical selection of consumable grades for welding Cr-Ni austenitic steels
Consumable grade Steel grade to be welded

308 304
308L 304 - 304L
316 304 - 316
316L 304 - 304L - 316 - 316L
316LN 304 - 304L - 316 - 316L - 316LN - 316Ti - 316Nb
317 304 - 316 - 317
317L 304 - 304L - 316 - 316L - 317 - 317L
309 309 (1)
309L 309 - 309L (1)
309 Mo 309 - 309Mo - 316 (1)
310 310 (1)
310Mo 310 - 310Mo (1)
347 321- 347
(1) Also for joints between ferritic and austenitic steels.
7 Welding procedures for extra high c) qualification tests with quenched and tempered steels
do not qualify thermo-mechanically rolled steels and
strength steels vice-versa.
7.1 General
8 Approval of welding procedures for
7.1.1 Test pieces, tests and requirements for the approval of crack arrest steel EH47CAS
the welding procedures are to be as specified in [2.1] to
[2.6], unless otherwise specified in this Article. 8.1 General
7.1.2 The bend specimens are to be bent on a mandrel hav- 8.1.1 Test pieces, tests and requirements for approval of the
ing a diameter equal to 5 times the specimen thickness in welding procedures are specified in [2.1] to [2.6], unless
the case of steel types 420 and 460 and equal to 6 times the otherwise specified in this Article.
specimen thickness in the case of steel types 500, 550, 620
and 690. 8.1.2 Parent metal
The welding procedure is qualified for the parent metal
7.1.3 The results from the hardness test is not to exceed tested.
420 HV10 for steels with a specified minimum yield
strength from 420 N/mm2 to 690 N/mm2. 8.1.3 Impact tests
The test temperature and absorbed energy are to be in
7.1.4 For the range of approval of parent metal the follow-
accordance with Tab 9.
ing applies:
a) for each strength level, welding procedures are consid- 8.1.4 Hardness tests
ered applicable to the same and lower toughness grades An additional row of indentations is to be carried out at
as that tested mid-thickness.
b) for each toughness grade, welding procedures are con- The results of hardness tests are not to exceed 380 HV for
sidered applicable to the same and one lower strength crack arrest steels with a specified minimum yield strength
levels as that tested equal to or greater than 460 N/mm2.
Table 9 : Impact test requirements for butt joints (t  100mm)
Value of minimum average absorbed energy (J)

Testing temperature For manually or semi-automatically welded joints
Grade of steel For automatically
(°C)
Downhand, Horizontal, Vertical upward, welded joints
Overhead Vertical downward
EH47CAS 20 64
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 4
8.1.5 Brittle fracture initiation test Figure 14 : Location of test specimens

for a butt joint in plate
Deep notch test or CTOD test may be required for parent
Discard 25 mm
metals. Tests are to be in accordance with recognised stan-
dards acceptable to the Society.
1 tensile test specimen and
2 bend test specimens
9 Approval of welding procedures for
aluminium alloys Additional test specimens
if required
9.1 Plates butt weld

1 tensile test specimen and
2 bend test specimens
The applicable requirements of [2.1.1] apply.
1 macro test specimen
The cleaning of the parts to be welded is to be carried out in
accordance with the same procedure as used in the con- Discard 25 mm
struction.
9.1.4 Transverse tensile tests
Welding consumables used are to be approved by the Soci- Specimens for transverse tensile tests are to be in accor-
ety in accordance with Sec 2, [15]. dance with Ch 1, Sec 2, [2.1.11].
The weld is to be made flush maintaining the thickness of
9.1.2 Examinations and tests the assembly.
Non-destructive examinations and destructive tests required The tensile strength results are to meet the requirements
according to Tab 10. The location of the test specimens is to stated in Tab 11.
be in accordance with Fig 14. Table 11 : Minimum tensile strength
for series 5000 and 6000 alloys
Table 10 : Examinations and tests Grade Minimum tensile strength Rm

(Alloy designation) (N/mm2)
Type of examination or test Extent of examination or test 5754 190
Visual examination 100% 5086 240
Radiographic or ultrasonic 100% 5083 275
examination
5383 290
Dye penetrant test 100%
5059 330
Transverse tensile tests 2 specimens
5456 290
Transverse bend tests (1) 2 root and 2 face specimens
6005 A 170
Macro examination 1 section
6061 170
Check of Mg content (2) weld metal
(1) The face and root bends are preferably to be replaced 6082 170
by 4 side bends for t  12 mm.
(2) In the case of non-approved filler metal, the check of
9.1.5 Bend tests
Mg content and other checks, as appropriate, are gen- Transverse root bend, face bend and side bend specimens are
erally required. to machined to the dimensions given in Ch 1, Sec 2, [3.1].
For dissimilar or heterogeneous butt joints, longitudinal
9.1.3 Non-destructive examinations bend test may be used instead of transverse bend tests.
The bend test specimens should be bent on a mandrel with
Non-destructive examinations should be carried out after maximum diameter as given in the formula below. The
any required post-weld heat treatment and natural or artifi- bending angle shall be 180°.
cial ageing, and prior to the cutting of test specimens.
 100  t s 
d = -----------------------
- – ts
Welds should be free from cracks. Imperfections detected A
by visual or non-destructive testing should be assessed in where:
accordance with ISO 10042, level B, except for excess weld d : Maximum former diameter
metal or convexity, excess throat thickness and excess of ts : Thickness of the bend test specimen (this
penetration for which the level C applies. includes side bends)
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 4
A : Minimum tensile elongation required by the 9.2.2 Examinations and tests

alloy grade, temper condition and thickness (for Non-destructive examinations and destructive tests are to be
combination between different alloys, the low- carried out in accordance with the requirements of Tab 12.
est individual value should be used).
The “wrap around bending method“ is the recommended Table 12 : Examinations and tests
bending procedure in lieu of the usual “free” bend test (see
Fig 15. Type of examination or test Extent of examination or test
After testing, the test specimens are not to reveal any open Visual examination 100%
defect in any direction greater than 3 mm. Defects appear- Dye penetrant test 100%
ing at the corner of the test specimen may be disregarded
Macro examination (1) 2 specimens
unless there is evidence that they result from lack of fusion.
Fracture test 1 specimen
Figure 15 : Wrap around bend test (1) One of the macro sections is to be taken at the position
of the stop/restart (see [9.2.1]).
t 9.2.3 Visual examination and surface crack

detection
The requirements specified in [9.1.3] are to be complied
Roller with.
D = 6 - 7t
9.2.4 Macro examination and fracture test
The fracture test as well as the macro examination are to
2
show, in general, the absence of defects, in particular lack

t+
D of root penetration.
However in the macro examination, small soundness
defects of the weld metal such as blowholes or inclusions
may be accepted provided that their total area does not
B = 1/2 D + t exceed 6% of the weld metal section examined.
The dimensions of leg size, throat and penetration are gen-
erally to be reported.
The fixed edge of the test specimen is to be clamped to avoid slid-
ing. The whole welded zone (weld and heat affected zone), in the 9.3 Pipes butt weld with full penetration
case of transverse bending, is to be entirely positioned in the bent
zone. 9.3.1 Assembly and welding
The applicable requirements of [2.4.1] apply.
The test specimens are to be prepared and etched on one accordance with the same procedure as used in the con-
side to clearly reveal the fusion line, the HAZ, the build up struction.
of the runs and the unaffected parent metal. The examina-
tion is to reveal a regular weld profile, through fusion If the tack welds are a condition of the weld process they
between adjacent layers of weld and base metal, and the are to be fused into the joint and are to be included in the
absence of defects such as cracks and lack of fusion. test pieces.
The acceptance levels are given in [9.1.3]. 9.3.2 Examinations and tests
Non-destructive examinations and destructive tests required
9.2 Plates fillet weld according to Tab 10. The location of the test specimens is to
be in accordance with Fig 16.
The requirements of [2.3.1] apply except otherwise speci- 9.3.3 Results
fied in the following. The results are to comply with the requirements for plates
butt weld in [9.1].
accordance with the same procedure as used in the con-
struction. 9.4 Re-testing
The two plates are to be positioned and tack welded edge-
9.4.1 If the test piece fails to comply with any of the
wise so as to constitute a T assembly without clearance.
requirements for visual or non-destructive testing, one fur-
Welding on one or both sides and fit up are to be as ther test piece is to be welded and subjected to the same
detailed in the pWPS. examination.
In general for semi-automatic welding a stop/restart position If this additional test piece does not comply with the relevant
is to be included in the test length and is to be clearly requirements, the pWPS is to be regarded as not capable of
marked for subsequent examination. complying with the requirements without modification.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 4
Area A for :
Top for fixed pipe - 1 tensile specimen,
2 side bend specimens
Area B for :
- additional test specimens if required
Area C for :
Area D for :
- 1 macro test specimen
9.4.2 If any test specimens fails to comply with the relevant 9.5.3 Thickness
requirements for destructive testing due to weld imperfec- The qualification of a WPS carried out on a test assembly of
tion only, two further test specimens shall be obtained for thickness t is valid for the thickness range given in Tab 13.
each one that failed. These specimens can be taken from
the same test piece if there is sufficient material available or In case of butt-joints between dissimilar thickness, t is the
from a new test piece, and is to be subjected to the same thickness of the thinner metal
test. If either of these additional test specimens does not In case of fillet joints between dissimilar thickness, t is the
comply with the relevant requirements, the pWPS is to be thickness of the thicker metal.
regarded as not capable of complying with the require-
ments without modification. In addition to the requirements of Tab 13 the range of qualifi-
cation of the fillet welds throat thickness a is given in Tab 14.
9.4.3 If a tensile test specimen fails to meet the require- Where a fillet weld is qualified by means of a butt weld test,
ments, the re-testing is to be in accordance with Ch 1, Sec the throat thickness range qualified should be based on the
2, [2.3]. thickness of the deposited weld metal.
Where the majority of production work is fillet welding, an
9.5 Range of approval additional fillet weld test may be required.
9.5.1 General 9.5.4 Pipe diameter

Qualification tests on an assembly of pipes of diameter D is
Unless otherwise specified in this Article, reference may be
valid for diameters in the range given in Tab 6.
made to the requirements in [2.6].
Table 13 : Range of qualification
9.5.2 Parent metal for parent material thickness
The alloys are grouped into three groups:
Thickness t
Range of qualifications
a) Group A: Aluminium-magnesium alloys with Mg con- of the test piece (mm)
tent 3,5% (alloy 5754) t 3 0,5 to 2 t
b) Group B: Aluminium-magnesium alloys with 4%  Mg 3  t  20 3 to 2 t
 5,6% (alloys 5059, 5083, 5086, 5383 and 5456) t > 20  0,8 t
c) Group C: Aluminium-magnesium-silicon alloys (alloys
6005A, 6061 and 6082). Table 14 : Range of qualification
for the throat thickness of fillet welds
For each group, qualification tests made on one alloy qual-
ify the procedure for the other alloys of the same group with
equal or lower minimum specified tensile strength after Throat thickness a
Range of qualifications
welding. of the test piece (mm)
a  10 0,75 a to 1,5 a
Qualification on Group B alloys qualify the procedure for
Group A alloys. a  10  7,5
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 4
9.5.5 Welding positions 9.5.8 Type of current

The test pieces are to be welded in the position(s) used in Changes in the type of current (AC, DC, pulsed) and polar-
the construction taking into account that: ity require a new welding procedure qualification.
a) Horizontal-vertical position qualifies also for flat and 9.5.9 Post-weld heat treatment or ageing
vertical upwards positions Addition or deletion of post-weld heat treatment or ageing
b) Vertical upwards position qualifies also for flat and hori- is not permitted. Artificial ageing for 6000 series alloys gives
zontal-vertical positions approval for prolonged natural ageing.
c) Overhead position qualifies also for flat, vertical 9.5.10 Type of joint
upwards and horizontal-vertical positions. The range of approval for the types of joint in relation to the
type of joint used in the procedure qualification test is given
9.5.6 Welding process in Tab 15.
The approval is valid only for the welding process used in
the welding procedure test. It is not permitted to change a 10 Approval of welding procedures for
multi-run deposit into a single run (or run on each side) or
copper alloys
vice versa for a given process. In the case of a multi-process
procedure, the approval is only valid for applying the pro- 10.1 Pipes butt weld
cesses in the order used during the procedure qualification
tests. 10.1.1 Assembly and welding
Note 1: For multi-process procedures each welding process may be The applicable requirements of [2.4.1] apply.
approved separately or in combination with other processes. Simi- The cleaning of the parts to be welded is to be carried out in
larly one or more processes may be deleted from an approved WPS accordance with the same procedure as used in the con-
provided the joint thickness is within the approved thickness range struction.
of the relevant welding process to be applied.
9.5.7 Welding consumables Non-destructive examinations and destructive tests required
The welding consumable used in the qualification tests according to Tab 16. The location of the test specimens is to
qualifies: be in accordance with Fig 16.
a) Approved welding consumables of the same strength as 10.1.3 Non-destructive examinations
the consumable used in the procedure qualification Reference is made to [9.1.3].
tests.
b) Approved welding consumables of higher strength than 10.1.4 Transverse tensile tests
the consumable used in the procedure qualification Reference is made to [2.1.4].
tests.
10.1.5 Bend tests
The qualification given to shielding gas and backing gas is Reference is made to [9.1.5].
restricted to the gas/gas mixture used in the welding proce-
dure test, see ISO 14175 or other recognised standards for 10.1.6 Macro examinations
gas designations. Reference is made to [9.1.6].
Table 15 : Range of approval for type of joint
Range of approval
Type of Butt welds for plates with full or partial penetration
welded joint Fillet welds on
for test assembly Welded from one side Welded from both sides
plate and pipe
with backing no backing with gouging no gouging
One side with backing   x  x

(1) no backing x  x x x
Butt joint
welded with gouging     x
Both sides
no gouging x  x  x
Fillet weld
      
for plates
Note 1:
 indicates the type of assembly of qualification test.
x indicates on the same line as the symbol  those welds for which the WPS is also approved.
 indicates on the same line as the symbol  those welds for which the WPS is not approved.
(1) Butt welds on a plate welded from one side approve butt welds on pipes having diameter > 500 mm within the limitations of
the Table.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 4
Table 16 : Examinations and tests 10.3.3 Thickness

The qualification of a WPS carried out on a test assembly of
Type of examination or test Extent of examination or test thickness t is valid for the thickness range given in the rele-
Visual examination 100% vant parts of [9.5.3].
Radiographic or ultrasonic 100% 10.3.4 Pipe diameter

examination
Dye penetrant test 100%
Transverse tensile tests 2 specimens 10.3.5 Welding process
Transverse bend tests (1) 2 root and 2 face specimens For Tungsten Inert Gas arc welding (141) and Plasma Arc
Welding (15), the approval obtained is restricted to the type
Macro examination 1 section
of gas used during the procedure test.
(1) The face and root bends are preferably to be replaced
by 4 side bends for t  12 mm. For Oxyacetylene welding (311), the approval obtained
with filler metal does not qualify welding without filler
10.2 Re-testing metal and vice-versa.
10.2.1 Reference is made to [9.4]. 10.3.6 Welding consumables

Welding consumable tested is to be used for the assembly.
10.3.7 Post-weld heat treatment and ageing
10.3.1 General
Unless otherwise specified in this Article, reference may be The heat treatment used in the qualification is to be main-
made to the applicable requirement in [2.6]. tained during manufacture. Addition or deletion of post-
weld heat treatment is not permitted.
10.3.2 Parent metal
The welding procedure is qualified for the parent metal 10.3.8 Type of joint
tested. A change of parent metal may be considered based Full penetration butt joint in pipes qualifies butt joint in
on the range of approval of a recognised standard accept- pipes with full or partial penetration.
able to the Society (e.g. ISO 15614-6).
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 5
SECTION 5 APPROVAL OF CO2 LASER WELDING

PROCEDURES
1 General 1.4.2 Steels having chemical composition different from

that indicated in Tab 1 may be used provided that satisfac-
tory results are obtained in the approval tests and produc-
1.1 Application tion welds.
In particular, the following deviation from the standard
1.1.1 The requirements of this Section apply to the
composition given in Tab 1 may be specially considered
approval of CO2 laser welding procedures for butt- and T-
subject to an adequate limitation of the welding speed, e.g.
joints in hull construction. Stake welding is not covered by 0,6 m / 1’ for a thickness of 12 mm or 2 m / 1’ for a thick-
these requirements. ness less than or equal to 6 mm:
• C  0,15% subject to a reduction in welding speed
1.2 General requirements and/or increase in applied energy in respect of the val-
ues found adequate for the maximum level of C 0,12%,
1.2.1 The user’s workshop is to demonstrate by means of a • S  0,010% and P  0,015% for a material thickness less
weld procedure approval test and examination of the first than or equal to 12 mm, or
production welds, that the welds produced under the nor-
• S  0,017% and P  0,018% for a material thickness less
mal conditions are sound and have the required mechanical
than or equal to 6 mm.
properties.
Table 1 : L24 and L36 steel chemical composition
1.2.2 The approval is granted for a defined range of appli-
cations (materials, plate thicknesses, seam preparation, tol- Elements Ladle analysis (%)
erances, etc.) and for specific characteristic welding
C  0,12
parameters (laser power, welding speed, welding consum-
ables, etc.), in accordance with the samples welded during Mn 0,90 - 1,60 (1)
the procedure qualification tests. Si 0,10 - 0,50
Normally, changes in essential variables outside the S  0,005
approved range (see Article [7]) require supplementary tests
P  0,010
or new qualification.
CEQ (2)  0,38
1.3 Welding procedure specification Pcm (3)  0,22

(1) Manganese may be reduced to 0,70% for L24 grade
1.3.1 A welding procedure specification is to be prepared consistent with the lowest values used in the weld pro-
by the Manufacturer and proposed for approval; this docu- cedure test.
ment is also referred to as preliminary welding procedure Mn Cr + Mo + V Ni + Cu
specification (pWPS) and is to be modified and amended (2) C EQ = C + --------- + -------------------------------- + --------------------- %
6 5 15
during the procedure tests as deemed necessary.
Si Mn Cu Ni Cr Mo V
In its final version, the welding procedure specification (3) Pcm= C + ------ + --------- + ------- + ------ + ------ + --------- + ------ + 5B %
30 20 20 60 20 15 10
(WPS) is to include all the welding parameters and main
data affecting the quality of welded joints and is to be used
as a basis for the laser production welds. 1.5 Welding consumables
1.5.1 Welding consumables and auxiliary materials are to
1.4 Parent metal be approved by the Society and are to be clearly defined in
the WPS.
1.4.1 In addition to the structural steels defined in Ch 2,
Sec 1, [2], two new grades of steel have been defined with a 2 Approval of welding procedure
narrower range of chemical composition.
These grades, designated L24 (normal steel) and L36 (higher 2.1 General
strength steel), have the chemical composition indicated in
Tab 1; for elements not indicated in this Table, the limits are 2.1.1 Qualification tests are to be carried out in the pres-
those of the standard steels defined in Ch 2, Sec 1, Tab 2. The ence of the Surveyor at the user’s workshop under fabrica-
steels are to comply with the requirements in Ch 2, Sec 1, [2]. tion conditions.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 5
2.1.2 Approval of the welding procedure is subject to the 3.1.2 Where automatic non-destructive examinations are
acceptance of the first production welds. used in fabrication (e.g. ultrasonic), the test piece is to be
subjected to such examinations.
2.2 Assembly and welding
3.1.3 Imperfections detected by visual or other non-
2.2.1 Butt-joint test assemblies and/or T-joint test assem- destructive examination are to be assessed in accordance
blies are to be selected in accordance with the range of with EN ISO13919-1 level C.
application applied for approval.
2.2.2 Test assemblies are to be of a sufficient size to ensure 4 Plates butt welds
reasonable heat distribution during welding and to provide for
the required test specimens, after sufficient discard at the ends. 4.1 Assembly
Unless otherwise agreed, the dimensions are to be in accor-
dance with [4.1.2] and [5.1.1]. 4.1.1 The weld direction is to be perpendicular to the roll-
ing direction of the plate and is to be marked on the test
2.2.3 Welding is to be carried out in accordance with the
piece.
pWPS and under the general conditions of production
welding which they represent. Where impact tests are prescribed for the base metal in the
transverse direction, the weld direction is to be parallel to
2.2.4 The type of joint preparation including tolerances is the rolling direction of the plate (see Fig 1).
to be representative of the fabrication welds. Maximum and
minimum values of tolerances are to be incorporated in the
weld procedure test. with Charpy impact test
Where gaps are required, the minimum and the maximum

values are to be verified on two procedure tests.

2.2.5 The plates are to be held in place by clamps, or other

suitable holding devices, or by tack welds as provided for
fabrication welding. If tack welds are to be used in the fabri-
cation, they are to be included in the test pieces.
2.2.6 The welding parameters are to be recorded and are to

be in accordance with the pWPS. Each test piece is to con-
tain at least one stop/restart of the welding process. 4.1.2 The dimension of the butt weld test assembly is to be
in accordance with Fig 2.
3 Non-destructive examinations The dimensions in Fig 2 are as follows:
• W = 300 mm min.
3.1 General
• L = 300 mm min.
3.1.1 Prior to the cutting of the test specimens, non-
• D = 25 mm max. for thickness  25mm
destructive examinations are to be carried out over the
entire length of the weld. • D = 50 mm max. for thickness > 25mm.
Flat tensile test Macro / Hardness test

Face bend test Discard
A-A
Root bend test
Side bend test
Macro / Section
Area for Charpy A

V - Notch specimen Stop / Restart
A
Macro / Hardness test
L
Bend test
Discard
W
D
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 5
4.2 Examinations and tests 4.5 Impact tests
4.2.1 General 4.5.1 Charpy V-notch impact tests are to be taken 1 mm

below the surface of the sample transverse to the weld and
Non-destructive examinations and destructive tests are to with the notch perpendicular to the material surface; they
be in accordance with the requirements of Tab 2, while the are to be machined to the dimensions indicated in Ch 1,
location of the test specimens is to be in accordance with Sec 2, [4.2.1].
Fig 2.
Three sets of Charpy V-notch specimens, each set including
Table 2 : Examinations and tests 3 specimens, are to be taken as follows:
• one set with the notch along the weld metal centre line
Type Extent with tolerance  0,1mm
Visual examination 100% • one set with the notch in the heat affected zone (HAZ)
Radiographic examination 100% • one set with the notch in the parent metal.
Magnetic particle examination 100%
The direction of fracture is to coincide with the weld direc-
Transverse tensile test 2 specimens
tion (see Fig 3). The parent material specimens are to have
Transverse bend tests (1) 2 root and 2 face specimens the same orientation as the specimens from the weld joint.
Longitudinal bend test 1 face specimen
Impact tests (2) 3 sets Figure 3 : Fracture direction of Charpy impact tests
Macro examination 3 sections

Orientation of charpy
Hardness test 2 sections specimens (notch position)
Weld direction
(1) The face and root bends are preferably to be replaced
by 4 side bends for t  12 mm.
(2) 3 sets of 3 specimens as per [4.5.1].
4.2.2 Non-destructive examinations

The requirements in Article [3] are to be complied with.
Special attention is to be paid to the stop/restart positions
with respect to profile, proper fusion and absence of cracks
and porosity. 4.5.2 The test temperature and the results are to comply
with the requirements specified for the parent metal.
4.3 Tensile tests
4.5.3 Requirements for reduced Charpy V specimens are
given in Ch 1, Sec 2, [4.2.2].
4.3.1 Transverse tensile test specimen and procedure is to
be in accordance with Ch 1, Sec 2.
4.5.4 The Society may require additional tests, e.g. Charpy
tests with other notch locations, and other or additional
4.3.2 The tensile strength is to be not lower than the speci- temperatures or CTOD tests.
fied minimum tensile strength of the parent material. The
location of the fracture is to be reported, i.e. weld metal,
HAZ, parent metal. 4.6 Hardness measurements
4.6.1 Hardness test

4.4 Bend tests
The Vickers method HV10 is generally to be used.
4.4.1 Bend test The indentations are to be made in the weld, heat affected
Transverse, side and longitudinal bend specimens are to be zones (HAZ) and the parent metal, with the object of mea-
in accordance with Ch 1, Sec 2. suring and recording the range of values in the weld joint
(see Fig 4). For butt welds, the upper and lower rows are to
The test specimens are to be bent on a mandrel having a transverse 2 mm maximum below the surface, depending
diameter 3,5 times the thickness of the specimen; the bend- on the plate thickness.
ing angle is to be 180°.
For each row of indentations, a minimum of 3 individual
indentations is required in the weld, both sides of the HAZ
4.4.2 During the test, the specimens are not to reveal any and the parent metal.
open imperfection, in any direction, greater than 3 mm.
Defects not initiated by a weld defect appearing at the cor- For the HAZ, the indentations are to be placed as close as
ner of the test specimen are disregarded. possible to the fusion line.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 5
Figure 4 : Butt weld hardness indentations Figure 6 : Weld shape limitations
of weld depth
within 70%
d
4.6.2 Where no filler metal or low hydrogen welding con-

sumables (H5) are used in the procedure, values not higher
than 380HV are considered acceptable; one individual
d1
value not higher than 400HV is accepted for each section.
Values not higher than 350HV are required in all other d : Minimum weld width, with d1,5 mm
cases. d1 : Weld root width, with d1  1,0 mm
D/d : Secondary wide zone “bulge”, if bulging occurs
D/d  1,2
5 T joint weld procedure test
4.7.1 The three macro sections are to be taken as shown in
Fig 2.
5.1 Assembly
One section is to be a length of weld including a stop/restart
position. This longitudinal section is to be cut as shown in 5.1.1 The dimensions of the T-joint weld test assembly are
to be in accordance with Fig 7.
Fig 5 and examined at the mid-thickness of the plate.
The dimensions in Fig 7 are as follows:
Figure 5 : Longitudinal mid-thickness macro section • W = 300 mm min.
• L = 1000 mm min.
Stop / Restart
• D = 50 mm max.
t/2

5.2.1 General
Non-destructive examinations and destructive tests are to
be in accordance with the requirements of Tab 3, while the
Cut
location of the test specimens is to be in accordance with
Fig 7.
Figure 7 : T-joint test assembly

4.7.2 The test specimens are to be prepared and etched on
one side only to clearly reveal the fusion line, the HAZ, the
W/2
solidification structure of the weld metal and the unaffected
parent metal.
4.7.3 The sections are to be examined by the naked eye (or Fracture
by low power hand lens if deemed necessary) for any Fracture Macro
D
imperfection present in the weld metal and HAZ and for Fracture
unsatisfactory profile features. Any imperfections are to be L
Fracture Macro
assessed in accordance with Article [3].
4.7.4 The weld shape is to be within the limits specified in W Macro

Fig 6. For thicknesses up to 8 mm, lower values for “d” and
“d1“may be accepted at the discretion of the Society. Stop/Restart
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 5
Table 3 : Examinations and tests The fracture surfaces are to be examined for possible defects
which are to be assessed in accordance with Article [3].
Type Extent Note 1: If a break in the weld cannot be obtained, an alternative is
Visual examination 100% to machine the base plate flush to the web and to X-ray the weld in
the direction of weld centre line.
Magnetic particle examination 100%
Ultrasonic examination 100% 6 Re-testing
Macro examination 3 sections
Hardness test 3 sections 6.1 Non-destructive and destructive tests
Break test 4 specimens (1) 6.1.1 If the test piece fails to comply with any of the
(1) One specimen is to be taken from the stop/restart position. requirements for visual or non-destructive testing, one fur-
ther test piece is to be welded and subjected to the same
5.2.2 Non-destructive examination examination.
The requirements in Article [3] are to be complied with. If this additional test piece does not comply with the relevant
Special attention is to be paid to the stop/restart positions requirements, the pWPS is to be regarded as not capable of
with respect to profile, proper fusion and absence of crater complying with the requirements without modification.
defects.
6.1.2 If any test specimens fails to comply with the relevant
requirements for destructive testing due to weld imperfec-
tion only, two further test specimens shall be obtained for
The three macro sections are to be taken as shown in Fig 7. each one that failed. These specimens can be taken from
Two sections are to be taken from the ends adjacent to the the same test piece if there is sufficient material available or
discards, the third from the middle of the length. from a new test piece, and is to be subjected to the same
test. If either of these additional test specimens does not
5.2.4 Hardness test comply with the relevant requirements, the pWPS is to be
regarded as not capable of complying with the require-
Hardness indentations are to be made as shown in Fig 8 in
ments without modification.
accordance with [4.6.1], as appropriate. All hardness values
are to be recorded. The values are to comply with the 6.1.3 If a tensile test specimen fails to meet the require-
requirements in [4.6.2]. ments, the re-testing is to be in accordance with Ch 1, Sec
2, [2.3].
Figure 8 : T joint weld hardness indentations
6.1.4 The re-testing of Charpy V-notch impact test specimens
are to be carried out in accordance with Ch 1, Sec 2, [4.4].
7 Range of approval
7.1 Parent metal

7.1.1 Approval is given to that grade tested.
5.2.5 Break test
7.2 Thickness
Break test specimens are to be taken from the length of the
welded assembly remaining after removal of the macro sec- 7.2.1 The approval of a procedure carried out on a welded
tions. Four test specimens (not less than 100 mm each in assembly of thickness t is valid for the range 0,80t to 1,2t.
length) are to be taken and fractured by folding the upright Speed and power may be changed within the limitations in
plate in alternate directions onto the through plate (see Fig 7). [7.6.2].
A saw cut may be made to facilitate breaking in accordance
with Fig 9. 7.3 Edge preparation and surface condition
Figure 9 : Break test 7.3.1 Cutting process

The cutting processes are as follows:
• thermal cut
• thermal cut and sand blasted
• thermal cut and ground
t t
• milled.
Other cutting methods, such as mechanical cutting (shear-
ing), may be considered analogously depending on their
t/2 t/2
edge geometry and surface condition. A change in the cut-
ting process requires new qualification.
NR 216, Ch 5, Sec 5
7.3.2 Surface condition 7.6.2 Laser power and welding speed

Any major change in surface condition, such as a change The parameter (laser power / thickness x speed) is to be
from uncoated to shop primer coated surfaces, requires new within the range 90-120% of that originally approved (while
qualification. In this context, special attention is to be paid also maintaining the welding speed above 0,6 m/1’).
to T-joint configurations.
For each resetting of parameters, one test sample is to be
taken and verified for weld profile shape and freedom from
7.4 Joint type, bevel defects by non-destructive examination.
7.4.1 Butt-joints cannot cover T-joints and vice versa.
7.6.3 Wire feed speed
7.4.2 Any change in joint geometry with respect to that The wire feed speed is to be maintained within the limits
specified in the welding procedure qualification report established by the procedure tests.
(WPQR) requires new qualification.
7.6.4 Focusing optic and focus position
7.5 Welding machine The focusing parameters are to be kept within the limits
specified in accordance with recognised standards.
7.5.1 Laser machine
A procedure approved for use on one laser machine is valid 7.6.5 Number of runs
for that machine and beam shape only. The approval is A change in the number of passes requires a new approval.
valid for the focusing system used at the approval tests.
7.6.6 Process and shielding gas
7.5.2 Modification of laser machine
Any change in shielding gas or plasma control gas composi-
Modifications carried out on an approved laser machine or tion requires a new approval.
the use of other laser machines having the same technical
specification (from the laser beam technology point of view) A change in the flow rate up to 10% is admitted.
only required a reduced re-approval test, if the beam
parameters are within the approved range. 7.6.7 Welding position
A change of the welding position requires a new approval.
7.6 Welding parameters
7.6.8 Welding consumables
7.6.1 General Any change of welding consumables requires a new
Variations within the limits described below in the welding approval.
speed, laser power, focusing parameters and wire feed rate
are allowed to accommodate changes in material thickness 7.6.9 Other variables
or fit-up, without need for re-approval. Monitoring of weld- The range of approval related to other variables may be
ing parameters within a given procedure setting is to be taken according to established practice as represented in
applied. recognised standards.
Marine & Offshore
Le Triangle de l’Arche - 8 Cours du Triangle - CS 50101
92937 Paris La Defense Cedex - France
Tel: + 33 (0)1 55 24 70 00
https://marine-offshore.bureauveritas.com/bv-rules
© 2020 Bureau Veritas – All rights reserved

216-NR Consolidated 2020-07

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

216-NR Consolidated 2020-07

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

216-NR Consolidated 2020-07

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Rules on Materials and Welding for the

Classification of Marine Units

Consolidated edition for documentation only

NR216 Amd 002 Amendments to NR216 July 2020

Chapter 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

July 2019 with amendments July 2020

Section 1 Manufacture, Inspection, Certification

Section 2 Testing Procedures for Materials

Section 1 Rolled Steel Plates, Sections and Bars

Section 2 Steel Pipes, Tubes and Fittings

Section 3 Steel Forgings

Section 4 Steel Castings

Section 5 Iron Castings

Section 1 Copper and Copper Alloys

Section 1 Equipment for Mooring and Anchoring

Section 2 Offshore Mooring Chain Cables and Accessories

Section 1 General Requirements

Section 2 Approval of Welding Consumables

Section 3 Approval of Over Weldable Shop Primers

Section 4 Approval of Welding Procedures

Section 5 Approval of CO2 Laser Welding Procedures

SECTION 1 MANUFACTURE, INSPECTION, CERTIFICATION

SECTION 2 TESTING PROCEDURES FOR MATERIALS

SECTION 1 MANUFACTURE, INSPECTION, CERTIFICATION

1 General 1.3 Information to be supplied by the

3.1 General conditions

4.1.1 General 4.1.5 Invalidation of Society’s brand

SECTION 2 TESTING PROCEDURES FOR MATERIALS

1 General 2 Tensile test

1.1 Scope 2.1 Tensile test specimens

1.2 Testing machines 2.1.2 Proportional flat test specimen

t : Thickness of the plate, strip or section, in mm

2.1.7 Test specimen for grey cast iron

2.1.4 Round proportional test specimen

R φ The original gauge length L0 is to be equal to:

and the distance between the grips Lc is to be not less than

For rolled products in aluminium alloy with thickness up to So R ≥ 10 mm

2.2.4 Percentage elongation after fracture

2.1.12 Tolerances L 0 = 5 ,65 So

The tolerances on test specimen dimensions are to be in where:

When using round proportional test specimens, L0 is equal 3 Bend test

3.2 Bend test procedure Figure 9 : Charpy V-notch test specimen

3.2.1 The bend test is to be performed, as a rule, by apply- 45˚

4 Charpy V-notch impact test

In the case of welded pipes or tubes, the test is to be carried

7 Ductility tests for pipes and tubes

7.1 Flattening test 30˚ or 45˚ or 60˚ or 120˚

7.1.1 The test specimen consists of a ring cut with

7.3 Flanging test Figure 12 : Ring expanding test

7.3.1 The test specimen consists of a tube section cut with

7.3.2 The length of the test specimen is equal to approxi-

7.3.3 The test is carried out in two stages and consists of

8 Other tests and checks 8.2 Macrographic and micrographic

STEEL AND IRON PRODUCTS

SECTION 1 ROLLED STEEL PLATES, SECTIONS AND BARS

SECTION 2 STEEL PIPES, TUBES AND FITTINGS

SECTION 3 STEEL FORGINGS

SECTION 4 STEEL CASTINGS

SECTION 5 IRON CASTINGS